Download - Fanuc Cimplicity i Cell Operator

8/22/2019 Fanuc Cimplicity i Cell Operator

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fanuc-cimplicity-i-cell-operator 1/737

OPERATOR’S MANUAL

B-75074EN/04

FANUC CIMPLICITY * CELL



• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.

• All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.

The export of this product is subject to the authorization of the government of the country

from where the product is exported.

In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.

However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be

done, because there are so many possibilities.

Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be

regarded as ”impossible”.

This manual contains the program names or device names of other companies, some of

which are registered trademarks of respective owners. However, these names are not

followed by or in the main body.



B-75074EN/04 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

s-1

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS describes notes, cautions and warnings to

be observed for safe handling of those machines that have the FANUC

CIMPLICITY

i CELL and FANUC CNC installed. Before using the

functions described in this manual, be sure to read SAFETY

PRECAUTIONS.

When using a function described in this manual, read the relevant

portion of the operator's manual of each CNC to fully understand the

function.

Contents

1.1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ........s-21.2 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ...........................s-3

1.3 WARNING AND CAUTIONS ON THE FANUC

CIMPLICITY

i CELL .............................................................s-5



SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-75074EN/04

s-2

1.1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and

preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into

Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also,

supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning,

Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING Applied when there is a danger of the user beinginjured or when there is a damage of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION Applied when there is a danger of the equipmentbeing damaged, if the approved procedure is notobserved.

NOTEThe Note is used to indicate supplementaryinformation other than Warning and Caution.

- Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.




s-3

1.2 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

WARNING1 Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the

entered data. Operating the machine with incorrectlyspecified data may result in the machine behavingunexpectedly, possibly causing damage to theworkpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.

2 Never attempt to machine a workpiece without firstchecking the programmed value, compensation value,current position, and external signal settings. Also,never attempt to machine a workpiece without first

checking the operation of the machine. Before startinga production run, ensure that the machine is operatingcorrectly by performing a trial run using, for example,the single block, feedrate override, or machine lockfunction, or by operating the machine with neither a toolnor workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm the correctoperation of the machine may result in the machinebehaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage tothe workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to theuser.

3 Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the

intended operation. Generally, for each machine, thereis a maximum allowable feedrate. The appropriatefeedrate varies with the intended operation. Refer tothe manual provided with the machine to determine themaximum allowable feedrate. If a machine is run atother than the correct speed, it may behaveunexpectedly, possibly causing damage to theworkpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.

4 When using a tool compensation function, thoroughlycheck the direction and amount of compensation.Operating the machine with incorrectly specified datamay result in the machine behaving unexpectedly,possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.

5 The parameters for the CNC and PMC are factory-set.Usually, there is no need to change them. When,however, there is no alternative other than to change aparameter, ensure that you fully Failure to set aparameter correctly may result in the machinebehaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage tothe workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the

user.




s-4

CAUTION1 Immediately after switching on the power, do not touch

any of the keys on the MDI panel until the positiondisplay or alarm screen appears on the CNC unit.Some of the keys on the MDI panel are dedicated tomaintenance or other special operations. Pressing anyof these keys may place the CNC unit in other than itsnormal state. Starting the machine in this state maycause it to behave unexpectedly.

2 The operator's manual describes all the basic functionsof the CNC, including the optional functions. Theselected optional functions vary with the machine. Somefunctions described in this manual may not, therefore,

be supported by your machine. Check the machinespecifications previously.

3 Some machine operations and screen functions areimplemented by the machine tool builder. For anexplanation of their usage and related notes, refer to themanual provided by the machine tool builder.For example:- On some machines, executing a tool function causes

the tool change unit to operate. When executing atool function on such a machine, stand well clear of the tool change unit. Otherwise, there is a danger of

injury to the operator.- Many auxiliary functions trigger physical operations,

such as rotation of the spindle. Before attempting touse an auxiliary function, therefore, ensure that youare fully aware of the operation to be triggered bythat function.

NOTECommand programs, parameters, and variables arestored in nonvolatile memory in the CNC. Generally, the

contents of memory are not lost by a power on/off operation. However, the contents of memory may beerased by mistake, or important data in nonvolatilememory may have to be erased upon recovering from afailure.To enable the restoration of data as soon as possible if such a situation arises, always make a backup of thedata in advance.




s-5

1.3 WARNING AND CAUTIONS ON THE FANUC CIMPLICITY

iCELL

Warnings and cautions on the FANUC CIMPLICITY

i CELL are

provided below and in the text of this manual. Read this manual

carefully before using the FANUC CIMPLICITY

i CELL, and

observe the warnings, cautions, and notes.

WARNING1 When using an NC program on an actual NC

machine, confirm that the operation of the machineand tool controlled by the NC program is safe,

before operating the machine.If an incorrect NC program is used or an NCprogram is used in a wrong way, the machine andtool can perform an unexpected operation, thusdamaging the tool, machine, and workpiece, andexposing humans to a fatal accident.

2 This software does not check whether an NCprogram transferred by this software operatesnormally on the NC machine. When using an NCprogram on an actual NC machine, observe Item 1above.

3 Even when an NC program once used successfullyis reused, the contents of the NC program input tothe NC machine can change for a cause such asdeteriorated NC program storage media and achange in the communication environment for transfer based on the communication function.When using an NC program on an actual NCmachine, observe Item 1 above.

In this manual, a program used to specify an NCmachine operation is referred to as an NC program.In the manual of an NC machine, an alias such as amachining program, part program, or program maybe used for an NC program. If the meaning andpurpose of such an alias are the same as for an NCprogram used in this manual, be sure to observe thewarnings above.




s-6

Warning and caution on DNC operation

WARNING

1 When performing DNC operation, check the NCprogram. If an incorrect NC program is used, themachine and tool can perform an unexpectedoperation, thus damaging the workpiece andmachine, and causing human injury.

2 When performing DNC operation, do not startmachine immediately. By using functions such asthe single block, feedrate override, and machinelock functions, check that the machine and toolcontrolled by DNC operation operate safely.If operation is performed using incorrect data, the

machine can perform an unexpected operation,thus damaging the workpiece and machine, andcausing human injury.

CAUTIONDNC operation may temporarily stop, depending onthe capability of the personal computer, the number of NCs connected, and the size of thecommunication buffer on the NC side. Moreover,DNC operation may temporarily stop when softwareirrelevant to NC program transfer such as softwarefor personal computer screen operation isexecuted. In these cases, reduce the number of machines on which DNC operation is performedsimultaneously.

Exclusive file control

NOTEBe careful not to perform multiple operations suchas download, upload, edit, copy, move, and deleteoperations simultaneously for the same NC

program.



B-75074EN/04 PREFACE

p-1

PREFACE

This manual describes the FANUC CIMPLICITY

i CELL that

operates on a personal computer (called PC for short). The FANUC

CIMPLICITY

i CELL is an application that runs on the

CIMPLICITY

HMI Plant Edition. Using the Ethernet, DNC2,

reader/puncher, or Data Server communication function available with

an NC produced by FANUC, the FANUC CIMPLICITY

i CELL

transfers data such as NC programs between the NC and personal

computer.

This manual is applicable to FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL Version

2.0.

Organization of this manualThis manual consists of the following parts:

PREFACE

This part itself

I. GENERAL

This part outlines each function.

II. INSTALLATION

This part describes the method of installation. Be sure to read this

part before starting installation.

III. SETTING

This part describes the setting items required to used eachfunction.

IV. OPERATION

This part describes the method of screen operation.

V. USER CUSTOMIZATION

This part describes the information required to customize the

FANUC CIMPLICITY

i CELL.

APPENDIX

The setting items required for an NC, error codes, and so forth are

described.

CIMPLICITY is a registered trademark of GE Fanuc Automation North

America, Inc.

Microsoft, WindowsNT, Windows2000, and WindowsXP are

registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A.



PREFACE B-75074EN/04

p-2

Related manualsThis manual also covers FANUC NCs, their communication functions,

and CIMPLICITY related to the use of this software.

However, this manual does not cover all required information. Refer to

the following manuals in addition to this manual:

(1) CIMPLICITY

• CIMPLICITY HMI Plant Edition Basic System Operator's

Manual (B-75064EN)

• CIMPLICITY HMI Plant Edition Option 1 (WebView/

Action Calendar/Statistic Process Management/VCR)

Operator's Manual (B-75064EN-5)

(This manual describes the method of WebView setting.)

(2) To connect a personal computer to an NC using FOCAS1/Ethernet

or Data Server

• FANUC Ethernet Board/Data Server Board Operator'sManual (B-63354EN)

• FANUC FAST Ethernet Board/FAST Data Server Operator's

Manual (B-63644EN)

• FANUC FAST Ethernet/FAST Data Server Operator's

Manual For FANUC Series 30i/300i, 31i/310i,

32i/320i-MODEL A (B-64014EN)

(3) To connect a personal computer to an NC using DNC2

• FANUC DNC2 DESCRIPTIONS (B-61992E)

(4) To connect a personal computer to an NC using Reader/Puncher

• RS-232-C/RS-422 Interface CONNECTION MANUAL

(B-60043E)Connection manual, maintenance manual, and operator's manual of an

NC to be connected using the FANUC CIMPLICITY

i CELL

Licensing agreementThe terms and conditions set forth by FANUC must be agreed upon by

a customer who purchases the FANUC CIMPLICITY

i CELL.

These terms and conditions represent the licensing agreement between

the customer and FANUC LTD. (referred to as FANUC) related to the

software product (referred to as this software) purchased by the

customer.

Article 1 Licensing of right for use

FANUC grants the customer the following right related to this

software:

<1> This software may be used on one computer.

<2> When this software is used on multiple computers, the

customer shall obtain licenses for this software as many as

the number of computers even if this software is not used at

the same time on those computers.

<3> When this software is read through the network to the

temporary memory of each computer, the customer shall

obtain licenses for this software as many as the number of computers used.

<4> Only one copy of this software may be produced for backup.



B-75074EN/04 PREFACE

p-3

Article 2 Copyright

FANUC possesses the copyright of this software. Accordingly, the

customer shall not copy this software for any purpose except for

the purpose stipulated in Article 1 "Licensing of right for use".

Article 3 Restrictions

The customer shall not transfer, lend, sell, distribute, lease, or rent

this software to a third party.

Article 4 Warranty

If the distributed media and manual of this software contains a

physical defect, and the customer so notifies FANUC within

ninety days after the reception of this software, FANUC replaces

this software with a new one at no cost.

Article 5 Exemption

FANUC does not provide any warranty and guarantee related to

this software except the warranty stipulated in Article 4,

"Warranty".

Namely, FANUC is not liable for any direct or indirect damages

arising from the use of this software.

AbbreviationsIn this manual, the following abbreviations may be used:

Formal name Abbreviation

FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL CIMPLICITY i CELL, i CELL

CIMPLICITY HMI Plant Edition CIMPLICITY HMI

Personal computer PC

Operating system OS

Directory where the i Cell is

installed

%iCELL%

(Used when the path of a particular file

name in the i CELL is described)

If the installation path is not changed at

installation time, %iCELL% is usually:

C:\Program Files\FANUC\iCELL



B-75074EN/04 TABLE OF CONTENTS

c-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS............................................................................s-1

PREFACE....................................................................................................p-1

I. GENERAL

1 OVERVIEW .............................................................................................3

2 ABOUT THE FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL ............................................4

3 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT................................................................63.1 CNC............................................................................................................... 9

3.2 PERSONAL COMPUTER/HARDWARE...................................................... 18

3.3 PERSONAL COMPUTER/SOFTWARE ...................................................... 21

3.4 NETWORK CONFIGURATION ................................................................... 24

3.5 CONTRACT WITH INTERNET SERVICE PROVIDERS............................. 26

4 NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT...........................................................27

4.1 OVERVIEW .................................................................................................28

4.2 NC PROGRAM TRANSFER........................................................................ 304.2.1 NC Program Transfer by Operating the NC Program Management Screen...........30

4.2.2 NC Program Transfer by Operating the NC...........................................................32

4.3 NC PROGRAM FORMAT............................................................................34

4.4 SUBPROGRAM TRANSFER FUNCTION...................................................36

4.4.1 Details of the Subprogram Batch Transfer Function..............................................38

4.4.2 Details of the Subprogram Expanded Transfer Function .......................................39

4.5 LIST FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION............................................................. 40

4.5.1 Details of List File Batch Transfer Function..........................................................41

4.5.2 Details of List File Expended Transfer Function ...................................................42

4.5.3 List File Transfer Monitor and Control Function...................................................42

5 OPERATION MONITOR........................................................................44

5.1 OPERATION RESULT SCREEN................................................................. 45

5.1.1 Creating Operation Results ....................................................................................45

5.1.2 Display Information ...............................................................................................46

5.2 WORKPIECE MACHINING RESULTS........................................................ 48

5.2.1 Workpiece Machining Result Data ........................................................................48


5.2.3 Display Format Alteration......................................................................................53



TABLE OF CONTENTS B-75074EN/04

c-2

5.2.4 Planned Parts Count Input......................................................................................54

5.3 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT........................................................................ 55


6 NC DISPLAY AND OPERATION..........................................................57

7 NC MAINTENANCE..............................................................................59

8 MAIL FUNCTION ..................................................................................63

8.1 IMPLEMENTATION OF THE MAIL FUNCTION BY DIAL-UP

CONNECTION............................................................................................. 64

9 WEB FUNCTION...................................................................................66

9.1 IMPLEMENTING THE MAIL FUNCTION AND WEB FUNCTION WITH

24-HOUR CONNECTION............................................................................ 67

II. INSTALLATION

1 OVERVIEW ...........................................................................................71

2 PREPARATION.....................................................................................72

2.1 PREPARATION (FOR Windows XP)........................................................... 74

2.1.1 Setting Up the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows XP ....................................74

2.1.2 Setting the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows XP ..........................................75

2.1.3 Setting the DNS (Mail Function) for Windows XP ...............................................76

2.1.4 Installing IIS 6.0 (Web Function) for Windows 2003 Server ................................76

2.1.5 Registering the New User "IUSR_ICELL" (Web Function) for Windows 2003

Server .....................................................................................................................77

2.1.6 Installing IE6.0 (Basic Function) for Windows XP ...............................................77

2.1.7 Installing CIMPLICITY (Basic Function) for Windows XP .................................78

2.1.8 Installing the CIMPLICITY Service Pack (Basic Function) for Windows XP......78

2.2 PREPARATION (FOR Windows 2000)........................................................ 79

2.2.1 Setting Up the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows 2000 .................................79

2.2.2 Setting the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows 2000 .......................................80

2.2.3 Setting the DNS (Mail Function) for Windows 2000 ............................................81

2.2.4 Installing IIS 5.0 (Web Function) for Windows 2000............................................81

2.2.5 Registering the New User "IUSR_ICELL" (Web Function) for Windows 2000...82

2.2.6 Installing IE5.5 (Basic Function) for Windows 2000 ............................................82

2.2.7 Installing CIMPLICITY (Basic Function) for Windows 2000 ..............................83

2.2.8 Installing the CIMPLICITY Service Pack (Basic Function) for Windows 2000...83

2.3 PREPARATION (FOR Windows NT)........................................................... 84




c-3

2.3.1 Setting Up the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows NT....................................84

2.3.2 Setting the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows NT..........................................85

2.3.3 Setting the DNS (Mail Function) for Windows NT ...............................................86

2.3.4 Setting Up ODBC (Basic Function) for Windows NT...........................................87

2.3.5 Installing IIS 4.0 (Web Function) for Windows NT ..............................................88

2.3.6 Registering the New User "IUSR_ICELL" (Web Function) for Windows NT .....89

2.3.7 Installing IE5.5 (Basic Function) for Windows NT ...............................................89

2.3.8 Installing the CIMPLICITY (Basic Function) for Windows NT ...........................90

2.3.9 Installing the CIMPLICITY Service Pack (Basic Function) for Windows NT......90

3 INSTALLATION ....................................................................................91

3.1 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................... 92

3.2 INFORMATION TO BE AUTOMATICALLY SAVED TO THE TCP/IP

SERVICE FILE ............................................................................................ 98

4 UNINSTALLATION .............................................................................100

4.1 UNINSTALLATION.................................................................................... 101

5 BACKUP AND RESTORATION..........................................................102

5.1 BACKUP....................................................................................................103

5.1.1 Opening the IcellBkupRstr Dialog Box ...............................................................1035.1.2 Selecting Information to be Backed Up ...............................................................104

5.1.3 Confirming Backup Archive File Paths ...............................................................105

5.1.4 Starting Backup ....................................................................................................106

5.1.5 Confirming the Contents of the Backup Archive File ..........................................106

5.1.6 Saving the Backup Archive File...........................................................................107

5.2 RESTORATION......................................................................................... 108

5.2.1 Installing i CELL..................................................................................................108

5.2.2 Copying the Backup Archive File ........................................................................108

5.2.3 Selecting Information to be Restored ...................................................................108

5.2.4 Starting Restoration..............................................................................................109

III. SETTING

1 OVERVIEW .........................................................................................113

2 BASIC FUNCTIONS............................................................................114

2.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 115

2.1.1 Setting up the Number of Machines According to Order Password ....................1152.1.2 Setting up the Number of Machines to be Connected and the Functions to be

Used ....................................................................................................................117




c-4

2.1.3 Setting up Machine Information...........................................................................117

2.1.4 Setting up Communication...................................................................................117

2.1.5 Setting up NC Program Management...................................................................117

2.1.6 Setting up i CELL ................................................................................................118

2.2 DIALOG BOX CONFIGURATION.............................................................. 119

2.2.1 Opening the Configuration Dialog Box ...............................................................119

2.2.2 Overview ..............................................................................................................119

2.2.3 Menus...................................................................................................................120

2.2.4 How to Change Settings .......................................................................................121

2.2.5 Work Flows for Adding and Deleting Machines .................................................122

2.2.6 Setting Change and CIMPLICITY Project...........................................................124

2.2.7 Stopping and Updating the i CELL Project..........................................................125

2.2.8 Displaying a Dialog Box When the Project Has Not Been Updated....................126

2.2.9 If an Attempt to Reflect Point Settings to CIMPLICITY Fails ............................127

2.3 MACHINE COUNT CONFIGURATION ..................................................... 128

2.4 PROJECT PROPERTY .............................................................................129

2.5 MACHINE INFORMATION........................................................................ 130

2.6 COMMUNICATION....................................................................................133

2.6.1 Setting up Communication...................................................................................1332.6.2 Setting up FOCAS2/Ethernet Communication ....................................................134

2.6.3 Confirming the FOCAS2/Ethernet Communication Setting ................................138

2.6.4 DNC2 Communication Setting.............................................................................142

2.6.5 Reader/Puncher Communication Setting .............................................................144

2.6.6 Data Server Communication Setting ....................................................................146

2.6.7 Confirming Data Server Communication Setting ................................................148

2.7 NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT – MACHINE SETTINGS ........................ 151

2.7.1 General Tab ..........................................................................................................152

2.7.2 Communication Setting ........................................................................................155

2.7.3 Download Tab ......................................................................................................156

2.7.4 Upload Tab...........................................................................................................158

2.8 NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - FTP CLIENT SETTINGS..................... 159

2.9 i CELL MACHINE ......................................................................................161

2.9.1 Workpiece Process Result ....................................................................................165

2.9.2 Automatic Data Backup .......................................................................................169

2.10 WORKPIECES PROCESS RESULT SYSTEM CONFIGURATION .......... 173

2.11 DATABASE MAINTENANCE..................................................................... 176

2.12 NC SETTINGS........................................................................................... 179




c-5

2.12.1 Machining Result .................................................................................................179

2.12.2 Workpieces Process Result...................................................................................179

2.12.3 Tool Life...............................................................................................................181

3 MAIL....................................................................................................182

3.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 183

3.1.1 Trigger Point and Trigger Criteria........................................................................183

3.1.2 Mail Destinations .................................................................................................183

3.1.3 Mail Message and Message Point ........................................................................184

3.1.4 Flow of Setting .....................................................................................................185

3.2 MAILER .....................................................................................................186

3.3 MAIL CONFIGURATION ...........................................................................187

3.4 SEND TEST............................................................................................... 191

4 WEB ....................................................................................................192

4.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 193

4.1.1 Web Screen Flow .................................................................................................193

4.1.2 Logon Screen........................................................................................................194

4.1.3 Machine Selection Screen ....................................................................................194

4.1.4 Machine Detail Screen .........................................................................................195

4.1.5 Setting Flow .........................................................................................................196

4.2 WEB INITIAL CONFIGURATION .............................................................. 197

4.3 POINT FOR WEB......................................................................................198

4.4 ITEM NAME...............................................................................................200

4.5 DISPLAY TABLE.......................................................................................201

5 CIMPLICITY VIEWER .........................................................................202

5.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 202

5.2 PREPARATION.........................................................................................203

5.2.1 Checking the Conditions for CIMPLICITY Viewer Operation and

Communication ....................................................................................................203

5.2.2 Allocating Available Drives for Sharing Directories ...........................................209

5.2.2.1 Available drive required for sharing the i CELL installation directory........... 209

5.2.2.2 Available drive required for sharing the NC program root directory .............. 210

5.2.3 Setting for Sharing the Server PC (Required When Windows XP Is Used) ........213

5.3 SETTING...................................................................................................221

5.3.1 Procedure for Setting the Server PC.....................................................................221

5.3.2 Procedure for Setting the Viewer PC ...................................................................226

5.4 CHECKS.................................................................................................... 229




c-6

5.4.1 Checking Communication between the Viewer PC and Each NC.......................229

5.4.2 Checking CIMPLICITY Viewer Communication ...............................................231

5.5 EXECUTION..............................................................................................232

5.6 CANCELING THE SETTINGS................................................................... 232

IV. OPERATION

1 OVERVIEW .........................................................................................235

2 SCREEN OPERATION........................................................................236

2.1 ACTIVATING THE i CELL PROJECT .......................................................237

2.2 TERMINATING THE i CELL PROJECT ....................................................238

2.3 SWITCHING AMONG THE SCREENS .....................................................239

2.4 ITEMS COMMON TO THE SCREENS...................................................... 242

2.4.1 Names of Screen Components..............................................................................242

3 MAIN MENU........................................................................................244

3.1 OUTLINE...................................................................................................245

3.2 ACTIVATING THE MAIN MENU................................................................ 245

3.3 TERMINATING THE MAIN MENU ............................................................ 246

3.4 OPERATION.............................................................................................. 246

4 OVERVIEW MENU..............................................................................247

4.1 OUTLINE...................................................................................................248

4.2 SCREEN OPERATION (1) OVERVIEW SCREEN .................................... 249

4.3 SCREEN OPERATION (2) SCREEN LIST FOR EACH OVERVIEW

MACHINE..................................................................................................251

4.4 CHANGING THE NUMBER OF CONNECTED MACHINES ..................... 252

4.4.1 Copying an Overview Prepared Beforehand........................................................252

4.4.2 Editing the Overview Screen................................................................................253

5 NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT.........................................................255

5.1 OUTLINE...................................................................................................256

5.2 SCREEN OPERATION.............................................................................. 259

5.2.1 About The NC Program Management Window...................................................259

5.2.2 Work with the File List in the PC.........................................................................262

5.2.3 Copying, Moving, Deleting and Renaming Files (and Directories) in the PC.....265

5.2.4 Browsing, Editing and Creating New Files in the PC ..........................................269

5.2.5 Creating New Directories in the PC .....................................................................2725.2.6 Downloading and Uploading NC Programs.........................................................273

5.2.6.1 Communication with the NC memory........... .................................................. 273




c-7

5.2.6.2 Communication with a Data Server (FTP server)............................................ 284

5.2.7 Copying, Moving, Deleting, and Renaming Connection Destination Files

(Directories)..........................................................................................................288

5.2.8 Referencing and Editing Connection Destination Files .......................................293

5.2.9 Creating a New Connection Destination Directory..............................................297

5.2.10 Setting Options.....................................................................................................298

5.3 EDIT LIST FILE SCREEN OPERATIONS .................................................301

5.3.1 Structure of Edit List File Screen .........................................................................301

5.3.2 Editing List Files ..................................................................................................304

5.4 LIST FILE MONITOR SCREEN OPERATIONS ........................................ 309

5.4.1 Structure of List File Monitor Screen...................................................................309

5.4.2 List File Monitor Operations................................................................................311

6 MACHINING RESULTS ......................................................................314

6.1 OUTLINE...................................................................................................315


7 WORKPIECE PROCESS RESULTS ..................................................320

7.1 OUTLINE...................................................................................................321


8 NC DISPLAY AND OPERATION........................................................332

8.1 OUTLINE...................................................................................................333


8.3 ACTUAL POSITION DISPLAY .................................................................. 338

8.4 PROGRAM CHECK................................................................................... 340

8.5 PARAMETER SETTING............................................................................341

8.6 DIAGNOSIS............................................................................................... 343

9 NC MAINTENANCE............................................................................3449.1 OUTLINE...................................................................................................345


9.3 ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY ..................................................................... 348

9.3.1 History Data Display ............................................................................................349

9.3.2 Outputting History Data .......................................................................................349

9.3.3 Clearing History Data...........................................................................................350

9.4 OPERATION HISTORY DISPLAY............................................................. 351

9.4.1 Operation History Display....................................................................................352

9.4.2 Outputting History Data .......................................................................................353

9.4.3 Clearing History Data...........................................................................................354




c-8

9.4.4 History Signal Setting ..........................................................................................354

9.5 VARIOUS DATA BACKUP/RESTORATION.............................................. 355

9.5.1 Data Backup .........................................................................................................356

9.5.2 Data Restoration ...................................................................................................357

9.5.3 File List Refreshing ..............................................................................................357

9.5.4 File Deletion .........................................................................................................358

9.6 FROM/SRAM DATA BACKUP/RESTORATION........................................ 359

9.6.1 FROM Data Backup.............................................................................................360

9.6.2 FROM Data Restoration.......................................................................................361

9.6.3 SRAM Data Backup.............................................................................................362

9.6.4 File List Refreshing ..............................................................................................362

9.6.5 FROM Data Deletion ...........................................................................................363

9.7 BACKUP DATA DISPLAY ......................................................................... 364

10 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT...............................................................366

10.1 OUTLINE...................................................................................................367


11 ALARM AND WARNING.....................................................................371

11.1 OUTLINE...................................................................................................372

11.2 SCREEN OPERATION (1) ALARM MESSAGE SCREEN......................... 374

11.3 SCREEN OPERATION (2) ALARM LOG DISPLAY SCREEN................... 377


1 OVERVIEW .........................................................................................381

2 ADDING SCREENS ............................................................................382

2.1 SCREEN SYSTEM OF THE i CELL.......................................................... 383

2.1.1 Screen Configuration............................................................................................383

2.1.2 Screen Switching..................................................................................................384

2.2 SCREEN ADDITION.................................................................................. 385

2.2.1 Determination of Basic Items...............................................................................385

2.2.2 Modification to the Function Switch Tab.............................................................387

2.2.3 Creation of a Basic Screen ...................................................................................389

2.2.4 Creation of a Standard Screen and Function Screen ............................................392

2.2.4.1 File creation .............................................................. ....................................... 392

2.2.4.2 Setting the screen variables (screen level variables)........................................ 393

2.2.4.3 Screen switching.......................................................... .................................... 395

2.3 GENERAL-PURPOSE OBJECTS FOR THE i CELL.................................396




c-9

2.3.1 General-Purpose Tab (Function Switch Tab) Control..........................................396

2.3.2 Back Button..........................................................................................................397

2.3.3 Title Bar................................................................................................................397

2.3.4 Message Line........................................................................................................398

2.3.5 Warning and Alarm Lamps ..................................................................................399

2.4 ScreenID.ini ............................................................................................... 400

2.4.1 File Modification..................................................................................................400

2.5 iCELL_ErrorMessage ................................................................................ 401

2.5.1 ErrorMessage........................................................................................................401

2.5.1.1 Method.............. ....................................................... ........................................ 401

2.5.1.2 Example of usage............................... ....................................................... ....... 4022.6 iCELLDef ...................................................................................................403

2.6.1 iCELLRW ............................................................................................................403

2.6.1.1 Method.............. ....................................................... ........................................ 403

2.6.1.2 Public variables........................................... ..................................................... 408

2.6.1.3 Properties.................................................. ....................................................... 410

2.6.1.4 Example of usage............................... ....................................................... ....... 416

2.7 MACHINE SELECTION CONTROL .......................................................... 418

2.7.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................418

2.7.2 Property ................................................................................................................4182.7.3 Method .................................................................................................................421

2.7.4 Event ....................................................................................................................423

2.7.5 Example of Usage ................................................................................................423

3 DATABASE SPECIFICATIONS..........................................................425

3.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 425

3.1.1 Operating the Database with the i CELL .............................................................425

3.1.2 i CELL Database ..................................................................................................426

3.1.3 i CELL Database Configuration...........................................................................426

3.2 MACHINING RESULT...............................................................................427

3.2.1 RunTimeAConfig - Machine Result Setting Table ..............................................427

3.2.2 RunTimeAData - Machining Result Data Table ..................................................427

3.3 WORKPIECES PROCESS RESULT......................................................... 429

3.3.1 WKPCMcnName - Workpieces Process Result Setting Table.............................429

3.3.2 WKPCWorkName - Workpiece ID Setting Table ...............................................430

3.3.3 WKPCLastStateConfig - Machining End ID Setting ...........................................430

3.3.4 WKPCUserConfig - User Area ID Setting Table.................................................4303.3.5 WKPCPlan - Planned Workpiece Machining Count Setting Table .....................431

3.3.6 WKPCData - Workpieces Process Result Data Table..........................................431




c-10

3.3.7 WKPCDspMcnCnd - Progress Status Display Table...........................................433

3.3.8 WKPCDspLastState - Machining End State Display Table.................................434

4 REFERENCING THE DATABASE......................................................435

4.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 436

4.2 REFERENCING THE ACCESS DATABASE FROM EXCEL..................... 436

4.2.1 Referencing the Database .....................................................................................437

4.2.2 Displaying Acquired Data ....................................................................................442

4.3 SAMPLE MACHINING RESULT SCREEN................................................ 445

4.3.1 Method of Operation ............................................................................................445

4.3.2 Description of VBA Scripts .................................................................................448

4.3.2.1 Database operation procedure........................................................... ............... 449

4.3.2.2 Data display processing procedures............................................................... .. 449

4.3.2.3 Timer processing procedures................................................. .......................... 450

4.4 SAMPLE WORKPIECES PROCESS RESULT SCREEN.......................... 452

4.4.1 Method of Operation ............................................................................................453

4.4.2 Description of VBA Scripts .................................................................................455

4.4.2.1 Database operation procedures ....................................................... ................. 455

4.4.2.2 Data display processing procedures............................................................... .. 466

APPENDIX

A HOW TO INSTALL AND REGISTER CIMPLICITY.............................469

A.1 HOT TO INSTALL CIMPLICITY................................................................. 470

A.1.1 Installing CIMPLICITY.......................................................................................470

A.1.2 How to Start Installation.......................................................................................471

A.1.3 Newly Installing CIMPLICITY HMI...................................................................472

A.1.4 Installing New Options with CIMPLICITY HMI ................................................476

A.2 REGISTERING USE OF CIMPLICITY....................................................... 477

A.2.1 Registering Use of CIMPLICITY HMI Software ................................................477

A.2.2 Newly Registering for CIMPLICITY HMI..........................................................478

A.2.3 Registering for CIMPLICITY HMI Options and Upgrading the Functions ........480

A.2.4 Using CIMPLICITY HMI without License .........................................................481

B NC SETTING.......................................................................................482

B.1 SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet OF THE OPTION BOARD FOR

Series 16i/18i/21i-A/B, Power Mate i, AND Series 0i-B/C.........................483

B.1.1 Precautions to be Observed when using the FOCAS2/Ethernet Functions for

the First Time .......................................................................................................483

B.1.2 FOCAS2/Ethernet Parameter Screen....................................................................484




c-11

B.1.3 Configuring a Small-scale Network .....................................................................487

B.1.4 Configuring a Large-scale Network .....................................................................487

B.2 SETTING THE EMBEDDED Ethernet FOR Series 16i/18i/21i-B .............. 488


the First Time .......................................................................................................488

B.2.2 Setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet Functions..............................................................489

B.2.2.1 FOCAS2/Ethernet parameter screen....................................... ......................... 489

B.2.2.2 Configuring a small-scale network.................................................................. 492

B.2.2.3 Configuring a large-scale network...................................................... ............. 492

B.2.3 Setting the FTP File Transfer Functions ..............................................................493

B.2.3.1 Setting the FTP file transfer function parameters....... ..................................... 493

B.2.3.2 Configuring a small-scale network............................................................. ..... 496


B.3 SETTING THE DATA SERVER FOR Series 16i/18i/21i-A/B AND

Series 0i-B/C ............................................................................................. 497

B.3.1 Precautions to be Observed when Using the Data Server Functions for

the First Time .......................................................................................................497

B.3.2 Setting the FTP Server .........................................................................................498

B.3.2.1 Ethernet parameter screen................................................ ................................ 498

B.3.2.2 Configuring a small-scale network............................................................... ... 502


B.3.3 Setting the Connection Host.................................................................................503

B.3.3.1 Ethernet parameter screen................................................ ................................ 503

B.3.3.2 Configuring a small-scale network............................................................... ... 506


B.4 SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet OF THE OPTION BOARD FOR

Series 30i/31i/32i-A................................................................................... 507


the First Time .......................................................................................................507

B.4.2 FOCAS2/Ethernet Screen.....................................................................................508

B.4.3 Configuring a Small-scale Network .....................................................................511

B.4.4 Configuring a Large-scale Network .....................................................................511

B.5 SETTING THE EMBEDDED Ethernet FOR Series 30i/31i/32i-A .............. 512


the First Time .......................................................................................................512

B.5.2 Setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet Functions..............................................................513

B.5.2.1 FOCAS2/Ethernet parameter screen....................................... ......................... 513

B.5.2.2 Configuring a small-scale network.................................................................. 517





c-12

B.5.3 Setting the FTP File Transfer Functions ..............................................................518

B.5.3.1 Parameter setting screen for the FTP file transfer function ............................. 518

B.5.3.2 Configuring a small-scale network.............................................................. .... 522


B.6 SETTING THE DATA SERVER FOR Series 30i/31i/32i-A........................523

B.6.1 Precautions to be Observed when Using the Data Server Functions for

the First Time .......................................................................................................523

B.6.2 Setting the FTP Server .........................................................................................524

B.6.2.1 Data Server setting screen ....................................................... ........................ 524

B.6.2.2 Configuring a small-scale network................................................................ .. 527


B.6.3 Setting the Connection Host.................................................................................528

B.6.3.1 Parameter setting screen for Data Server functions......................................... 528

B.6.3.2 Configuring a small-scale network.............................................................. .... 532


B.7 SETTING UP DNC2 .................................................................................. 533

B.8 SETTING UP READER/PUNCHER........................................................... 534

C EXAMPLES OF NC OPERATIONS ....................................................535

C.1 DNC2.........................................................................................................536

C.2 READER/PUNCHER ................................................................................. 542

D ERROR CODES..................................................................................550

D.1 NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT ERROR CODES.................................... 551

E DETAILS OF CIMPLICITY POINTS....................................................561

E.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 562

E.1.1 CIMPLICITY Points and i CELL ........................................................................562

E.1.2 Point Naming Rules..............................................................................................563

E.2 LIST OF POINTS.......................................................................................564

E.2.1 Machine-Specific Points.......................................................................................564

E.2.2 i CELL -Common Points......................................................................................571

F SETTING UP PC .................................................................................572

F.1 SETTING UP IIS........................................................................................ 573

F.1.1 Adding the Access Permission for Directories for Windows NT.........................573

F.1.2 Constructing Web Sites for Windows NT............................................................574

F.1.3 Adding the Access Permission for Directories for Windows 2000......................580

F.1.4 Constructing Web Sites for Windows 2000 .........................................................581

F.2 SETTING UP FTP SERVER...................................................................... 586

F.2.1 Peer Web Services for Windows NT....................................................................586




c-13

F.2.2 Internet Information Service for Windows 2000..................................................589

G CONNECTION TO THE INTERNET....................................................594

G.1 EXAMPLE CONTRACT FOR DIALUP CONNECTION ............................. 595

H CALLING FANUC LADDER-III ...........................................................597

H.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 597

H.2 OPERATION.............................................................................................. 598



I. GENERAL



B-75074EN/04 GENERAL 1.OVERVIEW

- 3 -

1 OVERVIEW

Organization of this partThis part (GENERAL) outlines the i CELL.



2.ABOUT THE FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL GENERAL B-75074EN/04

- 4 -

2 ABOUT THE FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL

The FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL is a software package for centrally

manage multiple CNC machine tools connected to a network. The i

CELL supports normal operations such as part machining and

machining result collection to improve productivity, and also supports

prompt recovery in case of a failure. With the enhanced network

function, the system can be remotely monitored from a personal

computer or i-mode cellular phone.

The i CELL has an operation support function and a remote support and

service function for supporting failure recovery. The major operation

support capabilities are:

• NC program management:

Input/output of machining programs between the personal

computer and each NC

• CNC display and operation:

CNC state display and operation handling from the personal

computer

• Operation monitoring:

Monitoring of machine operation and collection of machiningresults

• Maintenance:

Saving and restoring of a variety of NC data items

DATA SERVER FOCAS2 / EthernetDNC2Reader/Puncher

CIMPLICITY HMI

NC Program

Management

CNC Display

& Operation

Software

Prepared

By User

Maintenace

function

Operation

Monitoring

Remote

Monitoring

Monitoringby Web View

Remote Site

Monitoring byCIMPLICITY

Viewer

Wi n d ow sX P / 2 0 0 0

Wi n d ow sNT 4 . 0

Ethernet RS-232-C

CNC machine tool

FANUC CIMPLICITY ® i CELL

RS-232-C

*1 i-mode provides service

Monitoringby i mode *１

The i CELL is developed using CIMPLICITY

HMI, which has found

applications in SCADA (monitoring control and data collection)

software. The user can utilize a wide variety of functions available with

this tool. Moreover, the tool can be modified to meet the operation of

the user, and user-specific screens and functions can be added.

In addition, by using the enhanced network function of CIMPLICITY

HMI, a distributed system where multiple personal computers areinstalled at necessary locations can be built easily. Multiple

CIMPLICITY viewer personal computers can reference a personal



B-75074EN/04 GENERAL 2.ABOUT THE FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL

- 5 -

computer (server) that is performing central management with the i

CELL. With the Web view function, operating status monitored with

the i CELL can be monitored from a remote personal computer via the

Internet by using a browser such as Internet Explorer. (The Web view is

an option of CIMPLICITY.)

An i-mode cellular phone can externally monitor some of operating

statuses being monitored with the i CELL. A specified event such as the

completion of machining and the occurrence of an error can be posted

by mail to another personal computer or cellular phone. For the former

monitoring, connection with the Internet must be maintained at all

times.

The i CELL supports communication using FOCAS2/Ethernet, DNC2,

Reader/Puncher, and Data Server, so it is available for all NC models

including the newest NC and old models. However, the usable functiondepends on the communication function.

The i CELL connected to an NC using the Reader/Puncher interface can

be used as a replacement of a FANUC NC program input/output device.

By introducing the i CELL, the utilization of production equipment can

be improved, and quick recovery can be performed if a failure occurs.

FANUC hopes that the i CELL will be fully utilized as a package for

building a system and providing a base for operation.



3.OPERATING ENVIRONMENT GENERAL B-75074EN/04

- 6 -

3 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

This chapter describes the operating environment for using the i CELL.

Communication functions, and available CNCs and functionsi CELL supports four communication functions, FOCAS2/Ethernet,

DNC2, Reader/Puncher, and Data Server. The following table lists the

functions that are available from each communication protocol and NC

type.

NOTETo use an NC communication function, the CNCoption is required. For details, see Section 3.1,"CNC".

i CELL functionsNC program managementCommunication function

and NC type OverviewMachining

result

Workpieceprocessresult

AlarmToollife

NC display,operation

andmaintenance

Operator message

PCoperation

NCoperation

Ethernet

FOCAS2/EthernetSeries 16i /18i /21i A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ -

Series 16i /18i /21i B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (*1)

Series 30i /31i /32i A ○ ○ ○ ○ (*2) ○

(*3) (*2)

○ ○ (*1)

Power Mate i D/H ○ ○ ○ ○ - ○ ○ ○ -

Series 0i B/0i C ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (*1)

Data Server

Series 16i /18i /21i ○ (*4)

○ (*4)

○ (*4)

○ (*4)

○ (*4)

○ (*4)

○ (*4)

○ (*5)

○ (*6)

Series 30i /31i /32i A ○ (*4)

○ (*4)

○ (*4)

○ (*4) (*2)

○ (*3) (*4)

(*2) ○

(*5) ○

(*6)

Series 0i B/0i C ○ (*4)

○ (*4)

○ (*4)

○ (*4)

○ (*4)

○ (*4)

○ (*4)

○ (*5)

○ (*6)

DNC2

Series 0C ○ - - ○ - - - ○ ○

Series 15A/B ○ ○ - ○ - - - ○ ○

Series 16/18 ○ ○ - ○ - - - ○ ○

Series 16i /18i /21i ○ ○ - ○ - - - ○ (*7)

○ (*7)

Reader/Puncher

NC that supports

Reader/Puncher

communication(*8)

- - - - - - - - ○ (*7)



B-75074EN/04 GENERAL 3.OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

- 7 -

NOTE*1 Set an FTP server on the PC side, and set the

setting information (port number, IP address, user name, password, login directory) in the parametersfor the FTP file transfer function of the NC.

*2 Function under development*3 The following functions for Series 30i /31i /32i-A are

under development: Alarm history screen, operator message historyscreen, operation history screen, alarm/operator message/operation history acquisition based on theautomatic history acquisition function, andFROM/SRAM backup and restoration screen.

*4 Options related to FOCAS2/Ethernet are required.*5 When an NC program is to be input to and output

from the NC memory, an option related toFOCAS2/Ethernet is required. When an NC programis to be input to and output from a Data Server, theData Server needs to be set as an FTP server.

*6 Set an FTP server on the PC side, and set thesetting information (port number, IP address, user name, password, login directory) in the parametersof the Data Server.

*7 When the eight-digit O number option is used, NC

program I/O operation cannot be performed.*8 Connection is impossible if the Series 15i and Series

30i /31i /32i-A are in use.

CNC connection optionUp to five NCs can be connected using FOCAS2/Ethernet (including

the FOCAS2/Ethernet function of the Data Server) by setting the

password supplied with i CELL to the PC. When you want to connect

six or more NCs or connect an NC using DNC2 or Reader/Puncher,

purchase a desired CNC connection option listed below and set the

password to the PC. You can expand the number of connected NCs up

to 20.

Name Specification

5 CNC connection option A08B-9510-J940



However, when the FOCAS2/Ethernet function of the Data Server is

not used but only the function for input to and output from the hard disk

of the Data Server is used from the NC program management screen,

the NC with the Data Server is not counted in the number of NCs that

require the options above. When a connection is made to a PC that has

an FTP server, and files are transferred using the NC programmanagement screen, the PC is not counted in the number of PCs that

require the options above.




- 8 -

In other words, when only the FTP client function of the NC program

management screen is used, the connection destination, namely, a Data

Server or PC, is not counted in the number of units that require the

options above. So, when I/O operation to and from the NC memory is

to be performed using the FOCAS2/Ethernet function of a Data Server,

the NC that has the Data Server is counted in the number of NCs that

require the options above.




- 9 -

3.1 CNC

Usable CNCs- When the FOCAS2/Ethernet is used

An Ethernet is required for the following CNCs:

- Series 30i-MODEL A, Series 300i-MODEL A,

Series 300is-MODEL A





- Series 16i-MODEL A/B, Series 160i-MODEL A/B,

Series 160is-MODEL A/B





- Power Mate i-MODEL D/H, Series 0i-MODEL B/C NOTE1 When the i CELL is operated, maximum four

FOCAS2/Ethernet clients are used. Among these, two clients are used all times. One of the

remaining two is used only when the NC operation/displayscreen, NC maintenance screen, or tool life managementscreen is displayed. The other is used only when history datais collected using the automatic history backup function.(When the execution of one automatic backup operation per day is specified, the client is used at that time only.)With the embedded Ethernet function, no more than fiveFOCAS2/Ethernet clients can be used. Accordingly, when the embedded Ethernet function is used,one NC can communicate with only one i CELL product. An

option board is required for one NC to communicate with

multiple i CELL products.The table below indicates the number of FOCAS2/Ethernetclients usable with various Ethernet boards, and the number of clients used by the i CELL.

Type of Ethernet boardNumber of FOCAS2/

Ethernet clients

Number of clients

used by the i CELL

Embedded 5

Ethernet board

Data Server board10

FAST Ethernet board

FAST Data Server 20

4

3 To connect six or more NCs, a CNC connection option isrequired.




- 10 -

- When the DNC2 is usedAn DNC2 is required for the following CNCs:

Series 0-MODEL C, Series 15-MODEL A/B

Series 16-MODEL A/B/C, Series 18-MODEL A/B/C

Series 16i-MODEL A/B, Series 18i-MODEL A/B

Series 21i-MODEL A/B

NOTE1 The i CELL can be used with one-path control CNC.

The i CELL cannot be used with two-path or

three-path control CNC.2 DNC2 cannot be used with a CNC that uses the

8-digit O number option.

3 When DNC2 is used, a CNC connection option isrequired, which can connect as many CNCs as or more than the number of CNCs to be connectedusing DNC2.

- When the Reader/Puncher is usedReader/Puncher can be used on the CNC supported the Reader/Puncher

interface.

i CELL can be connected to a CNC using the Reader/Puncher interface

to be used as a replacement of a FANUC CNC program input/output

device as listed below:

FANUC Handy File

FANUC PROGRAM File / FANUC PROGRAM File Mate

FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER

FANUC FA CARD ADAPTER

NOTE1 The i CELL can be used with one-path or two-path

control CNC.The i CELL cannot be used with three-path control

CNC.

2 When Reader/Puncher is used, a CNC connectionoption is required, which can connect as manyCNCs as or more than the number of CNCs to beconnected using Reader/Puncher.

3 To display the NC program list of the i CELL on the

NC screen, the floppy cassette directory displayoption is required on the NC.




- 11 -

- When the Data Server is usedWith the following CNCs, the FAST Data Server or Data Server of

10BASE-T type is used:


Series 300is -MODEL A






Series 160is -MODEL A/B





NOTE1 When the FTP server function of the Data Server of

10BASE-T type is used, only one i CELL product

(FTP client) can be connected at the same time. If an attempt is made to connect more than one i

CELL product at the same time, a second i CELL

product and up are placed in the wait state.When multiple i CELL products are to be connected

to one NC, the FAST Data Server is required.

The table below indicates the number of FTP clientsthat can be connected to the Data Server board andthe number of FTP clients used by the i CELL.

Type of Data

Server board

Number of

connectable FTP

clients

Number of FTP

clients used by

the i CELL

Data Server of

10BASE-T type1

FAST Data Server 5

１

2 The Data Server of 10BASE-5 type does not havethe FOCAS2/Ethernet and FTP functions. So, onlyNC program input/output by operation from the NCside can be performed. When another i CELL

function is to be used, the Data Server needs to bereplaced with a Data Server of 10BASE-T type or FAST Data Server.




- 12 -

Ethernet boards or Data Server boards and CNC optionsThe table below indicates the Ethernet boards or Data Server boards

usable with the i CELL, and required CNC options.

Ethernet boards or Data Server boards and required options

No. NameApplicable

model

Drawing

number CNC option Control software

1FS16i /18i /21i

-TA/MA A02B-0236-J292

A02B-XXXX-S707(*1)

A02B-0207-J800(*2)

2

Ethernet board for

LCD-mounted type

CNCFS16i /18i /21i

-TB/MB A02B-0281-J292 A02B-XXXX-S707

(*1)

3FS16i /18i /21i

-TA/MA A02B-0236-J145

A02B-XXXX-S707(*1)

A02B-0207-J800(*2)

A02B-XXXX-S737(*3)

4

ATA Data Server

board for

LCD-mounted type

CNCFS16i /18i /21i

-TB/MB A02B-0281-J145 A02B-XXXX-S707

(*1)

A02B-XXXX-S737(*3)

5FS16i /18i /21i

-TA/MA A02B-0265-J291

A02B-XXXX-S707(*1)

A02B-0207-J800(*2)

6

Ethernet board for

stand-alone type CNC FS16i /18i /21i

-TB/MB A02B-0281-J298 A02B-XXXX-S707

(*1)

7FS16i /18i /21i

-TA/MA A02B-0265-J145

A02B-XXXX-S707(*1)

A02B-0207-J800(*2)

A02B-XXXX-S737(*3)

8

ATA Data Server

board for stand-alone

type CNC FS16i /18i /21i

-TB/MB A02B-0281-J148

A02B-XXXX-S707(*1)

A02B-XXXX-S737(*3)

9FS16i /18i

-TA/MA A02B-0265-J154

A02B-XXXX-S707(*1)

A02B-0207-J800(*2)

A02B-XXXX-S737 (*3)

10

RISC+ATA DataServer board for

stand-alone type CNC FS16i /18i

-TB/MB

A02B-0281-J158

A02B-0281-J160(*4)

A02B-XXXX-S707(*1)

A02B-XXXX-S737(*3)

A02B-0236-J561

#6561

11 Ethernet boardPower Mate i

-D/H A02B-0259-J230

A02B-0259-J862(*5)

A02B-0259-J847(*6)

A02B-0259-J561

#6561

12FS16i /18i /21i

-TA/MA A02B-0236-J293

A02B-XXXX-S707(*1)

A02B-0207-J800(*2)

A02B-0281-J561

#6567

13FS16i /18i /21i

-TB/MB A02B-0281-J293 A02B-XXXX-S707

(*1)

A02B-0281-J561

#6567

14

FAST Ethernet board

for LCD-mounted type

CNC

FS0i-TC/MC A02B-0281-J293 A02B-XXXX-S707(*1)

A02B-0281-J561

#656W

15FS16i /18i /21i

-TA/MA A02B-0265-J293

A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1)

A02B-0207-J800(*2)

A02B-0281-J561

#6567

16FS16i /18i /21i

-TB/MB A02B-0281-J299 A02B-XXXX-S707

(*1)

A02B-0281-J561

#6567

17

FAST Ethernet board

for stand-alone type

CNC

FS0i-TB/MB A02B-0281-J299 A02B-XXXX-S707(*1)

A02B-0281-J561

#6567

18FS16i /18i /21i

-TA/MA A02B-0236-J140

A02B-XXXX-S707(*1)

A02B-0207-J800(*2)

A02B-XXXX-S737(*3)

A02B-0281-J561

#6567

19FS16i /18i /21i

-TB/MB A02B-0281-J146

A02B-XXXX-S707(*1)

A02B-XXXX-S737(*3)

A02B-0281-J561

#6567

20

ATA FAST Data

Server for

LCD-mounted type

CNC

FS0i

-TC/MC A02B-0281-J146

A02B-XXXX-S707(*1)

A02B-XXXX-S737 (*3)

A02B-0281-J561

#656W




- 13 -

Ethernet boards or Data Server boards and required options

No. NameApplicable

model

Drawing


21FS16i /18i /21i

-TA/MA A02B-0265-J140

A02B-XXXX-S707 (*1)

A02B-0207-J800(*2)

A02B-XXXX-S737(*3)

A02B-0281-J561

#6567

22

ATA FAST Data

Server for stand-alone

type CNC FS16i /18i /21i

-TB/MB A02B-0281-J149

A02B-XXXX-S707(*1)

A02B-XXXX-S737(*3)

A02B-0281-J561

#6567

23

Built-in I/O board

stand-alone type CNC

(with Data Server)

FS0i -TB/MB A02B-0299-H021 A02B-XXXX-S707

(*1)

A02B-XXXX-S737(*3)

A02B-0281-J561

#6567

24FS16i /18i

-MA A02B-0265-J157

A02B-XXXX-S707(*1)

A02B-0207-J800(*2)

A02B-XXXX-S737(*3)

25

RISC+ATA FAST

Data Server for

stand-alone type CNC FS16i/18

i

-MB

A02B-0281-J161

A02B-0281-J162(*4)

A02B-XXXX-S707

(*1)

A02B-XXXX-S737

(*3)

A02B-0281-J561

#6567

26

Embedded Ethernet


CNC and stand-alone

type CNC

FS16i /18i

-TB/MB-

Not required(*7)

27

Embedded Ethernet


CNC and stand-alone

type CNC(*8)

FS21i

-TB/MB-

Not required(*8)

A02B-0281-J571

#656A

28 FAST Ethernet boardPower Mate i

-D/H A02B-0259-J293

A02B-0259-J862(*5)

A02B-0259-J847(*6)

A02B-0259-J555

#6567

29

FAST Ethernet board


CNC and stand-alone

type CNC

FS30i /31i /32i

-A

A02B-0303-J146(*9)

A02B-XXXX-S707(*10)

A02B-XXXX-S737(*11)

A02B-0303-J561

#6569

A02B-0303-J572

#656F

30

Embedded Ethernet


CNC and stand-alone

type CNC

FS30i /31i -A -Not required

(*12)

31

Embedded Ethernet


CNC and stand-alone

type CNC(*13)

FS32i -A -Not required

(*13)

A02B-0303-J571

#656E

A02B-0303-J572

#656F

(*1) A02B-XXXX-S707: Ethernet function for Series 16i/18i/21i/0i-B

/0i-C

This option is required when the overview, machining result, and

NC program management functions based on an external board are

used. This option is not required when the FTP client function

only is used.

Specify one of the following drawing numbers in XXXX

according to the NC type:0236 (16i -TA) 0238 (18i -TA) 0247 (21i –TA) 0299 (0i –TB)

0237 (16i -MA) 0239 (18i -MA) 0248 (21i –MA) 0300 (0i –MB)0281 (16i -TB) 0283 (18i -TB) 0285 (21i –TB) 0309 (0i –TC)

0282 (16i -MB) 0284 (18i -MB) 0286 (21i –MB) 0310 (0i –MC)




- 14 -

This option is required when the FOCAS2/Ethernet function is used.

(*2) A02B-0207-J800: Extended driver library for Series 16i/18i/21i

This option is required when Model A is used.

This option is not required for Model B, regardless of whether the

embedded function or external board is used.

(*3) A02B-XXXX-S737: Data Server function

This option is required when the Data Server function is used.

To use the FTP client function, the Data Server function is

required. So, this option is required.

Specify a drawing number in XXXX according to the NC type.

See (*1).

(*4) A02B-0281-J160 is the high-speed version of A02B-0281-J158.

A02B-0281-J162 is the high-speed version of A02B-0281-J161.

(*5) A02B-0259-J862: Ethernet function for Power Mate i-D/H

(*6) A02B-0259-J847: Extended driver library for Power Mate i-D/H(*7) When the embedded Ethernet function is used with Series

16i/18i-TB/MB, no option is required on the NC side.

(*8) When the embedded Ethernet function is used with Series

21i-TB/MB, the main CPU board with the embedded Ethernet

function needs to be specified. No option is required on the NC

side.

(*9) A02B-0303-J146: FAST Ethernet board for LCD-mounted type

CNC and stand-alone type CNC

With this board, either or both of the Ethernet function and the

Data Server function can be used, depending on the CNC option

used.

(*10)A02B-XXXX-S707: Ethernet functions for Series 30i/31i/32i-AThis option is required when the overview, machining result, and

NC program management functions are used. This option is not

required when the FTP client function only is used. In XXXX,

specify one of the drawing numbers indicated below, depending

on the NC type.0303 (30i-A) 0307 (31i -A) 0308 (32i –A)

(*11)A02B-XXXX-S737: Data Server functions for Series

30i/31i/32i-A

This option is required when the Data Server function is used. To

use the FTP client function, the Data Server function is required.

So, this option is required.In XXXX, specify a drawing number, depending on the NC type.

See (*10).

(*12)When the embedded Ethernet function is used with Series 30i/31i

-A, no option is required on the NC side.

(*13)When the embedded Ethernet function is used with Series 32i -A,

the main CPU board with the embedded Ethernet function needs to

be specified. No option is required on the NC side.




- 15 -

DNC2 boards and CNC optionsThe table below indicates the DNC2 boards usable with the i CELL,

and required CNC options.

DNC2 boards and required options

No NameApplicable

model

Drawing


1DNC2 card for control

unit A A16B-2200-0775

A02B-XXXX-J878(*1)

A02B-XXXX-J927(*1)

A02B-XXXX-J828(*1)

A02B-0098-K121(*2)

2DNC2 card for control

unit B

FS0 -TC/MC

A02B-0098-J055

A02B-XXXX-J878(*1)

A02B-XXXX-J927(*1)

A02B-XXXX-J828(*1)

A02B-0098-J543

#0688

3 Option 1 boardMain unit A

A02B-0162-J031

4Option 1 board

Main unit E A02B-0162-J035

5Option 1 board

Main unit F(*3)

A02B-0162-J036

6Option 1 board

Main unit I

FS15 -TB/MB

A02B-0162-J192

A02B-0162-J600(*4)

A02B-0162-J590

#60N0

7Option 1 board

Main unit A

FS16 /18

-TC/MC A02B-0200-J030

A02B-XXXX-J908(*5)

A02B-XXXX-J902(*5)

A02B-XXXX-J956(*5)

A02B-0200-J532

#B426

8FS16i /18i /21i

-TA/MA A02B-0236-J030

9

Serial communication

board for

LCD-mounted type

CNC

FS16i /18i /21i

-TB/MB A02B-0281-J030

10FS16i /18i /21i

-TA/MA A02B-0265-J030

11

Serial communication

board for stand-alone

type CNCFS16i /18i /21i

-TB/MB A02B-0281-J032

A02B-XXXX-J908(*6)

A02B-XXXX-J902(*6)

A02B-XXXX-J956(*6)

A02B-0236-J532

#B427

NOTE

DNC2 cannot be used with a CNC that uses the8-digit O number option.

(*1) A02B-XXXX-J878 : DNC2 for Series 0

A02B-XXXX-J927 : External control of I/O devices for Series 0

A02B-XXXX-J828 : Background edit for Series 0


according to the NC type:0098 (0-TC) 0099 (0-MC)

(*2) A02B-0098-K121: Mounting metal fixture for control unit A

This is necessary when the DNC2 card for control unit A is used.

(*3) This is usable only with the Series 15-MB.

(*4) A02B-0162-J600: DNC2 for Series 15In addition to this option, a CRT display circuit option that

matches the corresponding board is required.




- 16 -

(*5) A02B-XXXX-J908 : DNC2 for Series 16/18

A02B-XXXX-J902 : External control of I/O devices for Series

16/18

A02B-XXXX-J956 : Background edit for Series 16/18


according to the NC type:

0222 (16 -TC) 0228 (18 -TC)

0223 (16 -MC) 0229 (18 -MC)

(*6) A02B-XXXX-J908 : DNC2 for Series 16i/18i/21i

A02B-XXXX-J902 : External control of I/O devices for

Series 16i/18i/21i

A02B-XXXX-J956 : Background edit for Series 16i/18i/21i


according to the NC type:

0236 (16i-TA) 0238 (18

i-TA) 0247 (21

i-TA)0237 (16i -MA) 0239 (18i -MA) 0248 (21i –MA)

0281 (16i -TB) 0283 (18i -TB) 0285 (21i -TB)

0282 (16i -MB) 0284 (18i -MB) 0286 (21i -MB)




- 17 -

CNC options for functions other than the Ethernet, Data Server, and DNC2functions

The table indicates an option required for each function used.However, the options below are standard with the Series 0i-MODEL

B/C. The i CELL function which can be used by the communication

function is different.

No. Option nameCorresponding function in

the part IV “Operation”Remarks

1Parts count and operating

time display6. Machining results

When the operation result collection function is

used

7. Workpiece process resultsWhen the workpiece machining result collection

function is used2 Custom macro B

9.5 Various data

backup/restoration

When custom macro variable data is

input/output

3Custom macro B and custom

macro variable addition7. Workpiece process results

When the workpiece machining result collectionfunction is used, and the custom macro

common area has no free space

9.3 Alarm history displayWhen the external operator message history

data is used4

External message function or

external data input function11 Alarm and warning

When the external operator message display

function is used(*1)

5Pitch error compensation

function

9.5 Various data

backup/restoration

When the pitch error compensation data is

input/output

6 Workpiece coordinate system9.5 Various data

backup/restorationWhen a workpiece origin offset is input/output

7 Tool life management(*2)

10. Tool line management When the tool life management function is used

8Threading/ synchronous feed

and position coder

8.3 Actual position display

8.4 Program check

If these options are not selected when the actualspindle speed S [min

-1] is displayed with the M

series, a value calculated from the spindle

motor speed instead of a feedback value from

the position coder can be displayed by setting

bit 0 of parameter No. 3118 to 1.

*1 With the Series 16i/18i/21i-MODEL A/B and Series 0i-MODEL

B/C, four external operator messages can be displayed by setting

bit 0 of parameter No. 3207 to 1. With Series 16i/18i/21i-MODEL

A, however, the NCs with the following versions or later are

required: 16i-TA B1F1 version 14 16i-MA B0F1 version 15

18i-TA BEF1 version 14 18i-MA BDF1 version 15

21i-TA DEF1 version 9 21i-MA DDF1 version 9

*2 With the Series 0i-MODEL B/C, the tool life management

function can be used by setting bit 0 of parameter No. 8132 to 1.

NOTEThe following Ethernet-related options are not required:Basic operation package 1 A02B-0207-J810CNC screen display function A02B-0207-J850

NC program modificationIn workpiece machining result collection, a subprogram for writing

information such as a workpiece ID and machining state to custom

macro variables in the NC program needs to be called. For a sample

subprogram, see Subsection 2.12.2, "Workpieces Process Result", in

Part III, "SETTING".




- 18 -

3.2 PERSONAL COMPUTER/HARDWARE

The hardware used to operate the i CELL is described below.

Computer Select <1> or <2> below. Also select the item(s) required for the

communication protocol to be used from <3>.

<1> Computer compatible with IBM PC/AT

• CPU: Pentium

with 233 MHz or more is recommended.

• Physical memory: 128MB or more

• Virtual memory: 200MB or more

• HDD: 300MB or more

• A keyboard, mouse, and CD-ROM are required.

NOTESoftware required varies according to the functionused.Check the computer manufacturer to confirm thatthe software products listed in Section 3.3,"PERSONAL COMPUTER/SOFTWARE", can runon the personal computer used.Some computers may not be able to run Windows

2000 Server or NT 4.0 Server. These operatingsystems are necessary to use the WEB function.

<2> FANUC PANEL i

• Personal computer suitable for use in the FA floor

• Physical memory: 128MB or more

• Virtual memory: 200MB or more

• Touch panel available (option)

• Display unit: 12.4-inch, 15-inch

• A CD-ROM is required.

NOTEWhen the FANUC PANEL i is used, the Web

function cannot be used.To use the Web function, Windows 2000 Server or Windows NT 4.0 Server is required as the OS.However, the FANUC PANEL i does not support this

OS.




- 19 -

<3> Communication hardware

• Ethernet board (if the FOCAS2/Ethernet or Data Server

protocol is used)

• RS-232C port (if the DNC2 protocol is used)

• RS-232C expansion board (if the DNC2 or Reader/Puncher

protocol is used)

The RS-232C expansion board to be used should be one of

the following Digi International products.

- AccelePort 4p kit (4 ports, DTE, DB25 male)

- AccelePort 8p kit (8 ports, DTE, DB25 male)

Display• Resolution: 1024 × 768 dots or more

• Color: 16 colors or more

Internet communication unitWhen the mail function or Web function is used, the ISDN line and

dial-up router for ISDN are required. When the mail function and Web

function are not used, the ISDN line and dial-up router for ISDN are not

required.

Dial-up router for ISDN

Example: NTT-ME MN128-SOHO SLOTIN




- 20 -

RS-232C connection cableThe following interface specifications apply between the PC and NC.

If the RS-232C expansion board is RS-232C main unit port

AccelePort 4p/8p DTE, DB25 male.

PC side NC side PC side NC side

DSUB 9pin

(Female)

Signal Pin

SD 3

RD 2

RS 7

CS 8

ER 4

DR 6

CD 1

SG 5

GND

DSUB 25pin

(Mail)

Signal Pin

SD 2

RD 3

RS 4

CS 5

ER 20

DR 6

CD 8

SG 7

FG 1

DSUB 25pin

(Female)

Signal Pin

SD 2

RD 3

RS 4

CS 5

ER 20

DR 6

CD 8

SG 7

GND

DSUB 25pin

(Male)

Signal Pin

SD 2

RD 3

RS 4

CS 5

ER 20

DR 6

CD 8

SG 7

FG 1

NOTE1 The shape of each connector shown in the figure

may differ from that of the connectors of the PC or NC you are actually using. Before preparing anRS-232C cable, check the shape of each connector of your PC and NC.

2 No port on the PC can be used withReader/Puncher.

3 Refer to FANUC's "RS-232C/RS-422 InterfaceConnection Manual" (B-60043E) for detailedexplanations about how to create connection cables.

4 Transmission may stop during DNC operation,depending on the performance of the PC in use or

the size of a communication buffer in the NC.Transmission may stop also depending on the waythe screen is operated on. If transmission stops,decrease the communication rate or the number of units that are simultaneously subjected to DNCoperation.




- 21 -

3.3 PERSONAL COMPUTER/SOFTWARE

Operating system and related software

Using Windows NT

(A) When the Web function is usedAll of <1> to <3> below are required.

<1> Microsoft Windows NT

Server 4.0 ServicePack 6a and later

<2> Microsoft Internet Information Server 4.0

(Included in Microsoft Windows NT

4.0 Option Pack. Obtain

this product from Microsoft.)

<3> Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 and later

(B) Cases other than (A) above<1> or <2>, and <3> below are required.


Server 4.0 ServicePack 6a and later

(Microsoft Internet Information Server 4.0 required for the Web

function is not required.)


WorkStation 4.0 ServicePack 6a and

later


NOTETo use the i CELL with Windows NT4.0, the user

needs to belong to the Power Users group. To makevarious settings on the setting screen, the user needs to belong to the Administrators group.

Using Windows 2000


<1> Microsoft Windows 2000

Server ServicePack 4 and later


(A full installation of <1> has <2> installed by default.)




Server ServicePack 4 and later

(Microsoft Internet Information Server 5.0 required for the Web

function is not required.)


Professional ServicePack 4 and later





- 22 -

NOTETo use the i CELL with Windows 2000, the user

needs to belong to the Power Users group. To makevarious settings on the setting screen, the user needs to belong to the Administrators group.

Using Windows XP



Server





Server

<2> Microsoft Windows XP

Professional ServicePack 1, 1a, and later


(C) When using Windows XP as a WebView clientWindows XP may not include Java VM required for a WebView client.

In such a case, install JRE (Java runtime environment), which can be

downloaded from the following site free of charge:

http://www.java.com/en/index.jsp

NOTE1 To set or operate i CELL with Windows XP, the user

needs to belong to the Administrators group(computer administrators).

2 The user switch function of Windows XP is notsupported.

NOTEThe following Ethernet-related software is notrequired:

FOCAS2 library（ A02B-0207-K737）

Basic Operation Package 1（ A02B-0207-K752）

Basic Operation Package 2（ A02B-0207-K755）

Disks for CNC screen display functions

（ A02B-0207-K776）




- 23 -

CIMPLICITY systemi CELL can operate on the following CIMPLICITY versions:

CIMPLICITY HMI Plant Edition Version 6.1 (English or Japaneseversion)

Running both the Japanese and English versions of CIMPLICITY

requires CIMPLICITY HMI Plant Edition Version 6.1 Service Pack 2.

Service Pack 2 is included in the installation CD of i CELL.

The Japanese version of i CELL comes with the CIMPLICITY system,

but the English version of i CELL does not.

See the following description, "Installation CD contents."

NOTEEven if CIMPLICITY is already used, a personalcomputer and CIMPLICITY need to be purchasedwhen the license for "Unlimited I/O" is not granted.To execute multiple projects with CIMPLICITY at thesame time, the license for "Unlimited I/O" isrequired. If this license is not granted, a project of the user and i CELL project cannot be executed at

the same time. The user is to prepare a personalcomputer for the i CELL, and CIMPLICITY

additionally.If the user's project and i CELL project are

integrated with each other, the projects are nolonger multiple projects and can be usedsimultaneously.

Installation CD contentsThe Japanese version of i CELL is delivered on two CDs.

The first CD is the installation CD for the Japanese version of i CELL.

The second CD contains the Japanese version of CIMPLICITY HMI

Plant Edition Version 6.1.

Please purchase the licenses for the CIMPLICITY main package and

the option you want to use.

The English version of i CELL is delivered on a single CD, that is, the

installation CD. Unlike the Japanese version, the English version comes

with no CIMPLICITY CD.

Please purchase the CD for CIMPLICITY HMI Plant Edition Version

6.1, and the licenses for CIMPLICITY main package and the option

you want to use.

For both the Japanese and English versions, the installation CD

contains CIMPLICITY HMI Plant Edition Version 6.1 Service Pack 2.




- 24 -

3.4 NETWORK CONFIGURATION

Basic configurationWhen i CELL is used with the Ethernet, the method of setting on the

setting screen varies, depending on the network configuration. Check

the network configuration. Specifically, check if the i CELL server PC

and NCs belong to the same network as shown in Fig. 3.4(a), or if the i

CELL server PC belongs to one network and NCs belong to another

network, and the i CELL server PC and NCs are connected with each

other via a router as shown in Fig. 3.4(b).

(The configuration checked here is used in the setting of "Enable C4

Server" in Subsection 2.6.2, "Setting up FOCAS2/Ethernet

Communication" in Part III, "SETTING".)

NCServer PC

Router

NC Server PC

NC NC

Fig.3.4(a) Network configuration (1)

The PC belongs to anetwork separated with arouter from the network towhich the NCs belong.

The server PC and the NCs must belong to the samenetwork.

Fig.3.4(b) Network configuration (2)

Network A

Network B

Network configuration for the CIMPLICITY viewer i CELL can be used with the CIMPLICITY viewer. In this case, one

server PC and one or more viewer PCs are used. If the server PC

belongs to the same network as the NC units, the server PC need not

belong to the same network as the viewer PC. Therefore, both the

configurations shown in Fig.3.4(c) and Fig.3.4(d) are usable.

NC Server

PCNC

Server PC

Viewer PC

NC NC

Viewer PC

Fig.3.4(c) Network configuration (3)

The server PC and NCsbelong to the same network,but the viewer PC belongs to aseparate network.

The server PC, NCs, and viewer PC belong to thesame network.

Fig.3.4(d) Network configuration (4)

IP routingisrequired.

Network B

Network A

Router Communication byFOCAS2/Ethernet

Communication byFOCAS2/Ethernet

Similarly to the server PC, the viewer PC uses the FOCAS2/Ethernet protocol to communicate with NCs.




- 25 -

It is therefore necessary to set up the IP routing function in the router

shown in Fig.3.4(d) in such a way that network A, to which the NCs

belong, can communicate with network B, to which the viewer PC

belongs, using TCP/IP. Set up the router in such a way that a port

number set up for a port for TCP in each NC can be routed.

NOTEThe method of setting up IP routing variesdepending on what router you use.If you use i CELL and the CIMPLICITY viewer this

way, be sure to check the setting method inadvance.

The configuration shown in Fig. 3.4 (e) is an example of providing the

server PC with router functions and using two networks. Also in this

configuration, the viewer PC communicates with NCs, using

FOCAS2/Ethernet. It is necessary to set up the IP routing function in

the server PC in such a way that networks A and B can communicate

with each other, using TCP/IP. Set up the server PC in such a way that a

port number set up for a port for TCP in each NC can be routed.

NC

Viewer PC

Two NICs (Network Interface

Cards), A and B, are set in theserver PC to configure twonetworks.The server PC is provided withrouter functions in addition to its

Fig.3.4(e) Usable network configuration (5)

Server PC/router

NIC (A)

NIC (B)

IP routingis

necessary.

Network A

Network B

Communication byFOCAS2/Ethernet

NC

NOTEThe method of setting two NICs in the server PC for

having the server PC operate also as a router variesdepending on what operating system you use inyour server PC.If you use i CELL and the CIMPLICITY viewer this

way, be sure to check the setting method inadvance.




- 26 -

3.5 CONTRACT WITH INTERNET SERVICE PROVIDERS

When the user does not use the mail and Web functions, no contract

with an Internet service provider is required.

For connection with a provider, use the ISDN line.

(A) When the mail function only is used with dial-up connectionISDN dial-up connection

Example: NTT Communications OCN dial access

(B) When the mail function is used with 24-hour connection, and when the Web

function is usedISDN 24-hour connection

Example: NTT Communications OCN economy



B-75074EN/04 GENERAL 4.NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT

- 27 -

4 NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT



4.NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT GENERAL B-75074EN/04

- 28 -

4.1 OVERVIEW

NC program management connects a personal computer as a NC

program file server to multiple NCs. NC program management also

allows connection with a Data Server or PC. For communication with a

Data Server or PC, the operating side needs to be an FTP client, and the

operated side needs to be an FTP server. When the connection target is

a PC, the same operation as for a Data Server can be performed by

operating NC program management.

The following table lists the functions available for each

communication function.

NOTE

When the communication function is a Data Server,replace the "NC memory" in the following table with"hard disk drive or ATA flash card built onto(connected to) the Data Server board" or "ATA flashcard built onto (connected to) a Fast Data Server"depending on the device to connect.

Communication protocolFunction FOCAS2/

EthernetDNC2

Reader/puncher

DataServer

Sending and receiving of NC programs by operating the personal computer

An NC program on the personal computer can be downloaded to theNC memory.

O O - O

The folders and the NC programs contained in the folders on the

personal computer can be downloaded in a batch to the NC

memory.

O(*1)

- - -

When a main program is downloaded, the subprograms used by the

main program can automatically be retrieved and downloaded.

Moreover, multiple main programs can be registered in a list file,

and can be downloaded sequentially.

O - - -

NC programs can be uploaded from the NC memory to the personal

computer.O O - O

The folders and the NC programs contained in the folders in the NC

memory can be uploaded in a batch to the personal computer.O

(*1)- - -

Sending and receiving of NC programs by operating the NC

By operating the NC, an NC program on the personal computer can

be downloaded to the NC memory.

(*2)O O

(*3)

When a main program is downloaded by operating the NC, the

subprograms used by the main program can automatically be

retrieved and downloaded. Moreover, multiple main programs can

be registered in a list file, and can be downloaded sequentially.

(*2)- O

(*3)

By operating the NC, NC programs can be uploaded from the NC

memory to the personal computer.

(*2)O O

(*3)




- 29 -

Communication protocolFunction FOCAS2/

EthernetDNC2

Reader/puncher

DataServer

Management of NC program files in the NC memory by operating the personal computer

A list of NC programs held in the NC memory can be displayed on

the NC program management screen on the personal computer.O O - O

Editing and referencing NC programs held in the NC memory.

An NC program held in the NC memory can be edited and

referenced.

A specified NC program can be automatically uploaded to the

personal computer for editing or referencing on the personal

computer. If an NC program on the personal computer has been

edited, download the NC program to the NC after confirmation.

O O - O

An NC program or directory held in the NC memory can be deleted

by operating the personal computer.O O - O

In the NC memory, a directory is created from the personalcomputer.

O (*1) - - O

An NC program name or directory name in the NC memory is

modified from the personal computer.O

(*1)- - O

Management of NC programs for multi paths

The NC programs of each path are managed under an arbitrary

directory.O - - -

Management of NC program files on the personal computer by operating the NC

A list of NC programs on the personal computer can be displayed on

the NC screen.

(*2)- O

(*3)

An NC program file on the personal computer can be deleted by

operating the NC.

(*2)- O

(*3)

*1 This function can be used only with Series 30i/31i/32i.

*2 A function that can be executed by using the FTP file transfer

function of embedded Ethernet is available. However, NC

program management cannot be used. For details, refer to the

operator's manual of each NC.

*3 A function that can be executed by setting a Data Server as an FTP

client and setting a personal computer as an FTP server is

available. However, NC program management cannot be used. For

details, refer to the operator's manual of each Data Server.

NOTEWhen the Reader/Puncher communication protocolis used, some functions listed above may beunavailable or an additional NC option may berequired, depending on the NC model.




- 30 -

4.2 NC PROGRAM TRANSFER

This section describes NC program transfer by operating the NC

program management screen and NC.

4.2.1 NC Program Transfer by Operating the NC ProgramManagement Screen

NC programs can be transferred by operating the NC program

management screen on the personal computer.

NC programs downloaded to the NC are placed under a directory

specified for each machine. Such a directory is referred to as a default

directory.

NC programs uploaded from the NC are stored in a default directory.

If a communication function other than the Reader/Puncher function is

used and the personal computer used is a server, files can be transferred

to and from an arbitrary directory. If the personal computer is a viewer

personal computer, files can be transferred to and from only the default

directory.

Machine 1

Machine 2Directory F

Directory E

Arbitrary directory

Directory B

File system of the personal computer

Directory D

Set as the defaultdirectory of machine 1

File transfer between directoryC and machine 1

File transfer between directory E and machine 1

Set as the defaultdirectory of machine 2

= File (NC program)

= Directory, drive

Drive A

Directory C

File transfer between directory E and machine 2

File transfer between directory F and machine 2




- 31 -

The NC program management screen displays this default directory or

an arbitrary directory, and a list of NC programs in the NC memory or

Data Server (FTP server). The operator transfers NC programs by

operating this screen.

List of connectiontarget devices

(machine list,FTP server list),

and directory listtree of connected

machines

List of files in the default directoryor an arbitrary directory of amachine

List of NC programs in the NCmemory or Data Server (FTPserver) of a machine

NC programs can be downloaded anduploaded by drag and drop operation.

NC programs can also be transferredusing the screen menu.

For the method of default directory setting, see Subsection 2.7.1,

"General Setting", in Part III, "SETTING". For the method of NC

program management screen operation, see Chapter 5, "NC

PROGRAM MANAGEMENT", in Part IV, "OPERATION".




- 32 -

4.2.2 NC Program Transfer by Operating the NC

To transfer an NC program by operating the NC, you cannot specify thedirectory path to a file on the personal computer on the NC. On the NC,

specify an NC program with the file name, file number, or NC program

number of the NC program.

NC program management associates the file name, file number, or NC

program number directed by the NC with a file stored on the personal

computer.

At this time, the file name, file number, or NC program number is used

as a key.

NC program management searches the files in the default directory for

the NC program to be transferred using the key. With

FOCAS2/Ethernet and the Data Server, however, the concepts of key

and relating files are not applicable.There are restrictions on the method for specifying the file name, file

number, or NC program number and on available keys, depending on

the NC type and communication protocol.

See Appendix C, "EXAMPLES OF NC OPERATIONS" or CNC

Operator’s Manual for main methods for selecting an NC program by

operating the NC.

The following table lists restrictions on operations depending on the

communication function.

Restrictions depending on the communication function

Used keyCommunication

functionNC program transfer type

File nameNC program

number File number

Downloading by operating the NC B A BDNC2

Uploading by operating the NC B A B

Downloading by operating the NC C B CReader/puncher

Uploading by operating the NC C C B

Downloading by operating the NCFOCAS2/Ethernet

Uploading by operating the NC

The FTP file transfer function of embedded Ethernet

is used.

Downloading by operating the NCData Server

Uploading by operating the NC

The Data Server function (FTP client) is used for

transfer.A : Available as a key

B : Unavailable as a key

C : Whether the key is available depends on the operated NC type.




- 33 -

The following table lists the methods for determining an NC program to

be downloaded by operating.

Methods for determining an NC program to be downloaded by operating the NC

Used key Method for determining an NC program to be transferred

File name Searches the default directory for a file with the specified name.

NC program number Searches the default directory for file Oxxxx.DAT (xxxx: NC program number,

DAT: Default extension). The default extension can be changed.

File number Sorts the files in the default directory in ASCII order and finds a file whose ordinal

position number is the same as the file number.

1 FILE_A.TXT

2 FILE_B.TXT

3 O0001.DAT

4 O0003.DAT

5 WORK1.DOC

6 WORK2.DOC

Default directory for machine 1

on the personal computer

When file name "FILE_B.TXT" is used as the key,

this file is downloaded.

When NC program number "3" is used as the

key, this f ile is downloaded.

When NC program number "6" is used as the

key, this f ile is downloaded.

Machine 1

The following table lists the methods for storing a file uploaded by

operating the NC.

Methods for storing an NC program uploaded by operating the NC

Used key Method for storing an NC program

File name Uses the key as the file name without modification and stores the file in the

default directory.

NC program number Stores the file in the default directory with file name Oxxxx.DAT (xxxx: NC

program number as the key, DAT: Default extension).

O0001

O0001.DAT

When "O0001" in the NC is uploaded and stored

on the personal computer with NC program

number "1" used as the key

Machine 1

When "O0001" in the NC is uploaded and stored

on the personal computer with file name "O0001"used as the key

Default directory for machine

1 on the personal computer

See Appendix C, "NC OPERATION EXAMPLES" for how an NC

operation is associated with a key used on the personal computer FA.




- 34 -

4.3 NC PROGRAM FORMAT

NC programs used with the system are managed under the formats

indicated below. The program field must contain a main program

including an NC program number, or must contain a subprogram.

Example 1: Main program ending with M30

% ; OXXXX; . . . Part program . . . ;M30; %

% ; <file name>; . . . Part program . . . ;M30; %

Example 2: Main program ending with M02



Example 3: Subprogram ending with M99



";" is used to mark an "end of block". Actually, ";" is the EOB code

determined for the NC as with an LF code.

"XXXX" represents an NC program number. A 4-digit number or

8-digit number can be used.

With a CNC supporting file name management like Series 30i/31i/32i, a

file name in the format <file-name> can be used in addition to an NC

program number. The usable number of characters and the usable

characters are as follows:

Number of characters 32 characters or less

Characters Alphabetic characters (uppercase/lowercase), numbers,

four symbols −, +, _, and . (all in half size).

However, the file names "." and ".." cannot be used.

NOTE A CNC that supports file name management like

Series 30i/31i/32i can distinguish uppercase andlowercase alphabetic characters from each other.However, Windows OS does not have thiscapability. So, a file named AAA and a file namedaaa can be created with a CNC. However, if files AAA and aaa are uploaded to the personalcomputer in this order, file AAA is replaced with fileaaa updated later.




- 35 -

Use ASCII as the character code for NC programs. Some editors may be

set to create a file using Unicode. An error occurs if an attempt is made

to transfer an NC program created using Unicode.

Whether an NC program is created using Unicode can be checked

according to the procedure below.

1. Open the NC program in Notepad, then select [File]→[Save As].

2. If the check box for "Save in Unicode" in the Save As dialog box is

checked, the NC program is saved using Unicode.

If the NC program is saved using Unicode, uncheck the check box for

"Save in Unicode", then save the NC program again.




- 36 -

4.4 SUBPROGRAM TRANSFER FUNCTION

Subprogram transfer functionWhen an NC program is downloaded, and a subprogram call is included

in the NC program, the subprogram transfer function downloads the

subprogram as well.

With a CNC supporting file name management, a subprogram can be

specified by file name.

NOTEThis function can be used on a machine that usesthe FOCAS2/Ethernet function or theReader/Puncher function. This function can be usedfor communication with the default directory whenthe Reader/Puncher function is used.

Subprogram transfer is divided into two types: batch transfer and

expanded transfer.

(1) Batch transfer

A main program is analyzed. If a subprogram call is specified, the

subprogram is transferred after the main program.

(2) Expanded transfer

A main program is analyzed. If a subprogram call is specified, the

main program is transferred with the subprogram expanded in the

main program.

On the NC program management setting screen, the user can choose

from three subprogram transfer options for each machine: "no transfer,

batch transfer, and expanded transfer".

%O0001(MAIN START)M98P5001(MAIN END)M30%

%

O5001(SUB START)(SUB END)M99%

+

%O0001(MAIN START)(SUB START)(SUB END)(MAIN END)M30%

%O0001(MAIN START)M98P5001(MAIN END)M30

O5001(SUB START)(SUB END)M99%

Subprogram batchtransfer Main program

Subprogram

Subprogramexpanded transfer




- 37 -

Subprogram file nameA subprogram file name must be described in the format "O" + 4- or

8-digit-number + "." + 3-character-extension. For example, a

subprogram file name may be O0001.DAT. A 3-character extension

must be registered in [Subprogram extension] of the [General] panel on

the NC program management setting screen. (To use an NC program

with an 8-digit O number, the 8-digit O number option is required on

the CNC.) With a CNC supporting file name management, the format

"<"+file-name+">" can be used. When a file name is used, the

three-character extension cannot be used.

Subprogram file formatIn a subprogram file, one O number or file name and one M99 code

must be described. See Example 3 in Section 4.2, "NC PROGRAM

FORMAT". A subprogram containing multiple O numbers, file names

and/or multiple M99 codes cannot be transferred. An error occurs if an

attempt is made to call a subprogram that contains M02 or M30 instead

of M99.

Subprogram file storage directoryUp to three subprogram file storage directories can be specified in

[Subprogram search directory 1-3] of the [Download] panel on the NC

program management setting screen. A setting can also be made so that

a search operation starts with the same directory as for the main

program without setting Subprogram search directory 1 beforehand.

Each of three directories has a subprogram search priority set. When

each of the first directory and the second directory holds a subprogram

of the same name, for example, the subprogram of the first directory is

transferred.

NOTEOnly the directories set in [Subprogram searchdirectory 1-3] are searched for a subprogram. Whenstoring a subprogram in the default directory,specify the same directory as the default direction inany of [Subprogram search directory 1-3].

Disabling subprogram call

Even when the main program calls a subprogram, the transfer of thesubprogram can be disabled. For example, a setting can be made so that

the transfer of subprograms in the eight thousands and nine thousands is

disabled because those subprograms are held in the NC memory. The

transfer of subprograms can be disabled by specifying subprogram

numbers in steps of one thousand in [Subprograms not transferred] of

the [Download] panel on the NC program management setting screen.

Subprogram call code settingA call code for transferring a subprogram can be set. This capability

supports three types of calls: M98, G65, and G66. In accordance with a

set call type only, subprograms are called.

A subprogram call code can be set in [Call type] of the [Download] panel on the NC program management setting screen.




- 38 -

4.4.1 Details of the Subprogram Batch Transfer Function

Subprogram call format A main program can use four subprogram call formats:

(1) M98PxxxxLyy

(2) M98Pyyxxxx

(3) G65PxxxxLyy

(4) G66PxxxxLyy

(5) M98P<file name>Lyy

(6) G65P<file name>Lyy


In these formats, xxxx represents a program number, and yy represents

the number of call repeats. The number of repeats can be omitted. When

format (2) is used, a 4- or 8-digit program number must be specified.With a CNC supporting file name management, a subprogram can be

called by file name as in (5) through (7).

In a batch transfer, however, the number of repeats is ignored because a

subprogram called several times by the main program is transferred

only once.

Subprogram calling can be nested to a depth of 15 levels with Series 30i

/31i /32i, or to a depth of 8 levels with the other NC series.

If a subprogram called by the main program is found to be nonexistent,

an error occurs when an attempt is made to transfer the nonexistentsubprogram after the transfer of the main program.

NOTE1 The program number xxxx or file name must be

directly specifiable. A program number specifiedwith a macro variable cannot be transferred.

2 M99Pnnnn (function for returning to a sequencenumber) cannot be used. When a subprogram isread up to M99, the end of the subprogram isassumed. Control returns to the main program, and

Pnnnn is ignored.3 Instructions such as branch instructions (GOTO, IF,

WHILE) are not processed, but are transferred tothe NC without modification.




- 39 -

4.4.2 Details of the Subprogram Expanded Transfer Function

Subprogram call format A main program can use four subprogram call formats:

(1) M98PxxxxLyy

(2) M98Pyyxxxx

(3) G65PxxxxLyy

(4) G66PxxxxLyy

(5) M98P<file name>Lyy



In these formats, xxxx represents a program number, and yy represents

the number of call repeats. The number of repeats can be omitted. When

format (2) is used, a 4- or 8-digit program number must be specified.With a CNC supporting file name management, a subprogram can be

called by file name as in (5) through (7).

In an expanded transfer, a subprogram called several times by the main

program is transferred the specified number of times, with the

subprogram expanded each time in the main program.

Subprogram calling can be nested to a depth of 15 levels with Series 30i

/31i /32i, or to a depth of 8 levels with the other NC series.

When a subprogram called by the main program is found to be

nonexistent in the set directory, an error occurs. This means that thetransfer of the main program stops halfway, and the subprogram is not

transferred.

NOTE1 The program number xxxx or file name must be directly

specifiable. A program number specified with a macrovariable cannot be transferred.

2 M99Pnnnn (function for returning to a sequence number)cannot be used. When a subprogram is read up to M99, theend of the subprogram is assumed. Control returns to the

main program, and Pnnnn is ignored.3 Instructions such as branch instructions (GOTO, IF, WHILE)are not processed, but are transferred to the CNC withoutmodification.

4 In an expanded transfer, the transfer of a subprogram aloneis impossible. If a subprogram alone is transferred, an error indicating that the main program contains M99 occurs.

5 In a block that calls a subprogram, no other address can bespecified.Example:When the block M98P9000G00X00Y00 is sent in

an expanded transfer, the subprogram

O9000.DAT can be transferred, but the portion of G00X00Y00 cannot be transferred.




- 40 -

4.5 LIST FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION

List file transfer functionThe list file transfer function transfers multiple NC programs described

in "List file" to the NC. With a CNC supporting file name management,

file names can be written in a list file.

A list file is created on the LISTFILE EDITOR screen.

In a list file, up to 9999 NC programs can be registered.

NOTEOn a machine that uses FOCAS2/Ethernet and theReader/Puncher function, this function can be usedto perform communication with the default directory.

The list file transfer function is divided into two types: batch transfer

and expanded transfer.

• List batch transfer

This function sequentially transfers the NC programs registered in

a list file. This function assumes that multiple main programs are

registered in the NC memory.

• List expanded transfer

This function deletes O numbers, file names, and M30 from the

NC programs registered in a list file, and transfers the NC

programs as a single NC program. This function assumes that

multiple main programs are linked into a single program for DNCoperation.

On the NC Program Management screen, the user can choose between

two list file transfer options for each machine: "batch transfer and

expanded transfer".

%O0001(O0001 DATA)

M30%

+

%O0001(O0001 DATA)(O0002 DATA)

(O0003 DATA)M30%

%O0001(O0001 DATA)M30

O0002(O0002 DATA)M30

O0003(O0003 DATA)M30%

List batch transfer

List expandedtransfer

O0001.DAT

List fileO0001.LST

%O0002(O0002 DATA)M30%

%O0003

(O0003 DATA)M30%

O0001.DATO0002.DATO0003.DAT

O0002.DAT

O0003.DAT

List file creationscreen




- 41 -

List file nameA 3-character extension for a list file must be registered in [List file

extension] of the [General] panel on the NC Program Management

screen.

A list file can be created and edited only on the LISTFILE EDITOR

screen. When a list file is saved, the list file extension is automatically

set. So, the user need not consider a file name when creating a list file.

When [List file extension] is registered on the NC program

management setting screen, a different extension only can be set in each

of [Default extension] and [Subprogram extension]. So, for example,

the main program O0001.DAT and the list file O0001.LST can be

created.

The list file transfer function is enabled when the NC makes a request

for transfer of a file with a list file extension.

List file formatA list file can be created and edited only on the LISTFILE EDITOR

screen, so that the user need not consider the list file format when

creating a list file with an editor.

List file storage directoryStore a list file in the directory specified in [Default directory] on the

NC program management setting screen. Before a list file can be

specified by file number or file name from the NC after a list of files on

the personal computer is displayed, the list file must be stored in

[Default directory].

Combinations of the list file transfer and subprogram transfer functionsThe following combinations are possible:

Subprogram transfer type

Batch Expanded

Batch O OList file transfer

type Expanded X O

4.5.1 Details of List File Batch Transfer Function

The NC programs registered in a list file are transferred in the order of

registration.

The contents of registered NC program files are transferred without

deleting O numbers, file names, and M02, M30, and M99 codes.

When a request is made for batch transfer of a list file specifying both a

main program and subprogram, both of the main program and

subprogram are transferred.

NOTE1 Batch transfer of NC programs that have no O

number or file name is disabled. If such an attemptis made, an error occurs.

2 Batch transfer of NC programs that have the sameO number or file name is disabled. If such anattempt is made, an error occurs.




- 42 -

4.5.2 Details of List File Expended Transfer Function

The multiple main NC programs registered in a list file are transferred

after being linked into a single NC program.

The O numbers, file names, and M30 and M02 codes in the registered

NC programs are not transferred.

As the O number or file name transferred at the start of an expanded

transfer, the user can specify one of the following on the LISTFILE

EDITOR screen:

(1) O number or file name of the first NC program registered in the list

file

(2) O number specified in [Set ONo. in Developing] on the LISTFILE

EDITOR screen.(3) O number specified in [Set FileName in Developing] on the

LISTFILE EDITOR screen.

Expanded transfer allows the user to transfer an NC program that has no

O number or file name. In this case, an O number or file name must be

specified according to (2) and (3) above.

At the end of an expanded transfer, an M30 code is transferred.

NOTE

1 Expanded transfer of a list file specifying a mainprogram and subprogram is disabled. If such anattempt is made, the M02/M03 code in the mainprogram is deleted, but the M99 code in thesubprogram is transferred without being deleted.

2 Expanded transfer of NC programs that have thesame O number or file name is disabled. If such anattempt is made, an error occurs.

4.5.3 List File Transfer Monitor and Control Function

The list file monitor screen enables transfer monitor display andexercises control functions such as temporary stop, transfer skip,

transfer sequence alteration, and so forth for those NC programs not

transferred yet in a list file.

Monitor display of list file transfer During list file transfer, up to which NC program have been transferred

can be displayed.

When DNC operation is performed based on the expanded transfer of

multiple main programs, this function allows the user to check the

extent of transfer.




- 43 -

NOTE1 When using this function, check [Wait for send buffer to

become 0 before proceeding to next record in expandedtransfer] of the [Download] panel on the machine settingscreen.

2 Actual data transfer is affected by the send buffer on thepersonal computer and the NC receive buffer, so thedata displayed on the monitor screen may differ from thedata displayed on the NC screen. For example, an NCprogram displayed as being transferred on the monitor screen may not be received yet by the NC. Among the NC programs registered in a list file, the NCprograms whose transfer is not started yet can be

displayed correctly.

List file transfer control functionsDuring list file transfer, those NC programs that are not transferred yet

can be controlled as described below.

(1) Temporary stop

Immediately before transfer of a specified NC program, transfer

stops temporarily. NC programs registered after the NC program

specified for temporary stop can be deleted or rearranged for

transfer sequence alteration, or new NC programs can be added to

those NC programs.

(2) SkipA specified NC program is not transferred. Instead, the NC

program registered after the specified NC program is transferred.

(3) Sequence alteration

NC programs registered after an NC program specified for

temporary stop can be rearranged for transfer sequence alteration.

(4) NC program deletion and addition

NC programs registered after an NC program specified for

temporary stop can be deleted, or new NC programs can be added

to those NC programs.

NOTE A list file referenced for list file transfer to an NC is a

copy of a list file created for each NC on the LISTFILEEDITOR screen. A list file is copied for each NCimmediately before start of transfer. A list file copied for each NC is displayed and edited on the list file monitor screen.So, the temporary stop, sequence alteration, deletion,and addition of NC programs on the list file monitor screen are temporary modifications valid during list filetransfer only.

A modification that needs to be reflected in each transfer must be made on the LISTFILE EDITOR screen beforelist file transfer.



5.OPERATION MONITOR GENERAL B-75074EN/04

- 44 -

5 OPERATION MONITOR

The operation monitor function monitors the operating status of the

machine and collects machining results. The operation monitor function

has the screens described below.

Operation result screenA power-on time, operating time, cutting time, and machined parts

count are read periodically from the NC, and are summarized monthly

for display.

NOTE1 The NC must have the operating time and parts

count display option selected.2 The FOCAS2/Ethernet or DNC2 function is

required. The DNC2 function, however, cannot beused with Series 0.

Workpiece machining result screenData such as the machined parts count and machining end state of each

workpiece is summarized and displayed. A macro program for writing

machining information for each workpiece into the custom macro area

needs to be inserted into the NC program.

NOTE1 The NC must have the custom macro B option

selected.2 If the custom macro common area does not have a

free space, the custom macro variable additionoption is required.

3 The FOCAS2/Ethernet function is required.

Tool life management screenThis screen is the same as the tool life screen of the NC.

NOTE1 The NC must have the tool life management option

selected. With Series 0i-MODEL B/C, the tool life

management function can be used by setting bit 0 of parameter No. 8132 to 1.

2 There are not the tool life management function andoption for that in Power Mate i.

3 The FOCAS2/Ethernet function is required.4 This function for Series 30i /31i /32i is under

development.



B-75074EN/04 GENERAL 5.OPERATION MONITOR

- 45 -

5.1 OPERATION RESULT SCREEN

Data created by the operating time and parts count display option of the

NC is read periodically and is summarized monthly for display.

5.1.1 Creating Operation Results

The following data created by the operating time and parts count

display option of the NC is used:

• Power-on time [minutes]

Cumulative power-on time of the NC.

With Series 30i /31i /32i, Series 16/18/21i, PowerMate i, and

Series 0i, the value of parameter No. 6750 is used.

• Operating time [seconds]

Cumulative automatic operating time of the NC.


Series 0i, the value of parameter No. 6751 added to the value of

parameter No. 6752 is used.

• Cutting time [seconds]

Cumulative time for cutting feed such as linear interpolation

(G01) and circular interpolation (G02, G03).


Series 0i, the value of parameter No. 6753 added to the value of

parameter No. 6754 is used.• Machined parts count [quantity]

Cumulative number of machined parts counted by M02 and M30.


Series 0i, the value of parameter No. 6712 is used.

These data items are read every 30 seconds. Read data is registered in

the database every day.

When the operation result screen is activated, and a month for display is

specified, the collected data of the specified month is read from the

database for display.

NOTE1 The NC must have the operating time and parts

count display option selected.2 The FOCAS2/Ethernet or DNC2 function is

required. The DNC2 function, however, cannot beused with Series 0.




- 46 -

5.1.2 Display Information

Monthly report on power-on time, operating time, and cutting time (bar charts)For a specified NC, power-on time, operating time, and cutting time

data is displayed as bar charts.

Monthly report on machined parts count (bar chart)For a specified NC, machined parts count data is displayed as a bar

chart.




- 47 -

Monthly report on power-on time, operating time, operating time, cutting time,and parts count (table)

For a specified NC, power-on time, operating time, operating time,cutting time, and parts count data is displayed as a table.




- 48 -

5.2 WORKPIECE MACHINING RESULTS

Based on data (machine ID, workpiece ID, O number, start time, end

time, machining end ID, user area ID, and sequence number) collected

at the start and end of machining, workpiece machining results are

displayed. Information displayed includes "Current progress status

display" for indicating the progress status of the workpiece currently

being machined, "Log display" for indicating the machining time and

end state of each machined workpiece, and "Machining end state

display" for indicating summarized end state.

5.2.1 Workpiece Machining Result Data

To create workpiece machining result data, data transferred between the NC and i CELL needs to be assigned to custom macro variables. Then,

by using an NC program, values are to be entered into the assigned

custom macro variables. (For a part of data, values are directly entered.)

For the assignment of data items to custom macro variables and the

input of values to custom macro variables, see Subsection 2.9.1,

"Workpiece Process Result", in Part III, "SETTING", and see also

Subsection 2.12.2, "Workpieces Process Result", in Part III,

"SETTING".

When workpiece machining results are displayed, a character string can

be displayed instead of an ID. For correspondence between IDs and

character strings, see Section 2.10, "WORKPIECES PROCESSRESULT SYSTEM CONFIGURATION", in Part III, "SETTING".

NOTE1 The NC must have the custom macro B option

selected.2 If the custom macro common area does not have a

free space, the custom macro variable additionoption is required.





- 49 -


Current progress status displayWhen each machine has a workpiece currently being machined (when

the start time is latest, and end time, machining end ID, and user area ID

data to be obtained at machining end time is not obtained yet),

workpiece progress status is display for each machine. If a workpiece

machining time and the planned parts count of the current date are set,

the end time of the machining of the planned parts count of the date

(scheduled completion time) is displayed. For the setting of a

machining time, see Section 2.10, "WORKPIECES PROCESS

RESULT SYSTEM CONFIGURATION", in Part III, "SETTING". For

the setting of a planned parts count, see Section 7.2, "SCREEN

OPERATION", in Part IV, "OPERATION".

The display items are:

• Machine

• Workpiece

• O number

• Start time

• Scheduled end time

• Normally machined parts count

• Planned parts count

• Scheduled completion time

The user can choose whether to display an O number. For displayalteration, see Section 7.2, "SCREEN OPERATION", in Part IV,

"OPERATION".

Example of display




- 50 -

Log displayLog information such as the machining times and end states of

machined workpieces is displayed sequentially in the order from the

latest to oldest log start time. The user can choose from four types of

display: no specification, machine specification, workpiece

specification, and machine/workpiece specification. For each of these

options, the user can choose from three report options: daily report,

monthly report, and period specification.

Display with no specification

Regardless of machines and workpieces, all log information is

displayed.

Display with machine specification

Regardless of workpieces, the log information of a specifiedmachine only is displayed. Sequence numbers are displayed. If

sequence numbers are not successive (if data collection fails), a

comment is displayed. If the displayed sequence numbers are 1, 2,

5, ..., for example, "No log: 2" is displayed between the sequence

numbers 2 and 5. This means that the data of sequence numbers 3

and 4 could not be collected. A data collection failure can occur

because the i CELL fails to read a transition of the machining start

signal from OFF (0) to ON (1) (when the ON time is too short) or

data is collected during data deletion. Check the time interval for

making a machining start signal transition from ON to OFF

(Subsection 2.12.2, "Workpieces Process Result", in Part III,

"SETTING") and check the data deletion execution time (Section2.11, "DATABASE MAINTENANCE", in Part III, "SETTING").

Display with workpiece specification

Regardless of machines, the log information of a specified

workpiece only is displayed.

Display with machine/workpiece specification

The log information of only a specified combination of a machine

and workpiece is displayed.

The display items are listed below. However, the actually displayed

items depend on whether a specification is provided.

• Machine (when no machine is specified)

• Workpiece (when no workpieces is specified)

• O number (displayed only when workpiece display is provided)

• Machining start time

• Machining end time

• Machining time

• Machining end state

• User area

• Sequence number (machine specification only)

The user can choose whether to display an O number and user area. For

display alteration, see Section 7.2, "SCREEN OPERATION", in Part

IV, "OPERATION".




- 51 -

Example of display (no specification)

Machining end state displayThe summarized results based on the display number of a machining

end ID set on the setting screen are displayed. Two formats of display

are available: table format and pie chart format.

• Table formatAs with log display, the user can choose from four types of display: no

specification, machine specification, workpiece specification, andmachine/workpiece specification. For each of these options, the user

can choose from three report options: daily report, monthly report, and

period specification.

The display items are listed below. However, the actually displayed

items depend on whether a specification is provided.

• Machine (when no machine is specified)

• Workpiece (when no workpieces is specified)

• Total machined parts count

• Planned machined parts count

•

End state summaries (up to 5 in display number order)• Others

When the user selects a number in the No. column and clicks the pie

chart button in the case of display with no specification, display with

machine specification, or display with workpiece specification, the data

of the selected row can be represented in pie chart format.




- 52 -

Example of display (with workpiece specification)

• Pie chart formatIn pie chart format, data is displayed for a workpiece. So, the user can

choose from two types of display: workpiece specification and

machine/workpiece specification. For each of these options, the user

can choose from three report options: daily report, monthly report, and

period specification. A remaining parts count (planned parts count

-normally machined parts counted) and progress (normally machined

parts count/planned parts count) are also displayed.

Example of display (with workpiece specification)




- 53 -

5.2.3 Display Format Alteration

For the particular items (machine, workpiece, O number, user area, anddate and time) of the machine specification list box, workpiece

specification list box, progress status display, log display, and

machining end state display, the display format can be altered from the

screen.

Example of display format alteration screen




- 54 -

5.2.4 Planned Parts Count Input

A planned parts count used for current progress status display andmachining end state display (table or pie chart) can be altered from the

screen.

Example of machine/workpiece extraction screen

Select machines, workpieces, and dates for planned parts count input.

Example of planned parts count input screen

For extracted machines/workpieces, input planned parts counts.




- 55 -

5.3 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT

This screen has the same effect as the tool life screen of the NC. Two

types of display are available: tool group list display and tool group

detail display.

NOTE1 The NC must have the tool life management option

selected. With Series 0i-MODEL B/C, the tool life


2 There are not the tool life management function and

option for that in Power Matei.3 The FOCAS2/Ethernet function is required.

4 This function for Series 30i /31i /32i is under

development.


Tool group list displayA list of tool groups registered with a specified machine and path is

displayed.

The details of a tool group number selected on this display screen can

be viewed on the tool group detail display screen.




- 56 -

Tool group detail displayThe details of a tool group number selected on the tool group list

display screen are displayed.

Example of display



B-75074EN/04 GENERAL 6.NC DISPLAY AND OPERATION

- 57 -

6 NC DISPLAY AND OPERATION

With the NC display and operation function, NC state can be displayed

and parameters can be set for each NC.

This function can display the following NC states:

1. CNC status

2. O number and program number

3. Current position

4. Actual speed

5. Modal information6. Program check screen

7. Diagnosis screen

The NC operation function enables the following operation:

1. NC parameter setting

NOTE1 For actual speed display with the M series, the

threading/synchronous feed option and a positioncoder are required. If this option is not specified, a

value calculated from the spindle motor speedinstead of a feedback value from the position coder can be displayed by setting bit 0 of parameter No.3118 to 1.


NC display and operation screenExamples of NC display and operation screens are given below.

By selecting an NC machine and path number, the state display screen

or operation screen for each NC can be displayed.

Current position display screen Program check screen



6.NC DISPLAY AND OPERATION GENERAL B-75074EN/04

- 58 -

Parameter setting screen Diagnosis data screen



B-75074EN/04 GENERAL 7.NC MAINTENANCE

- 59 -

7 NC MAINTENANCE

In NC maintenance, operations such as input/output of NC maintenance

information and various types of data can be performed for each NC.

For NC maintenance, the following functions are available:

1. Alarm history display and external operator message history

display

2. Operation history display and history signal setting

3. Various data backup/restoration

4. FROM backup/restoration and SRAM backup5. Automatic backup of various data items and display of history data

NOTE1 The FOCAS2/Ethernet function is required.2 When the i CELL is used on the CIMPLICITY

viewer, history data automatically backed up cannotbe displayed.

3 With Series 30i /31i /32i, only the function for

backing up and restoring various types of data canbe used. Other functions are under development.

NC maintenance screenExamples of NC maintenance screens are given below.

By selecting an NC machine and path number, the maintenance screen

for each NC can be displayed.

Alarm history screen Operation history screen

Alarm history data and operation history data displayed can be output to

a file.



7.NC MAINTENANCE GENERAL B-75074EN/04

- 60 -

Various data backup/restoration screen

The various data backup/restoration screen enables the following data

to be backed up and restored:

(1) NC parameters

(2) Tool offset data

(3) Pitch error compensation data

(4) Custom macro variables (numbers in the five hundreds)

(5) Workpiece origin offset data

NOTEFor pitch error compensation data, the pitch error compensation function (option) is required. For custom macro variables, custom macro B (option) isrequired. For workpiece origin offset data, theworkpiece coordinate system (option) is required.

FROM backup/restoration and SRAM backup screen

This screen enables FROM data to be backed up, restored, and deleted,

and enables SRAM data to be backed up.

NOTE As FROM data, only user files created by themachine tool builder or user in the FROM can bebacked up, restored, and deleted. The system filesprovided by FANUC cannot be backed up, restored,and deleted.

In order to restore SRAM data, the NC boot functionneeds to be used.



B-75074EN/04 GENERAL 7.NC MAINTENANCE

- 61 -

In automatic backup, the following NC data can be automatically

backed up to the personal computer:

• Alarm history data

• Operation history data

• Message history data

• NC parameters

• Tool offset data

• Pitch error compensation data

• Custom macro variables (numbers in the five hundreds)

• Workpiece origin offset data

Alarm history data and message history data are saved to a file in the

order of occurrence time after duplicate data is automatically deleted.

NOTEThe function for backing up an alarm history,operation history, and message history of Series 30i

/31i /32i is under development.

Only NC parameters, tool offset data, pitch error compensation data, custom macro variables, andworkpiece origin offset data can be backed up.

The flow of automatic backup is shown below.

i CELL

setting

screen

Auto-backupsetting file

i CELL

auto-backupresident

process

NC

Auto-backupdata file

i CELL

maintenancescreen

(1)

(2)(3)

(3)

(4)

(1) The operator is to set the following on the i CELL setting screen:

• Target machine

• Backup timing• Type of data to be backed up

The specification data is saved to the setting file.

(2) The i CELL automatic backup resident process periodically

checks the contents of the setting file.

(3) The i CELL automatic backup resident process backs up data from

the NC to the data file each time automatic backup operation is to

be performed.

(4) The operator can check history data on the i CELL main screen.



7.NC MAINTENANCE GENERAL B-75074EN/04

- 62 -

Screen for displaying various backup data items

On the backup data display screen, automatically backed up alarm

history data, message history data, and operation history data can be

displayed. A display period can be specified.

NOTETo use message history data, the option for externalmessage or external data input is required on theNC.Messages displayed on the NC vary from onemachine to another. For details, refer to theoperator's manual of each machine.



B-75074EN/04 GENERAL 8.MAIL FUNCTION

- 63 -

8 MAIL FUNCTION

The i CELL runs on CIMPLICITY, and CIMPLICITY manages the

data of the connected CNC as a point. When a point satisfies a condition,

the mail function sends a message to an i-mode cellular phone or remote

personal computer. A point that determines mail transmission timing is

referred to as a trigger timing, and a condition that determines the value

of a trigger point for sending mail is referred to as a trigger condition.

The value of a point can be embedded in a mail message. A point whose

value is embedded in a mail message is referred to as a message point.The following items can be set on the setting screen:

• Trigger point and trigger condition

• Mail destination

• Mail message and message point

With the mail function, an event that occurred on a machine managed

with the i CELL can be posted.

NOTEThe FOCAS2/Ethernet or DNC2 function is

required.



8.MAIL FUNCTION GENERAL B-75074EN/04

- 64 -

8.1 IMPLEMENTATION OF THE MAIL FUNCTION BY DIAL-UP

CONNECTIONThe i CELL mail function uses a dial-up connection for Internet

connection. The jobs described below are required to make a dial-up

connection. The i CELL function can be used with 24-hour connection.

For the method of 24-hour connection, see Section 9.1,

"IMPLEMENTING THE MAIL FUNCTION AND WEB FUNCTION

WITH 24-HOUR CONNECTION" in this Part.

• The user needs enter into a contract with a provider for dial-up

connection. Based on information given by the provider after the

conclusion of the contract, perform settings such as DNS on the

personal computer. For a sample notification from a provider and

an example of setting on the personal computer, see Appendix G.1,

"EXAMPLE CONTRACT FOR DIAL-UP CONNECTION".

• The personal computer needs to be connected with a dial-up router.

For the method of connection, refer to the relevant manual of the

dial-up router.

Internet service provider

Mail server

Hub

i CELL

Dial-up router

Router

ISDN line

Internet

Mail function

192.168.0.101 192.168.0.102 192.168.0.103

172.16.15.2192.168.0.100

172.16.15.1192.168.0.1

172.16.0.10

172.16.0.1

Factory

i-mode cellular phoneor remote personalcomputer 100.100.100.100

Note) 192.168.0.xrepresents aprivate IP address.100.100.100.100and 172.16.x.xrepresent global IPaddresses.



B-75074EN/04 GENERAL 8.MAIL FUNCTION

- 65 -

For connection with a provider, use the ISDN line.

Some related terms are described below briefly.

Dial-up connectionDialing as required to make a line connection to the access point of an

Internet service provider. This mode of connection is the most popular

mode for one personal computer to use the Internet. In dial-up

connection, each time a connection is made, the provider assigns a

global IP address temporarily.

Mail server Server for sending and receiving e-mail. In general, providers may have

a server for mail transmission (SMTP server) (corresponding to a mail

post) and a server for reception (POP server) (corresponding to a mail box) separately or may have a server used for both purposes.

DNS (Domain Name System) server Server that converts an IP address to a character string that can be easily

remembered by humans. For example, a DNS server relates the IP

address, 123.123.123.123, of a personal computer to the name, taro, of

the personal computer for management. Other personal computers can

query the DNS server to find that the IP address of the personal

computer named taro is 123.123.123.123. In general, providers have

two DNS servers. The first server is referred to as the primary DNS

server, and the second server is referred to as the secondary DNS server.



9.WEB FUNCTION GENERAL B-75074EN/04

- 66 -

9 WEB FUNCTION

With the Web function, CNC data collected by the i CELL can be

checked from an i-mode cellular phone or remote personal computer. A

point to be displayed can be specified for each machine. The value of a

point can be converted to a character string for display. The following

items can be set on the setting screen:

• Web initialization

• Point for Web

• Item name• Display table

With the Web function, brief machine operation status managed by the

i CELL can be checked.

NOTEThe FOCAS2/Ethernet or DNC2 function isrequired.



B-75074EN/04 GENERAL 9.WEB FUNCTION

- 67 -

9.1 IMPLEMENTING THE MAIL FUNCTION AND WEB

FUNCTION WITH 24-HOUR CONNECTIONIn order to use the i CELL Web function, a 24-hour connection is

needed. For a 24-hour connection, the jobs described below are

required.

• A contract with a provider for a 24-hour connection is needed.

Settings such as for DNS are made on the personal computer.

• On the personal computer, IIS needs to be set. See Appendix F.1,

"SETTING UP IIS".

• The personal computer needs to be connected with a dial-up router.

For the method of connection, refer to the relevant manual of the

dial-up router.

Internet service provider

Mail server

Hub

i CELL

Dial-up router

Router

ISDN line

Internet

Mail functionWeb function

192.168.0.101 192.168.0.102 192.168.0.103

172.16.15.2192.168.0.100

172.16.15.1192.168.0.1

172.16.0.10

172.16.0.1

Factory

i-mode cellular phone or remote personal computer 100.100.100.100

Note) To providesecurity,operate thedial-up router as a firewall.



9.WEB FUNCTION GENERAL B-75074EN/04

- 68 -

A related term is described below briefly.

24-hour connection (leased line connection)Line that is connected at all times to the destination, unlike a general

switched line. No dialing is required for connection. For 24-hour

connection, multiple fixed global IP addresses are assigned by the

provider.



II. INSTALLATION



B-75074EN/04 INSTALLATION 1.OVERVIEW

- 71 -

1 OVERVIEW

Configuration of Part IIPart II, "Installation" consists of the following chapters:

1. OVERVIEW

This is the chapter you are reading now.

2. PREPARATION

This chapter describes what you should do before installing i CELL and a remote system.

3. INSTALLATION

This chapter explains how to install i CELL.

4. UNINSTALLATION

This chapter explains how to uninstall i CELL.

5. BACKUP AND RESTORATION

This chapter explains how to back up and restore i CELL.



2.PREPARATION INSTALLATION B-75074EN/04

- 72 -

2 PREPARATION

This chapter describes the items you need to set up before installing i

CELL in a PC.

The items you need to prepare differ depending on the functions to be

used with i CELL and the used OS.

Look at the following table. For each function, make the settings as

described in sections indicated with “ ” sequentially.

NOTEWhen the OS is Windows XP or Windows 2003Server, see Subsections 2.1.1 to 2.1.8, whichdescribe preparations to be made for Windows XP.When the OS is Windows 2000, see Subsections2.2.1 to 2.2.8, which describe preparations to bemade for Windows 2000.When the OS is Windows NT, see Subsections2.3.1 to 2.3.9, which describe preparations to bemade for Windows NT.

Function to be used

Used OS Basic

function

Mail

function

Web

function

Section that describes each item to be set up

2.1.1 Setting Up the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows XP

2.1.2 Setting the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows XP

2.1.3 Setting the DNS (Mail Function) for Windows XP

2.1.4 Installing IIS 6.0 (Web Function) for Windows 2003 Server

2.1.5 Registering the New User "IUSR_ICELL" (Web Function) for

Windows 2003 Server

2.1.6 Installing IE6.0 (Basic Function) for Windows XP

2.1.7 Installing CIMPLICITY (Basic Function) for Windows XP

Windows

XP

or

Windows

2003

Server

2.1.8 Installing the CIMPLICITY Service Pack (Basic Function) for

Windows XP

2.2.1 Setting Up the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows 2000

2.2.2 Setting the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows 2000

2.2.3 Setting the DNS (Mail Function) for Windows 2000

2.2.4 Installing IIS 5.0 (Web Function) for Windows 2000


Windows 2000

2.2.6 Installing IE5.5 (Basic Function) for Windows 2000

2.2.7 Installing CIMPLICITY (Basic Function) for Windows 2000

Windows

2000


Windows 2000



B-75074EN/04 INSTALLATION 2.PREPARATION

- 73 -

Function to be used

Used OS Basic

function

Mail

function

Web

function

Section that describes each item to be set up

2.3.1 Setting Up the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows NT

2.3.2 Setting the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows NT

2.3.3 Setting the DNS (Mail Function) for Windows NT

2.3.4 Setting Up ODBC (Basic Function) for Windows NT

2.3.5 Installing IIS 4.0 (Web Function) for Windows NT


Windows NT

2.3.7 Installing IE5.5 (Basic Function) for Windows NT

2.3.8 Installing the CIMPLICITY (Basic Function) for Windows NT

Windows

NT


Windows NT




- 74 -

2.1 PREPARATION (FOR Windows XP)

This section describes the items you need to prepare when using

Windows XP as the OS. When the Web function is used, the Windows

2003 Server, which is the server OS of Windows XP, is needed.

2.1.1 Setting Up the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows XP

NOTEThe user who makes the setting described in thissection must have the "administrator privilege".

Installing the TCP/IP protocol servicei CELL uses the network protocol called transmission control

protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) that enables communication over

the network.

Before installing i CELL, therefore, you must install the TCP/IP

protocol service on Windows XP.

You can check the TCP/IP is installed on Windows XP using the

following procedure. Select [Control Panel] → [Network and Dial-up

Connections] and activate [Local Area Connection]. Check whether

the [Local Area Connection Properties] list box contains "Internet

Protocol (TCP/IP)."

If the TCP/IP is not installed, install it using [Local Area Connection

Properties].

Refer to "Windows XP Setup Guide" for explanations about how to

install the TCP/IP.

Checking on localhostThe term localhost is a special host name used by the TCP/IP protocol

to indicate the host of interest. It is registered automatically when

Windows XP is installed. Deleting this setting hampers the normal

operation of i CELL.

Before installing the system described in this manual, check whether

localhost has been registered in the hosts file.

Supposing that Windows XP is installed in the "c:\windows" directory,the hosts file is in the location stated below. (The directory where

Windows XP is installed is registered in the system environment

variable "windir". It can be checked by activating [System] on

[Control Panel].)

"c:\windows\system32\drivers\etc\hosts

Open this file with a test editor such as Notepad, and look for the

following line (usually it is at or near the beginning of the file).

127.0.01 localhost

If this line is not in the hosts file, add it.




- 75 -

2.1.2 Setting the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows XP


To communicate with NCs using Ethernet, set the TCP/IP.

1. Select [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel], and activate

[Network].

2. Select [Network and Dial-up Connections] and activate [Local

Area Connection].

The IP address and subnet mask must always be set.

The default gateway setting may be required depending on the

network configuration in use. Contact the network administrator in

your company.

Also see Section 3.4, "NETWORK CONFIGURATION," in Part I,

"GENERAL."

To use a dial-up router with the i CELL mail or Web function, set the

IP address of the dial-up router for the default gateway.




- 76 -

2.1.3 Setting the DNS (Mail Function) for Windows XP


To use a dialup router with the i CELL mail function, you need to set

up the domain name system (DNS) of the dialup router. If you do not

use the mail function, you do not need to make this setting.


[Network].


Area Connection] and [Properties].

3. [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties]→

[General] and enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers in [Use the following DNS

server addresses] and click [OK].

2.1.4 Installing IIS 6.0 (Web Function) for Windows 2003 Server

When Windows 2003 Server is installed in a standard configuration,

IIS 6.0 is automatically installed. You do not need to install IIS 6.0

separately.




- 77 -

2.1.5 Registering the New User "IUSR_ICELL" (Web Function) for Windows 2003 Server

To use the Web function, you need to register the new user

"IUSR_ICELL". If you do not use the Web function, you do not need

to make this setting.


1. Select [Start] → [Programs] → [Administrative Tools] and

activate [Computer Management].

2. On [Computer Management], select [System Tools] → [LocalUsers and Groups] → [Users] and activate [New User] in

[Action].

3. Create a new user with specifying IUSR_ICELL for [User name]

and none for [Password] and turning the [Password never

expires] check box on.

2.1.6 Installing IE6.0 (Basic Function) for Windows XP

NOTEThe user who installs IE must have the"administrator privilege".

IE 6.0 (Internet Explorer Version 6.0) is installed together with

Windows XP, so that IE 6.0 need not be installed additionally.




- 78 -

2.1.7 Installing CIMPLICITY (Basic Function) for Windows XP

Before installingi

CELL, install CIMPLICITY. See Appendix A,"HOW TO INSTALL AND REGISTER CIMPLICITY," for how to

install CIMPLICITY.

NOTE1 The user who installs CIMPLICITY must have the

"administrator privilege".2 If you changes the computer name after installing

CIMPLICITY, you need to reinstall CIMPLICITY.Determine the computer name before installation.

i CELL can operate on the following CIMPLICITY versions:CIMPLICITY HMI Plant Edition Version 6.1 (English or Japanese

version)



2.1.8 Installing the CIMPLICITY Service Pack (Basic Function) for Windows XP

After installing CIMPLICITY, install CIMPLICITY Service Pack 2.

Execute the following file on the installation CD:\HMI6.1SP2 \setup.bat




- 79 -

2.2 PREPARATION (FOR Windows 2000)


Windows 2000 as the OS. When the Web function is used, the

Windows 2003 Server, which is the server OS of Windows XP, is

needed.

2.2.1 Setting Up the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows 2000


Installing the TCP/IP protocol servicei CELL uses the network protocol called transmission control

protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) that enables communication over

the network.


protocol service on Windows 2000.

You can check the TCP/IP is installed on Windows 2000 using the

following procedure. Select [Control Panel] → [Network and Dial-up

Connections] and activate [Local Area Connection]. Check whether

the [Local Area Connection Properties] list box contains "Internet

Protocol (TCP/IP)."

If the TCP/IP is not installed, install it using [Local Area Connection

Properties].

Refer to "Windows 2000 Setup Guide" for explanations about how to

install the TCP/IP.



Windows 2000 is installed. Deleting this setting hampers the normal



localhost has been registered in the hosts file.Supposing that Windows 2000 is installed in the "c:\winnt" directory,

the hosts file is in the location stated below. (The directory where

Windows 2000 is installed is registered in the system environment


[Control Panel].)

"c:\winnt\system32\drivers\etc\hosts"



127.0.01 localhost





- 80 -

2.2.2 Setting the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows 2000




[Network].


Area Connection].




your company.


"GENERAL."






- 81 -

2.2.3 Setting the DNS (Mail Function) for Windows 2000






[Network].


Area Connection] and [Properties].

3. [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties]→

[General] and enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers in [Use the following DNS

server addresses] and click [OK].

2.2.4 Installing IIS 5.0 (Web Function) for Windows 2000

When Windows 2000 Server is installed in a standard configuration,

IIS 5.0 is automatically installed. You do not need to install IIS 5.0

separately.




- 82 -

2.2.5 Registering the New User "IUSR_ICELL" (Web Function) for Windows 2000





1. Select [Start] → [Programs] → [Administrative Tools] and

activate [Computer Management].

2. On [Computer Management], select [System Tools] → [LocalUsers and Groups] → [Users] and activate [New User] in

[Action].

3. Create a new user with specifying IUSR_ICELL for [User name]

and none for [Password] and turning the [Password never

expires] check box on.

2.2.6 Installing IE5.5 (Basic Function) for Windows 2000

NOTEThe user who installs IE must have the"administrator privilege".

Before installing CIMPLICITY, install IE5.5 (Internet Explorer

Version 5.5). When installing IE5.5, you can select either of

"Minimum" and "Standard". IE5.5 saved to CD-ROM can be

purchased for 1,000 yen or so by ordering it at the Microsoft Web site.




- 83 -

2.2.7 Installing CIMPLICITY (Basic Function) for Windows 2000

Before installingi

CELL, install CIMPLICITY. See Appendix A,"HOW TO INSTALL AND REGISTER CIMPLICITY," for how to

install CIMPLICITY.

NOTE1 The user who installs CIMPLICITY must have the

"administrator privilege".2 If you changes the computer name after installing



version)



2.2.8 Installing the CIMPLICITY Service Pack (Basic Function) for Windows 2000


Execute the following file on the installation CD:\HMI6.1SP2\setup.bat




- 84 -

2.3 PREPARATION (FOR Windows NT)


Windows NT as the OS.

2.3.1 Setting Up the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows NT


Installing the TCP/IP protocol service

i CELL uses the network protocol called transmission control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) that enables communication over

the network.


protocol service on Windows NT.

You can check whether the TCP/IP protocol is installed on Windows

NT by activating [Network] on [Control Panel] and searching the

[Network Protocols] list box for [TCP/IP Protocol].

If the TCP/IP has not been installed, install it using [Network] on

[Control Panel]. Refer to "Windows NT Setup Guide" for

explanations about how to install the TCP/IP.



Windows NT is installed. Deleting this setting hampers the normal



localhost has been registered in the hosts file.

Supposing that Windows NT is installed in the "c:\winnt" directory,

the hosts file is in the location stated below. (The directory where

Windows NT is installed is registered in the system environment


[Control Panel].)"c:\winnt\system32\drivers\etc\hosts"



127.0.01 localhost





- 85 -

2.3.2 Setting the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows NT




[Network].




your company.


"GENERAL."






- 86 -

2.3.3 Setting the DNS (Mail Function) for Windows NT






[Network].

2. Select [Protocol]→ [TCP/IP Protocol]→ [Properties]→ [DNS],

click [Add] in [DNS Service Search Order], and enter the IP

address of your DNS server, and then click [Add].




- 87 -

2.3.4 Setting Up ODBC (Basic Function) for Windows NT

To install a CIMPLICITY viewer run-time environment, set upODBC.

You do not need to set up ODBC when installing a server run-time or

development environment, or viewer development environment.

(When ODBC setup is not required, setting up ODBC causes no

problem.)

Set up ODBC using the following procedure.


1. Start the PC, and insert the i CELL installation CD-ROM into the

drive.

2. The i CELL installer starts. Click the [Cancel] button.

3. Execute the following file from the installation CD.

\ODBC\Mdac_Typ.exe




- 88 -

2.3.5 Installing IIS 4.0 (Web Function) for Windows NT


Installing Internet Information Server 4.0 (IIS4.0) requires the

following software A to D. Software A can be purchased from a

software vender. B to E saved to CD-ROM can be each purchased for

1,000 yen or so by ordering them at the Microsoft Web site

(http://www.microsoft.com/japan/support/).

A. Windows NT Server 4.0 operating system (always required)

B. Windows NT Service Pack 3 (whether this is required is

determined at steps <1> and <2>)

C. Windows NT Service Pack 6a (always required)

D. Windows NT 4.0 Option Pack (always required; includes IIS4.0)

E. Internet Explorer 5.5 (always required)

It is difficult to additionally install IIS4.0 in a Windows NT Server PC

where IE5.x is already installed. If it is impossible to install IIS4.0

with the following procedure, you should start by getting a new PC

and installing Windows NT Server in it.

To install Windows NT 4.0 Option Pack, follow this procedure.

<1> Check the version of Service Pack (hereafter abbreviated as SP)

applied to Windows NT Server. When you execute the version

information command from the help menu of File Explorer, the

message "Service Pack?" appears.

<2> If the current version is earlier than SP3, apply SP3.<3> Check the version of Internet Explorer (hereafter abbreviated as

IE). The version is displayed by executing the version

information command from the help menu.

<4> If IE5 or later is already installed, uninstall it.

<5> Install Option Pack. A message prompting you to install IE4.01

appears. Install IE4.01 from Option Pack. Option Pack can run

even if "minimum" is selected for the options when Option Pack

is installed. IIS4.0 shall be set up after i CELL is installed. See

Appendix F.1, "SETTING UP IIS", for detailed explanations

about how to set up IIS4.0.

<6> Install SP6a. When you are trying to install SP6a, the following

message may appear to indicate that it is impossible to installSP6a.

In this case, install SP6a by following the solution procedure

presented in the Microsoft-issued support information (document

code Q250867) "It is impossible to install Service Pack 6a if

there is a highly encrypted IE" (which can be downloaded from

the Microsoft Web site).

<1>Check the versionof Service Pack

<2>Install Service Pack

3

Yes

No

<3>Check the version

of Internet Explorer.

<4>

Uninstall IE5.x.

<5>

Install Option Pack.

<6>Install Service Pack

6a.

Start

End

Earlier than 3?

Yes

No5 or later?




- 89 -

2.3.6 Registering the New User "IUSR_ICELL" (Web Function) for Windows NT





1. Select [Start]→ [Program]→ [Administrative Tool (Common)],

and activate [Domain User Manager].

2. In [Domain User Manager,] add a new user by specifying[Username] → IUSR_ICELL →, [Password] (none), and

[Password Never Expires].

2.3.7 Installing IE5.5 (Basic Function) for Windows NT

NOTE

The user who installs IE must have the"administrator privilege".

Before installing CIMPLICITY, install IE5.5 (Internet Explorer

Version 5.5). When installing IE5.5, you can select either of

"Minimum" and "Standard". IE5.5 saved to CD-ROM can be

purchased for 1,000 yen or so by ordering it at the Microsoft Web site.




- 90 -

2.3.8 Installing the CIMPLICITY (Basic Function) for Windows NT

Before installingi

CELL, install CIMPLICITY.See Appendix A, "HOW TO INSTALL AND REGISTER

CIMPLICITY," for explanations about how to install CIMPLICITY.

NOTE1 The user who makes the setting described in this

section must have the "administrator privilege".2 If you changes the computer name after installing



version)



2.3.9 Installing the CIMPLICITY Service Pack (Basic Function) for Windows NT


Execute the following file on the installation CD:\Hmi6.1Sp2\setup.bat



B-75074EN/04 INSTALLATION 3.INSTALLATION

- 91 -

3 INSTALLATION

The following sections explain how to install i CELL.



3.INSTALLATION INSTALLATION B-75074EN/04

- 92 -

3.1 INSTALLATION

i CELL is installed by executing a setup program from CD-ROM.

NOTE1 The user who install i CELL must have the

"administrator privilege".2 Before starting the installation procedure, stop all

application programs.3 The message "UDP Number for C4 Service"

appears during installation. The displayedinformation must match the setting in the NC. Take

note of this information.When you forgot to take note of this information,see "UDP number for C4 service" described inSection 3.2, "INFORMATION TO BE AUTOMATICALLY SAVED TO THE TCP/IPSERVICE FILE".

The setup procedure follows:

1. Start the computer, and insert the installation CD-ROM into the

drive.

The installer's start window appears automatically.Click the [Next] button.




- 93 -

2. The software license agreement terms appear. Read them

carefully, and if you agree, click the [Yes] button.

3. On the installation component select screen, the buttons

indicating the server and viewer components of the

CIMPLICITY viewer are displayed. When you want to install i

CELL on the server PC of the CIMPLICITY viewer or does not

want to use the CIMPLICITY viewer, select the "server"

component.

When you want to install i CELL on the viewer PC of the

CIMPLICITY viewer, select the "viewer" component.




- 94 -

4. Select a folder for installation. Check [Destination Folder], and if

it is ok, click the [Next] button. To install i CELL in a different

folder, click [Browse] and select the desined folder, then click

the [Next] button.

Configuration of the directories where i CELL and the related information areinstalled

When determining the directories where i CELL and the related

information are to be installed, you should use the following

configuration.

(Directory for NC001)(Directory for NC002)

<1> ...\iCELL (You select this directory when you install i CELL.)

<2> CimProject (This is created automatically during installation.)

<3> NcData (You create directories for NcData.)

i CELL has a dialog box for backup and restoration. Backup and

restoration can be performed for individual directories separately.

(See Chapter 5, "Backup and Restoration", for explanations

about how to use the backup dialog box.)If all files under <1> are selected for backup, all of the programs

necessary to run i CELL, setting data, result data, CIMPLICITY

dialog boxes are backed up.

If all files under <2> are selected for backup, setting data, result

data, and CIMPLICITY dialog boxes are backed up. However,

the programs necessary to run i CELL are not backed up because

they are not altered by changing settings.

The directories for saving NC data can be set up freely on the NC

Program Transfer setting screen. However, you should save NC

data to locations described at <3>.

Above the directory for each machine, create an NC data root

directory. To use the CIMPLICITY viewer, this directory

configuration must be used.




- 95 -

Using the directory configuration shown above enables you to

use three backup levels, each of which is selected according to

what was done.

<1> Backup is performed after i CELL is installed and

confirmed for normal operation.

<2> Backup is performed after a new machine is connected to i

CELL, or any CIMPLICITY dialog box is changed.

<3> Back up NC data each time it is changed, regardless of <1>

or <2>.

Note on installation on Windows 2000 or Windows XPIf the NC program root directory is not in the i CELL installation

directory or in a drive other than that contains the i CELL installation

directory, you need to add the right to access the entities in the NC

program root directory.Add the access right using the following procedure:

<1> Select [Start] → [Programs] → [Accessories] → [Command

Prompt] to display the command prompt.

<2> Move to the NC program root directory.

Example) When the NC program root directory is "D:\NcData",

enter "cd /d D:\NcData".

<3> Execute the following command:

cacls nc-program-root-directory /t /e /g everyone:f

Example) "cacls D:\NcData /t /e /g everyone:f" when the NC

program root directory is "D:\NcData"

5. Select a program folder where icons are to be saved. Usually

select the default value displayed on the screen, and click the

[Next] button.




- 96 -

6. Before file copy is started, a dialog box appears which prompts

you to check what you specified so far. If it is ok, click the

[Next] button. Installation begins.

7. The message "UDP Number for C4 Service" shown below

appears during installation. You need to enter the value indicated

in this message as "Port number for UDP" for all NCs. (A value

other than "8192" may be indicated depending on the

environment of the PC.) Take note of this value. See "UDP

number for C4 service" described in Section 3.2,

"INFORMATION TO BE AUTOMATICALLY SAVED TO

THE TCP/IP SERVICE FILE" for details.

8. The ReadMe file and the user register card are displayed.

The ReadMe file contains the cautions and other information that

have not been included in the ReadMe file manual. Be sure to

read the ReadMe file.

NOTEPlease fill in the user registration card and send it to us.When the user registration card is displayed, print it onyour printer, and fill in the printed form.If you want to print it later, for example, because your PChas no printer, use the following file:RegistJ.txt in the root directory on the installation CDThe fax address and post address are presented on theuser registration card.To read the ReadMe file later, open ReadMeJ.txt in theroot directory on the installation CD.




- 97 -

9. Once the setup is completed, the following message appears.

Turn the PC power off and on again.




- 98 -

3.2 INFORMATION TO BE AUTOMATICALLY SAVED TO THE

TCP/IP SERVICE FILEWhen i CELL is installed, i CELL entries are automatically registered

with the TCP/IP service file so that Windows TCP/IP protocol can be

used. The following table lists the services that are automatically

registered.

Table 3.2 Automatically registered services

Service name Port number Protocol

FANUC_PCFA_APP 4096 tcp

FANUC_PCFA_CDA 4097 tcp

FANUC_PCFA_COMM 4098 tcp

FANUC_C4_SERVER 8192 (*1) udp

FANUC_C4_API 8193 tcp

NOTE*1 This value is a "port number for UDP" to be entered

in the "ETHPRM" dialog box of the NC.

If a port number listed in the Table 3.2 "Automatically registered

services" is turned out to be already in use when an attempt is made to

register a service with the port number, the service is assigned with anumber larger than the maximum existing number in the services file.

Therefore, no existing service will be nullified.

Before automatic registration with the services file is started, a backup

copy of it is created and saved to the same directory as for it.

Supposing that the directory where Windows is set up is "c:\winnt",

the services file and its automatically created backup file are in the

following directories:

c:\winnt\system32\drivers\etc\

The directory where Windows system is installed is registered in the

system environment variable "windir". It can be checked by activating

[System] on [Control Panel].

The automatically created backup file is named

"services.YYYYMMDDhhmm" (where YYYY is the year, MM is the

month, DD is the day, hh is the hour, and mm is the minute) from the

time of automatic registration.




- 99 -

UDP number for C4 serviceAs described in *1 under the table above, the same value as the

FANUC_C4_SERVER service UDP port number automatically

registered in the services file must be set in the corresponding

parameter for all NCs. The automatically set port number is displayed

in the "UDP Number for C4 Service" dialog box during installation.

Set this value as a "Port number for UDP" in the "ETHPRM" dialog

box of the NC.

If you forgot to take note of the value in the "UDP Number for C4

Service" dialog box displayed during installation, you can use the

following procedure to display the value automatically set up in the

PC.

(1) Open the i CELL Configuration dialog box. See Subsection 2.2.1,

"Opening the Configuration Dialog Box", in Part III, "Setting",

for the operating procedure.(2) Select "Communication" under Machine Information from the

tree to display the Communication dialog box, and click the

<Confirm the Communication Configuration> button. The

Communication Configuration Confirmation dialog box appears.

See Section 2.5, "MACHINE INFORMATION", in Part III,

"Setting", for the operating procedure.

(3) In the Communication Configuration Confirmation dialog box,

selecting the [C4Service] tab causes the "UDP number for C4

service" currently set up in the PC to be displayed as follows:

(4) Close the Communication Configuration Confirmation dialog

box and the i CELL Configuration dialog box.

Editing the TCP/IP services fileTo set up a value other than the one displayed as the "UDP number for

C4 service" during installation, you need to edit the services file, using

a text editor such as NotePad. Be careful not to enter any value

already in use.

WARNINGDo not edit the services file unless you haveworking knowledge about the Ethernet and TCP/IP.If you edit it incorrectly, it is likely that not only i

CELL but also all Ethernet communicationprocesses on Windows may become inoperable.

NOTEOnce the services file is edited, you need to turnthe power off and on again to put the editing in

effect.

Value set in

the PC



4.UNINSTALLATION INSTALLATION B-75074EN/04

- 100 -

4 UNINSTALLATION



B-75074EN/04 INSTALLATION 4.UNINSTALLATION

- 101 -

4.1 UNINSTALLATION

i CELL can be uninstalled using [Add/Remove Programs] on [Control

Panel].

NOTE1 The user who uninstalls i CELL must have the

administrator privilege.2 Before starting the uninstallation procedure, stop all

application programs.3 When i CELL is uninstalled, all of the contents of

the CimProject directory under the directory where

i CELL is installed are deleted. Backup necessaryfiles such as modified screens and NC programsbeforehand.

Uninstall "CIMPLICITY i CELL".

Any files that were set up after installation are left installed. Use

Explorer to delete them.

Windows 2000 or Windows XP

Windows NT



5.BACKUP AND RESTORATION INSTALLATION B-75074EN/04

- 102 -

5 BACKUP AND RESTORATION



B-75074EN/04 INSTALLATION 5.BACKUP AND RESTORATION

- 103 -

5.1 BACKUP

If you changed the settings of i CELL or customized any i CELL

dialog box, be sure to back up i CELL, using the following procedure.

When i CELL is backed up, its multiple files and directories are

assembled and compacted into a single backup archive file. i CELL

can be restored from this file according to the procedure described in

Section 5.2, "RESTORATION".

NOTEBefore starting backing up i CELL, be sure to

terminate the i CELL project.

5.1.1 Opening the IcellBkupRstr Dialog Box

Click the [Start] button, select [Programs] - [CIMPLICITY i CELL],

and activate the [Backup & Restore] icon.




- 104 -

5.1.2 Selecting Information to be Backed Up

This subsection assumes that the NC data is stored using the directoryconfiguration explained in step 5 (determining folders for installation)

in Section 3.1, "INSTALLATION".

(Directory for NC001)(Directory for NC002)

<1> ...\iCELL (You select this directory when you install i CELL.)

<2> CimProject (This is created automatically during installation.)

<3> NcData (You create directories for NcData.)

In the "Select Backup/Restore Directory" frame, select what to back

up, using an option button.

All of i CELL:

All entities in the %iCELL% directory (where i CELL is

installed) at <1> in the above chart are backup targets.

All i CELL files are backed up.

CimProject Only:

The data under the %iCELL%\CimProject directory shown by

<2> in the figure above and various types of log data of i

CELLare backed up. (Various types of log data of i CELL are not

restored.)

The CIMPLICITY settings, its dialog boxes, NC program

communication settings, and collected result data are backed up.

The DLL or EXE files that are necessary for i CELL to run but

not affected by changes to the settings are not backed up.

If you changed the settings or dialog boxes of i CELL, select this

option.

Any Directory:

All entities in the directory specified in the text box are backup

targets. If the directory configuration shown above is used,simply entering the directory name shown at <3> causes the NC

programs to be backed up.

Using the directory configuration shown above enables you to use

three backup levels, each of which is selected according to what was

done.

<1> Backup is performed after i CELL is installed and confirmed for

normal operation.

<2> Backup is performed after a new machine is connected to i CELL,

or any CIMPLICITY dialog box is changed.

<3> Back up NC data each time it is changed, regardless of <1> or

<2>.




- 105 -

5.1.3 Confirming Backup Archive File Paths

A default backup archive file path is set up according to an optionselected in the "Select Backup/Restore Directory" frame. The default

path names used are as follows:

All of i CELL : %iCELL%\..\iCellAll. ibk

CimProject Only : %iCELL%\..\iCellCimPro. ibk

Any Directory : None; the user should specify a file name.

If "All of i CELL" or "CimProject Only" is selected, a backup archive

file is created by default in a directory one above the

directory %iCELL% where i CELL is installed.

To use a backup file name not specified by default, enter a desired

path name in the [File Path] text box. A backup file can be selected

using a selection dialog box displayed by clicking the small button atthe right of the text box.

NOTEBefore starting backup, make sure that there is anenough free area on the hard disk. A roughestimate of a backup archive file created atinstallation is as follows: All of i CELL : About 5 MB

CimProject Only : About 1 MBBackup is performed during operation, a larger free

area is necessary, because result data is collectedduring operation.




- 106 -

5.1.4 Starting Backup

Clicking the <Backup> button starts backup.If a backup file having the same name as specified now already exists,

a prompt message appears to ask whether you want to delete the

existing backup file and create a new one under the specified name.

During backup, the following window for indicating the backup file

name appears.

When backup is completed, the following window appears to display

a list of files backed up. Click the <Close> button.

5.1.5 Confirming the Contents of the Backup Archive File

After entering a backup archive file name in the [File Path] text box,

clicking the <Backup File List> button lists the information backed

up.




- 107 -

5.1.6 Saving the Backup Archive File

Save the backup archive file to an MO, CD-R, or floppy disk.One floppy disk cannot hold the backup archive file unless it is

divided, because it is too large to fit on one floppy disk. The

iCellBkupRstr dialog box allows the backup archive file to be divided

so that it can be saved to more than one floppy file. Use the following

procedure.

Dividing and saving the backup archive file to floppy disks(1) Specify a backup archive file to be divided.

In the [Backup/Restore File] frame, specify a backup archive file

in the [File Path] text box. A file can be selected by clicking the

small button at the right of the text box. At the end of backup, the

file name is automatically entered in the text box.(2) Click the <Save with split> button to save the file to floppy

disks.

When the button is clicked, the number of floppy disks required

to hold the divided file is displayed. Get ready as many formatted

floppy disks as the quantity displayed.

(3) When you are prompted to insert a floppy disk, set a floppy disk

not write-protected into the drive, and click the <OK> button.

Label the floppy disk, for example, "Backup: All of i CELL

(1/4)".

(4) If a floppy disk has no enough free area, the following dialog boxappears. Select a desired process and continue backup.




- 108 -

5.2 RESTORATION

To restore data from the backup file, follow the procedure described

below.

5.2.1 Installing i CELL

If the PC is repaired, and Windows is re-installed in it, i CELL must

also be re-installed.

If you have not re-installed i CELL, start with the following

subsection.

5.2.2 Copying the Backup Archive File

Copy the backup archive file created as described in Section 5.1,

"BACKUP", back to the place where the file was initially stored.

If the file has been divided and saved to more than one floppy disk,

follow this procedure to copy it from the floppy disks to the hard disk.

Restoring the backup archive file divided and saved to more than one floppydisk

(1) Set the first of the floppy disks that hold the backup archive file

into the floppy disk drive of the PC, and clock the <Restore to

HDD> button.

(2) When you are prompted to insert another floppy disk, set thefloppy disk with the correct sequence number, and click the

<OK> button.

5.2.3 Selecting Information to be Restored

In the "Select Backup/Restore Directory" frame, select a desired

option button.




- 109 -

5.2.4 Starting Restoration

Clicking the <Restore> button starts restoration.During restriction, the following window appears to display the name

of the files to be restored.

When restoration is completed, a window appears which lists the

restored files. Click the <Close> button to close the window.



III. SETTING



B-75074EN/04 SETTING 1.OVERVIEW

- 113 -

1 OVERVIEW

Configuration of this partPart III, “Setting,” explains how to set up i CELL.

1. OverviewThis chapter

2. Basic SetupThis chapter describes the basic setup of i CELL. Be sure to read

it.3. Mail

This chapter explains how to set up the mail function.4. Web

This chapter explains how to set up the Web function.5. CIMPLICITY Viewer

This chapter explains how to set up the CIMPLICITY Viewer function.



2.BASIC FUNCTIONS SETTING B-75074EN/04

- 114 -

2 BASIC FUNCTIONS

This chapter explains how to set up the basic functions of i CELL.

To run i CELL, you need to specify what machines (NC) to connect,

how to communicate with the machines, and which i CELL function to

be enabled for each machine. Some items must be set up in such a waythat they match the settings of the NC.Set up i CELL according to your machine configuration as explained

below.

If you are going to use i CELL with the mail and Web functions based

on the i-mode cellular phone, also read 3, “MAIL,” and 4, “WEB.”

It is necessary to make it a development server temporarily by usingOEM Key when a setting is changed when run time server of CIMPLICITY is used.Refer to the chapter “system management”, in the CIMPLICITY HMIPlant Edition Basic System Operator's Manual (B-75064EN) for thedetails of OEM Key.



B-75074EN/04 SETTING 2.BASIC FUNCTIONS

- 115 -

2.1 OVERVIEW

i CELL supports four communication functions, FOCAS2/Ethernet,

DNC2, Reader/Puncher, and Data Server. The following table lists thefunctions that are available from each communication function and NCtype. For each function, see Chapter 3, "OPERATINGENVIRONMENT" in Part I, "GENERAL".

To use i CELL, follow the flowchart shown below.

Setting up the number of machines according to the order password.

Setting up the number of machines to be connected and the functions to be used.

Setting up machine information.

Setting up communication.

Setting up i CELL.

Setting up NC program management.

The following subsections briefly describe the setup procedure for i

CELL according to this flowchart.

2.1.1 Setting up the Number of Machines According to Order Password

Purchasing i CELL allows you to connect up to five machines, using

FOCAS2/Ethernet (including a Data Server). To use any other communication function or connect more machines, you should

purchase a CNC connection option separately. When only NC programmanagement is used by making a connection with an FTP server,however, the machine is not counted in the required number of machines. In this case, see Section 2.8, "NC PROGRAM

MANAGEMENT - FTP CLIENT SETTINGS".The i CELL main package and CNC connection option come with order

passwords. Registering an order password with i CELL allows you to

connect as many machines as the number indicated with the purchasedoption.

Order password typeConnectable communication

function

i CELL main package (five machines) FOCAS2/Ethernet, Data Server

Option for connecting additional CNCs

(5, 10, or 15 CNCs)

FOCAS2/Ethernet, DNC2,

Reader/Puncher, Data Server




- 116 -

If you register an order password for the i CELL main package and that

for the 10-CNC connection function, for example, you can connect upto 15 machines, up to ten of which are connected using DNC2 or Reader/Puncher.

Number of machines connected

using DNC2 or Reader/Puncher : 0 0 10Maximum machine count : 0 5 15

Register the order passwordof the i CELL main package.

(Five machines can beconnected usingFOCAS1/Ethernet.)

Register the order password of the 10-CNC connection function.(Ten machines can beconnected usingFOCAS1/Ethernet, DNC2, andReader/Puncher.

NOTEEven when only up to five machines are to beconnected, if one of them is to be connected usingDNC2 or Reader/Puncher, you must purchase the5-CNC connection function option in addition to the i

CELL main package.

The order password is 24 alphanumeric characters. Its term of validityis limited.

NOTEIt is impossible to register the password with i CELL

after the term of validity.

The order password can be registered only once. It is impossible toregister one order password with i CELL on a single PC more than once.

It is also impossible to register one order password with i CELL on

different PCs more than once.

When you connect up to five machines using FOCAS2/Ethernet onlywith the i CELL main package, you also need to register the order

password for the i CELL main package.

The Machine Count Configuration dialog box is used to register theorder password. This dialog box is displayed by selecting Project fromthe menu bar, then Machine Count Configuration from the Projectmenu.




- 117 -

2.1.2 Setting up the Number of Machines to be Connected and theFunctions to be Used

Order password-based machine count management is performed inunits of five. The Machine Connect Configuration dialog boxdetermines the number of machines to be actually connected. As manysettings as the number of machines are displayed in the dialog box. Thenumber of machines to be connected can be specified within a machinecount range specified with the order password.

i CELL connects to the CNC, monitors its status, and manages NC

programs. It is also provided with mail and Web functions. Setting upthe functions to be used lets you specify whether to use the mail andWeb functions.

Setting up the number of machines to be connected and the functions to be used is performed, using the Project Property dialog box. The dialog box is displayed by selecting Project from the menu bar, then Propertyfrom the Project menu.

2.1.3 Setting up Machine Information

Setting up machine information lets you specify a machine name and NC type for individual machines.

Setting up machine information is performed by selecting MachineInformation from the tree.

2.1.4 Setting up Communication

Setting up communication lets you specify a communication protocoland its accompanying data (such as IP address for FOCAS2/Ethernet)for individual machines.

Setting up communication is performed by selecting Communicationfrom the tree.

2.1.5 Setting up NC Program Management

Setting up NC program management lets you specify information (suchas the directory used to manage NC programs in each NC) related to NC

program management.

Setting up NC program management is performed by selecting NCProgram Management from the tree.




- 118 -

2.1.6 Setting up i CELL

iCELL is provided with the overview, machining result, workpiece process result, and tool life functions. Setting up i CELL lets you

specify which function to be used for individual machines. Thefunctions you can select differ depending on the communicationfunction and NC type. It also lets you specify information common toall machines.

Setting up i CELL is performed by selecting i CELL from the tree.




- 119 -

2.2 DIALOG BOX CONFIGURATION

2.2.1 Opening the Configuration Dialog Box

To open the Configuration dialog box of i CELL, from the Windows

Start menu, select Start, Program, CIMPLICITY i CELL, and

Configuration.

2.2.2 Overview

Shown below is the Configuration dialog box.

The Configuration dialog box consists of a tree in the left section and agrid in the right section.i CELL has a wide variety of items to be specified. These items are

grouped in major categories and displayed in a tree form in the leftsection. When an item is selected from the tree, its details are displayedin the grid. The items displayed in the tree differ depending on what youspecify.In some cases, the tree has a hierarchical structure. Clicking the icon +expands branches under it. Clicking the icon - closes the currentlyexpanded branches.

You can relocate the border between the tree and grid by dragging anddropping it with the mouse.

You can also change the width of each column in the grid by draggingand dropping its border with the mouse.




- 120 -

2.2.3 Menus

The following summarizes the functions of each menu.

File Menu

Exit Closes the Configuration dialog box. Reflects point

settings to CIMPLICITY module as required.

Update Point

Configuration

Reflects point settings to CIMPLICITY module. This

command is not usually used.

See Subsection 2.2.9, “If an Attempt to Reflect Point

Settings to CIMPLICITY Fails,” for details.

Edit Menu

New Creates data for an item selected from the tree. This

may or may not be possible depending on the category

of the selected item.

Property Displays a dialog box for changing the setting of an

item selected from the grid.

Delete Deletes data for a row selected from the grid.

Project Menu

Property Displays a dialog box for setting up the entire i CELL

project.

Machine Count

Configuration

Displays a dialog box for registering an order password.

Help Menu

Version Displays the revision of i CELL.




- 121 -

2.2.4 How to Change Settings

Adding and editing settingsSelecting an item from the tree in the left section (<1> in the followingfigure) displays, in the grid in the right section, a summary of data aboutthe selected item. Double-clicking a row in the grid (<2> in thefollowing figure) displays a dialog box for changing the setting in thatrow.

<1><2>

You can display the same dialog box also by selecting (clicking) therow in the grid and selecting Edit from the menu bar, then Propertyfrom the Edit menu.

If an item has a fixed number of pieces of data, the necessary data is

prepared in the grid in advance. If not, you create data by selecting Editfrom the menu bar, then New from the Edit menu.

Deleting settingsAfter selecting (clicking) a row from the grid, selecting Edit from themenu bar, then Delete from the Edit menu causes the setting to bedeleted.




- 122 -

2.2.5 Work Flows for Adding and Deleting Machines

Adding machines Machines are added in the following work flow.<1> Select Project from the menu bar, then Machine Count

Configuration from the Project menu to display the MachineCount Configuration dialog box. Register an order password,using the dialog box.

<2> Select Project from the menu bar, then Property from the Projectmenu to display the Project Property dialog box. In this dialog box,specify the number of machines to be connected, then ensure that

NC Connection, NC Program Management, and i CELL are

selected as functions to be used. Select also the mail and Webfunctions if necessary.

<3> Selecting Machine Information from the tree displays the settingsfor each machine in the grid. Double-click the machine to be set upto display the Machine Information dialog box. In this dialog box,specify the name of the machine and its NC type.

<4> Selecting Communication from the tree displays the settings for each machine in the grid. Double-click the machine to be set up todisplay the Communication dialog box. In this dialog box, specifya communication protocol and the related items (such asFOCAS2/Ethernet IP address).

<5> Selecting NC Program Management from the tree displays thesettings for each machine in the grid. Double-clicking the machineto be set up displays the machine setup dialog box. In this dialog

box, specify a directory for managing the NC programs for thatmachine.

<6> Double-clicking i CELL in the tree displays Machine and System

under it. Selecting Machine displays the settings for each machinein the grid. Double-click the machine to be set up to display the i

CELL Machine dialog box. In this dialog box, specify the desiredi CELL functions.

<7> Set up mail and Web if necessary. See Chapters 3, “Mail,” and 4,“Web,” for detailed explanations about how to set up mail andWeb.

In the tree, make settings sequentially from top to bottom (fromMachine Information to i CELL).

Add settings sequentially,

starting at the highest

category.




- 123 -

Deleting machinesTo the contrary to addition, when deleting machines, delete their settings by going up the tree from i CELL to Machine Information.

<1> A machine cannot be deleted if the mail or Web function uses datafor the machine. To delete the machine, set up the mail or Webfunction so that it will not use data for the machine.

<2> Select i CELL and Machine from the tree. In the grid, select the

machine to be deleted by double-clicking to display the i CELL

Machine dialog box. On the Machine tab, click the Disable All button, then the OK button.

<3> Select Machine Information from the tree. In the grid, select themachine to be deleted by clicking it. Select Edit from the menu bar,then Delete from the Edit menu. When a confirmation messageappears, click the OK button. The machine is deleted.




- 124 -

2.2.6 Setting Change and CIMPLICITY Project

iCELL is software that runs on CIMPLICITY module. When a

CIMPLICITY i CELL project is operating, restrictions are imposed on

the changing of the values of some items.

Restrictions on the i CELL project Setting item

Even when an i CELL project is being

executed, a setting can be changed.

• Machine information name item

• NC program management - FTP

client setting

• Turning ON/OFF NC

display/operation/maintenance

of i CELL-machine and backup

data setting

When a setting is changed, the i CELLproject needs to be restarted.

• Communication• NC program - machine setting

When a setting is changed, the i CELL

project needs to be ended, updated,

and restarted.

• Items other than NC

display/operation/maintenance

of i CELL-machine

If an item that belongs to "Even when an i CELL project is being

executed, a setting can be changed" is modified, no message is

displayed even when the setting screen ends. i CELL can be used

without modification.

If an item that belongs to "When a setting is changed, the i CELL

project needs to be restarted." is modified, the following message appears when the setting screen ends:

Restart the i CELL project according to the instruction.

If an item that belongs to "When a setting is changed, the i CELL

project needs to be ended, updated, and restarted." is modified, thefollowing message appears when the setting screen ends:

Update and restart the i CELL project according to the instruction. If

the i CELL project is being executed, stop the i CELL project then

update and restart the i CELL project.




- 125 -

2.2.7 Stopping and Updating the i CELL Project

Stopping To stop the i CELL project, follow this procedure.

<1> From the Windows Start menu, select Start, and Program,CIMPLICITY i CELL, then i CELL Project. The CIMPLICITY

workbench appears.<2> On the CIMPLICITY workbench, check the status of the toolbar.

If the toolbar appears as shown below, it means that the i CELL

project is at a stop. Nothing need be done.

If the toolbar appears as shown below, it means that the i CELL

project is running. To stop the project, click the button .

<3> Exit the CIMPLICITY workbench.

UpdatingTo update the i CELL project, follow this procedure.

<1> Start the CIMPLICITY workbench.<2> On the toolbar of the CIMPLICITY workbench, click the setting

update button.

<3> Exit the CIMPLICITY workbench.

If the project is not running when you attempt to open the Configurationdialog box of i CELL, it is started automatically.

Check these icons.

Check these icons.

Update button




- 126 -

2.2.8 Displaying a Dialog Box When the Project Has Not BeenUpdated

If the settings on the i CELL setting screen were changed, but the

CIMPLICITY project was not updated, the following dialog boxappears when the project is started.

Starting the project from the workbenchIf the project is started from the workbench, the following dialog boxappears.

Select “Yes.” The project is updated before it is started.

Starting the project when displaying the i CELL screenIf an attempt is made to display the i CELL screen when the project is

not running (selecting Program from the Windows Start menu and thenCIMPLICITY i CELL and main menu), the following dialog box

appears.

Select “No.” The project will not be started. The i CELL screen is

displayed. Then, exit the screen.Update the project and then display the i CELL screen, while referring

to Subsection 2.2.7, “Stopping and Updating the i CELL Project.”

NOTE

Selecting “Yes” starts the project without updating it.So the data displayed on the screen is incorrect.The status of each NC and other information may bedisplayed as black rectangles.




- 127 -

2.2.9 If an Attempt to Reflect Point Settings to CIMPLICITY Fails

Before closing the Configuration dialog box, reflect point settings toCIMPLICITY if necessary. If this processing fails, the following dialog box appears.

Clicking the OK button closes the Configuration dialog box.In this case, open the Configuration dialog box of i CELL again, and

select File from the menu bar, then Update Point Configuration fromthe File menu.The CIMPLICITY point configuration settings are updated accordingto the settings of i CELL.




- 128 -

2.3 MACHINE COUNT CONFIGURATION

Selecting Project from the menu bar of the Configuration dialog box,then Machine Count Configuration from the Project menu displays theMachine Count Configuration dialog box.

This dialog box lets you register an order password.

Registration of

Order Password

Enter a 24-digit order password. Clicking the Action

button causes what you entered to be registered.

Machine This box indicates the number of machines that

corresponds to the entered order password.

Registered Order

Password and

Machine Count

This box lists the order passwords that are already

registered as well as the number of machines related to

each of the order password.

DNC2/Reader

Puncher

Machine Count

This box indicates the number of machines that can be

connected using the DNC2 or Reader/Puncher

communication protocol.

Total Machine

Count

This box indicates the total number of machines that

corresponds to the registered order passwords.

If an entered order password is correct, the number of machinescorresponding to the order password and whether the term of validity

for the order password has expired are displayed as shown below.

If the term of validity has expired, the following display appears,disabling registration.

When you register the order password for the i CELL main package, the

value of Total Machine Count is incremented by 5. When you register

the order password for a CNC connection option, the values of DNC2/Reader Puncher Machine Count and of Total Machine Count areincremented by the number indicated with the option.




- 129 -

2.4 PROJECT PROPERTY

Selecting Project from the menu bar of the Configuration dialog box,then Property from the Project menu displays the Project Propertydialog box.

This dialog box lets you make the settings related to the entire i CELL

project.

Specify the number of machines you want to connect. You can

specify as many machines as the total number of machines

allowed for the available order passwords. The range of

numbers you can enter is displayed to the right of the entry box.

Connect

Machine

Count

CAUTION

It is impossible to include, as a target for deletion, any

machine for which functions are enabled in i CELL settings.

To include a machine as a target for deletion, make sure thatall i CELL functions are disabled for the machine.

If you want to use any functions from NC Connection to Web in thei CELL project, turn on the corresponding check boxes to select the

functions. The tree displays the setting items for the selected functions.

NC Connection To transfer data between CIMPLICITY and the NC,

turn on this check box.

The checked state cannot be changed.

NC Program

Management

To perform NC program management on a PC, turn on

this check box.

The checked state cannot be changed.

iCELL To use i CELL, turn on this check box.The checked state cannot be changed.

Mail To use the mail function, turn on this check box.

Web To use the Web function, turn on this check box.

This item can be selected only on a Windows 2003

server , Windows 2000 server or Windows NT server.

For a Windows XP Professional, Windows 2000

Professional or Windows NT workstation, the Web

function cannot be selected because it is unavailable.

Read Data from

CNC

Set a method of reading data from the CNC. Check the

default, namely, "Parallel".

Clicking the OK button saves what you specified and closes the Project

Property dialog box. Clicking the Cancel button discards what youspecified when closing the dialog box.




- 130 -

2.5 MACHINE INFORMATION

Selecting “Machine Information” from the tree lists, in the grid, themachines that were previously set up.

If you double-click the row of a machine in the grid, or if you click therow of a machine row in the grid and select Edit from the menu bar, thenProperty from the Edit menu, the Machine Information dialog boxappears.

The setting items of this dialog box are explained below:

Number This box displays the machine number for the machine

selected from the grid. It cannot be changed.

Name This box lets you specify the name of the selected

machine. The machine name is up to 20 alphanumeric

characters. It must always be specified.

NC Type Select the NC type of the machine.

NC Spec. Select the NC specification (path) of the machine.

The displayed options differ depending on the selected

NC type. With Series 30i/31i/32i, detailed path

information is set using "Paths" and "Paths detail

setting", so that this box is not used.

Paths Set the number of CNC paths. This box is usable only

with Series 30i/31i/32i.




- 131 -

Paths details

setting

Set M (machining type) or T (lathe type) for each CNC

path. This box is usable only with Series 30i/31i/32i.

PMC Spec. Select the PMC specification of the machine. Available

only when NC Type is “FS15B”.

Clicking the OK button saves what you specified and closes theMachine Information dialog box. Clicking the Cancel button discardswhat you specified before closing the dialog box.

Once the i CELL function is set up, the Machine Information dialog box

appears as shown below.

If the title of the dialog box contains the phrase “(Point is defined),” youcannot change either of the NC Type, NC Spec. and PMC Type settings.To change the NC Type, NC Spec. or PMC Type setting, clear all the i

CELL functions.

To clear all the i CELL functions, select i CELL and Machine from the

tree, then double-click the target machines in the grid. The i CELL

Machine dialog box appears. On the Machine tab of this dialog box,click Disable All button, then the OK button.

If the NC Type, NC Spec., and PMC Type are changed for the machinefor which a communication protocol has been set up, thecommunication protocol is cleared to “None.”The following dialog box appears.

Selecting OK clears the communication protocol and saves the changes.Selecting Cancel deletes the changes.If you clear a communication protocol, set one again.




- 132 -

Automatic machine information update function based on communication(FOCAS2/Ethernet)

When communication is performed with the CNC by usingFOCAS2/Ethernet, a machine setting can be automatically made byobtaining various types of data from the CNC without setting themachine on this screen. In this case, enter the desired machine nameonly.The automatic machine information update function based oncommunication is described in Subsection 2.6.2, "Setting upFOCAS2/Ethernet Communication".




- 133 -

2.6 COMMUNICATION

2.6.1 Setting up Communication

Selecting “Communication” from the tree lists, in the grid, thecommunication settings for the machines that have been set up.

If you double-click the row of a machine in the grid, or if you click therow of a machine in the grid and select Edit from the menu bar, thenProperty from the Edit menu, the Communication dialog box appears.

Shown above is an example of selecting a machine for which nocommunication protocol has been set. In this dialog box, select acommunication protocol to be used. Selecting a communication

protocol displays a setting screen specific to the selectedcommunication protocol. A setting screen specific to a communication

protocol appears also if you select a machine for which thecommunication protocol has been set.

NOTEIf no machine name is set up, it is impossible to setup communication.

If the selected DNC2 or Reader/Puncher communication protocol doesnot match the number of machines you tried to connect, the followingdialog box appears.

Set up the communication protocol within a range of the number of machines connected using DNC2 or Reader/Puncher. Alternatively,

add an option for connecting additional CNCs to increase the number of machines that can be connected using DNC2 or Reader/Puncher.




- 134 -

2.6.2 Setting up FOCAS2/Ethernet Communication

Selecting “FOCAS2/Ethernet” in the Communication protocol boxdisplays the following:

The setting items of this dialog box are explained below:

IP Address This box lets you enter the IP address for the NC.

There is no default value.

Enter the same “IP address” as already specified

for the NC.

TCP Port Number This box lets you enter the TCP port number for the NC.

The default value is 8193.

Enter the same “TCP port number” as already

specified for the NC.

FwLib Timeout This box lets you specify a timeout value (in seconds)for communication with the NC.

Use a default value of 10.

Enable C4 Server This box lets you set whether to enable the C4 server

function for the PC to determine the power-off of the

NC. Set this item according to the network

configuration.

When the PC and NCs belong to the same network

as shown in Fig. 2.6.2(a), enable the function

(default). When a router is used between the PC

and NCs as shown in Fig. 2.6.2(b), disable the

function.




- 135 -

NCServer PC

Router

NC Server PC

NC NC

The server PC and NCsbelong to differentnetworks, with a router connecting the PC andNCs.

The server PC and NCs belong to the same network.

Network A

Network B

Fig. 2.6.2(a) Network configuration (1)→ C4 server enabled Fig. 2.6.2(b) Network configuration (2)→ C4 server disabled

C4 Server

Timeout

This box lets you specify a timeout value (in counts) to

decide whether to turn off the NC power. This box canbe set only when the Enable C4 Server check box is

checked.


Retry Count This box lets you specify how many times

communication with the NC is to be attempted after a

request for communication is rejected.


Re-connection

on

Communication

Error

This box lets you specify whether to make a

reconnection automatically and a reconnection method

if a communication error occurs for a poor

communication line quality. This box can be set only

when the Enable C4 Server check box is checked.Check Disable (default).

- Disable Does not make a reconnection automatically.

- Enable Makes a reconnection automatically. When the quality

of the communication line is poor, another error can

occur soon even if Enable is checked and a

reconnection is made. If a communication error occurs

frequently, do not reply on the reconnection function

but improve the quality of the communication line. Note

that you may be unaware of frequently occurring errors

if Enable is checked. If a reconnection is made using

this function, the log "Retry Connection(1)" is created in

the "CimCNC connection error log".

- Select by Point Specifies whether to make a reconnection by using the

value of the point FNCmmmpp.F_COM_RETRY (with

mmm representing a 3-digit machine number and pp

representing a 2-digit path number). If a communication

error occurs, i CELL sets the point to True. To make a

reconnection, set the point to False. If a reconnection is

made using this function, the log "Retry Connection(2)"

is created in the "CimCNC connection error log". When

using this function, the user needs to add a script that

monitors the point and sets the point to False when the

point is set to True.

Retry Interval This box lets you specify an interval between retries for

communication with the NC to be made after a requestfor communication is rejected.





- 136 -

Enable This check box lets you specify whether to enable

communication with the NC.

To communicate with the NC, turn on the check box.


Confirm the

Communication

Configuration

Checks that communication between the NC and PC is

enabled.

Update Machine

information by

comm.

When you click <OK>, the settings of Section 2.5,

"MACHINE INFORMATION", are updated by

communication with the NC. If there is a setting

difference between the machine information and the

data read from the NC, the difference is displayed to

check if the setting is to be updated. When using this

function, check the check box. No default value is

assigned. This function can be used only when the

Enable C4 Server check box is checked.

NOTE1 After setting the communication protocol to

“FOCAS2/Ethernet,” first click the Default button toselect the default values. After this, set up the IP address and TCP portnumber.

2 When the “Enable C4 Server” check box is checked,the power state of the CNC is checked based ondata sent periodically from the CNC. In this case,

the overview screen provides a power-off indication2 to 3 seconds after the power to the CNC is turnedoff.When the “Enable C4 Server” check box is notchecked, the power state of the CNC is checkedbased on a communication time-out error. So, after the power to the CNC is turned off, the overviewscreen does not provide a power-off indication for awhile.

3 Before checking the "Update Machine informationby comm." check box, check that communicationbetween the PC and NC is enabled, by clicking the<Confirm the Communication Configuration>button.

For an item above that is commented with “There is no default value,”clicking the Default button does not change its value.For an item indicated with a default value, clicking the Default buttonselects the default value.

<Confirm the Communication Configuration> button to check whether it is possible to perform communication between the PC and NC.




- 137 -

Once you set up the i CELL function, the Communication dialog box

appears as shown below.

If the title of the dialog box contains the phrase “(Point is defined),” youcannot change the communication protocol. To change thecommunication protocol, clear all the i CELL functions.

To clear all the i CELL functions, select i CELL and Machine from the

tree, then double-click the target machine in the grid. The i CELL

Machine dialog box appears. On the Machine tab of this dialog box,click Disable All button, then the OK button.




- 138 -

2.6.3 Confirming the FOCAS2/Ethernet Communication Setting

Clicking the <Confirm the Communication Configuration> button onthe FOCAS2/Ethernet communication setting screen displays a screenfor confirming the FOCAS2/Ethernet communication setting.

NOTEThe buttons in the dialog box are used to checkcommunication errors (if any).Do not use them during normal operation.

Displays for the correct setupWhen the IP addresses for the PC and NC are set up correctly, and the

NC power is on, the dialog box appears as shown below.

<1> “PING test...” is a result of testing the PING command in the NC.

<2> “Get System Information test...” is the system information of the NC.CNC Type: Indicates an NC type.15 Series 15i

(Caution: This model cannot be connected to i CELL.)

16 Series 16i

18 Series 18i

21 Series 21i

30 Series 30i

31 Series 31i 32 Series 32i

PD Power Mate i -D

<1> PING test...

<2> Get System Information test...

<3> C4Api test...




- 139 -

PH Power Mate i -H

0 Series 0i

M/T: Indicates an M/T type.M Machining center T LatheMM M series two-path controlTT T series two-/three-path controlMT T series with the complex machining functionP Punch/press

(Caution: This model cannot be connected to i CELL.)

L Laser (Caution: This model cannot be connected to i CELL.)

Series : Indicates the CNC software series number, using afour-digit character string.

Version : Indicates the CNC software version number, using afour-digit character string.

Max Axes : Indicates the maximum number of controllableaxes.

Axes : Indicates the number of controlled axes.

<3> “C4Api test...” indicates whether the NC power is on or off.Live=True means it is recognized that the NC power is on.Live=False means it is recognized that the NC power is off.

NOTEWhen the "Enable C4 Server" check box is clearedin communication setting, Live=True/False in <3>need not be checked.

Incorrect setting (1)If an IP address set up for the NC or PC is incorrect, or the NC power isoff, the dialog box may appear as shown below.

If the “Reply From...” line does not appear, the probable causes are:(1) The NC power is off.(2) The NC IP address is different from the one set up in the

Configuration dialog box.

(3) The NC network address or the host address is incorrect.Refer to an applicable Ethernet board manual for explanations about theIP address.




- 140 -

Incorrect setting (2)When the IP addresses set up for the PC and NC are correct, and the NC

power is on, if any other kind of setting is incorrect, the dialog box mayappear as shown below.

If the “Get System Information test...” line does not appear, the probable causes are:(1) An IP address for the PC or the devices for which a TCP/IP has

been set up, rather than for the NC, has been specified.(2) The “TCP port number” set for the NC is incorrect.

If the message “No option (Extended driver and libraries function)” isdisplayed, the NC lacks the “extended driver library option.” Theembedded Ethernet protocol does not need this option, though.




- 141 -

Incorrect setting (3)When the IP addresses set up for the PC and NC are correct, and the NC

power is on, if any other kind of setting is incorrect, the dialog box mayappear as shown below.

Unlike the display of correct settings, “C4Api test...” contains

Live=False.

In this case, the probable causes are:

(1) The “PC's Udp port setting” displayed when i CELL was installed

in the PC does not match the UDP port number set up for the NC.On the [C4Svc] tab, the “PC's Udp port setting” for the current PCappears as shown below. Ensure that it matches the UDP portnumber set up for the NC. If it does not match, change the UDP

port number set up for the NC so that it matches the followingdisplay.

(2) The “Time Interval” for the NC is 0.Enter 50.

NOTEWhen the "Enable C4 Server" check box is clearedin communication setting, Live=True/False need notbe checked. The "Time Interval" for the NC need notbe set either.




- 142 -

2.6.4 DNC2 Communication Setting

Selecting the “DNC2” communication protocol displays the following:

The setting items of this dialog box are explained below.Port This box lets you enter the name of a port that performs

serial communication.


Specify a serial port to which the machine is

connected.

BaudRate This box lets you enter a baud rate for serial

communication.


Specify the same baud rate as set in the NC.

Data Length This box lets you enter the length of data to be

transferred by serial communication.


Data Code This box lets you enter the data code to be used in


Use a default value of ASCII.

Parity This box lets you enter the parity check type to be used

in serial communication.

Use a default value of EVEN. Stop Bit This box lets you enter the number of stop bits to be

used in serial communication.


Enable This box lets you specify whether to enable




NOTE After setting the communication protocol to “DNC2,”first click the Default button to select the defaultvalues. After this, set up the port and baud rate.




- 143 -

For an item commented with “There is no default value” in the abovedescription, clicking the Default button does not change its value.For an item indicated with a default value, clicking the Default buttonselects the default value.

No setting item under Option need be changed. Use the followingdefault values, which are selected by clicking the Default button.

Retry 5

NAK Retry 3

Data Length 256

Timeout 5

EOT Timeout 5

Output Timeout 1

A.L. Timeout 120

Once you set up the i CELL functions, the Communication dialog box

title appears as shown below.

If the title of the dialog box contains the phrase “(Point is defined),” youcannot change the communication protocol. To change the

communication protocol, clear all the i CELL functions.To clear all the i CELL functions, select i CELL and Machine from the

tree, then double-click the target machine in the grid. The i CELL

Machine dialog box appears. On the Machine tab of this dialog box,click the Disable All button, then the OK button.




- 144 -

2.6.5 Reader/Puncher Communication Setting

Selecting the “Reader/Puncher” communication protocol displays thefollowing:

The setting items of this dialog box are explained below.

Port This box lets you enter the name of a port that performs



Specify a serial port to which the machine is

connected.

BaudRate This box lets you enter a baud rate for serial

communication.


Specify the same baud rate as set in the NC.

Data Length This box lets you enter the length of data to be

transferred by serial communication.


Data Code This box lets you enter the data code to be used in


Use a default value of ISO.

Parity This box lets you enter the parity check type to be used

in serial communication.Use a default value of NONE.

Stop Bit This box lets you enter the number of stop bits to be

used in serial communication.


Enable This box lets you specify whether to enable







- 145 -

NOTE After setting the communication protocol to

“Reader/Puncher,” first click the Default button toselect the default values. After this, set up the port and baud rate.

For an item commented with “There is no default value” in the abovedescription, clicking the Default button does not change its value.For an item indicated with a default value, clicking the Default buttonselects the default value.

No setting item under Option need be changed. Use the followingdefault values, which are selected by clicking the Default button.

TV Check Check

Send DC2 and DC4 Check

Send ER(%) at the head and the end Check




- 146 -

2.6.6 Data Server Communication Setting

NOTEWhen only the Data Server function of the NC isused and no other i CELL functions are used, see

Section 2.8, "NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - FTPCLIENT SETTINGS".

The setting screen of each communication protocol has a "Use DataServer" check box.When transferring NC programs on the NC program managementscreen by using the Data Server function of the NC, check this check

box. A tab for Data Server setting is displayed.

Check here.

The setting items of this dialog box are explained below.

Use the same IP address

as FOCAS2/Ethernet

Displayed only when the communication

protocol is FOCAS2/Ethernet.

This box is checked by default.

If the IP address of the Data Server on the NC

is the same as that of FOCAS2/Ethernet,

check this box. Otherwise, clear this box.

When this box is cleared, the next IP address

item can be set.

IP Address Specify the IP address of the Data Server.

No default value is assigned.

Set the same value as the "IP Address" of

the Data Server set on the NC.




- 147 -

User Name Set a user name to be used for logging in to the

Data Server.


Set the same name as "User Name"(of FTP

server) specified in the Data Server setting

on the NC.

Password Set a password for logging in to the Data

Server.


Set the same value as "Password" (of FTP

server) specified in the Data Server setting

on the NC.

Login Dir Set a login directory for logging in to the Data

Server.


Set the same value as "Login DIR" (of FTPserver) specified in the Data Server setting

on the NC.

Port Number Set a port number to be used for making a

connection to the Data Server.


Set the same value as "Port Number" of the

Data Server specified on the NC. Usually,

the default value 21 is used.

After setting an IP address, user name, and password, click the<Confirm the Communication Configuration> button. PING and FTP

login tests are conducted to confirm the communication setting. For details, see Subsection 2.6.7, "Confirming Data Server CommunicationSetting".




- 148 -

2.6.7 Confirming Data Server Communication Setting

When you click the <Confirm the Communication Configuration> button on the Data Server communication setting screen, thecommunication setting confirmation screen appears.An example of correct setting and examples of incorrect settings are

provided below together with countermeasures.

The communication setting confirmation screen is also used in Section2.8, "NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - FTP CLIENT SETTINGS".This screen is used to confirm both Data Server communication andFTP server communication, so that a Data Server and FTP server arecollectively called a "communication destination".

Correct setting

When the settings are correct, all of (1) through (3) are displayed. Theinformation below is displayed.

(1) In "PING test", the results of testing the PING command on thecommunication destination are displayed. When a communicationsetting is made correctly, the communication destination returns"Reply from ..." as shown above.

(2) In "FTP Connect & Disconnect test", the results of conducting aconnection test to the communication destination are displayed.When a communication setting is made correctly, the currentdirectory after login such as "257 "/NCDATA" is currentdirectory" indicated on the bottom line is displayed.

(3) In "FTP Directory List test", the results of conducting acommunication destination directory display test are displayed. If the communication setting is correct, a list of the files or directories in the currently logged-in directory is displayed.After conducting this test, log out.

(1) PING test

(2) FTP Connect & Disconnect test

(3) FTP Directory List test




- 149 -

Meanings of messages displayed in FTP Connect testThe message displayed with a number depends on the specifications of the communication destination software. The table below indicates themeanings of numbers and examples of display on the Data Server.

Number Meaning and example of display on Data Server

220The communication destination is ready for accepting a new user.

Example) FANUC FTP server ready.

331Login is started and the password is requested.

Example) User name okay, need password.

230Login is completed.

Example) User logged in, proceed.

257 A path name (current directory in the test) was created.

Example) “/NCDATA” is current directory.

530

Login operation is not performed.

Example) Not logged in.

Method of retest on the communication setting confirmation screenThis screen is activated from the communication setting screen.Using the procedure below, a retest for communication confirmationcan be conducted without quitting this screen and returning to thecommunication setting screen.(1) Enter the desired communication destination in [IpAddr].(2) Enter the user name in [Usrname].(3) Enter the password in [Password].(4) Click the <Connect Test> button.

When a communication confirmation is made by a retest, reenter theretest information on the communication setting screen.

Incorrect setting (1)If the IP address of the communication destination is not set correctly,or the power to the communication destination is off, the followingindication may be provided in "(1) PING test".

When the "Reply From ..." line is not displayed, check the following:(1) The power to the NC is off, or the cable is disconnected.(2) The IP address of the NC does not match the setting on the setting

screen.

(3) The settings of the NC network address and host address areincorrect.




- 150 -

Incorrect setting (2)When a connection is made to an NC with the Data Server function notenabled or to a PC with the FTP server function not enabled, "<2> FTPConnect Test" may fail even if "<1> PING test" is successful.In such a case, a message indicating the readiness for user acceptancesuch as "220 FANUC FTP Server ready" is not displayed from thecommunication destination, but "Cannot connect ..." is displayed. Set acorrect communication destination. The screen display below providesan example where the communication destination is an NC that does nothave the Data Server function.

Incorrect setting (3)When a set user name or password is incorrect, "<2> FTP ConnectTest" may fail even if "<1> PING test" is successful. In such a case, amessage indicating the readiness for user acceptance such as "220FANUC FTP Server ready." is displayed from the communicationdestination, and a message indicating a failure in login such as "530 Notlogged in." is displayed.Check the user name and password.The screen display below provides an example of incorrect passwordsetting. A similar screen is displayed if an incorrect user name isentered.




- 151 -

2.7 NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT – MACHINE SETTINGS

Selecting “NC Program Management” – “Machine Settings” from thetree lists, in the grid, the NC program management settings for themachines that have been set up.

If you double-click the row of a machine in the grid, or if you click therow of a machine in the grid and select Edit from the menu bar, thenProperty from the Edit menu, the NC Program Transfer setting dialog

box appears.

The tabs displayed in the NC Program Transfer setting dialog box varydepending on what communication protocol is in use. The exampleshown above applies to FOCAS2/Ethernet. For DNC2 andReader/Puncher, the following apply.

Tabs for DNC2 Tabs for Reader/Puncher

Settings are grouped on

a different tab.

Closes the NC Program

Transfer setting dialog box.Save what you specified.




- 152 -

2.7.1 General Tab

The General tab lets you specify a directory for NC programs to be sentor received, file extensions, and O number digit.The setting items on this tab are explained below:

Directory Setting frameDefault Directory This box lets you specify what directory in the PC is to

be used to manage the NC programs for each NC.

It is possible to assign a directory to each NC. It is also

possible to assign one directory to all or multiple NCs

so that NC programs can be shared.

Clicking the button at right of the text box displays a file

list. Select a default directory from the file list.

NOTEIf one directory is assigned to all or multiple NCs, it isimpossible to create NC programs having the sameO-number but different contents.

Create default directories as shown below:1 C:\Program Files\Fanuc\iCELL (Selected at installation.)2 CimProject (Automatically created during installation.)

3 NcData (Create a parent directory for the default directory.)

001 (Create a default directory for NC001.)002 (Create a default directory for NC002.)

This default directory configuration enables efficient backup to be performed. See Section 5.1, “BACKUP,” of Part II, “Installation.”




- 153 -

File Extension Settings frameDefault

Extension

Enter a default extension in this text box. Usually leave

the default extension “.dat” without changing it. A file

having the file extension entered here is displayed as

“NC program” in the type box in the NC Program

Management dialog box when file details are displayed.

Extension of Sub

Program

Enter the extension to be used for a subprogram in this

text box. Usually specify the same extension as the

default file extension.

Extension of List

File

Enter the extension to be used for a list file in this text

box. Specify an extension different from the default

extension or subprogram extension. If it is the same as

the default extension or subprogram extension, an

error is detected when the file is saved.

NOTE1 The DNC2 communication protocol does not

support subprogram transfer or list file transfer. So,it is impossible to set a value in the subprogram andlist file extension boxes.

2 When a connection is made with Series 30i/31i/32i,

Default Extension and Extension of Sub Programcannot be set (an extension is required with a listfile). With these series of CNCs, an NC program canbe managed using a file name including anextension, so that the setting of an extension isunnecessary.When a file named "Shaft001.main" is created in theCNC memory and is uploaded to i CELL, for

example, the file name is "Shaft001.main.dat" if theextension ".dat" is set with i CELL. To avoid this

kind of file name confusion, no extension is set.

If the communication

protocol in use is DNC2,

these item names are

dimmed, disabling any

value from being

entered.




- 154 -

O number digit frame8-digit program

number [Use

OXXXXXXXX.dat

format file name

for O1-99999999]

Check this check box when using the 8-digit O number

option with the CNC. When a file with an O number is to

be downloaded, a file name not in the OXXXX.dat

format but in the OXXXXXXXX.dat format is found. For

uploading from the CNC, a file in the format

OXXXXXXXX.dat is created on the PC. This check box

is not displayed when the 8-digit O number option is not

specified with the CNC or a communication protocol

such as DNC2 that cannot use an 8-digit O number is

set. This check box can also be set with the function

"Update Machine information by comm." described in

Subsection 2.6.2, "Setting up FOCAS2/Ethernet

Communication". When this function is used, whether

to use the 8-digit O number option with the CNC is set.

So, do not make any modification on this screen.Compatible with

4-digit [Use

OXXXX.dat

format file name

for O1-O9999

only]

When a file with an O number is to be downloaded, not

a file in the format OXXXXXXXX.dat but a file in the

format OXXXX.dat is found for a 4-digit O number from

1 to 9999. For uploading from the CNC, a file in the

format OXXXX.dat is created on the PC. This setting is

disabled for an O number of O10000 or up, and a file in

the format OXXXXXXXX.dat is used. This option can

be used only when "8-digit program number" above is

checked.




- 155 -

2.7.2 Communication Setting

The communication tab appears only when the communication protocolin use is Reader/Puncher.

This dialog box displays communication settings. It does not allowthem to be changed.Clicking the Set Details button lets you set details of Reader/Puncher communication. For these items, clicking the Default button in theCommunication setting dialog box selects default values. Usually, it isunnecessary to change the default settings.




- 156 -

2.7.3 Download Tab

Download tab is displayed only if Reader/Puncher or FOCAS2/Ethernet is used for communication protocol.

The Download tab lets you specify downloading. The setting items of this tab are explained below:

Transfer Styles for Sub Programs frameThe “for Sub Program...” frame lets you specify a transmission methodfor subprograms.

Ignore Subprograms are not sent. Only specified NC programs

are downloaded.

Concatenate

(Send one

after another)

The main program is searched for subprogram calls.

Subprograms are sent after the main program is sent.

Merge

(Replace

calling line)

The main program is searched for subprogram calls. When

the main program is being sent, subprograms are

embedded in the main program so that they can be sent

together with the main program.

Next, subprogram transmission is set up.

Calling Type The code to be used for subprogram calling can be set up.

M98, G65, and G66 can be combined for setting.




- 157 -

Masks of Sub

Programs

It is possible to disable transmission of subprograms even

if their calling is found. Subprograms can be specified in

units of 1000. It is possible to specify, for example, that

subprograms 8000 to 8999 and 9000 to 9999 are not to be

sent because they are in NC memory.

1st Directory

Searching

Sub Program

2nd Directory

Searching

Sub Program

3rd Directory

Searching

Sub Program

Up to three directories can be specified as storage for

subprograms. Numbers 1 to 3 represent the order in which

the directories are searched through. To put another way, if

the subprograms having the same name are in the [1st

Directory Searching Sub Program] and [2nd Directory

Searching Sub Program], the one in [1st Directory

Searching Sub Program] is sent.

An entered directory name can be deleted by pressing the

backspace key.

Search Sub

Program fromMain

program's

directory

If this check box is checked, a subprogram search

operation is performed in such a way that the folder including the main program is searched instead of 1st

Directory Searching Sub Program then 2nd Directory

Searching Sub Program and 3rd Directory Searching Sub

Program are searched. When this check box is checked,

1st Directory Searching Sub Program cannot be set.

NOTE1 Only the directories set up in the [1st Directory

Searching Sub Program] to [3rd Directory SearchingSub Program] are searched for subprograms.(If [Search Sub Program from Main program'sdirectory] is checked, only the folder including themain program, and the directories set in [2ndDirectory Searching Sub Program] and [3rdDirectory Searching Sub Program] are searched.)If a directory is set up in the [Default Directory] butnot in any of the [1st Directory Searching SubProgram] to the [3rd Directory Searching SubProgram], no subprogram is searched for.

2 In the same way as for default directories, configurethe [1st Directory Searching Sub Program] to the

[3rd Directory Searching Sub Program] as childdirectories of NcData so that backup files can becreated easily.

Transfer Styles for NC Programs Registered in List File frameThis frame lets you set up list file transmission. The setting items in thisframe are explained below:Concatenate Files registered in the list file are sent separately.

Merge The multiple main NC programs registered in the

list file are transferred after being linked into a

single NC program.

Wait for transfer

buffers to become 0

before the next record

at an extension

Turn on this check box if “Merge” is selected.




- 158 -

2.7.4 Upload Tab

Upload File Saving frame

This frame lets you specify how to save uploaded files. The settingitems in this frame are explained below.When you click Default button on Communication Setting screen,items are set like shown above.Usually, make the settings shown above so that they match the line-endsetting used by Windows. If they do not match, NotePad cannot readuploaded files.

Append ER[%] at

the head and the

end

This item must be turned on.

Append CR+LF atthe end and Save

NC Program

Files are saved with the Windows-style line endcharacter.

Append LF at the

end and Save NC

Program

Files are saved with the UNIX-style line end character.

Append Nothing

at the end and

Save NC Program

Files are saved with the exact line end character

received from the NC.




- 159 -

2.8 NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - FTP CLIENT SETTINGS

On the NC program management screen, a connection can be made withan FTP server operating on another personal computer to enableFTP-based NC program transfer.

. . .

PC

FTP client

i CELL

PC

FTP server

CAD, etc. NC

FTP server

NC

FTP server

Ethernet

For this purpose, make an FTP client setting to specify a condition for i

CELL to log in to the FTP server as an FTP client.Moreover, when only the Data Server function of the NC is used and

the other i CELL functions are not used, make an FTP client setting to

specify a condition for logging in to the FTP server of the NC.

From the tree, select NC Program Management then FTP ClientSettings. A list of the FTP client settings currently made is displayed inthe grid.

To edit a setting already registered, double-click the machine line of thegrid, or click the line of the grid then select Edit then Property from themenu.To register a new setting, double-click the blank line at the end of thegrid or select Edit then New from the menu.




- 160 -

The client setting dialog box is displayed, regardless of which operationwas chosen.

The example of screen display above is used for creation. For editing, avalue is set in the item of Name, and the value of the Name item cannot

be modified.

The table below indicates the meanings of the setting items.

Name Set a name for identification in login to the FTP

server.

IP Address Specify the IP address of the FTP server.

User Name Set a user name to be used for logging in to

the FTP server.Password Set a password to be used for logging in to the

FTP server.

Login Dir Set a login directory to be used for logging in

to the FTP server.

Port Number Set a port number to be used for connection to

the FTP server.

Usually, the default value 21 is used.

Upon completion of communication setting, click the <Confirm theCommunication Configuration> button for confirmation. For details,see Subsection 2.6.7, "Confirming Data Server Communication

Setting".




- 161 -

2.9 i CELL MACHINE

Selecting i CELL and Machine from the tree lists, in the grid, the i

CELL machine settings for the machines that have been set up.

If you double-click the row of a machine in the grid, or if you click therow of a machine in the grid and select Edit from the menu bar, thenProperty from the Edit menu, the i CELL Machine dialog box appears.

This dialog box displays the settings for the machine selected from thegrid. Turn on the i CELL functions used for that machine. The overview,

machining result, workpiece process result, alarm, tool life functions, NC Disp, Ope and Mainte and Operator Message correspond to therespective i CELL screens.

Clicking the Enable All button enables all the functions. Clicking theDisable All button disables all the functions.

The overview and alarm functions are turned on automatically whenany other function is turned on because they are basic functions.

NOTEThe functions that can be selected depend on thetypes of the communication protocol and NC that

are in use. See Chapter 3, "OPERATINGENVIRONMENT", in Part I, "GENERAL".




- 162 -

Setting the number of axisFor communication using FOCAS2/Ethernet, the number of axes of the

NC needs to be set. If the power to the NC is on and communication isenabled, the number of axes is automatically obtained from the NC. Inthis case, no action is required.

(1) If the number of axes has not been set even once

When the i CELL machine setting screen is opened

a. The power to the NC is on and communication is enabled

→ The number of axes is automatically obtained from the NC and set. No action is required.

b. The power to the NC is off, and communication is disabled.

→ The number of axes is not automatically set. Thenumber of axes needs to be set manually.

(2) If the number of axes has been set at least onceThe number of axes is not automatically modified.If the number of axes is changed afterwards, modify the settingmanually, or obtain the number of axes from the NC by operatingthe screen.

If the number of axes is not set even when the i CELL function is

checked on the i CELL machine setting screen, pressing the OK button

displays the following dialog box:




- 163 -

The procedure for setting the number of axes is described below.(1) Press the Number of Axes button on the i CELL machine setting

screen. The screen for setting the number of axes is displayed.

(2) The list on the left side of the screen displays an NC path and thenumber of axes of the path. When the number of axes is not set, ahyphen (-) is indicated.

(3) If the power to the NC is on and communication is enabled, pressthe Get from NC button. The number of axes for all paths isautomatically obtained from the NC and set.

(4) If the number of axes cannot be obtained from the NC, set a valuemanually.(a) On the list, click the line of a path for which the number of

axes is to be set.

(b) In the box for inputting the number of axes, set the number of axes of the path.

(c) Press the OK button. The entered value is displayed in thelist.

(d) Repeat steps (a) to (c) for all paths.(5) When the setting of the number of axes is completed, press the

Return button.

NOTEWhenever possible, obtain the number of axes fromthe NC for setting instead of manual input.

Setting the number of operator messagesWhen operator messages are displayed on a machine thatcommunicates using FOCAS2/Ethernet, the number of messages mayneed to be specified, depending on the model of NC.If the power to the NC is on and communication is enabled, the number of messages is automatically obtained from the NC. In this case, noaction is required.

Models of NCs that require the number of messages to be specified:

Series 16i/18i/21i, Series 0i

Use bit 0 of parameter No. 3207 to specify the number of messages. For details, refer to the parameter manual of each NC.




- 164 -

For other models of NCs, the number of messages need not bespecified.1. For NCs that require the number of messages to be specified

The radio button for the number of messages can be operated.(1) If the number of messages has not be set even once

When the i CELL machine setting screen is opened

a. The power to the NC is on and communication is enabled.

→ The number of messages is automatically obtained fromthe NC and set. No action is required.

b. The power to the NC is off and communication is disabled.

→ The number of messages is not automatically set. Thenumber of messages needs to be set manually.

(2) If the number of messages has been set at least onceThe number of messages is not automatically modified.If the number of messages is changed afterwards bymodifying the NC parameter, modify the setting manually, or obtain the number of messages from the NC by pressing theGet from the NC button.

2. For models of NCs that do not require the number of messages to be specified

One of the radio buttons for Number of Msg is selected.The radio button cannot be operated to modify the value.

If the number of messages is not set even when Operator Message is

checked on the i CELL machine setting screen, pressing the OK button

displays the following dialog box:

Select the number of messages manually, or press the Get from NC button after turning on the power to the NC and enablingcommunication.

NOTEWhenever possible, obtain the number of messagesfrom the NC for setting instead of manual input.




- 165 -

2.9.1 Workpiece Process Result

Overview Using the workpiece process result requires that the NC inform i CELL

of the beginning and end of the process, and, if necessary, theworkpiece ID and process end ID. This information transfer betweenthe NC and i CELL is performed using the custom macro variables of

the NC.

The NC changes the values of custom macro variables that mean the beginning and end of the process, using an NC program. i CELL reads

these values periodically to judge on the beginning and end of the NC process, and records the result in a database.

i CELLJudge on the beginningof the process.

Judge on the end of theprocess.

Write the workpieceprocess result to adatabase.

10

Custom macrovariable for thebeginning of theprocess

Workpiece machining

10

Custom macrovariable for theend of theprocess

NC program

NC Periodical reading

Accordingly, the following procedure is needed to set up the workpiece process result.<1> Determine what items are to be acquired from the NC.<2> Determine to which custom macro variables the items to be

acquired are to be assigned.

Items to be acquired from the NCi CELL collects the following required and optional items from the NC,

using the Workpiece Process Result tab.

Required itemsSequence Number, Process Begin, Process End,

Handshake ON/OFF

Optional items Workpiece ID, O Number, Process End ID, User Area ID

Handshaking with the NC for informing of the beginning and end of the

process requires the items listed below.

Items required

in handshakingConfirmation of Begin, Confirmation of End




- 166 -

Handshaking with the NCThe NC informs i CELL of the beginning and end of the process in two

ways. The first way uses handshaking, and the second way does not.

<1> Not using handshakingThe NC keeps the value of a custom macro variable for notification of the beginning and end of the process at 1 for acertain time then resets it to 0.The NC cannot detect whether i CELL has read the change in the

custom macro variable value, but it continues machining even if i

CELL is not operating. No workpiece process result is collected if i CELL is not operating, however.

Beginning and end of the process 1

(The value is changed by the NC.) 0

<2> Using handshakingThe NC changes the value of the custom macro variable for notification of the beginning and end of the process to 1, and thenwaits until the value of the custom macro variable for confirmationof the beginning and end becomes 1. When the latter variable

becomes 1, the NC resets the former variable to 0.This method can accurately inform i CELL of the beginning and

end of the process. However, handshaking is impossible unless i

CELL is operating. If i CELL is not operating, the NC cannot start

machining until the handshaking timer in the machiningsubprogram detects a timeout.Confirmation of the beginning and end 1(The value is changed by i CELL.) 0

Beginning and end of the process 1(The value is changed by the NC.) 0

Even if this method is in use, resetting a custom macro variable for specifying whether to use handshaking to 0 disables handshaking.

Custom macro variable assignment

Once you have decided the item on which data is to be collected fromthe NC, assign the item to a custom macro variable not being used bythe NC. Set the variable number of that custom macro variable in theWorkpieces Process Result tab of i CELL. Also create an NC program

for informing of the beginning and end of the process, using the custommacro variable.Read the following descriptions for explanations about a WorkpiecesProcess Result tab of i CELL. Also see Subsection 2.12.2, “Workpieces

Process Result,” for explanations about NC programs.If you want to display character strings, rather than digits, for theworkpiece ID and process end ID in the workpieces process resultdialog box, see Section 2.10, “WORKPIECES PROCESS RESULTSYSTEM CONFIGURATION.”




- 167 -

SettingWhen the Workpieces Process Result tab is selected from the i CELL

Machine dialog box, it appears as shown below:

This tab lets you specify the numbers of custom macro variables to beused for informing of the values of the beginning and end of the process,

workpiece ID, O number, process end ID, and user area ID.

To use handshaking in informing of the beginning and end of the process, turn on Handshake with NC.

The following four items must always be set up.

Sequence

Number

This is the number of a custom macro variable for

which the sequence number that represents a

machining number is set.

Process Begin This is the number of a custom macro variable for

informing of the beginning of the process.

Process End This is the number of a custom macro variable for

informing of the end of the process. Handshake

ON/OFF


informing from the NC whether to use handshaking.




- 168 -

The following two items are necessary only when Handshake with NCis turned on.Confirmation of

Begin


handshaking with Process Begin.

When the NC sets the Process Begin custom macro

variable to 1, the PC sets this (Confirmation of Begin)

variable to 1 to inform the NC that it recognized the

beginning of the process.

Confirmation of

End


handshaking with Process End.

When the NC sets the Process End custom macro

variable to 1, the PC sets this (Confirmation of End)

variable to 1 to inform the NC that it recognized the end

of the process.

The following four items are optional. If the NC is to inform the PC of their values, turn on the corresponding checkboxes and specify custommacro variable numbers.Workpiece ID This is the number of a custom macro variable for

representing the ID of the workpiece that was

processed.

O Number This is the number of a custom macro variable for

representing the O number of the program executed for

machining.

Process End ID This is the number of a custom macro variable for

representing the end status of the process.

User Area ID This is the number of a custom macro variable for

representing the ID that the user can use freely.

Clicking the Assign in order from Sequence Number buttonsequentially assigns values to the items that can be set up, starting at theSequence Number.

The values set on this tab must match those in the NC program used ininforming of the workpiece process result.




- 169 -

2.9.2 Automatic Data Backup

With i CELL, various types of NC data can be automatically backed upat regular intervals.Check the NC Disp, Ope and Mainte check box of the function tab on

the i CELL machine setting screen. The Backup Data button is enabled.

Check

Enabled

Press the Backup Data button to display the backup data screen shown below.

(1) Select adata type.

(2) The settingsregistered for aselected datatype aredisplayed.

(3) Backupcondition

The operation procedure is described below.(1) Select a type of data to be backed up.(2) The settings registered for a selected data type are displayed as a

list on the right side of the screen.(3) To add a setting, specify a backup condition and press the Add

button. To edit a setting already registered, select the setting fromthe list. Then, the registered backup condition is displayed. Editthe condition and press the Correct button.To delete a setting already registered, select the setting from thelist, then press the Delete button.




- 170 -

The meanings of the setting items are as follows:

Data Type Select a type of NC data to be backed up from

the following:

• Alarm history

• Operation history

• Message history

• Parameter

• Tool offset

• Pitch error compensation

• Custom macro

• Workpiece origin offset

Frequency Select a frequency of backup from the

following:

• Invalidity: Backup operation is not

performed.

• Daily: Backup operation is performed daily.• Monday - Sunday: Backup operation is

performed on a specified day of the week.

• Specified day: Backup operation is

performed on a specified day of each

month.

Time Select a number and select Cycle or Time.

When Cycle is selected, a specified number

means a backup interval. When Time is

selected, a specified number means the time

when backup operation is to be performed.

Format Only when Alarm history, Operation history, or

Message history is specified in Data Type,"CSV" format or "TXT" format can be selected.

For the other types of data, "TXT" format is

used.

Days For alarm, operation, and message history

data, specify the number of past days to

preserve data of that period. For the other

types of data, specify the number of past days

to preserve backup files of that period. Data

whose preservation period has elapsed is

discarded. When 0 is specified, data is not

discarded.

For one type of data, multiple backup conditions can be registered. Inthis case, data is backed up at the timing determined by ORing allconditions. For the same type of data, the same format and the samenumber of preservation days need to be set.

The maintenance screen of i CELL can be used to search for and display

alarm history data, operation history data, and message history data.




- 171 -

NOTE1 An alarm history involves huge amounts of data. So,

do not back up this type of data more frequently thandaily.2 If a backup operation is performed during

acquisition of workpieces process result data,workpieces process result data may not be acquiredor correct workpieces process result data may notbe acquired. Do not perform a backup operationduring acquisition of workpieces process resultdata.

3 For pitch error compensation data, the optional pitcherror compensation function is required. For custom

macro variable data, the custom macro B option isrequired. For workpiece origin offset data, theworkpiece coordinate system option is required.

4 With the Power Mate i, message history data and

workpiece origin offset data cannot be backed up.5 The function for backing up an alarm history,

operation history, and message history of FS30i/31i/32i is under development.

6 With series other than Series 30i/31i/32i, an alarmhistory, operation history, and message history arebacked up, but parameters, tool offset data, pitch

error compensation data, custom macros, andworkpiece origin offset data are not backed up if theNC is in operation at the time of backup operation.With Series 30i/31i/32i, parameters, tool offset data,pitch error compensation data, custom macros, andworkpiece origin offset data are backed up even if the NC is in operation at the time of backupoperation.

7 Alarm history data, operation history data, andmessage history data older than the specifiednumber of preservation days is not backed up.

Backed up data is saved under the following directory:%iCELL%\AutoBkupFolder

Here, the drive name depends on the location where i CELL is installed.

The table below indicates the names of files created.

History data

File nameData type

CSV format TXT format

Alarm history AAA_Alhis.csv AAA_Alhis.txt

Operation history AAA_Ophis.csv AAA_Ophis.txtMessage history AAA_Omhis.csv AAA_Omhis.txt

In the table above:




- 172 -

AAA represents a machine number. If a machine number is shorter than three digits, O is placed at the start.

Variable data

Data type File name

Parameter AAA_BB_param_YYYYMMDD_HHNN.txt

Tool offset AAA_BB_tlofs_YYYYMMDD_HHNN.txt

Pitch error compensation AAA_BB_pcherr_YYYYMMDD_HHNN.txt

Custom macro AAA_BB_cmval_YYYYMMDD_HHNN.txt

Workpiece origin offset AAA_BB_wzofs_YYYYMMDD_HHNN.txt

In the table above:AAA represents a machine number, and BB represents a path number.For a one-digit number, O is placed at the start.YYYYMMDD_HHNN represents date (year/month/day)_time

(hours/minutes) when data was backed up.




- 173 -

2.10 WORKPIECES PROCESS RESULT SYSTEM

CONFIGURATION

NOTEIf any of the following operations is performed duringacquisition of workpieces process result data,workpieces process result data may not beacquired, or correct workpieces process result datamay not be acquired:

•Data backup using the automatic data backupfunction

•Data input/output operation using the maintenance

screen•NC program input/output using the NC program

management screenDuring acquisition of workpieces process resultdata, do not perform these operations.

Selecting i CELL, System, and Workpieces Process Result from the

tree displays the following Workpieces Process Result SystemConfiguration dialog box, which is applied to all machines in common.

If you want to have the workpiece ID, process end ID, and user area IDthat were received from the NC with the workpiece process resultfunction represented using names rather than ID values on the screen,associate the ID values with the names, using this dialog box.Clicking the Add button adds a new association of an ID with a name.After selecting a row from the grid, clicking the Edit button enables thecontents of the selected row to be changed.After selecting a row from the grid, clicking the Delete button deletesthe contents of the selected row.The settings made in this dialog box are common to all machines.

Whether to use these settings for each machine is determined accordingto the workpiece process result options set up for the machine. See the

previous section, “ i CELL Machine.”




- 174 -

Workpiece IDThe Workpiece ID tab lets you set up the scheduled machining time inaddition to the workpiece ID and workpiece name.

The meaning of each item on this tab and the entry rules are explained below.

Workpiece ID Workpiece ID value received from the NC, ranging from

1 to 99999999.

Workpiece Name Character string used to display a workpiece ID

received from the NC on the screen, consisting of up to

20 alphanumeric characters. Estimated Time

for Process

Time (in seconds) needed to process the workpiece,

ranging from 0 to 99999999. It is used to obtain that

scheduled time for completion of all the workpieces

which is to be displayed as the status of progress in the

workpieces process result dialog box.

Process End IDThe Process End ID tab lets you set up the display order in addition tothe process end ID and the end status of the process.


Process End ID Process end ID received from the NC, ranging from 1 to

9999. The value 1 means a normal end. It is used to

obtain the number of workpieces yet to be processed

from the total number of workpieces to be processed.

Any value other than 1 is assumed to indicate an

abnormal end. Be sure to set the value 1 and the

display number 1 as well. Process End Character string used to display the process end ID


20 alphanumeric characters.

Display Order Digit from 0 to 5, indicating the sequence of displays on

the screen, used in counting the processed workpieces

in the process end status. Items having display order

numbers 1 to 5 are grouped by display order number to

count the processed workpieces for display on the

screen. Items having display order number 0 are

counted as “Others” for display on the screen. Be sure

to set 1 for Process End ID set to 1.




- 175 -

User Area IDThe User Area ID tab lets you set up the user area ID and user area.


User Area ID User area ID value received from the NC, ranging from

1 to 9999.

User Area Character string used in displaying the user area ID


20 alphanumeric characters.




- 176 -

2.11 DATABASE MAINTENANCE

Selecting i CELL, System, and Database Maintenance from the tree

displays the Database Maintenance dialog box.

If the machining result and workpiece process result functions are inuse, the data in the database increases day by day as machining

progresses. The database cannot limitlessly hold data. So, you need tospecify how much data is to be saved in the database using the DataSaving Criteria frame.

i CELL checks the contents of the database once everyday. If any pieceof data does not meet the specified Data Saving Criteria, it isautomatically deleted from the database.

The targets of setting include the Machining Result and WorkPiecesProcess Result databases. They have the same setting items.Data Count Turning on this item enables as many items of data as

specified in the input field at the right to be saved. If there is

more data to be saved, older data is removed from the

database so that the database will hold a specified number of

data items.

Unless Data Count is on, data deletion is not triggered at a

specified count.The numbers that can be entered range from 0 to 100,000.

Data Count is on by default. The default value is 50,000.

Period of

Time

Turning on this item enables data to be kept for the period

specified in the input field at the right. Any data kept for the

specified period is deleted.

Unless Period of Time is on, data deletion is not triggered

after the specified period.

The numbers that can be entered range from 0 to 50. The

period can be represented in days, months, and years.

Period of Time is off by default.

You need to turn on at least one of the Data Count and Period of Time.(Both can be turned on.)




- 177 -

Even if Data Count is off, only up to 100,000 items of data can be savedin the database. If there is more data to be saved, older data is removedfrom the database so that the database will hold 100,000 items of data.

Machining result data is created once every day, and such datacorresponds to one-day list display data and one-day graph display dataon the machining result screen. When 50,000 is set as the number of data items to be deleted, the data for the past 50,000 days is preserved.When five NCs are connected, the data for the past 10,000 days is

preserved on each NC.Workpieces process result data is created when machining startinformation is sent from the NC, and such data corresponds to one linewhen log information is displayed on the workpieces process resultscreen. When 50,000 is set as the number of data items to be deleted, the

data for the past 50,000 processes is preserved. The cycle times of processes differ from each other, so that the amount of data preservedon each NC cannot be calculated.

NOTE As for Data Count and Period of Time under Machining Result, set sufficiently large values sothat data related to workpieces being processed willnot be deleted. If the specified period is shorter thanthe time required for machining the workpiece or thespecified data count is smaller than the number of

data items added by other machines during theprocessing of the workpiece, no correct data will bedisplayed.

Clicking the OK button saves what you specified and closes the dialog box. Clicking the Cancel button closes the dialog box without savingwhat you specified.

Time of deletionOnce everyday, i CELL checks the database and deletes any data not

meeting the specified data saving criteria. This processing is performed

at 12:00 p.m. by default. However, the processing cannot be performedunless i CELL is running at the data deletion time. If it is apparent that i

CELL will not be running at the default data deletion time, you need tochange the data deletion time.

To delete the data deletion time, follow this procedure.

<1> If the i CELL project is running, stop it. See Subsection 2.2.7,

“Stopping and Updating the i CELL Project,” for explanations

about how to stop the project.

<2> From the Windows Start menu, select Program, CIMPLICITY i

CELL, and i CELL Project.




- 178 -

<3> The CIMPLICITY workbench appears. In the tree in the leftsection of the screen, double-click Event Editor under BasicControl Engine.

<4> The CIMPROJECT - CIMPLICITY Event Editor dialog boxappears.

Double-click “FNC_AUTO_DEL” in the Event ID list in the left

section of the screen.

<5> The Modify Event - FNC_AUTO_DEL dialog box appears.

In Event time on the second line, specify when data is to be deletedfrom the database. Do not change the other items.Clicking the OK button closes the dialog box and brings you back to the Event Editor. To exit the Event Editor, select File from themenu bar and Exit from the File menu.

<6> Update the i CELL project. See Subsection 2.2.7, “Stopping and

Updating the i CELL Project,” for explanations about how to

update the project.

Data deletion will be performed at the newly specified time nexttime i CELL runs.




- 179 -

2.12 NC SETTINGS

This section explains those settings to be made on the NC which arenecessary to use i CELL.

2.12.1 Machining Result

Using the machining result requires that the NC have the “MachiningTime and Parts Count Display” options.

2.12.2 Workpieces Process Result

Overview Using the workpiece process result requires that the NC inform i CELL

of the beginning and end of the process, and if necessary, workpiece IDand process end ID. This information transfer between the NC and i

CELL is performed using an NC's custom macro area.

Securing a custom macro areaSecure the custom macro area set up in the Configuration dialog box.Be sure to enter 0 (not to use handshaking) or 1 (to use handshaking) inthe custom macro area that was set up.

Creating NC programsIf the process beginning or end signal changes from 0 to 1, a programfor collecting result data is executed in the background of CIMPLICITY. The NC program must be created according to theinterface signal timing chart.

- When the machining process begins

Sequence number setting NC→ Workpiece ID settingO number setting

Process begin signal NC→

Confirmation-of-beginning signal PC→ (handshaking in use)

- When the machining process ends

Process end ID setting NC→ User area ID setting

Process end signal NC→

Confirmation-of-end signal PC→ (handshaking in use)

- CautionCommon to when handshaking is in use and not in useOnl for when handshakin is in use




- 180 -

The following shows an example of an NC program for implementingthis timing chart.The custom macro variables used in this example are assigned as listed

below.To use different variables, change their numbers to those to be used,using the NC program.

Interface signal

Custom

macro

variable

Range of values

Sequence number #500 Any integer from 1 to 99999999

Beginning of the process #501 0 or 1

End of the process #502 0 or 1

Handshaking #5030: Handshaking not to be used.

1: Handshaking to be used

Confirmation of beginning #504 0 or 1, to be changed by i CELL

Confirmation of end #505 0 or 1, to be changed by i CELL

Workpiece ID #506 Any integer from 1 to 99999999

O number #507 Any integer from 1 to 9999

Process end ID #508 Any integer from 1 to 9999

User area ID #509 Any integer from 1 to 9999

- Main programO0101;G65 P201 D1 H101; - <1>…NC statement for machining...…

G65 P301; - <2>M30;

<1> Custom macro 1 (when the process begins) is called. D and Hrepresent, respectively, the argument addresses of custom macrovariables #7 and #11. In this example, 1 is assigned to #7, and 101,to #11. Custom macro 1 causes these specified values to beassigned to the workpiece ID and O number custom macrovariables.

<2> Custom macro 2 (when the process ends) is called. Before thecalling, the process end ID and user area ID custom macro variable

areas must be loaded with values.




- 181 -

- Custom macro 1 (Process Begin)O0201;

#1=0; Initialize a loop count.

#2=10; Loop count

IF[#500LT99999999]GOTO100; Check the value of the Sequence Number.

#500=0; If the sequence number is 99999999, reset it to 0.

N100;

#500=#500+1; Increment the sequence number by 1.

#506=#7; Assign the workpiece ID.

#507=#11; Assign the O number.

#501=1; Turn on the process begin signal.

IF[#503EQ1]GOTO300; Check whether to use handshaking.

G04X3.0; Wait for 3 seconds if handshaking is no in use.

GOTO400;

N200;

G04X0.5; Wait for 0.5 seconds.#1=#1+1; Increment the loop count by 1.

N300;

IF[#504EQ1]GOTO400; Check the confirmation-of-beginning signal.

IF[#1LT#2]GOTO200; Check the loop count.

#3000=1(START TIMEOUT); Error message

N400;

#501=0; Turn off the process begin signal.

M99;

- Custom macro 2 (when the process ends)O0301;

#1=0; Initialize the loop count.#2=10; Loop count

#502=1; Turn on the process end signal.

IF[#503EQ1]GOTO300; Check whether to use handshaking.

G04X3.0; Wait for 3 seconds if handshaking is not in use.

GOTO400;

N200;

G04X0.5; Wait for 0.5 seconds.

#1=#1+1; Increment the loop count by 1.

N300;

IF[#505EQ1]GOTO400; Check the confirmation-of-end signal.

IF[#1LT#2]GOTO200; Check the loop count.

#3000=2(END TIMEOUT); Error messageN400;

#502=0; Turn off the process end signal.

M99;

2.12.3 Tool Life

Using the tool life function requires that the NC be provided with the“tool life management” option.With Series 0i-MODEL B/C, however, the tool life management

function can be used by setting bit 0 of parameter No. 8132 to 1.There are not the tool life management function and option for that in

Power Mate i.



3.MAIL SETTING B-75074EN/04

- 182 -

3 MAIL

To use the mail function of i CELL to send mail to an i-mode cellular

phone or PC, set up the mail function as explained in this chapter.

NOTEThe mail function is unavailable for a machine for which Reader/Puncher or FTP is used as thecommunication protocol.



B-75074EN/04 SETTING 3.MAIL

- 183 -

3.1 OVERVIEW

3.1.1 Trigger Point and Trigger Criteria

i CELL can send mail when the value of a CIMPLICITY point changes.

A point for determining when to send mail is known as a trigger point.

You can select one of the three criteria listed below to specify the waythe trigger point value changes so that mail can be sent.

Trigger criterion Description

Zero → Non ZeroMail is sent when the trigger point value

changes from a number other than 0 to 0.

Non Zero → ZeroMail is sent when the trigger point value

changes from a number other than 0 to 0.

Value ChangeMail is sent when any change occurs at the

trigger point value.

Only one piece of mail can be sent from one trigger point. Two or moredifferent pieces of mail can be set from one trigger point.

3.1.2 Mail Destinations

Mail from one trigger point can be sent to up to two destinations. The

same mail is sent to the two destinations.




- 184 -

3.1.3 Mail Message and Message Point

The mail message consists of fixed character strings and replacementcharacter strings.

Character string type Description

Fixed character stringCharacter strings specified when the mail

function is set up become a mail message.

Replacement character

string

Mail message is generated by replacing the

replacement character strings specified when

the mail function is set up with a machine

number, machine name, and the point value

corresponding to the tripper point that meets a

trigger criterion.

The following table lists the replacement character strings.Replacement character

stringDescription

<N>This character string is replaced with the

number of a machine at a trigger point.

<M>This character string is replaced with the name

of a machine at a trigger point.

<L>This character string is replaced with the series

number of a machine at a trigger point.

<T>This character string is replaced with a trigger

point name.

<P1>This character string is replaced with the point

value specified at message point 1.





The term “message point” refers to that portion of a mail message whichis replaced with a point value when the trigger criterion at the trigger

point is satisfied. Up to three message points can be used for one mailmessage.

Example:Assume the following settings.Machine number: 1Machine name: MCN1Trigger point: FNC00101.F_AL

Trigger criterion: Zero → Non ZeroMail message: Alarm <P1> occurred at <M>Message point 1: FNC00101.F_ALARM0

If an alarm condition occurs in the NC, the FNC00101.F_AL valuechanges from 0 to 1. At the same time, the value (such as 71) for thealarm number is set in FNC00101.F_ALARM0. When the trigger criterion for the trigger point is satisfied, the message point value isembedded in the mail message, thus causing the mail message “Alarm71 occurred at MCN1” to be sent.

Up to 999 pieces of mail can be registered.




- 185 -

3.1.4 Flow of Setting

After selecting Project from the menu bar and Property from the Projectmenu, turning on the mail function causes the item mail to appear in thetree. There are Mailer, Mail Configuration, and Send Test under Mail.

The setting items in this dialog box are explained below.

Mailer Sets items related to the mailer of your Internet provider.Mail

Configuration

Specifies when each mail message is to be output.

Send Test Allows you to conduct a test to check whether mail

messages are sent correctly using the settings for

“Mailer.”

So, you first make settings with Mailer and then check that mail is sent properly, using Send Test. You also specify Mail Configuration asrequired.

“Mailer” lets you specify whether to enable mail transmission.

Mail transmission Description

Enable

Mail is sent automatically according to the

setting at “Mail Configuration.”

The contents of “Mail Configuration” cannot be

changed.

Disable

No mail is sent.

The contents of “Mail Configuration” can be

changed.

To change the setting at “Mail Configuration,” follow this procedure.<1> With “Mailer,” disable mail transmission.<2> With “Mail Configuration,” change its contents as required.<3> With “Mailer,” enable mail transmission.

NOTENote that if you forget to enable mail transmissionafter the contents of “Mail Configuration” ischanged, mail transmission remains disabled.




- 186 -

3.2 MAILER

Selecting Mail and Mailer from the tree displays the Mailer Configuration dialog box.

The setting items in this dialog box are explained below.Send Mail Turning on this item causes mail to be sent automatically

according to the setting. It is impossible to change the setting

for mail transmission.

Turning off this item disables mail transmission. It is possible

to change the setting for mail transmission.

Mail Server This box lets you set up the IP address or domain name of

the mail server of your Internet provider. The IP address and

domain name can each consist of up to 255 characters.

Mail Source

Address

This box lets you set up the mail address of the PC on which

i CELL is running. The provider gives you the mail address

(at which you can receive mail) when you enter a contract

with an Internet provider. The mail address consists of up to255 characters.

Mail sent from i CELL is sent to the addressee through the mail server

specified at “Mail Server.”




- 187 -

3.3 MAIL CONFIGURATION

Selecting Mail and Mail Configuration from the tree lists the currentlyregistered settings for mail transmission in the grid.

To add a new mail transmission setting, select Edit from the menu bar,then New from the Edit menu.To delete a mail transmission setting, click a desired row in the grid,and select Edit from the menu bar, then Delete from the Edit menu.If you double-click a row in the grid, or if you click a row in the grid andselect Edit from the menu bar, then Property from the Edit menu, theMail Send Configuration dialog box appears.




- 188 -


Number This box indicates a number for identifying the current

mail transmission settings. It cannot be changed.

Trigger Point This box lets you select the timing of mail

transmission. Click the Select button, and select a

desired point from those registered with CIMPLICITY.

Trigger Criteria These text box lets you specify on what change to the

trigger point value mail is to be sent. One of “Zero →

Non Zero,” “Non Zero → Zero,” and “Value Change”

can be selected.

Mail Destination 1

Mail Destination 2

These boxes let you specify the addressee of mail. It

can be selected from mail addresses previously

saved to a text file. Each mail address can consist of

up to 255 characters.

Mail Message This box lets you set up the body of mail. You can

select it from those previously saved to a text file byclicking the Select button.

Message Point 1

Message Point 2

Message Point 3

These text boxes let you select a message point that

is to be replaced with a point value in the mail

message. Click the Select button to select one from a

list of previously registered points. Clicking the Clear

button clears the point setting.

Enable Mail is sent only when Enable is on. When Enable is

off, no mail is sent even if the trigger point meets the

trigger criteria.

If you use a message point in the Mail Send Configuration dialog box,

be sure to assign a point name to the message point.

You can previously save mail destinations and mail messages,respectively, to the text files listed below, so you can select from thefiles, using the dialog box.

Item Name of text file for saving settings

Mail Destination MailAddress.txt

Mail Message MailFormat.txt

These files must be placed in the following directory.FANUC\i CELL\CimProject\Fanuc\Data

In either file, one data item must be confined within one line. Samplesof these files are available after i CELL is installed.

i CELL places no limit to the length of a mail message to be sent. Note,

however, that some cellular phones have a limit to the length (incharacters) of a mail message they can receive.




- 189 -

Applying to all other machinesWhat you specify for a machine in the Mail Send Configuration dialog

box can be applied to other machines. To put another way, once youmade settings for one machine, you can change the machine number with the same settings retained so that they can be used for another machine.Click All Machine... button. The All Machine Configuration dialog boxappears.

In this dialog box, the List of applicable machine box displays a list of machines to which what you specified in the Mail Send Configuration

dialog box can be applied. Select a desired machine and click the Add→ button. The selected machine is moved to the List of target machine box.Once you moved all desired machines to the List of target machine box,click the OK button. Mail settings are created for these machines.

Clicking the Cancel button brings you back to the Mail SendConfiguration dialog box without changing anything.




- 190 -

Conditions for applying the settings of one machine to all other machinesFor the settings of one machine to be applied to all other machines, thefollowing conditions must be satisfied.<1> All points (trigger and message points) used in the Mail Send

Configuration dialog box are in the formatFNCxxxyy.<data-type>, and the same machine number isspecified for all the points.

<2> The data type for the points used in the Mail Send Configurationdialog box is registered for all other machines.

In the format stated above, xxx is a three-digit machine number, and yyis a two-digit series number. <data-type> represents a data type that the

NC has; for example, F_AL represents an NC alarm signal.

In the Mail Send Configuration dialog box, a point that is not in this

format can also be set up for a machine. In this case, however, its settingcannot be applied to other machines.

Example)Assume the following points are registered for each machine.

Machine Point

1.MCN1 FNC00101.F_AL, FNC00101.F_ALARM0

2.MCN2 FNC00201.F_AL, FNC00201.F_ALARM0

3.MCN3 FNC00301.F_AL

If you already set up the trigger point FNC00101.F_ALand the message point FNC00101.F_ALARM0 in the Mail Send Configuration dialog

box, the settings can be applied to the machines MCN1 and MCN2, butnot to the machine MCN3 (because FNC00301.F_ALARM0 has not beregistered for MCN3).




- 191 -

3.4 SEND TEST

Selecting Mail and Send Test from the tree displays the Send Testdialog box.This dialog box causes mail to be sent no matter what is the status of theconnected machine. However, the mail message is sent without beingchanged; any replacement character is not replaced with a value.Performing a mail transmission test requires specifying correct valuesin Mail Server and Mail Source Address in the Mailer Configurationdialog box in addition to the settings in the Send Test dialog box. Noother setting is required. The operation of the Send Test dialog box doesnot depend on whether Send Mail in the Mailer Configuration dialog

box is on.


Mail Destination 1

Mail Destination 2

These text boxes let you specify the addressee of

mail. It can be selected from mail addresses

previously saved to a text file. Each mail address canconsist of up to 255 characters.

Mail Message This box lets you set up the body of mail. You can

select it from those previously saved to a text file by

clicking the Select button.

If the mail message contains a replacement character

string, it is sent together with the mail message. No

value substitutes the replacement character string.

The settings you made in Mail Destination 1, Mail Destination 2, andMail Message in this dialog box are saved to the same text files usedwith the Mail Send Configuration dialog box.

After the settings are made, clicking the Send button sends the mail.

The following table lists the error numbers that are displayed if anattempt to send mail fails, and their meanings.

Error number Meaning

1 Failure to connect to the mail server

4,5 Failure to send the mail source address

6 Failure to send the mail address of the destination

7 Failure to start mail transmission

8 Failure to send the mail message

9 Failure to end mail transmission



4.WEB SETTING B-75074EN/04

- 192 -

4 WEB

To use the i CELL Web function based on the i-mode cellular phone, set

up the Web function as explained in this chapter.

NOTEThe Web function is unavailable for a machine for which Reader/Puncher or FTP is used as thecommunication protocol.



B-75074EN/04 SETTING 4.WEB

- 193 -

4.1 OVERVIEW

4.1.1 Web Screen Flow

i CELL can display Web screens on the i-mode cellular phone.

The Web screens include the logon, machine selection, and machinedetail screens.

FANUC

iCELL

ID:

KEY:

ENTER

<Logon screen>

iCELL

5/15 13:14:42

1.MCN1 O

2.MCN2 O

3.MCN3 X

Refresh

Back

<Machine selection screen>

iCELL

1.MCN1

Status 1

ProgNo O0100

PartsNo 300

Refresh

Back

<Machine detail screen>

When an i-mode cellular phone connects to i CELL, the logon screen

first appears on the phone. When you enter your logon ID and logonkey on the logon screen and press the ENTER key, the machineselection screen appears. The logon key you entered appears asasterisks.

The machine selection screen displays the machine status with a mark.Selecting a machine displays the machine detail screen for the selectedmachine.

The machine detail screen displays the point values for the selectedmachine according to its setting.

i CELL updates its Web data once every 30 seconds or so. So the data

displayed on the i-mode cellular phone is rewritten once every 30seconds or so no matter how often you press the Update button on the

i-mode cellular phone.




- 194 -

4.1.2 Logon Screen

On the logon screen, you enter your logon ID and logon key. Onlywhen they match the values previously set up in the Web InitialConfiguration dialog box, you can go to the next screen.The character strings to be displayed as the titles on the first two linesare also set up in the Web Initial Configuration dialog box.

FANUC

iCELL

ID:

KEY:

ENTER

Title 1

Title 2

Logon ID

Logon key

<Logon screen>

(to be set up on the Web InitialConfiguration dialog box)

4.1.3 Machine Selection Screen

The machine selection screen displays a list of machine numbers andnames that can be displayed over the Web. It can also display the statusof each machine using a mark.

iCELL

5/15 13:14:42

1.MCN1 O

2.MCN2 O

3.MCN3 X

Refresh

Back

<Machine selection screen>

Title 2 set up in the Web InitialConfiguration dialog box

Latest update time

Status of each machine:Status of the display table

When you select machines, you are brought to the machine detailscreen.




- 195 -

4.1.4 Machine Detail Screen

The machine detail screen displays the status of each machine. Thestatus data is the point value of each machine. You can specify the pointvalue that is to be displayed for each machine, using the Web PointConfiguration dialog box.

iCELL

1.MCN1

Status 1

ProgNo O0100

PartsNo 300

RefreshBack


Title 2 set up in the Web InitialConfiguration dialog box

Number and name of amachine selected on themachine selection screen

Items and point valuesset up in the Web PointConfiguration dialog box

The item names, Status, ProgNo, and PartsNo, displayed in the abovefigure can be changed to those set up in the Item Name Configurationdialog box.For some items, character strings corresponding to point values, rather than point values themselves, can be displayed. The character stringsare those set up on the display table setup screen.

iCELL

1.MCN1

Status Machining

ProgNo O0100

PartsNo 300

Refresh

back


Change the displaycharacter string for theitem name:

To be specified in theItem NameConfiguration dialog box

Display with a character string rather than a value:

To be specified in theDisplay TableConfiguration dialog box

It is possible to display up to 20 point values per machine over the Web.




- 196 -

4.1.5 Setting Flow

After selecting Project from the menu bar, then Property from theProject menu, turning on the Web function displays the item Web in thetree. There are the items Web Initial Configuration, Point for Web, Item

Name, and Display Table under Web.

In the Web Initial Configuration dialog box, set up the login screen. Inthe Web Point Configuration dialog box, set up points to be displayedfor each machine. In addition, set up the item name and display table asrequired.




- 197 -

4.2 WEB INITIAL CONFIGURATION

Selecting Web and Web Initial Configuration from the tree displays theWeb Initial Configuration dialog box.


Title 1 This box lets you specify a character string to be displayed

as a title on line 1 of the logon screen. The title can consist

of up to four full-size or eight half-size characters.

Title 2 This box lets you specify a character string to be displayed

as a title on line 2 of the logon screen and on line 1 of the

machine selection screen. The title can consist of up to four

full-size or eight half-size characters.

Logon ID This box lets you specify a logon ID that is to be entered on

the logon screen of the i-mode cellular phone. The logon IDcan consist of up to eight half-size characters. It can

contain no full-size character.

Logon Key

Logon Key

Confirmation

These boxes let you specify a logon key that is to be

entered on the logon screen of the i-mode cellular phone.

The value you entered appears as asterisks. Be sure to

enter the same character string in both boxes. A logon key

can consist of up to eight half-size characters. It can

contain no full-size character.




- 198 -

4.3 POINT FOR WEB

Selecting Web and Point for Web from the tree lists the settings of thecurrently registered Web points in the grid.

Each row in the grid corresponds to one machine. The grid can containas many rows as the maximum number of machines set up withProperty in the Project menu.If you double-click a row in the grid, or if you click a row in the grid andselect Edit from the menu bar, then Property from the Edit menu, theWeb Point Configuration dialog box appears.


Machine

Machine Name

These boxes display the machine number and name

selected from the grid. Neither machine number nor

name can be changed here.

Display Turning on this item causes point values to be

displayed over the Web. Turning it off disables them

from being displayed.

Points for Status to

GoodShots and

Variable0 toVariable9

These list boxes let you select points to be displayed

over the Web.

Selecting “<NONE>“ for an item disables the itemfrom being displayed on the machine detail screen.




- 199 -

Display Table for

Status and

Variable0 to

Variable9

Turning on Display Table causes a character string

corresponding to a point value set up in the

respective display tables to be displayed on the Web

machine detail screen. Turning it off causes the point

value itself to be displayed on the machine detail

screen.

The following table lists the items whose point values are convertedinto the format of individual items for display on the Web screen.

Item Display format

ProgNo Oxxxx

where xxxx is a point value. If the digits in the

value are fewer than four digits, the

unoccupied digits are filled with zeros.

SeqNo Nxxxxx

where xxxxx is a point value. If the digits in

the value are fewer than five digits, the

unoccupied digits are filled with zeros.

RunTime Displayed in the format hh:mm with the point

value assumed to be the number of seconds.

CutRate xxx%

where xxx is a point value.

CycleTime x.xx

where x.xx is a point value.

Clicking the Change all to <NONE> button resets all points to<NONE>.

Clicking the OK button saves what you specified and closes the WebPoint Configuration dialog box. Clicking the Cancel button discardswhat you entered.

If a point value is meaningless (for example, if the NC is not turned on),“***” appears on the machine detail screen.




- 200 -

4.4 ITEM NAME

Selecting Web and Item Name from the tree lists display names for thecurrently set items in the grid.Character strings listed under Display Name are displayed as itemnames on the machine detail screen over the Web.

If you double-click a row in the grid, or if you click a row in the grid andselect Edit from the menu bar, then Property from the Edit menu, theDisplay Name Configuration dialog box appears.

The Display Name box lets you enter an item name to be displayed onthe Web screen. The item name can consist of up to four full-size or eight half-size characters.

Clicking the OK button saves what you specified and closes the Display Name Configuration dialog box. Clicking the Cancel button closes thedialog box without saving what you entered.




- 201 -

4.5 DISPLAY TABLE

Selecting Web and Display Table from the tree displays the Status andVariable0 to Variable9 display tables under Display Table. Selectingthe display table in which you want to change settings lists the settingsin the grid.

If you turn on Display Table in the Web Point Configuration dialog box,the character strings in the display names corresponding to point values0 to 9 are displayed as item values on the Web screen.

If a point value is not 0 to 9, “(NSV)” is displayed on the machine detailscreen; NSV stands for No Such Value.Only if Status is selected, its display name and mark are displayed. If Variable0 to Variable9 are selected, only their display names aredisplayed. The value of the mark for Status is used to display the statusof each machine on the machine selection screen.

If you double-click a row in the grid, or if you click a row in the grid andselect Edit from the menu bar, then Property from the Edit menu, theDisplay Data Configuration dialog box appears.

This dialog box lets you specify the values of a display name and mark.The display name can consist of up to four full-size or eight half-sizecharacters. The mark can consist of one full-size or up to two half-sizecharacters.

Clicking the OK button saves what you specified and closes the DisplayData Configuration dialog box. Clicking the Cancel button closesdialog box without saving what you entered.



5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER SETTING B-75074EN/04

- 202 -

5 CIMPLICITY VIEWER

This chapter describes how to use i CELL on the CIMPLICITY viewer.

5.1 OVERVIEW

You can also use all i CELL functions on the CIMPLICITY viewer.

Information on an NC connected to the server PC can be displayed on

the viewer PC.Before using i CELL on the CIMPLICITY viewer, you need to set the

CIMPLICITY viewer using the i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER

Setting Screen. Set required items on both the server and viewer PCs.

NOTEBefore using the i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER

Setting Screen, be sure to create a backup of theentities in the i CELL installation directory.

Note on installationOn the installation component select screen, the buttons indicating theserver and viewer components of the CIMPLICITY viewer aredisplayed. When you want to install i CELL on the server PC of the

CIMPLICITY viewer or does not want to use the CIMPLICITY viewer,select the “server” component.When you want to install i CELL on the viewer PC of the CIMPLICITY

viewer, select the “viewer” component.

Network configurationTo use the CIMPLICITY viewer for i CELL, both the server and viewer

PCs must be able to communicate with NCs using FOCAS2/Ethernet.

When you want to use a router between the server and viewer PCs, youneed to set up IP routing. See Section 3.4, “NETWORK CONFIGURATION,” in Part I, “GENERAL,” for details.After setting up the CIMPLICITY viewer for i CELL, confirm that NCs

can be connected from the viewer PC according to the proceduredescribed in Subsection 5.4.1, “Checking Communication between theViewer PC and Each NC.”



B-75074EN/04 SETTING 5.CIMPLICITY VIEWER

- 203 -

5.2 PREPARATION

This section describes the conditions for operating i CELL on the

CIMPLICITY viewer and items prepared for setup.

5.2.1 Checking the Conditions for CIMPLICITY Viewer Operationand Communication

This subsection describes how to check the conditions for operating theCIMPLICITY viewer and how to make basic network setup for server and viewer PCs.To use the CIMPLICITY viewer for i CELL, the i CELL

“CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen” is used to set items. Thissubsection describes the items to be checked and set before the use of the screen.This subsection aims to confirm that server and viewer PCs cancommunicate with each other.

CIMPLICITY point countFor the server PC, a system with at least 75 points is required.A 50-point system does not support WebView or CIMPLICITY viewer.For the viewer PC with a server license, a system with at least 75 pointsis also required. For the viewer PC with a viewer license,communication with a PC with any license is enabled.

On a system for which no license is given, both server and viewer PCscan be used only within 4 days after installation.

Computer name and work groupEach computer name must consist of up to 9 characters and cannotcontain a blank character or any 2-byte character such as kanji. (Validexamples: SERVER1, VIEWER1) Computers must belong to the samework group.When a domain server is used, the computers must belong to the samedomain.Check the computer name and work group as follows:

(1) Select [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel] → [Network] anddisplay the [Identification] tab.

(2) Check the computer name and work group.If any requirement is not satisfied, change the computer name or work group. Refer to “Windows Setup Guide” for explanations about how tochange them.




- 204 -

TCP/IP and NetBEUI protocolThe TCP/IP network protocol needs to have already been incorporatedinto both of the server PC and viewer PC. Moreover, whenCIMPLICITY HMI Version4.0 is used on Windows NT4.0, the

NetBEUI protocol needs to have already been incorporated into both of the server PC and viewer PC.Check if these protocols are incorporated, as described below.

- For Windows NT(1) Select [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel] → [Network] and

display the [Protocols] tab.(2) On the [Protocols] tab, check “TCP/IP Protocol” is displayed as

network protocols.(3) When using CIMPLICITY HMI 4.0, check also that "NetBEUI

Protocol" is indicated.

- For Windows 2000 or Windows XP(1) Select [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel] → [Network and

Dial-up Connections] → [Local Area Connection] → [Property]and display the [General] tab.

(2) Check “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” is displayed as componentsand whether the check marks for these items are on.(With Windows 2000 or later, CIMPLICITY HMI 4.0 is no longer used. So, whether the NetBEUI protocol is installed need not bechecked.)

If the TCP/IP or NetBEUI protocol is not installed, install it. Refer to“Windows Setup Guide” for explanations about how to install them.

Subnet maskFor the TCP/IP, all of server and viewer PCs and NCs must use thesame subnet mask.Check the subnet mask of each PC as follows.

- For Windows NT(1) Select [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel] → [Network] and

display the [Protocols] tab.(2) On the [Protocols] tab, select “TCP/IP Protocol” among the

displayed network protocols and click the [Property] button.(3) Check [Subnet mask].

- For Windows 2000 or Windows XP(1) Select [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel] → [Network and

Dial-up Connections] → [Local Area Connection] → [Property]and display the [General] tab.

(2) Select “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” among the displayedcomponents and click the [Property] button.

(3) Check [Subnet mask].




- 205 -

If a different subnet mask is used, change it. Refer to “Windows SetupGuide” for explanations about how to change a subnet mask.Refer to the operator's manual for the Ethernet board in use for explanations about how to set the subnet mask for an NC.

When a router is used between the server and viewer PCs

- Setting the router IP addressWhen using a router between the server and viewer PCs, you need to setthe default gateway address for each PC and the router IP address for each NC. Set the IP address of the router as the default gateway addressand router IP address.Because similarly to the server PC, the viewer PC usesFOCAS2/Ethernet to communicate with NCs, you need to set up IP

routing for the router.

NCServer PC

Router

Viewer PC

Network A

Network B

IP address for

network B:

192.168.2.99

IP address

192.168.1.30

Subnet mask

255.255.0.0

Default gateway address

192.168.1.99

IP address

192.168.1.31

Subnet mask

255.255.0.0

Router IP address

192.168.1.99

IP address

192.168.2.40

Subnet mask

255.255.0.0

Default gateway address

192.168.2.99

IP address for

network A:

192.168.1.99

IP routing setup is required.

Communication usingFOCAS2/Ethernet

Setting example for a network configuration in which a router is used




- 206 -

- Adding items in the hosts fileWhen using a router between the server and viewer PCs, you also needto edit the hosts file. The hosts file is in System32\drivers\etc in theWindows installation directory (for example, C:\WinNT).In the hosts file on the server PC, add the computer name and IP addressof the viewer PC. When multiple viewer PCs are used, add thecomputer name and IP address of each viewer PC.In the hosts file on the viewer PC, add the computer name and IPaddress of the server PC. You should find setting “127.0.0.1 localhost”in the host file. Add the computer name and IP address just under theline.Edit the hosts file with a text editor such as Notepad. Be careful not tomodify or delete any item that has been set. It is desirable to create acopy of the host file in the same directory before editing.

NCComputer nameof the server PC

SERVER01IP address

192.168.1.30

Router

Network A

Network B

192.168.2.40 VIEWER01192.168.2.41 VIEWER02

Computer nameof viewer PC <1>

VIEWER01IP address

192.168.2.40

Computer nameof viewer PC <2>

VIEWER02IP address

192.168.2.41

192.168.1.30 SERVER01

Items added to the hosts file

on the server PC

Items added to the hosts file on each of viewer

PCs <1> and <2> (same line for <1> and <2>)

Example of adding items to the hosts files




- 207 -

Checking communication between the server and viewer PCsAfter completion of setup described above, confirm that the server andviewer PCs can communicate with each other.Activate the i CELL FethDgn program and confirm that the server and

viewer PCs can communicate with each other using their computer names.

(1) First, confirm that the viewer PC can be connected from the server PC.Execute “Ethernet Diagnose” in program group “CIMPLICITY i

CELL “ on the server PC.(2) The following screen appears:

(3) Enter the name of the destination viewer PC in the [IpAddr] textfield on the screen and click the [Ping] button.When the settings are correct, “Reply” is displayed as shown

below:

(4) In this example, the viewer PC name is VIEWER01 and the IPaddress is 192.168.2.40. For a communication test, confirm thatthe correct IP address of the viewer PC is displayed for “Reply.”When multiple viewer PCs are connected, check communicationwith each viewer PC.

(5) Then, confirm that the server PC can be connected from the viewer

PC.On the viewer PC, activate the FethDgn program as described instep (1).




- 208 -

(6) Enter the name of the destination server PC in the [IpAddr] textfield on the screen and click the [Ping] button.When the settings are correct, “Reply” is displayed as shown in thefigure in step (3).Confirm that the IP address of the server PC is displayed for “Reply.”

TroubleshootingIf the server and viewer PCs cannot communicate with each other,either of the following messages appears:(A) “Bad IP address (Get Host Name) XXXXXX”:

No IP address corresponding to input computer name XXXXXXcan be obtained.

(B) “ICMP_Error:0”

An IP address corresponding to input computer name XXXXXXwas obtained, but communication with the IP address is disabled.

Take action for each message as follows.(A) For "Bad IP address (Get Host Name) XXXXXX"

(1) Check that the input destination computer name is correct.(2) Enter the IP address corresponding to the destination

computer name in [IpAddr] and click the [Ping] button again.If communication is disabled with the computer name, butenabled with the IP address, add the computer name and IPaddress of the communication destination to the hosts file,restart the personal computer, then perform a communication

test again. See "Adding items in the hosts file" in "When arouter is used between the server and viewer PCs."

(3) If the error cannot be removed by the above operation, asoftware setting error and/or hardware error may occur.Check the following items:

• Computer names and work group name

• Whether the TCP/IP and NetBEUI protocol areinstalled

• Whether the correct IP address and subnet mask are set

• Whether the hub and Ethernet cable are connected properly

• Whether when the used Ethernet cable is connected toanother network in which communication is enabled,communication is also enabled

• When a router is used, whether the IP address of therouter is set for the default gateway on each PC androuter IP address on each NC. See "Setting the router IPaddress" in "When a router is used between the server and viewer PCs."

(B) For "ICMP_Error:0"Check items listed in step (3) in (A).




- 209 -

5.2.2 Allocating Available Drives for Sharing Directories

To usei

CELL on the CIMPLICITY viewer, the server and viewer PCsneed to share CIM files, various types of setup files, and NC programdirectories.To share directories, one or two available drives for sharing are requiredon the server and viewer PCs.Before setting items on the i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting

Screen, you need to allocate required available drives.

5.2.2.1 Available drive required for sharing the i CELL installationdirectory

The CIM files and various types of setup files are all stored in thei CELL installation directory. The server and viewer PCs share this

directory.To share this directory, one available drive is always required on theserver and viewer PCs.

NOTE A shared drive with the same name is required onthe server and viewer PCs.When specifying R: for the drive for sharing the i

CELL installation directory on the server PC, create

a drive named R: on the viewer PC.Before setting a drive on the server PC, therefore,check that a drive with the same name is availableon the viewer PC.

Just by allocating an available drive with the same name on the server and viewer PCs, the i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen

automatically performs directory sharing and mapping to the drive.




- 210 -

5.2.2.2 Available drive required for sharing the NC program rootdirectory

The directory containing NC programs must also be shared between theserver and viewer PCs. Because different directories for storing NC

programs can be set for different machines, create a parent directorycontaining these directories and make the PCs share the parent directory(called this parent directory "NC program root directory" below).

NOTETo use the CIMPLICITY viewer, create the NCprogram directory for each machine in one NCprogram root directory. When you do not use the

CIMPLICITY viewer, you do not need to create thedirectory as above.

The number of drives for sharing the NC program root directory differsdepending on the location of the NC program root directory.

(1) When the NC program root directory is in the i CELL installation directoryWhen the NC program root directory is created in the i CELL

installation directory as recommended in "Configuration of thedirectories where i CELL and the related information are installed" in

Section 3.1, "INSTALLATION," in Part II, "INSTALLATION," in thei CELL manual, no drive is required for the NC root directory. The

number of drives with the same names that are prepared on the server and viewer PCs is, therefore, one.

In this case, one drive for sharing the i CELL installation directory is

required on the server and viewer PCs.For example, when the server PC is SERVER01, a shared drive is set onthe server and viewer PCs on the i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER

Setting Screen as shown below:

NC data directory for NC 001


A drive for sharing the i CELL installation

directory is required.

No shared drive is required because the NC

program root directory is in the i CELL installation

directory.




- 211 -

NOTE A shared drive with the same name is required on the server and

viewer PCs.When specifying R: for the drive for sharing the i CELL installation

directory on the server PC, set a drive named R: on the viewer PC.Before setting a drive on the server PC, therefore, check that adrive with the same name is available on the viewer PC.

(2) When the NC program root directory is not in the i CELL installationdirectory

The method recommended in "Configuration of the directories where i

CELL and the related information are installed" in Section 3.1,"INSTALLATION," in Part II, "INSTALLATION," in the i CELL

manual may not be used, and the NC program root directory may not bein the i CELL installation directory or may be in another drive. In this

case, a drive for sharing the NC program root directory is required. Thenumber of drives with the same names that are prepared on the server and viewer PCs is, therefore, two.

For example, when the server PC is SERVER01, shared drives are set

on the server and viewer PCs on the i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen as shown below:

NOTE A shared drive with the same name is required on the server andviewer PCs.When specifying R: for the drive for sharing the i CELL installation

directory on the server PC, set a drive named R: on the viewer PC.This also applies to the NC program root directory.

Before setting a drive on the server PC, therefore, check that adrive with the same name is available on the viewer PC.



A drive for sharing the i CELL installation

directory is required.

A drive for sharing the NC program root directory

is required.




- 212 -

Exclusive control on NC program operationYou can also operate the NC Program Management screen on theviewer PC, but the NC programs are stored on the server PC. Note thaton the viewer PC, you operate an NC program shared on the network using the NC Program Management screen.The NC Program Management screen has a function for editing an NC

program using the selected editor. At the installation of i CELL,

Windows Notepad is selected as the editor. Because this editor has noexclusive control function, however, on the viewer PC, you can edit or delete an NC program edited, downloaded, or uploaded on the server PC.Change Notepad to an editor with an exclusive control function.

Note on preparation on Windows 2000 and Windows XP

If the NC program root directory is not in the i CELL installationdirectory or is in a drive other than that contains the i CELL installation

directory, you need to add the right to access the entities in the NC program root directory.Add the access right using the following procedure:

<1> Select [Start] → [Programs] → [Accessories] → [CommandPrompt] to display the command prompt.

<2> Move to the NC program root directory.Example) When the NC program root directory is "D:\NcData",

enter "cd /d D:\NcData".<3> Execute the following command:

cacls nc-program-root-directory /t /e /g everyone:f Example) "cacls D:\NcData /t /e /g everyone:f" when the NC program root directory is "D:\NcData"




- 213 -

5.2.3 Setting for Sharing the Server PC (Required When WindowsXP Is Used)

When Windows XP is used, a setting for sharing the i CELL installation

directory and NC program directory must be made before makingsettings on the CIMPLICITY viewer setting screen with the i CELL

server PC. Make a setting for sharing the directories according to the procedure below.With the i CELL viewer PC, the work described below is not required.

In the description below, it is assumed that i CELL is installed on a PC

([Server01]) that belongs not to a domain but to a work group and is notconnected to the Internet. If another network configuration is employed,make a setting according to the help information of Windows XP.

1 Check the work group to which the computer belongs.

From the Start menu, click [Settings] → [Control Panel] → [System] to display the System Properties. Next, click the[Computer Name] tab then note down the work group.

After noting down the work group, click <Cancel> to close thedialog box.




- 214 -

2 Display the i CELL installation directory with Explorer then

right-click to display the property menu. When the property menuis displayed, select the "Sharing" tab then execute the "Network Setup Wizard".

When the "Network Setup Wizard" is executed, the dialog box

shown below is displayed. Click <Next>.




- 215 -

3 When the dialog box shown below is displayed, click <Next>.

4 When the dialog box shown below is displayed, check [Other]then click <Next>.




- 216 -

5 When the dialog box shown below is displayed, check [Thiscomputer belongs to a network that does not have an Internetconnection] then click <Next>.

6 When the dialog box shown below is displayed, check the name of the computer used then click <Next>.




- 217 -

7 Enter the work group name noted down in step 1 in [Workgroupname] then click <Next>.

8 When the dialog box shown below is displayed, check thedisplayed information then click <Next>.




- 218 -

9 When the dialog box shown below is displayed, check [Just finishthe wizard; I don't need to run the wizard on other computers] thencheck <Next>.

10 When the dialog box shown below is displayed, click <Finish>.




- 219 -

11 When the dialog box shown below is displayed, check [Share thisfolder on the network].

After checking [Share this folder on the network], check [Allownetwork users to change my files] then click <OK>. The sharename need not be modified.

This completes the setting for sharing the i CELL installation

directory.




- 220 -

12 If the NC program directory is not included in the i CELL

installation directory, make a setting for sharing the NC programdirectory as well.The Network Setup Wizard has already been executed, so it is easyto make a setting for sharing the NC program directory. Displaythe NC program directory with Explorer. Next, right-click thenclick [Sharing and security].When the dialog box shown below is displayed, check [Share thisfolder on the network] and [Allow network users to change myfiles] then click <OK>.




- 221 -

5.3 SETTING

This section describes the items you set using the i CELL

"CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen" on the server and viewer PCs.

5.3.1 Procedure for Setting the Server PC

NOTEThe user who makes the setting described in thissubsection must have the administrator privilege.

Terminating the i CELL projectIf the i CELL screen is displayed, use the [Quit] button on the main

menu to close the screen. If the × button at the upper-right corner of theCimView screen is clicked or [Quit] in the [File] menu on the CimViewscreen is executed to close the screen, you cannot make normal setting.Then, terminate the i CELL project.

When you want to change an item that has already been set on theCIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen, close the i CELL screen and

terminate the i CELL project on all viewer PCs.

Backup

Execute “Backup & Restore” in program group “CIMPLICITYi CELL” and create a backup file with specifying “i CELL All”.

Checking the conditions for CIMPLICITY viewer operationCheck that the server and viewer PCs satisfy the conditions for CIMPLICITY viewer operation, referencing Subsection 5.2.1,"Checking the Conditions for CIMPLICITY Viewer Operation andCommunication."

Allocating available drivesAllocate available drives, referencing Subsection 5.2.2, "AllocatingAvailable Drives for Sharing Directories."

Setting for sharing the server PC (when Windows XP is used)Make a setting for sharing the i CELL installation directory and NC

program directory according to Subsection 5.2.3, "Setting for Sharingthe Server PC".

Starting the viewer PCA communication test with the viewer PC will be performed duringsetup of the server PC on the i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting

Screen. Start the viewer PC in advance.




- 222 -

CIMPLICITY Options window on the server PCActivate CIMPLICITY Options in “HMI” in program group“CIMPLICITY.”On the Startup Options tab, check that the [Accept connections] check

box is on.

i CELL project optionsExecute “i CELL Project” in program group “CIMPLICITY i CELL.”

Then, select “Project” → “Properties” to display the Project Properties

window. On the Options tab, check that the [Enable project broadcast]check box is on.




- 223 -

Operation on the i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen on the server PC(1) Open the CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen.

Execute “CIMPLICITY VIEWER SETUP” in program group“CIMPLICITY i CELL.”

(2) Check the TCP/IP setting using the ping command.Check that the server PC can communicate with the viewer PCusing the TCP/IP.A. Execute the [ping] command from the [Tools] menu. The

FethDgn program is activated.

B. Enter the computer name of the viewer PC in [IP Addr] of theFethDgn program.

C. Click the [Ping] button of the FethDgn program. When theserver PC can communicate with the viewer PC, the IPaddress of the viewer PC is displayed for "Reply" as shown

below:

If "Reply" is not displayed, check the setting so that "Reply"is displayed, referencing Subsection 5.2.1, "Checking theConditions for CIMPLICITY Viewer Operation andCommunication."

D. To communicate with multiple viewer PCs, check communication with all viewer PCs.

(3) Select the drive for the i CELL installation directory.

Use the [Drive] combo box (<1>) to select the drive to be used for the “i CELL installation directory.”

<1>

<2>

<3>

<1>




- 224 -

(4) Select the NC program root directory.Click the <2> button and select the NC program root directoryfrom the directory list.The NC program root directory must be the parent directory of thedefault directory of each machine that is set on the i CELL

Configuration dialog box. Example) When the following directories are set on the i CELL

Configuration dialog box

Machine 1 → C:\Program Files\Fanuc\NcData\01

Machine 2 → C:\Program Files\Fanuc\NcData\02Set C:\Program Files\Fanuc\NcData as the NC programroot directory.

When the selected NC program root directory is in the i CELL

installation directory, step (5) is not required.

NOTETo change an NC program default directory, use thefollowing procedure:

<1> On i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER SETUP,

cancel the CIMPLICITY viewer settings for the server and viewer PCs.

<2> On the i CELL Configuration dialog box,

change the default directory.<3> On i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER SETUP,

make the CIMPLICITY viewer settings for theserver and viewer PCs again.

(5) Select the drive for the NC program root directory.Use the [Drive] combo box (<3>) to select the drive to be used for the "NC program root directory."

(6) Click the [Set] button (<4>) to make what you specified effective.The settings that are made once are effective until they arecanceled.Restart the server PC and log in. The items related to sharing areset again based on the settings.

(7) Check that the drives can be shared.

- For Windows NTActivate Explorer and execute [Map Network Drive] from the[Tools] menu. The server PC name is displayed in the [SharedDirectories] tree. Click the server PC name.

- For Windows 2000 or Windows XPActivate Explorer, execute [Map Network Drive] from the [Tools]menu, and click the <Browse> button. A list of work groups is

displayed. Expand the work group to which the server and viewer PCs belong, then the server PC.




- 225 -

When i CELL_InstallDir and i CELL_NcDataRoot are displayed,the drives are shared. If the setting for the NC program rootdirectory is not made, however, i CELL_NcDataRoot is notdisplayed.In the example shown in the following figure, the setting is made onthe server PC SERVER01 and viewer PC VIEWER01 that belongto work group "FA-SYSTEM."

Note that to use the CIMPLICITY viewer, the server and viewer PCs must belong to the same work group. The CIMPLICITYviewer can be used only when the server and viewer PCs aredisplayed under the same work group as shown in the figure.(When the PCs are managed using a domain, they must belong tothe same domain.)

- For Windows NT

- For Windows 2000 or Windows XP




- 226 -

5.3.2 Procedure for Setting the Viewer PC

NOTEThe user who makes the setting described in thissubsection must have the administrator privilege.

Terminating the i CELL projectIf the i CELL screen is displayed, use the [Quit] button on the main

menu to close the screen. If the ( button at the upper right corner of theCimView screen is clicked or [Quit] in the [File] menu on the CimViewscreen is executed to close the screen, you cannot make normal setting.Then, terminate the i CELL project.

When you want to change an item that has already been set on the

CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen, also terminate the server PC.

BackupExecute “Backup & Restore” in program group “CIMPLICITY i

CELL” and create a backup file with specifying “i CELL All.”

Checking the conditions for CIMPLICITY viewer operationCheck that the server and viewer PCs satisfy the conditions for CIMPLICITY viewer operation, referencing Subsection 5.2.1,"Checking the Conditions for CIMPLICITY Viewer Operation andCommunication."

Allocating available drivesAllocate available drives, referencing Subsection 5.2.2, "AllocatingAvailable Drives for Sharing Directories."

Starting the server PCA communication test with the server PC will be performed duringsetup of the viewer PC on the i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting

Screen.Start the server PC in advance.

Login name and password to connect the server PCTo connect the viewer PC to the server PC, the login name and

password granted by the server PC are required.Contact a system administrator.




- 227 -

Operation on the i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen on the viewer PC(1) Open the CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen.

Execute “CIMPLICITY VIEWER SETUP” in program group“CIMPLICITY i CELL.”

(2) Enter the i CELL server PC name.

Enter the name (not the IP address) of the i CELL server PC in the

[Server PC Name] text box (<1>).

(3) When there is a router between the server and viewer PCs, check

[Connect to Server PC's C4 Service] in the [Option] menu.

(4) Check the TCP/IP setting using the ping command.Check that the viewer PC can communicate with the server PCusing the TCP/IP.A. Click the [Server Ping] button (<2>).B. When the viewer PC can communicate with the server PC,

the IP address of the server PC is displayed for "Reply" asshown below:

If "Reply" is not displayed, check the setting so that "Reply"is displayed, referencing Subsection 5.2.1, "Checking the

Conditions for CIMPLICITY Viewer Operation andCommunication."

<2>

<8>

<6>

<7>

<5>

<1>

<3>

<4>




- 228 -

(5) Enter the login user name.Enter the user name for logging in to the i CELL server PC in the

[Connect As] text box (<3>).

(6) Enter the login password.Enter the password for logging in to the i CELL server PC in the

[Password] text box (<4>).

(7) Click the [Display Server PC Information] button (<5>).When the viewer PC can be connected to the server PC,information set on the server PC is displayed in <6> and <7>.<6>: Name of the shared drive for the i CELL installation

directory<7>: Name of the shared drive for the NC program root directory

If these names are not displayed, invalid data is entered in step (2),(5), or (6). Check the data.

(8) When a router is used between the server and viewer PCs, check [Connect to Server PC's C4 Service] in the [Option] menu.

(9) Click the [Set] button (<8>) to make what you specified effective.

(10) The settings that are made once are effective until they arecanceled.Restart the viewer PC and log in. The items related to sharing areset again based on the settings.

When the CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen is opened onthe viewer PC set once, operations in steps (2), (5), and (6) are

performed automatically.

NOTETo change an NC program default directory, use thefollowing procedure:<1> On i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER SETUP,

cancel the CIMPLICITY viewer settings for theserver and viewer PCs.

<2> On the i CELL Configuration dialog box, change

the default directory.<3> On i CELL CIMPLICITY VIEWER SETUP,

make the CIMPLICITY viewer settings for theserver and viewer PCs again.




- 229 -

5.4 CHECKS

This section describes the checks required after CIMPLICITY viewer setup.If the CIMPLICITY viewer does not operate normally, review thesettings.

NOTEThe items checked in this section contain thesettings made in Sections 5.1 to 5.3.Start checking after completion of all settings.

5.4.1Checking Communication between the Viewer PC and EachNC

When the CIMPLICITY viewer function is used with i CELL, the

viewer PC needs to communicate with NCs using the TCP/IP.Check that the viewer PC can communicate with NCs using thefollowing procedure.

(1) Activate the FethDgn program on the viewer PC.On the viewer PC, execute “Ethernet Diagnose” in program group"CIMPLICITY i CELL."

(2) On the displayed screen, click the [Ping] tab and enter the IPaddress of a destination NC in the [IpAddr] text field and click the[Ping] button. When the settings are correct, "Reply" is displayedas shown below:

Check that the IP address of the NC is displayed for "Reply."If the above messages are not displayed, check the followingitems:

• On the server PC, activate the FethDgn program and performthe same check.

If the above messages are not displayed also on the server PC,make the settings on the server PC and subsequent settingsagain.

• When there is a router between the server and viewer PCs,

the router gateway setting is required for the viewer PC and NCs.




- 230 -

(3) Click the [FOCAS2] tab on the screen and click the [GetNcInfo] button. When the settings are correct, NC identificationinformation is displayed as shown below:

If NC identification information is not displayed, check thefollowing item:

• On the server PC, activate the FethDgn program and performthe same check.If NC identification information is not displayed also on theserver PC, make the settings on the server PC and subsequentsettings again.

(4) If "Enable C4 Server" is checked in communication setting of i

CELL, click the [C4 Api] tab on the screen then click the [Test] button.When the settings are correct, "Live=True" is displayed as shown below:




- 231 -

If "Live=True" is not displayed, check the following items:

• On the server PC, activate the FethDgn program and performthe same check.If "Live=True" is not displayed also on the server PC, makethe settings on the server PC and subsequent settings again.

• When there is a router between the server and viewer PCs,you need to check [Connect to Server PC's C4 Services] inthe [Option] menu during "CIMPLICITY VIEWER SETUP"operation on the viewer PC.Check the operation in step (8) in "Operation on the i CELL

CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen on the viewer PC" inSubsection 5.3.2, "Procedure for Setting the Viewer PC."

5.4.2 Checking CIMPLICITY Viewer Communication

(1) On the server PCExecute the i CELL project. You do not need to activate [Main

Menu].(2) On the viewer PC

From the Start menu, select Programs → CIMPLICITY → HMI

→ CIMPLICITY Options to open the CIMPLICITY Optionsscreen. Then, select the Projects tab and click the [Start as viewer]

button. "VIEWER" is displayed in the [Running projects] field.(3) On the viewer PC

From the Start menu, select Programs → CIMPLICITY → HMI

→ Point Control Panel.(4) On the viewer PC

On the Point Control Panel, select Edit → Add Points.Enter the name of the server PC in the [Project] text box on the"Select a Point" screen.

(5) Enter "$PROJECT" in the [Point ID] text box on the "Select aPoint" screen and click the [Browse] button. The $PROJECT

point of the project running on the server PC is displayed at the bottom of the screen as an option. Double-click the point.

(6) When "CIMPROJECT" is displayed as the value of the$PROJECT point, communication between the server and viewer PCs is performed.




- 232 -

5.5 EXECUTION

This section describes how to execute the CIMPLICITY viewer on i

CELL.

(1) On the server PC, execute the i CELL project and [Main Menu].

(2) On the viewer PC, execute “Main Menu” in program group“CIMPLICITY i CELL.”

NOTEWhen the CIMPLICITY viewer is used with WindowsXP, the NC program management screen cannot beused with the viewer PC until the main menu isexecuted even if a project is executed on the server PC.When the CIMPLICITY viewer is used with Windows2000 or Windows NT, the NC program managementscreen can be used with the viewer PC if a project isexecuted on the server PC.

5.6 CANCELING THE SETTINGS

To cancel the settings, use the CIMPLICITY VIEWER Setting Screen.Execute "CIMPLICITY VIEWER SETUP" in program group"CIMPLICITY i CELL."

NOTEThe user who cancels the settings must have theadministrator privilege.Note the following points when canceling thesettings.

<1> StopiCELL. Also stop the CIMPLICITY project.<2> Before canceling the settings on the server PC,

cancel the settings on the viewer PC.<3> Before canceling the settings, confirm that the

shared drives, iCELL_InstallDir andiCELL_NcDataRoot are not accessed. Also confirm that the contents of the shareddrives are not displayed using Explorer.

Procedure for canceling the CIMPLICITY viewer settings on the viewer PCClick the Unset button. The settings are canceled.

Procedure for canceling the CIMPLICITY viewer settings on the server PCClick the Unset button. The settings are canceled.



IV. OPERATION



B-75074EN/04 OPERATION 1.OVERVIEW

- 235 -

1 OVERVIEW

This chapter describes the methods of activating and terminating the i

CELL project of CIMPLICITY and the method of operating each i

CELL screen.

For the method of remote support operation, refer to the operator's

manual of remote support.

The table below indicates the procedure for activating, operating, and

terminating the i CELL, and the chapters and sections of the manual to

be referenced.

Procedure DescriptionRelevant chapter/section of the manual

(part for operation)

1 Activation of the i CELL project 2.1 ACTIVATING THE i CELL PROJECTActivation

2 Activation of the main menu 3.2 ACTIVATING THE MAIN MENU

Operation 3 Operation of various screens

3. MAIN MENU

4. OVERVIEW MENU

5. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT

6. MACHINING RESULTS

7. WORKPIECE PROCESS RESULTS

8. NC DISPLAY AND OPERATION

9. NC MAINTENANCE10. TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT

11. ALARMS AND WARNINGS

4 Termination of the main menu 3.3 TERMINATING THE MAIN MENU

Termination5 Termination of the i CELL project

2.2 TERMINATING THE i CELL

PROJECT



2.SCREEN OPERATION OPERATION B-75074EN/04

- 236 -

2 SCREEN OPERATION

This chapter describes the method of activating the i CELL project, the

structure for calling each screen, and the name and operation of each

component common to the screens.



B-75074EN/04 OPERATION 2.SCREEN OPERATION

- 237 -

2.1 ACTIVATING THE i CELL PROJECT

The i CELL screens are created on CIMPLICITY.

Before the i CELL screens can be displayed and executed, the i CELL

project created by FANUC must be operating on CIMPLICITY.

The method of activating the i CELL project is described below.

<1> Choose the [Start] button on the menu of Windows. Next, choose

[Programs], then activate the [iCELL Project] icon of

[CIMPLICITY iCELL].

The CIMPLICITY workbench shown below appears.

<2> Check the state of the toolbar on the CIMPLICITY workbench.

(1) When the CIMPLICITY workbench is displayed as shown

below, the i CELL project is terminated. Click the buttonto execute the i CELL project.

When the project selection dialog box appears, click the

<Start> button to start the project.

NOTEClicking the Cancel button also displays the mainmenu. In this case, however, the CIMPLICITYproject is not started, so that the screen does notoperate normally.

When the i CELL project is activated, the login dialog box

appears. Enter the following information:

User ID: ADMINISTRATOR

Password: None

After user ID and password input, click the <OK> button.

Check here.




- 238 -


below, the i CELL project is already executed. So, activate

the main menu according to <4> below.

<4> Activate the main menu. For the method of main menu activation,

see Section 3.2, "ACTIVATING THE MAIN MENU".

After main menu activation, the CIMPLICITY workbench may be

terminated or may continue being displayed.

2.2 TERMINATING THE i CELL PROJECT

This section describes the method of terminating the i CELL project.

<1> Terminate the main menu. For the method of main menu

termination, see Section 3.3, "TERMINATING THE MAIN

MENU".

<2> Choose the [Start] button on the menu of Windows. Next, choose

[Programs], then activate the [iCELL Project] icon of

[CIMPLICITY iCELL].

The CIMPLICITY workbench shown below appears.<3> Check the state of the toolbar on the CIMPLICITY workbench.


below, the i CELL project is terminated. No operation is

required.


below, the i CELL project is activated. Click the button to

terminate the i CELL project.

<3> Terminate the CIMPLICITY workbench.

Check here.

Check here.

Check here.




- 239 -

2.3 SWITCHING AMONG THE SCREENS

This section describes the method of switching among the screens.

Screen configurationThe screen configuration related to screen switching only is briefly

described below.

<1> Function selection tabs

A function selection tab is used to call the corresponding function.

When you click a tab, the screen for managing the selected

function is displayed. When a selected function has multiple

screens, a submenu for calling a desired screen is displayed.

<2> Screen switch buttons

When the function corresponding to a selected tab has multiple

screens, these buttons are displayed. For example, the operation

monitoring tab involves the machining result screen, process

result screen, and the tool life management screen. When the

operation monitoring tab is selected, the machining result screen

first appears. To display the process result screen, click the [Proc.

Result] button.

<3> Previous-screen buttonThis button returns the screen display to the previous screen.

<1>

Function

selection

tabs

<3>Previous-screenbutton

<2> Screen switch buttons




- 240 -

Two methods of switchingEach screen is divided into functions. On each screen, a machine

number to be displayed can be selected. Two methods are available for

switching the screen display.

One method uses the overview menu. The procedure is:

<1> From the overview menu, select a machine to be displayed.

<2> When a machine is selected, the screen list buttons appear. Choose

a desired one from the screen list buttons.

The other method uses the function selection tabs. The procedure is:

<1> Select the tab of a desired function.

<2> On the displayed screen, select a machine to be displayed.

Switching using the overview menuBy using an example of displaying the workpiece process result screen,

the screen switching method is described below.

<1> Select the overview tab.

Arbitrary screen

XXXXX screen

XXXXXXXX

<2> The overview screen appears. Click the status display indicating

the path number of a machine to be displayed.

MCN001 MCN002 MCN003 MCN004 MCN005

Overview Screen

Select a desired machine.




- 241 -

<3> A screen list usable with machine 01 is displayed. When you click

the <Workpiece Process Result> button, the workpiece process

result screen appears.

MCN001

Overview Screen Machine 01 related screen

Select a desired screen.

Directory Display

Workpiece Process Result

Machining Result

Switching using a function selection tabBefore using the function selection tabs, you need to know which

screen belongs to which tab.

By using an example of displaying the workpiece process result screen,

the screen switching method is described below.

<1> Select the operation monitoring tag involving the workpiece

process screen.

Arbitrary screen

XXXXX screen

XXXXXXXX

<2> The operation monitoring tab involves multiple screens. The

machining result screen first appears. To display the workpiece process result screen, click the [Proc. Result] button.




- 242 -

2.4 ITEMS COMMON TO THE SCREENS

By using the machining result screen as an example, this section

describes the names and operation methods common to the screens.

NOTEThe NC Program Management screen and theremote support screen do not share these commonscreen elements.

2.4.1 Names of Screen Components

The names of screen components are indicated below.

<1> Screen title

A screen title is displayed in the format: function name - screen

name.

<2> Current date and time

The current date and time is displayed.

<1> Screen title<2> Current date and time

<3> Warning and alarm lamps

<4> Message indication line

<6>

Machineselection

<5> Message confirmation button




- 243 -

<3> Warning and alarm lamps

(1) Warning lamp:

If an error occurs in i CELL background processing such as

machining result collection, the lamp blinks in yellow.

Clicking the warning lamp activates the warning log display

screen, and displays an error log.

(2) Alarm lamp:

If an alarm is raised in any NC connected, the alarm lamp

blinks in red. If an operator message is issued, the lamp

blinks in magenta. If there are both an alarm state and an

operator message, the lamp blinks in the color of alarm, that

is, in red. Clicking the blinking alarm lamp causes the alarm

message screen to appear. The screen first shows the

information of an NC with the smallest machine number of

the NCs having an alarm state or operator message. If thereare both an alarm state and an operator message, the

information of an NC in an alarm state takes precedence.

<4> Message indication line

The message indication line displays an operation method or error

message. If a message is displayed in this line, operation is

disabled until you click the message confirmation button

described in <5> below.

<5> Message confirmation button

The message confirmation button appears only when a message is

displayed. (The figure displays the button for explanation.) Upon

confirmation of a message displayed in the message indication line,

click this button.<6> Machine number selection

Select a machine number or machine name in the combo box.

Depending on the screen, a combo box for path number selection

is also displayed.



3.MAIN MENU OPERATION B-75074EN/04

- 244 -

3 MAIN MENU



B-75074EN/04 OPERATION 3.MAIN MENU

- 245 -

3.1 OUTLINE

The main menu is the highest-order screen of the i CELL. The i CELL

is activated on this screen, and is terminated on this screen.

Before activating the main menu, perform operation according to

Section 2.1, "ACTIVATING THE i CELL PROJECT".

3.2 ACTIVATING THE MAIN MENU

Choose the [Start] button. Next, choose [Programs], then activate the

[Main Menu] icon of [CIMPLICITY iCELL].

The main menu is activated.

NOTEWhen activating the i CELL screen, be sure to use

the [Main Menu] icon.When the main menu is activated, the backgroundprograms required for the i CELL are activated.



3.MAIN MENU OPERATION B-75074EN/04

- 246 -

3.3 TERMINATING THE MAIN MENU

To terminate the main menu, click the Quit button of the main menu.

NOTEWhen terminating the i CELL screen, use the <Quit>

button of the main menu.When CimView is terminated, the main menu displaycan be terminated, but the background programsactivated together with the main menu cannot beterminated.

3.4 OPERATION

The operation buttons on the main menu have the following functions:

OvewView Displays the overview screen.

NC Program Management Displays the NC Program Management

screen.

Operation Monitoring Displays the machining result and tool life

management screens.

NC Display and Operation Displays the NC display and operation screen.

Alarm and Warning Displays the alarm and warning screen.

Maintenance Displays the maintenance screen.Remote Support Displays the remote support screen.

NOTEWhen the main menu is displayed by usingWebView, the NC Program Management button andthe Remote Support button are not displayed.



B-75074EN/04 OPERATION 4.OVERVIEW MENU

- 247 -

4 OVERVIEW MENU



4.OVERVIEW MENU OPERATION B-75074EN/04

- 248 -

4.1 OUTLINE

The overview menu displays the status of each machine connected to

the i CELL as a list on a path-by-path basis.

When you click the status display on the overview menu, the overview

machine screen is displayed.

NOTEIf the Reader/Puncher interface is used as thecommunication protocol, the status of each path isnot displayed.




- 249 -

4.2 SCREEN OPERATION (1) OVERVIEW SCREEN

Method of activationThe overview screen is activated by choosing the [OverView] button on

the main menu.

The figure below shows an example where one NC is connected.

<1> Machine number displayA machine number set on the setting screen is displayed.

<2> Machine name displayA machine name set on the setting screen is displayed.

<3> Path number display A path number set on the setting screen is displayed in the format: "P" +

path number.

Clicking this field displays the overview machine screen.

<4> Status display for each path

<5> Machine figure

display

<1> Machine

number display<2> Machine name display

<3> Path number display




- 250 -

<4> Status display for each pathMachine status is displayed for each path. Clicking this field displays

the overview machine screen.

When a machine with multiple paths is connected, status information is

displayed for each path. The following statuses are displayed:

Power off State where the power to the NC is not turned on or

communication is not performed

Reset, Stopped,

Hold, Running

Based on the STL, SPL, and OP signals of the NC, a

state in automatic operation is displayed. For details,

see the table below.

STL SPL OP

Reset OFF OFF OFF

Stopped OFF OFF ON

Hold OFF ON ON

Running ON OFF ON

Emergency The emergency stop state is set.

Alarm An alarm is issued.

Com. Hold This state appears if a machine connected with DNC2

is displayed on the NC Program Management screen.

If the connection is made by DNC2, statuses such as

Activated and Alarm cannot be displayed while the

NC Program Management screen is active.

Machining results cannot be obtained either. This

state is indicated as Com.Hold.

<5> Machine figure display A machine figure created in the bit map format is displayed.

For the method of modifying a displayed machine figure, see the

description of "Modifying a machine figure" in Section 4.4,

"CHANGING THE NUMBER OF CONNECTED MACHINES".




- 251 -

4.3 SCREEN OPERATION (2) SCREEN LIST FOR EACH

OVERVIEW MACHINE

Method of activationWhen you click the [Status Display] object on the overview menu, the

screen list for each overview machine is activated.

<1> through <5> on the left side of the screen are the same as on the

overview screen.

When you click a button in the middle of the screen, the screen

indicated on the button is activated. The activated screen displays

information about the machine number selected on this screen.

Just the functions assigned to each machine on the i CELL setup screen

are displayed.For instance, if the workpiece process result function is not assigned to

machine 1, the “Workpieces Process Result” button does not appear.


<5> Machine figure

display

<1> Machine

number

display

<2> Machine name display

<3> Path number

display

<6> Used to

activate

each screen




- 252 -

4.4 CHANGING THE NUMBER OF CONNECTED MACHINES

At the time of installation, up to five machines can be displayed on the

overview screen. If additional machines are connected using the

Additional CNC connecting option, the number of machines displayed

on the overview screen needs to be increased.

To increase the number of machines displayed on the overview screen,

two methods are available:

(A) Copy an overview screen prepared beforehand for 10 machines,

15 machines, or 20 machines.

(B) Edit the screen for displaying five machines at installation time on

the CimEdit screen of CIMPLICITY to add objects for machine

information display.

Method (A), which uses a copy of an overview screen prepared beforehand, is much easier. However, information added by the user to

the overview screen for five machines is not displayed on a copied

screen. In such a case, edit the screen by using method (B). Each

method is described below.

4.4.1 Copying an Overview Prepared Beforehand

With the i CELL, overview screens for 10 machines, 15 machines, and

20 machines are available in addition to the overview screen for 5

machines used at installation time.

If additional machines are connected using the Additional CNCconnecting option, these overview screens can be copied for use. Use

the procedure below for copying an overview screen.

(1) Delete the current screen.

The overview screen used at installation time is stored at the

location indicated below. (%iCELL% is the directory where i

CELL is installed.)

Directory name %iCELL%\CimProject\Screens

File name OverViewMenu.cim

(2) Select an overview screen to be used.

Select an overview screen according to the number of machines to

be connected. The overview screens for 10 machines,15 machines,

and 20 machines are stored at the locations indicated below.Directory name %iCELL%\CimProject\Screens

File name for 10 machines OverViewMenu10.cim



(3) Copy the overview screen to be used, and rename it.

With the file explorer, copy the overview screen to be used, and

rename the screen to OverViewMenu.cim. Change the name of

the copied file, keeping each file in (2) unchanged.

Machine drawing bit map files to be displayed on the overview screen

are also available for 20 machines under the same directory as for the

overview screen. These files are automatically called from the overview

screen, so that no modification to the files is required even when thenumber of machines is changed.




- 253 -

4.4.2 Editing the Overview Screen

When adding machines by editing the overview screen, use the procedure below.

Opening the overview screen with CimEditOpen the overview screen with CimEdit of CIMPLICITY. (For the

method of CimEdit operation, refer to the relevant manual of

CIMPLICITY.)

The overview screen is stored at the following location:

Directory name : %iCELL%\CimProject\Screens

File name : OverViewMenu.cim

(%iCELL% is the directory where the i CELL is installed.)

Changing the number of objectsTo change the number of machines, change the number of status group

objects and machine figure objects. The figure below provides an

example of opening the overview screen with CimEdit.

By default, the number of status group objects is 5, and the number of

machine figure objects is 5. Change these numbers as required.

To decrease these numbers, delete unnecessary objects.

To increase these numbers, copy and paste desired objects.

To each machine, only a status group object or only a machine figure

object can be assigned.

<1> Status group

object

<2> Machine figure

object

For machine 1 For machine 2 For machine 3 For machine 4 For machine 5




- 254 -

Naming each objectWhen a machine is added, assign a name to a copied and pasted object.

(When the number of connected machines is decreased, the remaining

object names are valid, and need not be changed.)

Select a desired object from CimEdit, display the property dialog box

by right-clicking. Assign the following name corresponding to a

machine number to [Object name] of the [General] tab:

Object : Object name

Status group : McnStat + machine number

Machine figure : McnImage + machine number

When the number of connected machines is increased to 6, for example,

an object created for machine number 6 is named as follows:

Status group : McnStat6

Machine figure : McnImage6

When increasing the number of connected machines to 6, name the

status group object and machine figure object as shown below.

McnImage3 McnImage4McnImage1 McnImage2 McnImage5 McnImage6

McnSlct1 McnStat2 McnStat3 McnStat4 McnStat5 McnStat6



B-75074EN/04 OPERATION 5.NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT

- 255 -

5 NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT



5.NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-75074EN/04

- 256 -

5.1 OUTLINE

NC Program Management is the software package that allows a

computer to function as an NC program file sever to connect multiple

NCs. NC Program Management also allows connection with a Data

Server or PC. For communication with a Data Server or PC, the

operating side needs to be an FTP client, and the operated side needs to

be an FTP server. When the connection target is a PC, the same

operation as for a Data Server can be performed by operating NC

Program Management.

The functions that can be carried out by NC Program Management

depend on the communication protocol used, as indicated below.

(1) Communication by FOCAS2/Ethernet or DNC2The following can be performed just by operations on the NC

Program Management screen of the computer.

• A computer can download an NC program to NC.

• A computer can upload an NC program from NC.

• NC Program Management can show the list of NC programs

stored in the NC memory.

• NC Program Management can delete an NC program stored

in NC.

• NC programs in NC memory can be edited and referenced. A

specified NC program is automatically uploaded to the

personal computer, and edited or referenced on the personal

computer. If an NC program on the personal computer is

rewritten, download the NC program to the NC after

confirmation.

• NC programs for each path can be managed in any directory.

(For FOCAS2/Ethernet only)

With Series 30i/31i/32i, the following processing can be

performed as well:

• Folders containing files on the personal computer can be

downloaded directly to NC memory.

• Folders containing files in NC memory can be uploaded

directly to the personal computer.

• Folders in NC memory can be deleted.• Files and folders in NC memory can be renamed.

• A new directory can be created in NC memory.

• Files in NC memory can be copied and moved to different

folders.

The processing below can be performed by operating the NC.

With FOCAS2/Ethernet, however, only the FTP file transfer

function of embedded Ethernet can be used.

• An NC program can be downloaded from a computer to the

NC.

• An NC program can be uploaded from the NC to a computer.




- 257 -

For NC operation, refer to the operator's manual of each NC in the case

of FOCAS2/Ethernet, and see Appendix C.1, "DNC2", in the case of

DNC2.

NOTEWhile the NC Program Management screen isdisplaying a machine connected by DNC2, statussignals such as Activated and Alarm or machiningresults cannot be obtained from the machine.In this state, "Com.Hold" is displayed in the statusfield of the overview menu screen.

(2) Reader/Puncher communication

The following can be performed by operating the NC.

•

An NC program can be downloaded from a computer to the NC.

• An NC program can be uploaded from the NC to a computer.

• A DNC operation can be carried out through the use of an NC

program in a computer.

• The File List in a computer can be displayed on the NC

screen.

• A file can be deleted from a computer.

For details of NC operations, see Appendix C.2,

"READER/PUNCHER."

(3) Data Server communicationThe following can be performed just by operations on the NC

Program Management screen of the computer.

• Files of the personal computer can be downloaded to the

connection destination.

• Files of the connection destination can be uploaded to the

personal computer.

• The directory list and File List of the connection destination

can be displayed on the NC Program Management screen on

the personal computer.

• Files and directories of the connection destination can be

deleted.• Files and directories of the connection destination can be

renamed.

• A directory can be created on the connection destination.

• A file of the connection destination can be edited or

referenced. A specified file can be automatically uploaded to

the personal computer and can be edited or referenced on the

personal computer. If a file on the personal computer is

rewritten at the time of editing, the file can be downloaded to

the connection destination after confirmation.

• A file of the connection destination can be copied or moved

to a directory.




- 258 -

The processing below can be performed by operating the NC.

• NC programs in the personal computer can be downloaded

into the NC memory and Data Server.

• NC programs in the NC memory and Data Server can be

updated to the personal computer.

• By using an NC program in the personal computer, DNC

operation can be performed.

• The File List on the personal computer can be displayed on

the NC screen.

• Files and directories in the personal computer can be deleted.

For NC operation, refer to the operator's manual of each Data Server.

NOTE

1 When a Data Server has aFOCAS2/Ethernet-related option selected, theFOCAS2/Ethernet function can also be used. Refer also to the relevant document.

2 When a file is copied or moved, the file is onceuploaded to the personal computer then isdownloaded to a specified directory to perform avirtual copy or move operation.




- 259 -

5.2 SCREEN OPERATION

Method of activationFor activation, use one of the following methods:

• From the [Main Menu], use the [NC Program Management] button

for activation.

• On the [Overview - Screen List for Each Machine] screen, use the

[Program Directory] button for activation.

• From the [Main Menu], use the [NC Program Management] button

for activation.

5.2.1 About The NC Program Management Window

The following figure is NC Program Management screen. Basically, the

upper part of the screen is the management screen on PC side (personal

computer) and the lower part of the screen is the management screen on


File List

Slider

Split Bar

PC Directory Trees

Tool Bar

Current Management Status Bar

Scroll Bar

Menu Bar

Management screen of connection destination

Managementscreen on PC side

Status Bar

Machine List of ConnectionTarget

PC side (upper part)- PCDirectory Trees

The PC Directory Trees appear on the upper left part of the NC Program

Management screen. In the PC Directory Trees, My Computer (a

directory in Windows) is displayed. Files can be transferred between

directories without using Windows Explorer. In addition, files can

directly be downloaded to and uploaded from the connection

destination.




- 260 -

- File ListThe PC side File List is displayed in the upper right part of the NC

Program Management screen. The PC side File List shows a list of files

in the directory currently selected in the PC Directory Trees.

- Current Management Status Bar The Current Management Status Bar on the PC side shows the path of

the directory currently selected in the PC Directory Trees. The current

management status bar also indicates whether the selected directory is

the default directory or not.

Connection destination (lower part)- Machine List of Connection Target

The Machine List of Connection Target is displayed in the lower left

part of the NC Program Management screen. The Machine List of

Connection Target shows the Machine List and the FTP Server List.

(1) Machine List

The Machine List indicates the machines that can be used by NC

Program Management. When a machine is selected from the

Machine List, the default directory assigned to the machine is

selected in the PC Directory Trees, and files in the default

directory are listed in the PC side File List.

(2) FTP Server List

FTP Server List indicates the FTP servers that can be used by NC

Program Management. However, if no FTP client is set on thei

CELL setting screen, no FTP server is indicated. FTP servers have

no default directory. So, even when an FTP server is selected from

the FTP Server List, the directory selected in the PC Directory

Trees remains unchanged.

If the connection destination is Series 30i/31i/32i or an FTP server (data

server), the directory list is indicated in a tree structure when the PC is

connected to the connection destination.

- File ListThe File List of the connection destination is displayed in the lower

right part of the NC Program Management screen. The File List of the

connection destination shows a list of files on the machine (or FTPserver) currently selected in the Machine List of Connection Target.

When the machine or FTP server is not connected, nothing is displayed.

- Current Management Status Bar The Current Management Status Bar of the connection destination

shows information (such as the machine name and communication

protocol) about the machine currently selected in the Machine List of

Connection Target. When the machine is not connected, only the

machine name is displayed.




- 261 -

Status Bar The Status Bar shows the total number of files in the File List currently

selected. When a command that requires certain processing time is

executed such as a command for changing directories or a command for

performing connection processing, a message appears in the Status Bar,

indicating that processing is in progress.

Scroll Bar The Scroll Bar is used to scroll the PC Directory Trees, the Machine

List of Connection Target, or the File List to bring a part currently

hidden into view.

Slider The Slider is used to change pages of the PC side File List.

When the total number of files in the selected directory exceeds themaximum number of files that can be displayed on one page of the File

List, the remaining files are displayed on the second and subsequent

pages.

Any value within the range 100 to 5000 can be set in the Options screen

as the maximum number of files that can be displayed in one page of the

File List.

Menu Bar The Menu Bar contains the commands for handling NC Program

Management.

Tool Bar The Tool Bar contains the shortcut buttons providing quick access to

the often utilized commands .

Split Bar You can place the mouse on the Split Bar between the PC Directory

Trees or Machine List of Connection Target and the File List or on the

Split Bar between the management screen on the PC side and the

management screen of the connection destination, and drag to a desired

position to adjust the widths and heights of these display areas.




- 262 -

5.2.2 Work with the File List in the PC

Changing the current management directory on the PC side1 When the NC Program Management screen is activated for the

first time, My Computer is expanded in the PC Directory Trees,

and the Machine List and the FTP Server Lists are expanded in the

Machine List of Connection Target.

2 When you click a directory in the PC Directory Trees, it is selected

as the current management directory on the PC side, and the

contents of the directory are listed in the PC side File List.

When you click a machine in the Machine List of Connection

Target, the default directory set for the machine is selected in the

PC Directory Trees, and the contents of the directory are listed in

the PC side File List. When no default directory has been set for

the machine, the displayed information in the PC Directory Trees

and the PC side File List remains unchanged.




- 263 -

♦ You can select the connection destination machine also from

the list box on the left side of the tool bar. (Machine List and

FTP Server List only)

Changing the display format of the PC side File List• To display large icons of files, choose the [Large Icons] from the

[Upper File List] of [View] menu, or click the [Large Icons] button

on the tool bar.

• To display only names of files, click the [List] command from the

[Upper File List] of [View] menu, or click the [List] button on the

tool bar.• To display complete information about each file, click the

[Details] command from the [Upper File List] of [View] menu, or

click the [Details] button on the tool bar.




- 264 -

Display sequence of the PC side File List• To sort files alphabetically by name, choose the [Sort by Name]

command from the [Arrange Icons] of [Upper File List] of [View]menu.

• To sort files by type, choose the [Sort by Type] command from the

[Arrange Icons] of [Upper File List] of [View] menu.

• To sort files by size, choose the [Sort by Size] command from the


• To sort files by date, choose the [Sort by Date] command from the


♦ When complete information of files are displayed, you can

sort files by clicking one of the [Name], [Type], [Size], [Last

modification date] column in the top of the File List.

Updating the display of the PC side File List1 Press the F5 function key or choose the [Refresh] command from

the [View] menu. The File List is updated.

The display of the PC side File List is updated to the most recent

information. The PC Directory Trees, the Machine List of

Connection Target, and the File List of the connection destination

are also updated at the same time.




- 265 -

5.2.3 Copying, Moving, Deleting and Renaming Files (andDirectories) in the PC

This subsection explains how to copy, move, delete, and rename files in

the PC. The subsection also explains how to delete and rename

directories.

Copying Files in the PC1 In the PC side File List, click the file you want to copy.

You can select more than one file by clicking files while pushing

the [Ctrl] key.

2 Perform a menu operation or drag and drop operation.

A) Menu operation

In the [File] menu or the menu displayed by right-clicking on

the selected file, click the [Copy] command. Alternatively,

press the [Ctrl+C] keys. Then, the selected file is registered in

the work list. (The work list is not displayed.) Proceed to step

3.

B) Drag and drop operation

Drag the selected file to a directory in the PC Directory Trees

or the PC side File List, and drop the file while holding downthe [Ctrl] key. (The dragged and dropped file is not registered

in the work list.) The [Copy File] dialog box is displayed.

Proceed to step 5.




- 266 -

3 Select and click the copy destination in the directories in the PC

Directory Trees or the PC side File List.

4 In the [File] menu or the menu displayed by right-clicking in the

PC side File List, click the [Paste] command. Alternatively, click

the [Ctrl+V] keys. Then, the [Copy File] dialog box appears.

5 Click the <Copy> button.

NOTE1 When a copy source and copy destination are

located in the same directory, the file cannot be

copied.2 Even when a file has been copied, the registered file

is not cleared from the work list. Such a file can becopied to another directory in succession.

3 You can clear registered files from the work list bypressing the [Esc] key.




- 267 -

Moving Files in the PC1 Choose the file you want to move from the PC side File List.


the [Ctrl] key.


A) Menu operation

In the [File] menu or the menu displayed by right-clicking on

the selected file, click the [Cut] command. Alternatively,

press the [Ctrl+X] keys. Then, the selected file is registered

in the work list. (The work list is not displayed.) Proceed to

step 3.


Drag the selected file to a directory in the PC Directory Trees

or the PC side File List, and drop the file. (The dragged and

dropped file is not registered in the work list.) The [MoveFile] dialog box is displayed. Proceed to step 5.

3 From the directories of the PC Directory Trees or the PC side File

List, select and click a move destination.

4 Click the [Paste] command on the [File] menu or the right-click

menu in the PC side File List, or press the [Ctrl+V] keys. The

[Move File] dialog box is displayed.

5 Click the <Move> button.

NOTE1 When a move source and move destination are

located in the same directory, the file cannot bemoved.2 When the [Move File] dialog box is closed, the

registered file is cleared from the work list.3 You can clear registered files from the work list by

pressing the [Esc] key.




- 268 -

Deleting Files and Directories in the PC1 Choose the file and directory (hereinafter simply referred to as the

file) you want to delete from the PC side File List.


the [Ctrl] key.

2 When one of the following operations is performed, the [Delete

File] dialog box appears:

• Press the [Delete] key.

• Click the [Delete] command in the [File] menu.

• In the menu displayed by right-clicking on the selected file,

click [Delete] command.

3 If the <Delete> button is clicked, the selected file is deleted from

the NC memory.

If the <Cancel> button is clicked, the deletion is canceled.

NOTE1 When a directory is deleted, all files and directoriesincluded in the directory are deleted.

2 Deleted files and directories are completely removedfrom the PC. Take special care when deleting filesand directories.

Renaming the file or directory in the PC1 Choose the file or directory you want to rename from the PC side

File List.

2 In the [File] menu or the menu displayed by right-clicking on the

selected file, click the [Rename] command. Then, the [RenameFile] dialog box appears.

3 Enter a new name of the file, and click the <Change> button.

Unless you enter a name in the text box, the <Change> button does

not become effective.




- 269 -

5.2.4 Browsing, Editing and Creating New Files in the PC

Browsing Files in the PC 1 Choose the file you want to browse in the PC side File List.


selected file, click the [View] command. Then, the viewer set for

the selected file is activated.

• When the file is selected in the File List, the Edit File List

screen is started. Refer to 5.3 “EDIT LIST FILE SCREENOPERATIONS” for details of operations in the Edit File List

screen.

• If an item other than the list file is selected, the viewer set in

the [Option] dialog box is activated.

To terminate reference operation, click [Exit] on the menu.




- 270 -

NOTE1 File Viewer allows you to view only one file at once.

2 File Viewer is a text viewer. It does not allow you toview binary files.3 The largest file size that File Viewer allows you to

view is 32 Kbytes. When you browse files exceedingthis size limit, only the first 32 Kbytes of the file aredisplayed.

4 You can also specify third-party viewer software inthe [Options] dialog box. Refer to "5.2.10 SettingOptions.

Editing Files in the PC

NOTE1 If you have selected the "Disable Editor" option in

the [Options] dialog box, the [Edit] menu is notdisplayed.

2 Files in work directory cannot be edited.

1 Choose the file you want to edit in the File List.


selected file, click the [Edit] command. Then, the editor set for the

selected file is activated.

• When the file is selected in the File List, the Edit File List

screen is started. Refer to 5.3 “EDIT LIST FILE SCREEN

OPERATIONS” for details of operations in the Edit File List

screen.

• When the file is selected outside of the File List, the editor set

in the [Options] dialog box is started.




- 271 -

Creating New Files in the PCNOTE1 If you have selected the "Disable Editor" option in

the Options menu, the [New File] menu is notdisplayed.

2 You can create files only when you have selectedthe default directory of the selected machine.

1 In the PC Directory Trees, select the default directory of the

selected machine.

2 Point at the [New] command in the [File] menu. File types that can

be created are displayed. Click the desired file type.

• When the file is selected in the File List, the editor that you

specified in the Options menu is displayed. Use this editor for

creating NC programs or subprogram.

• When the file is selected outside of the File List, the Edit File

List screen is started. Use this screen for creating the File List.

Refer to 5.3. “EDIT LIST FILE SCREEN OPERATIONS”for details of operations in the Edit File List screen.




- 272 -

5.2.5 Creating New Directories in the PC

Creating new directories in the PC1 In My Computer (in the PC Directory Trees), click the directory in

which you want to create a new directory to specify the selected

directory as the PC side current management group.

2 In the [File] menu or the menu displayed by right-clicking in the

PC Directory Trees, click the [Create Directory] command. Then,

the [Create Directory] dialog box appears. When the command is

executed from the menu displayed by right-clicking, right-click on

a place in which neither a file nor directory is displayed in the File

List. If you right-click on a file or directory, you cannot use the

[Create Directory] command.

3 Enter the name of a directory to be created in the [New Name] text

box, then click the <Create> button. Unless you enter a name inthe [New Name] text box, the <Create> button does not become

effective.




- 273 -

5.2.6 Downloading and Uploading NC Programs

This subsection explains how to download and upload NC programsthrough communication with NC memory (for the FOCAS2/Ethernet

and DNC2 functions) and through communication with a data server

(FTP server) (for the data server function).

NOTEWhen i CELL is used on the CIMPLICITY viewer to

download NC programs to or upload NC programsfrom NC memory, the viewer PC can perform onlydownloading from the default directory anduploading to the default directory.

5.2.6.1 Communication with the NC memory

Displaying the List of NC Programs in the Memory of NC1 Click a machine in the Machine List of the Machine List of

Connection Target. Then, communication with the clicked

machine starts.

(The start of communication when a machine is clicked can be

suppressed by option setting. For details, see the description of the

communication tab in Subsection 5.2.10, "Setting Options". When

this option is set, communication is started by clicking the [Start

Communication with NC Memory] command in the[Communication] menu.)

The PC side File List shows the contents of the default directory

set for the machine.

Displays a list of files of the default directory

assigned to machine MCN002.




- 274 -

In the Machine List of Connection Target and the File List of the

connection destination, the data displayed depends on the

connected NC as follows:

<Series 30i/31i/32i>

Under the name of the connected machine in the Machine

List of Connection Target, device and folder information is

displayed in a tree structure.

In the File List of the connection destination, files of the

default folder set in the foreground of the first path of the NC

are listed.

Displays NC programs stored in NCmemory of machine MCN002.

Displays information about devices andfolders in NC memory of machineMCN002.

<Other than Series 30i/31i/32i>

When the number of paths of the connected machine is set to

two or more on the i CELL setup screen, path information is

displayed in a tree structure under the name of the connected

machine in the Machine List of Connection Target. When

connection to multiple paths is disabled by option setting,

only the machine name is indicated. For details, see the

description of the communication tab in Subsection 5.2.10,"Setting Options". For a single-path system, only the

machine name is indicated.

In the File List of the connection destination, files in memory

of the first path of the NC are listed.




- 275 -

Displays path information of machine MCN003.

Displays NC programs stored in NCmemory of machine MCN003.

• When the [File List] command of the [Communication] menu

is clicked, the File List of the NC memory is updated.

Changing the NC path engaged in communicationWhen the number of paths of the connection destination machine is set

to two or more on the i CELL setup screen, the path to communicate

with can be changed. When connection to multiple paths is disabled by

option setting, however, the path cannot be changed. For details, see thedescription of the communication tab in Subsection 5.2.10, "Setting

Options".

1 When the [Change Path] command in the [Communication] menu

is pointed to, a list of paths is displayed. Click the path with which

you want to communicate.




- 276 -

2 The communication destination switches to the selected path, and

the contents of the File List of the connection destination change

to display the file list for the path.

In the current management status bar of the connection destination,

the currently selected path is displayed. With a CNC other than

Series 30i/31i/32i, the currently selected path is highlighted in the


Path currently selected

NOTEEven when selecting a path indicated under amachine name in the Machine List of Connection

Target, you cannot change the communicating path.

Downloading an NC Program1 Select the file you want to download from the PC side File List.


the [Ctrl] key. When the connected CNC is Series 30i/31i/32i, you

can also select folders.

2 Perform one of the following operations:

A) Drag and drop the file selected in the PC side File List to the

File List of the connection destination. When the file is

dropped to a blank space or a file in the File List of the

connection destination, the file is downloaded to the folder

for which the File List of the connection destination is

displayed. When the file is dropped to a folder displayed in

the File List of the connection destination, the file is

downloaded to the folder (dropping to a folder is enabled

only when the Series 30i/31i/32i is connected).




- 277 -

B) Drag and drop the file selected in the PC side File List to a

folder under the name of the connected machine in the

Machine List of Connection Target (this operation is enabled

only when Series 30i/31i/32i is connected).

C) In the [Communication] menu or the menu displayed by

right-clicking on the selected file, click the [Download]

command.

When a file is selected in the File List of the connection

destination, the file is downloaded to the folder for which the

File List of the connection destination is displayed.

When a folder is selected in the File List of the connection

destination, the file is downloaded to the folder

(downloading to a folder is enabled only when Series

30i/31i/32i is connected).

AB

C

NOTE1 When Series 30i/31i/32i is connected, and

downloading is specified by selecting the[Download] menu item, files are downloaded to afolder if the folder is selected in the File List of theconnection destination.

Before the menu operation, check the file or folder selected in the File List of the connectiondestination.

2 If the connected CNC is a multipath system other than Series 30i/31i/32i, folders indicating path

names are displayed in the Machine List of Connection Target. However, downloading to a pathnot connected cannot be performed.

3 Downloading from a directory of the network drivecannot be performed.




- 278 -

3 The [Download NC Program] dialog box for the data to be

downloaded is displayed.

When only files are downloaded, a dialog box as follows appears:

<Downloading files only>

When only folders, or files and folders are downloaded, the dialog box as shown below appears. Select options for folder processing.

<Downloading folders>

The following options are provided for folder processing:Cancel the process when

it field.

Processing stops when downloading of a

file fails. The subsequent files are not

downloaded.

Download only the files. Only files contained in a selected folder are

downloaded. Folders in the selected folder,

and files (or folders) in these folders are notdownloaded.

Display the folders before

the files.

File names are displayed prior to folder

names in the result dialog box.

Absolute path The absolute paths of downloaded folders

and files are indicated in the result file(Note)

.




- 279 -

NOTEWhen folder downloading is performed, the result of

the downloading operation is written in the result file.The contents of the result file are displayed in theResult downloaded folders dialog box describedlater, so you need not open this file to check theresults.The result file is createdin %iCELL%\CimProject\Fanuc\Data\. The filename is XXX_FolderDownloadResult.ini, whereXXX denotes the machine number. The file isoverwritten each time a selected folder isdownloaded.

4 Click the <Download> button. When folders are included, the

result dialog box as shown below is displayed each time a selected

folder is downloaded. When a folder contains a list file, the list file

is not downloaded. If downloading fails, an error code is indicated

in the Result column.

• Selected folder:

Indicates the path of the download destination folder.




- 280 -

5 The selected files are downloaded to the NC, and the File List of

the connection destination is updated to display the latest

information.

NOTEIf a program with the same name already exists atthe download destination, the program isoverwritten when the NC parameter that enablesoverwriting is set. When downloading a program,

check if the same program name already exists.Particularly, be careful when using the subprogramtransmission function and the list file transmissionfunction.




- 281 -

Uploading a NC Program1 In the File List of the connection destination, click the file you

want to upload. You can select more than one file by clicking files

while pushing the [Ctrl] key. When the Series 30i/31i/32i is

connected , you can also select folders.


A) Drag and drop the file selected in the File List of the

connection destination to the PC side File List. When the file

is dropped to a blank space or a file in the PC side File List,

the file is uploaded to the folder for which the PC side File

List is displayed. When the file is dropped to a folder in the

PC side File List, the file is uploaded to the folder.

B) Drag and drop the file selected in the File List of the

connection destination to the PC Directory Trees.

C) In the [Communication] menu or the menu displayed byright-clicking on the selected file, click the [Upload]

command.

When a file is selected in the PC side File List, the file is

uploaded to the folder for which the PC side File List is

displayed.

When a folder is selected in the PC side File List, the file is

uploaded to the folder.

A

B

C

NOTE1 When uploading is specified by selecting the

[Upload] menu item, the file is uploaded to adirectory if the directory is selected in the PC sideFile List. Before the menu operation, check the fileor directory selected in the PC side File List.

2 Uploading to the root directory of My Computer or tothe directory of the network drive cannot be

performed.




- 282 -

3 The [Upload NC Program] dialog box for the data to be uploaded

is displayed.

When only files are uploaded, a dialog box as follows appears:

<Uploading files only>

When only folders, or files and folders are uploaded, the dialog box as shown below appears. Select options for folder processing.

<Uploading folders>

The following options are provided for folder processing:

Cancel the process when

it field.

Processing stops when uploading of a file

fails. The subsequent files are not

uploaded.

Can not overwrite When there is a file (or a folder) having the

same name in the upload destination, thefile is not overwritten.

Upload only the files. Only files contained in a selected folder are

uploaded. Folders in the selected folder,

and files (or folders) in these folders are not

uploaded.

Display the folders before

the files.

File names are displayed prior to folder

names in the result dialog box.

Absolute path The absolute paths of uploaded folders and

files are indicated in the result file(Note)

.




- 283 -

NOTEWhen folder uploading is performed, the result of

the uploading operation is written in the result file.The contents of the result file are displayed in theResult uploaded folders dialog box described later,so you need not open this file to check the results.The result file is createdin %iCELL%\CimProject\Fanuc\Data\. The filename is XXX_FolderUploadResult.ini, where XXXdenotes the machine number. The file is overwritteneach time a selected folder is uploaded.

4 Click the <Upload> button.

When folders are included, the result dialog box as shown below isdisplayed each time a selected folder is uploaded. If uploading

fails, an error code is indicated in the Result column.

• Selected folder: Indicates the path of the folder to be

uploaded. In File Name on the screen, "/" is displayed.

5 The selected files are uploaded to the personal computer, and the

PC side File List is updated to display the latest information.

NOTE A CNC that supports file name management likeSeries 30i/31i/32i provides case sensitivity.

However, Windows OS does not support casesensitivity. So, a file named AAA and a file namedaaa can be created with the CNC. However, if files AAA and aaa are uploaded to the personalcomputer in this order, file AAA is replaced with fileaaa uploaded later.




- 284 -

5.2.6.2 Communication with a Data Server (FTP server)

Displaying the File List of a connection destination1 From the Machine List or FTP Server List in the Machine List of

Connection Target, select a machine.

2 <When selecting a machine from the Machine List>

Usually, communication with NC memory starts. Switch the

connection by using one of the methods listed below. As the

connection is switched, FTP communication with the selected

machine starts.

• Point to the [Change Connect] command in the

[Communication] menu. A list of connection destinations is

then displayed. Click [Data Server].

• Click the [DS] button in the tool bar.

<When selecting a machine from the FTP Server List>

FTP communication with the selected machine starts.

The start of communication when a machine is selected can be

suppressed by option setting. For details, see the description of the

communication tab in Subsection 5.2.10, "Setting Options". When

this option is set, communication is started by clicking the [Start

Communication with FTP] command in the [Communication]

menu.

Under the name of the connected machine in the Machine List of Connection Target, directory information of the connected

machine is displayed in a tree structure. If the login directory has

been set on the i CELL setup screen, a list of files in the directory

is displayed in the File List of the connection destination. If the

login directory has not been set, a list of files in the login directory

set on the connection destination side is displayed.

Displays files in the data server of machine MCN002.

Displays directory information in thedata server of machine MCN002.

• Each time you click the [File List] command on the

[Communication] menu, the File List of the connectiondestination is updated to the latest information.




- 285 -

Downloading a file to the connection destination1 Select the file you want to download from the PC side File List.


the [Ctrl] key.


A) Drag and drop the file selected in the PC side File List to the

File List of the connection destination. When the file is

dropped to a blank space or a file in the File List of the

connection destination, the file is downloaded to the folder

for which the File List of the connection destination is

displayed. When the file is dropped to a folder displayed in

the File List of the connection destination, the file is

downloaded to the folder.B) Drag and drop the file selected in the PC side File List to a

folder under the name of the connected machine in the



right-clicking on the selected file, click the [Download]

command.

When a file is selected in the File List of the connection

destination, the file is downloaded to the folder for which the

File List of the connection destination is displayed.

When a folder is selected in the File List of the connection

destination, the file is downloaded to the folder.

AB

C




- 286 -

NOTE

When downloading is specified by selecting the[Download] menu item, files are downloaded to afolder if the folder is selected in the File List of theconnection destination.Before the menu operation, check the file or folder selected in the File List of the connectiondestination.

3 The [Downloading NC Program] dialog box appears. Click the

[Download] button.

4 The file selected is downloaded to the connection destination, and

the File List of the connection destination is updated to the latest

information.

NOTEIf the contents of a file do not have an NC programformat, downloading the file to the data server of Series 30i/31i/32i may change the file contents

automatically.




- 287 -

Uploading a file from the connection destination1 In the File List of the connection destination, click a file to be

uploaded. You can select more than one file by clicking files while

pushing the [Ctrl] key.


A) Drag and drop the file selected in the File List of the

connection destination to the PC side File List. When the file

is dropped to a blank space or a file in the PC side File List,

the file is uploaded to the folder for which the PC side File

List is displayed. When the file is dropped to a folder in the

PC side File List, the file is uploaded to the folder.

B) Drag and drop the file selected in the File List of the

connection destination to the PC Directory Trees.


right-clicking on the selected file, click the [Upload]command.

When a file is selected in the PC side File List, the file is

uploaded to the folder for which the PC side File List is

displayed.

When a folder is selected in the PC side File List, the file is

uploaded to the folder. A

B

C

NOTE1 When uploading is specified by selecting the

[Upload] menu item, the file is uploaded to adirectory if the directory is selected in the PC sideFile List. Before the menu operation, check the fileor directory selected in the PC side File List.

2 Uploading to the root directory of My Computer cannot be performed.

3 The [Uploading NC Program] dialog box appears. Click the

[Upload] button.

4 The selected NC programs are uploaded from the NC to the

computer, and the File List in the Current Management Group is

updated automatically.




- 288 -

5.2.7 Copying, Moving, Deleting, and Renaming ConnectionDestination Files (Directories)

This subsection describes the methods of copying, moving, deleting,

and renaming directories and files on a connection destination (such as

the NC memory, Data Server, and personal computer). The following

shows the functions provided for each communication function:

Communication function

Function FOCAS2/

EthernetDNC2

Reader

puncher

Data

server

Operations on file

Copy ○ (*1)

- - ○

Move ○ (*1)

- - ○

Delete ○ ○ - ○

Rename ○ (*1)

- - ○

Operations on

directory

Copy - - - -

Move - - - -

Delete ○ (*1)

- - ○

Rename ○ (*1)

- - ○

*1 These functions are available only when Series 30i/31i/32i is in

use.

NOTEWhen the communication function isFOCAS2/Ethernet (Series 30i/31i/32i), none of the

functions can be used if the device to be operated isa memory card or data server instead of NCmemory.

Copying files of the connection destination

NOTE1 When the communication function is

FOCAS2/Ethernet (other than Series 30i/31i/32i),

DNC2, or reader/puncher, files cannot be copied.2 With Series 30i/31i/32i, files cannot be copied

unless the EDIT mode is set (FOCAS2/Ethernet).

1 Click a file to be copied in the File List of the connection

destination.

To select multiple files to be copied, click the files while holding

down the [Ctrl] key.




- 289 -


A) Menu operation

In the [Communication] menu or the menu displayed by

right-clicking on the selected file, click the [Copy] command.

Alternatively, press the [Ctrl+C] keys. The selected file is

then registered in the work list. (The work list is not

displayed.) Proceed to step 3.


Drag the selected file to the directory in the Machine List of

Connection Target or the File List of the connection

destination then drop the file there while holding down the

[Ctrl] key. (The dragged and dropped file is not registered in

the work list.) The [Copy File] dialog box is displayed.

Proceed to step 5.

3 From the directory in the Machine List of Connection Target or

the File List of the connection destination, select and click a copy

destination.

4 Click the [Paste] command on the [Communication] menu or the

right-click menu in the File List of the connection destination, or

press the [Ctrl+V] keys. The [Copy File] dialog box is displayed.

5 Click the <Copy> button.




- 290 -

NOTE1 When a copy source and copy destination are

located in the same directory, the file cannot becopied.2 Even when a file has been copied, the registered file

is not cleared from the work list. Such a file can becopied to another directory in succession.

3 The registered file can be cleared from the work listby pressing the [Esc] key.

4 When a file is copied using the FOCAS2/Ethernetfunction, the subprogram transmission function isnot executed.

5 When a file in a data server (FTP server) is copied, a

virtual copy operation is implemented by uploadingthe file to the personal computer once thendownloading it to a specified directory.

Moving files of the connection destination

NOTE1 When the communication function is

FOCAS2/Ethernet (other than Series 30i/31i/32i),

DNC2, or reader/puncher, no file can be moved.2 With Series 30i/31i/32i, files cannot be moved

unless the EDIT mode is set (FOCAS2/Ethernet).

1 Click a file to be moved in the connection destination File List.

To select multiple files to be moved, click the files while holding



A) Menu operation

In the [Communication] menu or the menu displayed by

right-clicking on the selected file, click the [Cut] command.

Alternatively, press the [Ctrl+X] keys. The selected file is

then registered in the work list. (The work list is not

displayed.) Proceed to step 3.

B) Drag and drop operationDrag the selected file to the directory in the Machine List of

Connection Target or the File List of the connection

destination then drop the file there. (The dragged and

dropped file is not registered in the work list.) The [Move

File] dialog box is displayed. Proceed to step 5.

3 From the directory in the Machine List of Connection Target or

the File List of the connection destination, select and click a move

destination.

4 Click the [Paste] command on the [Communication] menu or the

right-click menu in the File List of the connection destination, or

press the [Ctrl+V] keys. The [Move File] dialog box is displayed.

5 Click the <Move> button.




- 291 -

NOTE1 When a move source and move destination are

located in the same directory, the file cannot bemoved.2 When the [Move File] dialog box is closed, the

registered file is cleared from the work list.3 The registered file can be cleared from the work list

by pressing the [Esc] key.4 When a file is moved using the FOCAS2/Ethernet

function, the subprogram transmission function isnot executed.

5 When a file in a data server (FTP server) is moved, avirtual move operation is implemented by uploading

the file to the personal computer once thendownloading it to a specified directory.

Deleting files and directories of the connection destination

NOTEWhen the communication function isFOCAS2/Ethernet (other than Series 30i/31i/32i) or

DNC2, only deletion of files can be performed. Whenthe communication function is reader/puncher,neither files nor directories can be deleted.

1 Click a file or directory (hereinafter simply referred to as a file) to

be deleted in the File List of the connection destination.

To select multiple files to be deleted, click the files while holding


2 When you perform any of the operations below, a dialog box for

confirmation of deletion appears.

• Press the [Delete] key.

• Click the [Delete] command in the [Communication] menu.

• In the menu displayed by right-clicking on the selected file,

click the [Delete] command.

3 If the <Delete> button is clicked, the selected file is deleted from

the NC memory.If the <Cancel> button is clicked, the deletion is canceled.




- 292 -

NOTE1 When a directory is deleted, all files and directories

included in the directory are deleted.2 Deleted files and directories are completelyremoved from the connection destination. Takespecial care when deleting files and directories.

Renaming files or directories of the connection destination

NOTEWhen the communication function isFOCAS2/Ethernet (other than Series 30i/31i/32i),

DNC2, or reader/puncher, neither files nor directory

can be renamed.

1 Click a file or directory to be renamed in the File List of


2 In the [Communication] menu or the menu displayed by

right-clicking on the selected file, click the [Rename] command.

The [Rename File] dialog box is displayed.

3 Enter a new name in the [New Name] text box then click the

<Change> button. Unless a name is entered in the text box, the

<Change> button does not become effective.




- 293 -

5.2.8 Referencing and Editing Connection Destination Files

Referencing a file of the connection destination1 Click a file to be referenced in the File List of the connection

destination.


right-clicking on the selected file, click the [View] command. The

specified file is automatically uploaded, and the viewer set in the

[Option] dialog box is activated.

To terminate [File Viewer], click [Exit] on the menu.




- 294 -

NOTE1 [File Viewer] allows you to view only one file at once.

If you browse another file while you are browsing thecurrent file, the [File Viewer] displays the contents of the newly selected file.

2 [File Viewer] is a text viewer. It does not allow you toview binary files.

3 The largest file size that [File Viewer] allows you toview is 32 Kbytes. When you browse files exceedingthis size limit, only the first 32 Kbytes of the file aredisplayed.

4 You can also specify third-party viewer software inthe [Options] dialog box. Refer to "5.2.10 Setting

Options" for details.

Editing a file of the connection destination

NOTEIf you have selected the "Disable Editor" option inthe [Options] dialog box, the [Edit] menu is notdisplayed.

1 Click a file to be edited in the File List of the connection

destination.


right-clicking on the selected file, click the [Edit] command. Thespecified file is automatically uploaded (temporarily saved on the

personal computer), and the viewer set in the [Option] dialog box

is activated.




- 295 -

3 Upon completion of editing, terminate the editor. If a file is savedduring editing, the system asks you whether to download the saved

file to the NC as shown below.

NOTE1 If a file is not saved, the file cannot be downloaded.2 If the program name (program number) of a file is

changed to a new number, check if a file with thesame new program name exists on the NC. If the NCparameter that enables overwriting is set, theprogram is overwritten.

3 A saved file is deleted when download operation iscompleted or you click <No>.

4 When the device to be operated in Series 30i/31i/32i

is a memory card or data server instead of NCmemory, edited programs cannot be downloaded.

- When download operation fails1 If download operation fails, an error message is displayed. Note

down a displayed message, then click the <OK> button.




- 296 -

2 A file before editing and a file after editing are temporarily saved

on the personal computer. The system asks you whether to save

those files under arbitrary names on the personal computer. Click

<Yes> to save them. Click <No> not to save them. When <No> is

selected here, the temporarily saved files are deleted.

3 When the files are to be saved, the [Save File] dialog box is

displayed. Enter a full-path file name to be assigned to each of the

files before and after editing (i.g., D:\Program Files\O0001.dat).

Then, click the <Save> button. The <Cancel> button can be used

to cancel save operation. (The temporarily saved files are deleted.)

4 If an incorrect path is specified (if a nonexistent directory isspecified), the message indicated below is displayed. Check the

entered path and directory. Pressing the buttons perform the

following operations:

<Abort> : Stops save operation. (The files are deleted.)

<Retry> : Performs another save operation according to the

same path.

<Ignore> : Returns the screen display to the [Save File] dialog

box.

5 From the error message noted down, determine the cause of the

failure in downloading the NC program. Correct the cause then

retry to download the NC program.




- 297 -

5.2.9 Creating a New Connection Destination Directory

Creating a new directory on the connection destination

NOTEOnly when the communication function isFOCAS2/Ethernet (Series 30i/31i/32i only) or data

server (FTP server), a new directory can be created.

1 In the Machine List of Connection Target, click the directory in

which you want to create a new directory to specify the selected

directory as the current management directory of the connection

destination.

2 In the [Communication] menu or the menu displayed byright-clicking in the File List of the connection destination, click

the [Create Folder] command. The [Create Folder] dialog box is

then displayed. When the command is executed from the menu

displayed by right-clicking, right-click on a place in which neither

file nor directory is displayed in the File List. If you right-click on

a file or directory, you cannot use the [Create Folder] command.

3 Enter the name of the directory to be created in the [New Name]

text box, then click the <Create> button. Unless a name is entered

in the text box, the <Create> button does not become effective.




- 298 -

5.2.10 Setting Options

Click the [Options] command in the [Tools] menu. The [Options]dialog box will open.

After making a setting, click the <OK> button for the setting to become

effective.

To cancel a setting and return to the previous value, click the <Cancel>

button.

Listing tab

1 In the [Machine List] frame, make a setting related to machine list

display of the management group list on the left side of the screen.• When the [Display machine which was set up for

communication] check box is checked, only those machines

that are set for communication are displayed.

2 In the [File List] frame, make settings relating to File List display

on your computer.

• When the [Reflesh File List before sort] check box is checked,

the latest file list information is acquired before the File List

display order is changed.

If this check box is not checked, the File List display order is

changed based on the details currently displayed in the File

List.

NOTE, however, that if the File List has several pages of data,the latest file list information is acquired before the File List

display order is changed regardless of the setting of this

check box.

• If the [Not display message at page move] check box is

checked, the confirmation dialog box will not be displayed

when you switch pages in the File List.

• If you change the value of the [Number of displayed files in a

page] check box, you can change the number of files that can

be displayed in one page of the File List.

• With the [Double click on upper file list] frame and [Double

click on lower file list] frame, a type of operation to be

performed when you double-click a file object in each File

List can be selected.




- 299 -

View, Edit tab

1 In the [File View] frame, make settings relating to file browsing.

• If you select the [No External Viewer] option, the File

Viewer integrated in NC Program Management is used.

• If you select the [Use External Viewer] option, you can

specify third-party viewer software. Enter the command for

starting the editor in the [Viewer command] box.

2 In the [Edit File] fame, make settings relating to file editing.

• If you select the [No Editor] option, you can no longer edit

files or create new files.

• If you select the [Use Editor] option, you can edit files or

create new files using the specified editor. Enter the

command for starting the editor in the [Viewer command]

box.

NOTE, however, that the [Edit File List] screen is used for

editing the File List.




- 300 -

Communication tab

1 In the [Communication] frame, make setting relating to


• If the [Connect to multi paths CNC] check box is checked,

you can specify the NC system with which you are to

communicate.

If this check box is not checked, communication is carried

out with only the 1st of the multiple connected NC systems.

Communication with other NC systems is not possible.

• When the [Communicate to machine when click machine list

or ftp server list] check box is checked, clicking a machine

name in the Machine List of the management group starts

communication with the NC and displays the File List in the

NC memory (Data Server hard disk in the case of FTP

connection). Clicking an FTP server name in the FTP Server

List starts communication with the FTP server and displays

the File List in the FTP server hard disk.

If this check box is not checked, communication is started by

clicking the [Start Communication with NC Memory]

command in the [Communication] menu.

• If the [Display NC memory tree view at high speed.] check

box is checked, the NC memory tree view can be displayed

more quickly when NC memory is connected. In this case,

the mark (+) appears at the left of every directory regardlessof whether the directory has sub-directories or not (for Series

30i/31i/32i only).

• When the [Display FTP tree view at high speed] check box is

checked, the tree view of the hard disk of a connected FTP

server can be displayed at high speed. In this case, the mark

(+) appears at the left of every directory regardless of

whether the directory has sub-directories or not.




- 301 -

5.3 EDIT LIST FILE SCREEN OPERATIONS

The Edit List File screen is where you create and edit List Files.

The Edit List File screen can be activated by one of two methods:

(1) Select [File], [New], then [List File] on the NC Program

Management screen, and create a new List File.

(2) Select a List File on the NC Program Management screen, and

specify [File] then [Edit].

5.3.1 Structure of Edit List File Screen

The figure below shows the Edit List File screen and details when

LIST001.LST List File for machine number 1 is being edited.

Directory

List File name

Directory nameRegistration file directoryselection combo box

Contents of List FileList Box

Registration filename List Box

File type to be displayed inregistration file name listbox

Buttons for changingorder/deletingcontents of List File

Buttons for adding/insertingfrom registration fileto List File

Menu bar O number used for extended transfer

Number of records




- 302 -

DirectoryDisplays the machine name to which the List File currently being edited

belongs. The machine name is displayed in the following format:

"<3-digit machine number>.<machine name>"

Directory NameDisplays the directory in which the List File currently being edited is

saved.

List File NameDisplays the name of the List File currently being edited.

Registration File Directory Selection Combo BoxThis combo box is for selecting the directory to be displayed in the

[Register File Name] list box.

When you select "Same directory as List File", a list of files in the

directory currently displayed at [Directory Name] is displayed in the


When you select "Different directory from List File", a dialog box for

selecting the drive and directory appears.

File Type To Be Displayed in Registration File Name List BoxSelects the type of file to be displayed in the [Register File Name] list

box.

Registration File Name List BoxDisplays the file name to be registered to the List File.

Button for Adding/Inserting from Registration File to List FileThe <Add> button is enabled when the file currently displayed in the

[Register File Name] list box is selected. When you press the <Add>

button, the file selected in the [Register File Name] list box is appended

to the end of the [Contents of List] list box.

The <Insert> button is enabled when the file currently displayed in the

[Register File Name] list box is selected, and the record to insert is

selected in the [Contents of List] list box. When you press the <Insert>

button, the file selected in the [Register File Name] list box is insertedin front of the record currently selected in the [Register File Name] list

box.

List File Details List BoxDisplays the details of the List Files currently being edited in the order

in which they are to be transferred.

[Send Command] displays the instruction details as such as [Pause] and

[Skip].

The names of registered NC program files are displayed in their full

path at [File Name].




- 303 -

Buttons for Changing Order/Deleting Contents of List FileThese buttons are for changing the order of List Files and deleting List

Files. Each of these buttons are enabled by selecting a line in the

[Contents of List] list box.

The <Top> button moves the selected record to the top.

The <Up> button moves the selected record up one record.

The <Down> button moves the selected record down one record.

The <Last> button moves the selected record to the end of the records.

The <Delete> button deletes the selected record.

The <Clear> button deletes all records.

O Number Used for Extended Transfer In the extended transfer mode, the O number in the registered NC

programs is not transferred. If you check the [Set ONo. in Developing]

check box, the [ONumber or FileName] text box is enabled, and the Onumber entered here can be transferred. Enter a 4-digit number.

If you uncheck the [Set ONo. in Developing] check box, the O number

of the first file registered to the List File is transferred.

This setting is ignored in the separate transfer mode.

File Name Used for Extended Transfer In the extended transfer mode, the file name in the registered NC

programs is not transferred. If you check the [Set FileName in

Developing] check box, the [ONumber or FileName] text box is

enabled, and the file name entered here can be transferred. File names

may consist of alphabetic characters (uppercase and lowercase),

numeric characters, and four symbols -, +, _, and . (all characters are en

characters).

If you uncheck the [Set FileName in Developing] check box, the file

name of the first file registered to the List File is transferred.

This setting is ignored in the separate transfer mode.

Number of RecordsDisplays the currently registered number of records.




- 304 -

5.3.2 Editing List Files

Creating New List Files To create a new List File, click the [New] command in the [File] menu.

The [New] dialog box appears.

1 Select the directory for saving the List File from the [Machine]combo box.

If you select a machine name in the [Machine] combo box, the

default directory of the machine selected in the [Directory] text

box is displayed.

If you select <Optional Directory> in the [Machine] combo box,

select the directory by the button to the right of the [Directory] text

box.

NOTESelect the machine name at [Machine], and displaythe default directory of the machine to communicate

with at [Directory].If you select <Optional Directory> at [Machine],specify a directory other than the default directory atthe [Directory] button and create a List File, you willno longer be able to call the List File from the NC.

2 Enter the name of the new List File in the [List File] text box, and

press the <Start> button. The file name does not need a file

extension. The List File extension set in the Machine Setup screen

is added to the file name according to the machine selected in the

[Machine] combo box.

To edit an existing file, enter the file name in the [List File] text box, and press the <Start> button.

When you specify an existing file, a confirmation dialog box for

checking if it is OK to delete the file and create a new file appears.




- 305 -

Opening Existing List FilesTo edit an existing List File, select it from the file list and execute the

[Edit] command listed in the [File] menu or the menu displayed by a

right-click.

You may be already executing the List File editor. If so, execute the

[Open] command in the [File] menu. The [Open] dialog box will

appear.

1 Select the directory containing the List File in the [Machine]

combo box. The directory name is displayed in the [Directory] text

box.

2 When you select the List File name from the list box, the List Filename selected in the [ListFile] text box is displayed.

You can also enter the List File name to edit directly in the

[ListFile] text box.

3 Press the <Open> button.

Registering NC Programs to Transfer to List FilesUse the <Add> or <Insert> buttons.

1 Select the file to register in the [Register File Name] list box.

2 The <Add> button is enabled when you select the file currently

displayed in the [Register File Name] list box. When you press the

<Add> button, the file selected in the [Register File Name] list box

is appended to the end of the [Contents of List] list box.Instead of the <Add> button, you can also add files by

double-clicking the file to register in the [Register File Name] list

box.

3 The <Insert> button is enabled when the file currently displayed in

the [Register File Name] list box is selected, and the record to

insert is selected in the [Contents of List] list box. When you press

the <Insert> button, the file selected in the [Register File Name]

list box is inserted in front of the record currently selected in the





- 306 -

Changing the Transfer Order of List FilesUse the <Top>, <Up>, <Down> and <End> buttons.

1 Select the record whose transfer order you want to change in the


2 The <Top> button moves the selected record to the top.

The <Up> button moves the selected record up one record.

The <Down> button moves the selected record down one record.

The <Last> button moves the selected record to the end of the

records.

In addition to using the above buttons, you can also change the transfer

order by dragging and dropping by the mouse.

1 Press the record whose transfer order you want to change in the

[Contents of List] list box with the left mouse button to select.

2 If you move the mouse with the left mouse button held down, the"<" mark appears at the beginning of the record you selected, and a

blank record prefixed with the ">" mark is inserted at the record

where you want to move the record to.

3 Release the left mouse button. The selected record is moved.

Example:Inserting O0008between O0005 andO0006.

Deleting Records in List FilesUse the <Delete> or <Clear> buttons.

1 Select the record you want to delete in the [Contents of List] list

box.

2 The <Delete> button deletes the selected records.

The <Clear> button deletes all records.

Setting the Transfer Instructions to Each Record in the List FileUse the [Edit] menu.

To set the transfer instruction to a specified record, use the [Skip],

[Pause] and [Cancel] commands in the [Edit] - [Send Command] menu.

To set the transfer instruction to all records following a specified record,use the [Skip] and [Cancel] commands in the [Edit] - [Send Command]

- [All of Records Below Cursor] menu.

The meanings of the various commands are as follows:

• When you instruct [Skip], that record is not transferred, and

transfer of subsequent records is continued.

• When you instruct [Pause], transfer of all records following that

record is not carried out and transfer is paused. The pause state can

be confirmed in the List File Monitor screen. To cancel the pause,

specify the [Cancel] command in the List File Monitor screen.




- 307 -

Example of List File transfer Monitor screen

Example: Paused

• To cancel a [Skip] or [Pause] specification, use the [Cancel]

command.

NOTEThe meanings [Cancel] in Edit List File screen and[Cancel] in List File Monitor screen are different.

• [Cancel] in Edit List File screen[Skip] and [Pause] are canceled by alltransmission using specified List Files.

• [Cancel] in List File Monitor screen

[Skip] and [Pause] are canceled by only the ListFile currently being transferred.

Transfer by the [Edit] menu is specified as follows:



2 Set the [Skip], [Pause] or [Cancel] commands in the [Edit] menu.

In addition to transfer by the [Edit] menu, you can also instruct transfer

in the context menu of the right mouse button.

1 Bring the mouse cursor to the record whose transfer order you

want to change in the [Contents of List] list box, and press the right

mouse button.

2 The same menu as the [Edit] menu appears.




- 308 -

Registering Files in the Same Directory as List Files Using Only the File Name Normally, the files to transfer to the List File are registered using their

full path.

The Option screen allows you to select whether to register only a file

name or register the file by its full path.

Specify registration by only a file name when you do not want to

register a file using its full path to copy a List File to another machine

having a different default directory.

To set this, click the [Option] command in the [Tool] menu.

In the List Files registered by only a file name, only the file name is

displayed even in the [Contents of List] list box.

Overwriting List FilesTo save the file currently being edited under the same name, click the

[Overwrite] command in the [File] menu.

Saving to List Files Under a New NameTo save the file currently being edited under a new name, click the

[Save As] command in the [File] menu. The [Save As] dialog box

appears.

1 Select the directory for saving the List File from the [Machine]

combo box. The directory name is displayed in the [Directory] text

box.

2 Enter the List File name that you want to save to from the

[ListFile] text box.

3 Click the <Save> button.

Exiting the ScreenClick the [Exit] Command in the [File] menu.




- 309 -

5.4 LIST FILE MONITOR SCREEN OPERATIONS

The List File Monitor screen automatically displays the transfer status

according to the List File at each monitor cycle.

Use the [Listfile transfer monitor] command in the [Tool] menu on the

NC Program Management for activation.

5.4.1 Structure of List File Monitor Screen

The List File Monitor screen is as follows:Monitor machine number andmachine name

Details of List Files

currently being transferred

Menu bar Original List File name

Monitor Machine Number and Machine NameSelect the machine to monitor in the [Monitor Machine] combo box.

Original List File NameThe List File name created in the Edit List File screen is displayed.

Nothing is displayed if a List File is not being transferred.




- 310 -

Details of List Files Currently Being TransferredThis screen monitors and displays the status of List Files currently

being transferred at each monitor cycle described later.

• Transfer instruction

Displays the transfer instruction set in the Edit List File screen.

• File name

Displays the file name set in the Edit List File screen. The

displayed order is the transfer order.

• Transfer results

Displays the current transfer status:

"Complete" Transfer of this record has ended.

"Skip" This record has not been transferred, and the next

record has been processed.

"Pause" This record has not been transferred, and transfer has

been paused.Specify [Cancel] to resume transfer.

Nothing is displayed if a List File is not being transferred.




- 311 -

5.4.2 List File Monitor Operations

Changing the Monitor MachineSelect the machine to monitor in the [Monitor Machine] combo box.

Changing the Monitor CycleIf you execute the [Monitor Cycle Set] in the [View] menu, the

[Monitor Cycle] dialog box appears. Drag the slider to change the

monitor cycle, and press the <OK> button.

The monitor cycle default is 10 seconds.

Updating to Latest Monitor InformationIf you execute the [Monitor Cycle Set] in the [View] menu, the latest

monitor information is displayed regardless of the monitor cycle.

Pausing Monitor DisplayTo pause monitor display without exiting the screen, press the

<Monitor End> button. Each press of this button toggles between

<Monitor End> and <Monitor Start>.

Whether or not monitor is in progress is displayed on the screen's title

bar. If monitor is in progress, "List File Monitor - Monitoring" is

displayed, and if monitor is stopped, "List File Monitor - Monitor

Stopped" is displayed.




- 312 -

Changing the Transfer InstructionChange the transfer instruction, for example, to cancel the pause

transfer instruction or skip a non-transferred record in order to resume

transfer of a paused record.

To change the transfer instruction, use the [Skip], [Pause] and [Cancel]

commands in the [Edit] - [Send Command] menu.

To set the same instruction to all records following a specified record,

use the [Skip] and [Cancel] commands in the [Edit] - [Send Command]

- [All of Records Below Cursor] menu.

The meanings of the various commands are as follows:

• When you instruct [Skip], that record is not transferred, and

transfer of subsequent records is continued.

• When you instruct [Pause], transfer of all records following thatrecord is not carried out and transfer is paused.

Transfer by the [Edit] menu is specified as follows:



2 Set the [Skip], [Pause] or [Cancel] commands in the [Edit] menu.

In addition to transfer by the [Edit] menu, you can also instruct transfer

in the context menu of the right mouse button.

1 Bring the mouse cursor to the record whose transfer order you

want to change in the [Contents of List] list box, and press the right

mouse button.2 The same menu as the [Edit] menu appears.




- 313 -

Changing the Order, Adding and Deleting NC Programs to be TransferredFor all records following a paused record, you can change the order of

NC programs to be transferred, add and register new NC programs or

delete NC programs.

When you execute the [Edit List] command in the [Edit] menu, the Edit

screen appears. Operations in this screen are the same as in the Edit List

File screen.

NOTEThe Edit screen displays records that wereregistered after the paused record.



6.MACHINING RESULTS OPERATION B-75074EN/04

- 314 -

6 MACHINING RESULTS



B-75074EN/04 OPERATION 6.MACHINING RESULTS

- 315 -

6.1 OUTLINE

The machining result screen displays data such as run time and

machined parts count of each NC. The following data is displayed:

1. Monthly report on power-on time, operating time, and cutting time

(bar chart)

2. Monthly report on machined parts count (bar chart)

3. Monthly report on power-on time, operating time, current time,

and machined parts count (table)

NOTE1 The machining result screen displays data created

by the "Run Time/Parts Count display option" of the

NC.2 The FOCAS2/Ethernet or DNC2 function is required.

The DNC2 function, however, cannot be used withSeries 0.

3 While the NC Program Management screen isdisplaying a machine connected with DNC2,machining results of the machine cannot becollected.




- 316 -


Method of activationUse one of the following methods to activate the screen:

1. [Main Menu] → <Operation Monitoring> button

2. <Op. Monitoring> tab

3. [Overview-Screen List for Each Machine] screen → <Machining

Result> button

When the screen is activated, run time is displayed as a bar chart.




- 317 -

Screen operation

<1> Monthly list boxFrom the list box, select a desired year and month for result display.

<1> Monthly report list box<2> Graph display

change button

<3> Table format

display button

<4> Utilization

display<5> Display

refresh

button

<7> Workpiece process

result display button

<6> Tool life management display button




- 318 -

<2> Graph display change buttonThis button is used to select data to be displayed as a graph. You can

choose between run time data and machined parts count data.

- Example of run time displayRun time data accumulated on the NC by the Run Time/Parts Count

display option of the NC is displayed as a bar chart.

- Example of machined parts count displayMachined parts count data accumulated on the NC by the Run

Time/Parts Count display option of the NC is displayed as a bar chart.




- 319 -

<3> Table format display buttonThis button displays data in a table format. In this format, tun time data

and machined parts count data is indicated in a table.

- Example of table format display

<4> Utilization displayThe ratio of cutting time to power-on time is indicated by percentage.

The utilization for the indicated number of days is indicated.

<5> Display refresh button

This button updates the screen to display the latest data.

<6> Tool life management display buttonThis button displays the tool life management screen.

<7> Workpiece process result display buttonThis button displays the workpiece process result screen.



7.WORKPIECE PROCESS RESULTS OPERATION B-75074EN/04

- 320 -

7 WORKPIECE PROCESS RESULTS



B-75074EN/04 OPERATION 7.WORKPIECE PROCESS RESULTS

- 321 -

7.1 OUTLINE

Workpiece process results are displayed based on data (Machine ID,

Workpiece ID, O number, Start time, End time, Process End ID, User

area ID, and Sequence number) obtained at the start and end of

machining. Three types of display are available: "current progress

status display" for displaying the progress status of the workpiece

currently being machined, "log display" for displaying the process time

and end state of each machined workpiece, and "process end state

display" for displaying summarized end state data.

NOTE1 The "custom macro B" option is required for the NC.

2 If the custom macro common area does not have afree space, the "custom macro variable addition"option is required.





- 322 -



1. [Main Menu] → <Operation Monitoring> button (The machining

result screen is activated.) → <Proc. Result> button

2. <Op. Monitoring> tab (The machining result screen is activated.)

→ <Proc. Result> button

3. [Overview-Screen List for Each Machine] screen → <Proc.

Result> button

When the screen is activated, the screen is displayed in the previously

selected format.

Automatic updatingThis screen is automatically updated to the latest information at

intervals of one minute.

Screen operation

<1> Display condition

change button<5> Process plan input

screen button

<6> Display form change

screen button<7> Display refresh

button

<9> Machining result display button

<2> Display term

specification list box<3> Machine specification

button/list box

<4> Workpiece specification

button/list box

<8> Display change button <10> Tool life management display button




- 323 -

<1> Display condition change buttonThis button is used to select a condition for screen display. You can

choose from daily reporting, monthly reporting, and term specification.

<2> Display term specification list boxWhen daily reporting or monthly reporting is selected, only the

left-hand list box is used. When term specification is selected, both the

left-hand list box and the right-hand list box are used. For daily

reporting or term specification, select a year, month, and day from the

list box or list boxes. For monthly reporting, select a year and month

from the list box. In the case of term specification, a date specified using

the left-hand list box is earlier than a date specified using the right-hand

list box. Otherwise, process result data is not displayed correctly.

<3> Machine specification button/list boxEach time you click the machine specification button, the list box is

enabled or disabled. When the list box is enabled, the button is

displayed in light blue. In this case, the process result data of the

indicated machine is displayed. When the list box is disabled, the data

of all machines is displayed.

<4> Workpiece specification button/list boxEach time you click the workpiece specification button, the list box is

enabled or disabled. When the list box is enabled, the button is

displayed in light blue. In this case, the process result data of the

indicated workpiece is displayed. When the list box is disabled, the dataof all workpieces is displayed.

<5> Process plan input screen buttonThis button is used to display the process plan input screen. The

planned number of workpieces to be machined can be input for each

machine. Steps (1) and (2) are used for input:

(1) On the machine/workpiece extraction screen, extract machines

and workpieces for which planned counts are to be input.

(2) On the process plan input screen, input planned counts for the

range extracted in (1).




- 324 -

- Machine/workpiece extraction screenSelect a date, machines, and workpieces for which planned counts are to

be input.

A. Date specification list box

This button is used to select a date.

B. Machine specification list

This list is used to select a machine. Multiple machines can also be

selected. When you click the fixed cell, all machines can be

selected.

C. Workpiece specification list

This list is used to select a workpiece. Multiple workpieces can

also be selected. When you click the fixed cell, all workpieces can

be selected.

D. Extract button

This button is used to extract selected machines and workpieces

and switches the screen display to the process plan input screen.

Be sure to click this button after selecting machines and

workpieces. If no machine or no workpiece is selected, an error

message is displayed. Clear the error, then select machines and

workpieces. Until an error message is cleared, the screen does notaccept any event.

E. Exit button

This button is used to exit from the process plan input screen.

A. Date specification

list box

B. Machine

specification

list

C. Workpiece

specification listD. Extract button E. Exit button




- 325 -

- Process plan input screenInput planned counts for extracted machines and workpieces.

A. Planned process count input box

Input a planned count. After inputting a value, be sure to press the

Enter key.

B. Planned process count input button

This button inputs a planned count into a cell selected from the

process plan selection table.

C. Planned process count clear button

This button clears the planned count of a cell selected from the

process plan selection table.

D. Process plan selection table

This table displays a selection table of extracted machines and

workpieces. If planned process counts are already input, their

values are displayed. Select a cell from this table. Multiple cells

can be selected. Moreover, multiple rows and columns can be

selected at a time by selecting the fixed cell.

E. Button for returning to the extraction screen

This button returns the screen display to the machine/workpieceextraction screen.

A. Planned process

count input box

B. Planned process

count input button

C. Planned process count clear button E. Button for returning tothe extraction screen

D. Process plan selection table




- 326 -

<6> Display form change screen buttonThis button is used to display the screen for changing the screen display

form. The method of machine display, workpiece display, O number

display, user area display, and date and time display can be changed.

The currently enabled buttons for machine display, workpiece display,

O number display, and user area display are displayed in light blue.

A. Machine display specification

Select a machine display method. You can choose from No., Name,

and No. + Name.

B. Workpiece display specification

Select a workpiece display method. You can choose from No. and

Name.

C. O number display specification

Choose whether to perform O number display.

D. User area display specificationChoose whether to perform user area display.

E. Exit button

This button enables you to exit from the display form change

screen.

F. Current form display

The currently specified form of date and time is displayed. For the

details of the form, refer to the description of "Format" statement

in the "CIMPLICITY HMI Plant Edition Basic Control Engine

Operator's Manual".

G. Current example of display

An example of the currently specified form is displayed.

H. New form input boxEnter a new form. After entering a new form, be sure to press the

Enter key.

D. User area display specification

I. Change button

A. Machine display specification

B. Workpiece display specificationC. O number display

specification E. Exit button

F. Current form display

G. Current example of display

H. New form input box J. Initialize button




- 327 -

I. Change button

This button switches the form to the new form. The new form is

displayed in the Current Form field, and an example of display is

displayed in the Current Form field.

J. Initialize button

This button returns the form to the initial value. The initial value is

"yy/mm/dd hh:nn:ss" (Example of display: 01/05/09 10:50:20).

<7> Display refresh buttonThis button updates the screen display to the display of the latest data.

When the display condition and display term (date) are changed, be sure

to update the screen display.

<8> Display change button

By clicking the "Progress", "Log", "End State", or "Circle Graph" button, the screen display can be changed to the display of the current

progress status, log, process end state (table), or process end state (pie

chart). Note, however, that Circle Graph can be selected only when a

workpiece is specified.

- Current progress status displayWhen you click the "Progress" button, the screen display switches to

this display, canceling the machine and workpiece specification.

If machines have a workpiece currently being machined (a workpiece

with the latest start time for which end time, process end ID, and user

area ID data to be obtained at process end time is not obtained yet), the

progress status of such a workpiece is displayed on a

machine-by-machine basis. If a workpiece process time and the planned

process count of the current date are set, the time (scheduled completion

time) of the planned count of the date is displayed based on the setting.

For the setting of process time, see Section 2.10, "WORKPIECES

PROCESS RESULT SYSTEM CONFIGURATION" in Part III,

"SETTING".

The following items are displayed:

⋅ Machine

⋅ Workpiece

⋅ O number

⋅ Start time⋅ End plan time

⋅ Normal completion count (total of quantities with end state ID set

to 0 [including cases where the nonuse of end state IDs is set on the

setting screen] and set to 1)

⋅ Planned count

⋅ All end plan time

You can choose whether to display O number data.




- 328 -

- Log displayWhen you click the "Log" button, the screen display switches to this

display.

Log data such as the process time and end state of each machined

workpiece is displayed in order of latest start time to oldest start time.

Four modes of display are available: no specification, machine

specification, workpiece specification, and machine and workpiece

specification. For each mode, daily reporting, monthly reporting, or

term specification can be selected.

Display with no specification

All log data is displayed, regardless of machines and workpieces.

Display with machine specification

The log data of a specified machine only is displayed, regardlessof workpieces. In display with machine specification, only

sequence numbers are displayed.

NOTESequence numbers must be successively assignedto workpieces to be machined on each machine. For the method of sequence number assignment toworkpieces to be machined, see Subsection 2.12.2,"Workpieces Process Result" in Part III, "SETTING". An example where assigned sequence numbers are

not successive is shown below. This example meansthat data for sequence numbers 3 and 4 could not beobtained. The cause is a failure by the i CELL to read

a transition of the process start signal from OFF (0)to ON (1) (because of the ON time being too short)or a data acquisition attempt made during datadeletion. Check the time period for a transition of theprocess start signal from OFF to ON (Subsection2.12.2, "Workpiece Process Results" in Part III,"SETTING"), and data deletion execution time(Section 2.11, "DATABASE MAINTENANCE" in Part

III, "SETTING").Example of display




- 329 -

Display with workpiece specification

The log data of a specified workpiece only is displayed.

Display with machine and workpiece specification

The log of a specified combination of a machine and workpiece

only is displayed.

The display items are listed below. Note, however, that the display

items vary, depending on the specification.

⋅ Machine (when no machine is specified)

⋅ Workpiece (when no workpiece is specified)

⋅ O number (displayed only in the case of workpiece display)

⋅ Process start time

⋅ Process end time

⋅ Process time⋅ Process end state

⋅ User area

⋅ Sequence number (only in the case of machine specification)

You can choose whether to display O number and user area data.

NOTEIn connection with display time, all logs satisfying acondition are not written to a table at a time. Actually,up to 180 logs (12 pages) can be written to a table at

a time. Six pages are written in the upper and lower areas with respect to the desired display line(uppermost display line). So, each time other logsare to be displayed, those logs need to be obtainedand written to the table, requiring some time for display. When logs are obtained, the latestinformation is obtained. This means that if thecontents of the database change while pages areswitched, the same line does not always display thesame log data as previously displayed.

- Process end state displayThe summarized results based on a displayed process end ID set on the

setting screen are displayed. Two types of display are available: table

format and pie chart format.




- 330 -

- Table formatWhen you click the "End State" button, the screen display changes to

this type of display.

As with log display, four modes of display are available: no

specification, machine specification, workpiece specification, and

machine and workpiece specification. For each mode, daily reporting,

monthly reporting, or term specification can be selected.

The display items are listed below. Note, however, that the display

items vary, depending on the specification.

⋅ Machine (when no machine is specified)

⋅ Workpiece (when no workpiece is specified)

⋅ Total process count

⋅ Planned process count

⋅ Number of end states summarized (up to 5 in display order)⋅ Other

When you select a number in the No. column and click the Circle Graph

button in the case of display with no specification, display with

machine specification, and display with workpiece specification, the

data of the selected line can be displayed as a pie chart.

NOTEWhen you specify, on the setting screen, that thedisplay items (workpiece, end state, and user area)

are not used in the three types of display (progressstatus, log, and end state display), an ID of 0 issaved in the database, and "No Collect" is displayed.If no ID is registered, the comment [No Setting] isdisplayed after each ID.




- 331 -

- Pie chart formatWhen you click the "Circle Graph" button, the screen display changes

to this type of display.

The workpiece process count and process end state extraction results

are displayed as a pie chart. This type of display is provided for a

specified workpiece. So, if no workpiece is specified, this type of

display is disabled. This means that this type of display is provided for

two modes: workpiece specification, and machine and workpiece

specification. For each mode, daily reporting, monthly reporting, or

term specification can be selected. Remaining count data (planned

count - normal completion count) and progress data (normal completion

count/planned count) are displayed as well.

A. Progress display

Process progress data (normal completion count/planned count) is

displayed as a bar chart. Moreover, remaining count data (planned

count - normal completion count) is displayed.

B. Planned process count display

A planned process count is displayed.

C. Total process count display

A total process count is displayed.D. Pie chart display of process end state

The summarized results of process end state are displayed as a pie

chart.

E. Process end state display

The summarized results of process end state are displayed using

numeric values. Up to five items (optional) and "Others" are

displayed.

<9> Machining result display buttonThis button is used to display the machining result screen.

<10> Tool life management display buttonThis button is used to display the tool life management screen.

A. Progress display B. Planned process count display

C. Total process count display

D. Pie chart display of process end stateE. Process end state display



8.NC DISPLAY AND OPERATION OPERATION B-75074EN/04

- 332 -

8 NC DISPLAY AND OPERATION



B-75074EN/04 OPERATION 8.NC DISPLAY AND OPERATION

- 333 -

8.1 OUTLINE

With the NC display and operation function, operations such as NC

state display and parameter setting can be performed for each NC.

The following NC state indications can be provided with this function:

1. CNC status

2. O number, program number, and file name display

3. Actual position display

4. Actual speed display

5. Modal information display

6. Program check display

7. Diagnosis screen display

The following NC operation can be performed:1. NC parameter setting

NOTE1 For actual speed display with the M series, the

threading/synchronous feed option and a positioncoder are required. If this option is not specified, avalue calculated from the spindle motor speedinstead of a feedback value from the position coder can be displayed by setting bit 0 of parameter No.3118 to 1.





- 334 -



1. [Main Menu] → <NC Display and Operation> button

2. <NC Disp. & Ope.> tab

3. [Overview-Screen List for Each Machine] screen

→ <NC Display and Operation> button

Screen operation

With the NC display and operation function, the operations below are

common.

<1> NC machine selection

From the combo box, select an NC machine and path number.


<3> NC status information

<4> Program number, file name, and sequence number display

<2> NC display and operation switch button




- 335 -

<2> NC display and operation switching

Switch the screen display by clicking a desired button at the

bottom of the screen.

[Current Position] button :

Displays the current position display screen.

[Program Check] button :

Displays the program check screen.

[Parameter] button :

Displays the parameter setting screen.

[Diagnosis] button :

Displays the diagnosis screen.

<3> NC status information NC status information is displayed.

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

In (1) through (7), status information is displayed as indicated

below.

Status display in (1)

*** : Non-selection

MDI : MDI mode

Mem : MEMORY mode

Edit : EDIT mode

Hndl : HANDLE modeJog : JOG mode

Tjog : TEACH in JOG mode

THnd : TEACH in HANDLE mode

Inc : INCREMENTAL mode

Ref : REFERENCE mode

Rmot : SCHEDULE mode

Test : TEST run mode


**** : Reset

Stop : Operation stopped

Hold : Operation temporarily stopped

Strt : Being startedMStr : During tool wait and return operation, repositioning,

and motion based on a manual numeric command


*** : Others

Motn : During axis movement

Dwel : During dwell operation


*** : Non-selection

FIN : Waiting for processing

Emg : Emergency stop state

Reset : Reset state

Status display in (5)*** : No alarm issued

Alarm : Alarm issued




- 336 -

Batt : Voltage drop of the battery for the nonvolatile memory

and absolute position detector


⋅ M series (including Power Mate i)

*** : No editing

EDIT : During edited

SeaRCH : Search being made

OUTPUT : Data being output

INPUT : Data being input

COMPARE : Comparison being made

Label Skip : Label skip state

ReSTaRT : Program being restarted

HPCC : RISC operation being performed

PTRR : Placed in the tool retract and return mode

RVRS : Retrace/reverse motion being performedRTRY : Retrace/re-forward motion being performed

RVED : Retrace/reverse motion ended

HANDLE : During handle interrupt

OFfSet : Placed in the tool length compensation value

measurement mode

Work OFfSet : Placed in the workpiece origin offset

measurement mode

AICC : In AI contour control operation

MEmory-CHecK : Tape memory check being made

CusToMer's BoarD : In customer board control operation

SAVE : Fine torque sensing data being saved

AI NANO : In AI nano control operationAI APC : In AI advanced preview control operation

MBL APC : In multi-block pre-read advanced preview

control operation

⋅ T series

**** : No editing

EDIT : During edited

SeaRCH : Search being made

OUTPUT : Data being output

INPUT : Data being input

COMPARE : Comparison being made

Label SKip : Label skip state

OFfSet : Placed in the tool length compensation value

write mode

Work ShiFT : Placed in the workpiece shift value write

mode

ReSTaRT : Program being restarted

PTRR : Placed in the tool retract and return mode

MEmory-CHecK : Tape memory check being made

SAVE : Fine torque sensing data being saved

Status display in (7) (valid only for a combined machine tool)

T mode : T mode

M mode : M mode




- 337 -

<4> Program number and sequence number displayThe program number, file name, and sequence number currently

selected are displayed.

(1) (2)

(1) Program number and file name

(2) Sequence number




- 338 -

8.3 ACTUAL POSITION DISPLAY

The actual position display screen can display the following

information:

(1) Overall position data (relative position, absolute position, machine

position, and distance to go)

(2) Relative position

(3) Absolute position

(4) Machine position

(5) Distance to go

This screen also displays the following information:

(1) Modal information

(2) Actual speed information

Example of the actual position display screen

<1> Actual position display<2> Modal information display

<3> Actual speed information display




- 339 -

<1> Actual position display

The current NC position is displayed.

The following information can be displayed:

(1) Overall position data (relative position, absolute position,

machine position, and distance to go)

(2) Relative position

(3) Absolute position

(4) Machine position

(5) Distance to go

The following buttons are used for display switching:

Example of overall Example of relative

position display position display

<2> Modal information display

Modal information such as G code information is displayed.


The actual speed and spindle speed are displayed.




- 340 -

8.4 PROGRAM CHECK

The program check screen can be used to check the NC program

currently being executed.

This screen also displays the following information:

(1) Modal information

(2) Actual speed information

Example of the program check screen

<1> Program check screen

The NC program currently being executed is displayed.

<2> Modal information display

Modal information such as G code information is displayed.


The actual speed and spindle speed are displayed.

<1> Program check display <2> Modal information display





- 341 -

8.5 PARAMETER SETTING

The parameter setting screen can be used to set NC parameters.

NOTEWhen setting parameters, place the NC in thefollowing states:

• Setting data- Set "PARAMETER WRITE" to ENABLE.

• Operation state- Emergency stop state- Operation stop/halt state in the MDI mode

Example of the parameter setting screen

<1> Parameter setting

• Enabling/disabling parameter write operation

Click the [PWE off] button to change it to [PWE on].

Click the [PWE on] button to change it to [PWE off] state.

NOTETo change [PWE off] to [PWE on], the NC must beplaced in the emergency stop state or stopped/halted in the MDI mode.

<1> Parameter setting




- 342 -

• Parameter search

Specify a parameter number to be found, and click the [Find] button.

• Bit-type parameter

A bit-type parameter is set when its check box is checked.

NOTEWhen parameter write operation is disabled, the titleline displays "(Writing Disabled)".




- 343 -

8.6 DIAGNOSIS

The diagnosis screen can display the diagnostic data of the operation

state of the CNC including the servo system.

Example of the diagnosis screen

<1> Diagnosis screen

Diagnosis items and their statuses are displayed.

• Diagnostic data search

Specify a desired diagnostic data number, then click the

[Find] button.

<1> Diagnosis screen



9.NC MAINTENANCE OPERATION B-75074EN/04

- 344 -

9 NC MAINTENANCE



B-75074EN/04 OPERATION 9.NC MAINTENANCE

- 345 -

9.1 OUTLINE

With the NC maintenance function, operations such as input/output of

NC maintenance information and various data items can be performed

for each NC.

With the NC maintenance function, the following capabilities are

available:

1. Alarm history display and external operator message history

display

2. Operation history display and history signal setting

3. Various data backup/restoration

4. FROM backup/restoration, SRAM backup

5. Display of history data automatically backed up

NOTE1 The FOCAS2/Ethernet function is required.2 When the i CELL is used on the CIMPLICITY viewer,

history data automatically backed up cannot bedisplayed.

3 With Series 30i/31i/32i, only various data

backup/restoration can be performed. The other functions are under development.




- 346 -



1. [Main Menu] → <Maintenance> button

2. <Maintenance> tab

3. [Overview-Screen List for Each Machine] screen

→ <Maintenance> button

Screen operation

With the NC maintenance function, the operations below are common.


From the combo box, select an NC machine and path number.

For details, see <1>, "NC machine selection" in Section 8.2,

"SCREEN OPERATION".


<3> NC status information<4> Program number, file name, and

sequence number display

<2> NC maintenance switch button




- 347 -

<2> NC maintenance switching

Switch the screen display by clicking a desired button at the

bottom of the screen.

[Alarm History] button:

Displays alarm history data and external operator message

history data.

[Operation History] button:

Displays operation history data and sets history signals.

[Data Input/Output] button:

Displays the data input/output screen.

[FROM/SRAM Backup] button:

Performs FROM data backup/restoration and SRAM backup.

[Backup Data] button:Alarm history data, external operator message data, and

operation history data backed up to the personal computer

with the automatic backup function can be displayed.

<3> NC status information display

NC status information is displayed.

For details, see <3>, "NC status information display" in Section

8.2, "SCREEN OPERATION".

<4> Program number and sequence number display

The program number and sequence number currently selected are

displayed.

For details, see <4>, " Program number, file name, and sequence

number display" in Section 8.2, "SCREEN OPERATION".




- 348 -

9.3 ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY

The alarm history display screen can display the following information:

(1) Alarm history data

(2) External operator message history data

NOTE1 History data being displayed on the alarm history

screen is not sampled.2 For external operator message history display, an

optional function, that is, the external messagefunction or the external data input function, is

required.To display the external operator message historyscreen, bit 2 of the NC parameter No. 3112 must beset to 1.

3 This function for Series 30i/31i/32i is under

development.

Example of the alarm history display screen

<1> Alarm history display




- 349 -

9.3.1 History Data Display

When the alarm history display screen is displayed, two history dataitems can be checked:



Click the [Display Switch] button to switch to a desired screen.

• Page

By clicking the scroll bar, page feed operation can be performed.

When you click the [Top] button, the top (oldest) page of history

information is displayed.

When you click the [End] button, the bottom (newest) page of

history information is displayed.

9.3.2 Outputting History Data

Procedure for outputting history dataHistory data can be output in text image to an arbitrary folder according

to the procedure below.

<1> Click the [Output] button. The screen display changes as shown

below.

The keytop of the [Output] button changes to [Exec.].

<2> Specify a desired folder name and file name, then click the [Exec.]

button.

If no extension is specified, the following extensions are used:

Alarm history : .alhis

External operator message history : .omhis

Format of alarm history dataThe following five items, separated by spaces, are output:

<1> Date (yy/mm/dd format)

<2> Time (hh:mm:dd format)

<3> Alarm number

<4> Axis (For alarms not related to axes, 0 is indicated.)

<5> Alarm message

Example of alarm history output

04/02/24 10:52:03 5136 00 FSSB:NUMBER OF AMPS IS SMALL

04/02/24 10:51:33 0417 01 SERVO ALARM : AXIS DGTL PARAM




- 350 -

Format of external operator message history dataThe following four items, separated by spaces, are output:

<1> Date (yy/mm/dd format)

<2> Time (hh:mm:dd format)

<3> Operator message number (When no operator message number is

present, 0000 is indicated.)

<4> Operator message

Example of external operator message history output

04/05/07 09:41:42 0000 OPERATER MESSAGE B

04/04/21 22:21:58 2003 OPERATER MESSAGE A

9.3.3 Clearing History Data

When you click the [Clear] button, the following inquiry appears to

confirm that history data may be cleared:

Click the [Yes] button. The history data is cleared.




- 351 -

9.4 OPERATION HISTORY DISPLAY

The operation history display screen can be used to display NC

operation history data and set history signals.

NOTE1 NC operation history data being displayed on the

operation history screen is not sampled.To display the operation history screen, bit 5 of theNC parameter No. 3112 must be set to 0, and bit 4 of the NC parameter No. 3106 must be set to 1.

2 This function for Series 30i/31i/32i is under

development.

Example of the operation history display screen

<1> Operation history display




- 352 -

9.4.1 Operation History Display

This screen displays key input/signal operation performed by theoperator, and the history of issued NC alarms.

• History data

History data is displayed as indicated below.

⋅ Function keys :

<POS>, <PROG>, and so forth

⋅ Address/numeric keys :

A to Z, 0 to 9, ;, +, -, and so forth

⋅ Page/cursor keys :

<PAGE_U>, <PAGE_D>, <CUR_U>, <CUR_D>,

<CUR_L>, <CUR_R>

⋅ Soft keys :[SF1], [SF2], [SF3], [SF4], and so forth

⋅ Other keys :

<RESET>, <CAN>, and so forth

⋅ Signals:

G0000.7_ON, G000.7_OFF, and so forth

⋅ Alarms:

PS/0100, OT ALM/xxxx, and so forth

* For the meanings of alarms, refer to the operator's

manual of each CNC.

⋅ Date: YY/MM/DD for Japanese

MM/DD/YY for English⋅ Time: hh:mm:ss

NOTEFor the word sub, and path 3, "S_" and "3_" isprefixed, respectively.Example: <S_POS>, S_G, 3_G0000.7_U,

3_PS/0000, and so forth

• Page

Page feed operation can be performed by clicking the scroll bar.

When you click the [Top] button, the top (oldest) page of history

information is displayed.When you click the [End] button, the bottom (newest) page of

history information is displayed.




- 353 -

9.4.2 Outputting History Data

Outputting operation history dataHistory data can be output in text image to an arbitrary folder according

to the procedure below.

<1> Click the [Output] button. The screen display changes as shown

below.

The keytop of the [Output] button changes to [Exec.].

<2> Specify a desired folder name and file name, then click the [Exec.] button.

If no extension is specified, the following extension is used:

.ophis

Format of operation history dataThe following three items, separated by spaces, are output:

<1> Record type

<2> Data for record type

<3> Data displayed on the NC screen

The following values are set for the first and second items:

0 1st itemRecord type

2nd itemData for record type

0 MDI in path 1 1 Power-on, 2 Others

1 Signal in path 1 Always set to 0

2 Alarm in path 1 Always set to 0

3 Date 1 Power-on, 2 Others

4 Time 1 Power-on, 2 Others







Data for the third item is displayed on the screen.

Example of operation history output data

0 1 <RESET>

0 1 <DELETE>

3 1 04/02/24

4 1 10:47:26

2 0 PS/0100

0 0 <SYSTEM>




- 354 -

9.4.3 Clearing History Data

When you click the [Clear] button, the following inquiry appears toconfirm that history data may be cleared:

Click the [Yes] button. The history data is cleared.

9.4.4 History Signal Setting

Click the [Signal Setting] button. The screen changes as shown below,

enabling operation history I/O signals to be set.

• Setting of I/O signals

Set signal names, signal numbers, and bit data subject to I/O signal

history data manipulation. Up to 20 data items can be set.

• All clear

When you click the [All Clear] button, all currently set operation

history target signal data is cleared.

• Clear

When you click the [Clear] button, the operation history target

signal data where the cursor is placed currently is cleared.

• Display of the operation history screen

When you click the [History Display] button, the screen display

returns to the operation history display screen.




- 355 -

9.5 VARIOUS DATA BACKUP/RESTORATION

With the various data backup/restoration function, the following data

can be backed up/restored:

(1) NC parameters



(4) Custom macro variables (in the five hundred)

(5) Workpiece origin offset

NOTEFor pitch error compensation data, the pitch error compensation function (option) is required. For

custom macro variables, custom macro B (option) isrequired. For workpiece origin offset data, theworkpiece coordinate system setting function(option) is required.

<1> Data backup/restoration




- 356 -

9.5.1 Data Backup

Data can be backed up using the procedure below.

<1> From the data type combo box, select a type of data to be backed

up.

(1) NC parameter



(4) Custom macro variables (in the five hundreds)


<2> Specify TV check and CTV.

Specify TV check and CTV as required.

• TV check A blank code is inserted into a data block to make a TV

check.

When this item is checked, the TV check function is enabled.

• CTV

This item is enabled when TV check is set ON.

When this item is checked, TV check in a comment is

canceled.

<3> Specify a folder name for saving backup data.

When a folder name is specified, a list of the files in the folder is

displayed.

<4> Specify a file name for storing backup data.

Use one of the two methods:

(1) Select a file from the list.

(2) Specify a file name directly.

<5> Click the [BackUp NC->PC] button to start backup operation.

During backup operation, data being backed up is displayed in the

list area.

* To cancel backup operation, click the [Cancel] button.




- 357 -

9.5.2 Data Restoration

Data can be restored using the procedure below.

<1> From the data type combo box, select a type of data to be restored.

(1) NC parameter



(4) Custom macro variables (in the five hundreds)


<2> Specify TV check and CTV.

Specify TV check and CTV as required.

• TV check

A blank code is inserted into a data block to make a TVcheck.

When this item is checked, the TV check function is enabled.

• CTV

This item is enabled when TV check is set ON.

When this item is checked, TV check in a comment is

canceled.

<3> Specify the name of a folder holding data to be restored.

When a folder name is specified, a list of the files in the folder is

displayed.

<4> Specify the name of a file to be restored.




<5> Click the [Restore PC->NC] button to start restoration operation.

During restoration operation, data being restored is displayed in

the list area.

* To cancel restoration operation, click the [Cancel] button.

9.5.3 File List Refreshing

Click the [List Refresh] button to update the list to the latest state.




- 358 -

9.5.4 File Deletion

A file on the list can be deleted using the procedure below.

<1> Specify the name of a folder where a file to be deleted is held.

Specify the name of a folder to be displayed as a list.

<2> Specify the name of a file to be deleted.




<3> Click the [Delete] button.

The following inquiry is displayed:

Click the [Yes] button. The specified file is deleted.




- 359 -

9.6 FROM/SRAM DATA BACKUP/RESTORATION

The FROM/SRAM data backup/restoration function can back up,

restore, and delete FROM data and can back up SRAM data.

NOTE1 In FROM data backup/restoration/deletion, only user

files created by the machine tool builder or user inFROM can be backed up, restored, and deleted. Thesystem files distributed by FANUC cannot be backedup, restored, and deleted.

2 To restore SRAM data, the NC boot function needs

to be used.3 This function for Series 30i/31i/32i is under

development.

<1> FROM/SRAM data backup/restoration




- 360 -

9.6.1 FROM Data Backup

FROM data can be backed up using the procedure below.

<1> Click the [BackUp NC->PC] button.

<2> From the data type combo box, select FROM.

<3> From the board name combo box, select the name of the board

where the FROM to be backed up is installed.

<4> Specify the name of a folder where FROM data to be backed up is

to be saved.

<5> From the list, select FROM data to be backed up.

<6> Click the [Exec.] button to start backup operation.

During backup operation, the progress bar indicates the progress

status of backup operation.


* Naming of a backed up FROM file

A backed up FROM file is automatically named as follows:

FROM-file-name.xxx

xxx represents a serial number starting with 000. If a

specified folder holds the same FROM file name, a higher

number such as 001 and 002 is assigned.




- 361 -

9.6.2 FROM Data Restoration

FROM data can be restored using the procedure below.

<1> Click the [Restore PC->NC] button.



where the FROM to be restored is installed.

<4> Specify the name of a folder where FROM data to be restored is

stored.

<5> From the list, select an FROM data file to be restored.

<6> Click the [Exec.] button to start restoration operation.

During restoration operation, the progress bar indicates the

progress status of restoration operation.

* To cancel restoration operation, click the [Cancel] button.

NOTEWhen restoration operation is canceled, FROM databecomes invalid. When the power is turned on next

time, the CNC may not start up.




- 362 -

9.6.3 SRAM Data Backup

SRAM data can be backed up using the procedure below.


<2> From the data type combo box, select SRAM.


where the SRAM to be backed up is installed.

<4> Specify the name of a folder where SRAM data to be backed up is

to be saved.

<5> From the list, select SRAM data to be backed up.

<6> Click the [Exec.] button to start backup operation.

During backup operation, the progress bar indicates the progress

status of backup operation.


* Naming of a backed up SRAM file

To a backed up SRAM file, a name that can be recognized by the

NC boot function is automatically assigned.

NOTEBefore SRAM data can be backed up, the NC mustbe placed in the "emergency stop" state.

9.6.4 File List Refreshing

Click the [List Refresh] button to update the list to the latest state.




- 363 -

9.6.5 FROM Data Deletion

FROM data in an FROM of the NC can be deleted using the procedure below.




where the FROM to be deleted is installed.

<4> From the list, select FROM data to be deleted.

<5> Click the [Delete] button. The following inquiry appears:

Click the [Yes] button. The FROM data is deleted.




- 364 -

9.7 BACKUP DATA DISPLAY

The backup data display screen can display the following history data

backed up to the personal computer with the automatic backup

function:



(3) Operation history data

NOTE1 To display external operator message history data,

the optional external message function or the

optional external data input function is required.2 The automatic backup function of the alarm history,

external operator message history, and operationhistory for Series 30i/31i/32i is under development.

Screen operation

<1> Data type selection button

<2> Display period specification

<3> Display button <4> Button for jump to top/end




- 365 -

The screen operation procedure is described below.

<1> Data type selection

Select a type of history data to be displayed on the screen. A

selection can be made from alarm history, message history, and

operation history. No button can be pressed for a type of history

data for which a history data file is not created.

<2> Display period specification

Specify a period for which history data is displayed.

NOTEIn the case of operation history data, a displayperiod is based not on the date of the data but on thedate when the data was acquired from the NC.(Unlike alarm history data and message history

data, duplicate operation history data is notdeleted.)The amount of operation history data is huge. So,data read from the NC by each read operationshould be displayed on the screen.Example :

When data is collected once a day, specify adisplay period of one day.When data is collected once a week, specify adisplay period of seven days.

If you specify the display of multiple sets of readdata (for example, if you specify a display period of two days when data is to be collected once a day),all data cannot be displayed on the screen.

<3> Display button

After selecting a type of data and a period of display, press the

Display button. The specified data is displayed.

<4> Top/End button

When data is displayed, you can jump to the top or end of data by

pressing the Top or End button.



10.TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-75074EN/04

- 366 -

10 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT



B-75074EN/04 OPERATION 10.TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT

- 367 -

10.1 OUTLINE

The tool life management screen has the function equivalent to that of

the tool life screen of the NC. The screen provides two types of display:

tool group list display and tool group detail display.

At the time of tool group list display, select a group number and click

the [Detail] button to switch the screen display to tool group detail

display.

NOTE1 The tool life management option is required with the

NC. With Series 0i-MODEL B/C, the tool life


2 There are not the tool life management function andoption for that in Power Mate i.

3 The FOCAS2/Ethernet function is required.4 This function for Series 30i/31i/32i is under

development.




- 368 -



1. [Main Menu] → <Operation Monitoring> button (The machining

result screen is activated.) → <Tool Life Management> button

2. <Op. Monitoring> tab (The machining result screen is activated.)

→ <Tool Life Management> button

3. [Overview-Screen List for Each Machine] screen → <Tool Life

Management> button

When this screen is activated, a tool group list is displayed.

Automatic updateThis screen is updated to the latest information at intervals of one

minute.

Screen operation<1> Display change button <2> Display refresh button

<3> Machining result

display button

<4> Workpiece process

result display button



B-75074EN/04 OPERATION 10.TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT

- 369 -

<1> Display change buttonThis button switches the screen display between tool group list display

and tool group detail display. At the time of tool group list display, this

button is enabled only if a group number is already selected (a group

number of the table is clicked and the color of the line is reversed).

The keytop of this button displays [Detail] at the time of tool group list

display, and displays [List] at the time of tool group detail display.

- Example of tool group list displayA tool group list is displayed. However, a tool group with no tool

registered is not displayed.

A. Currently used tool group number display

The currently used tool group number is displayed. When no tool

group is currently used, [***] is displayed.

B. Currently selected tool group number display

The currently selected tool group number is displayed. When no

tool group is currently selected, [***] is displayed.

C. Tool group list

• Group No.

Tool group numbers are displayed.

• Use Tool No.

The order number of each currently used tool is displayed.

When no tool is used currently, [-] is displayed.

• Life

The life of each currently used tool are displayed.

• Count

The count of each currently used tool is displayed.



C. Tool group list




- 370 -

• Rest of Life

The remaining life of each currently used tool is displayed.

This value is the result of subtracting the value of Count from

the value of Life.

• Unused Number

The number of tools not used yet is displayed, However,

skipped tools are not counted in this number.

- Example of tool group detail displayThe state of tools registered in a selected tool group is displayed. For

the tool currently used, life information is displayed as well.


This display is not used on this screen.B. Currently selected tool group number display

This display is not used on this screen.

C. Tool group detail table

• Order No.

The order number of each currently used tool is displayed.

• Tool No.

Each registered tool number is displayed.

• State

Tool state information is displayed. One of four types of

states are indicated: Use, Unused, No Life, and Skip.

D. Currently used tool detail displayFor each of the items, the same data as for the tool group list is

displayed.

<2> Display refresh buttonClicking this button updates the screen to display the latest data.

<3> Machining result display buttonClicking this button displays the machining result screen.

<4> Workpiece process result display buttonClicking this button displays the workpiece process result screen.



C. Tool group detail tableD. Currently used tool detail display



B-75074EN/04 OPERATION 11.ALARM AND WARNING

- 371 -

11 ALARM AND WARNING



11.ALARM AND WARNING OPERATION B-75074EN/04

- 372 -

11.1 OUTLINE

The alarm and warning screen has the [Alarm Message] button and

[Warning Log Display] button.

Alarm messageClicking this button displays the alarm message screen. The alarm

message screen shows any current alarm state of a machine by the alarm

message if the communication protocol is FOCAS2/Ethernet. If the

communication protocol is DNC2, the alarm type is shown instead. Any

operator message is shown at the same time.

NOTE

1 FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i can use the operator message display function if the external data inputor external message function is provided. Power Mate i does not require any optional function to use

the operator message function.2 To use the alarm message display function, the

FOCAS2/Ethernet or DNC2 function is required. Touse the operator message display function, theFOCAS2/Ethernet function is required.

3 The operator message display function for Series

30i/31

i/32

iis under development.




- 373 -

Warning log displayClicking this button displays the warning log display screen. To view

an error log, click the [Log Display] button. To turn off the warning

(WRN) lamp, click the [Turn Off Warning Lamp] button. While the

WRN lamp is blinking, an error log is automatically displayed.

NOTE1 If the WRN lamp blinks, activate error log display on

the warning log display screen and send the log toFANUC.

2 When the screen is displayed with WebView, error log display is not performed.




- 374 -

11.2 SCREEN OPERATION (1) ALARM MESSAGE SCREEN


1. [Main Menu] → [Alarm and Warning] button (The alarm and

warning screen appears.) → [Alarm Message] button

2. [Alarm & Warning] tab (The alarm and warning screen appears.)

→ [Alarm Message] button

3. [Overview-Screen List for Each Machine] screen → [Alarm

Message] button

4. Click the [ALM] ([OPM]) lamp when the lamp is turned on.

When the screen is activated, the screen displays the alarm message or

operator message for the machine with the youngest machine number

among those machines for which alarms are issued.If there are both an alarm state and an operator message, the information

of a machine in the alarm state is displayed.

Automatic updateThis screen is updated to the latest information at intervals of one

minute.

Method of operation


<5> Machine figure display

<1> Machine number display<2> Machine name display

<3> Pathnumber

display

<6> Display refresh button

<7> Alarm message display <8> Operator message display




- 375 -

<1> through <5>The same information as for the overview screen is displayed.

<6> Display refresh buttonThis button updates the screen display to the latest information.

<7> Alarm message displayAlarms (irrelevant to axes) issued for the displayed machine (all paths)

are displayed.

The following items are displayed.

When FOCAS2/Ethernet is used


⋅ Path

⋅ Axis ("---" is indicated when the alarm is irrelevant to an axis.)

⋅ No.

⋅ Alarm No.

⋅ Type

⋅ Message ("No Setting" is indicated when no message is set in the

database.)

Example

When DNC2 is used


⋅ Path

⋅ No.⋅ Bit

⋅ Type

Example




- 376 -

NOTE

When DNC2 is used, only those alarms that areirrelevant to axes can be displayed.

<8> Operator message displayOperator messages issued for the displayed machine are displayed.


⋅ Path (If a distinction between paths is not made, [---] appears.)

⋅ No. (If no number is assigned, [---] appears.)

⋅ Message

Example

NOTE1 If four operator messages are displayed on the i

CELL setting screen, and a function for displaying

four messages is set on the NC, up to four operator messages can be displayed. In other cases, onlyone message can be displayed.

2 The symbols & and ~ displayed on the NC side aredisplayed as indicated below.

NC side & ~

i CELL side _ •




- 377 -

11.3 SCREEN OPERATION (2) ALARM LOG DISPLAY SCREEN


1. [Main Menu] → [Alarm and Warning] button (The alarm and

warning screen appears.) → [Warning Log Display] button

2. [Alarm & Warning] tab (The alarm and warning screen appears.)

→ [Warning Log Display] button

3. Click the [WRN] lamp when the lamp is turned on.

<1> Log DisplayThis button displays the error log screen. When [WRN] is blinking, the

error log screen is automatically displayed. This button is used to

display the error log screen when [WRN] is not blinking, or is used to

close the error log screen automatically displayed then re-display the

error log screen.

<2> Turn Off Warning LampAfter correcting the cause of a warning, turn off the warning lamp by

clicking this button.

<1> Machine number display button <2> Warning lamp turn-off button



B-75074EN/04 USER CUSTOMIZE 1.OVERVIEW

- 381 -

1 OVERVIEW

Organization of this partPart V, "USER CUSTOMIZATION", provides information required to

customize the i CELL.

1. OVERVIEWThis is the chapter you are reading now.

2. ADDING SCREENSThis chapter describes the method of adding new screens to the i

CELL.

3. DATABASE SPECIFICATIONS

This chapter describes the specifications of the i CELL database.

4. REFERENCING THE DATABASE

This chapter describes the method of referencing the i CELL

database from Excel.



2.ADDING SCREENS USER CUSTOMIZE B-75074EN/04

- 382 -

2 ADDING SCREENS

This chapter describes the method of adding new screens to the i CELL.

A new screen to be added must match the screen system (configuration)

of the i CELL. This chapter describes items necessary for this purpose.

This chapter alose describes DLL usable for screen creation.

For details of operating the editor CimEdit for creating screens, refer to

"CIMPLICITY HMI CimEdit OPERATOR’S MANUAL(B-75064EN-1)".



B-75074EN/04 USER CUSTOMIZE 2.ADDING SCREENS

- 383 -

2.1 SCREEN SYSTEM OF THE i CELL

This section describes the screen system (screen configuration and

screen switching) of the i CELL.

2.1.1 Screen Configuration

The screen configuration of the i CELL is outlined below. Basically,

the individual screens are hierarchically structured in each functiongroup.

Function Group

(Function Overlay Tab)

Standard Screen Function Screen

MenuMain Menu

Operation Monitoring

Tool Life Management

Workpieces Process Result

Machining Result

Screen List for Each MachineOverview Menu

NC Display and Operation Actual Position Display

Program Check

Parameter Setting

Diagnosis

Alarm and Warning Menu Alarm Message

Warning Log Display

NC Program Management Menu NC Program Management

Remote Support Menu Remote Support

Maintenance Alarm History Display

Operation History Display

Data Input/Output

FROM/SRAM Backup

Backup Data Display




- 384 -

(*1) Standard screen:Screen that is opened when the function switch tab is selected andhas a function for switching to another screen of the same group.In the function groups with no standard screen, the screens(Machining Result, Actual Position Display, and Alarm HistoryDisplay) displayed at the top of the function screen serve asstandard screens. These screens can be called either standardscreens or function screens.

(*2) Function screen:Screen that has a function such as for data display

2.1.2 Screen Switching

With the i CELL, the screen display can be basically switched in the

arrow directions shown in the outline of the screen configuration of Subsection 2.1.1, "Screen Configuration".Example 1 : “Overview” group

When the OverView tab is selected, the screen display switches tothe menu. From the menu, the screen display can be switched toScreen List for Each Machine.

Example 2 : “Operation Monitoring” groupWhen the Op. Monitoring tab is selected, the screen displayswitches to Machining Result. From Machining Result, the screendisplay can be switched to Workpieces Process Result and ToolLife Management. From Workpieces Process Result, the screen

display can be switched to Machining Result and Tool LifeManagement. From Tool Life Management, the screen display can be switched to Machining Result and Workpieces Process Result.

Example 3 : “Alarm and Warning” groupWhen the Alarm & Warning tab is selected, the screen displayswitches to Menu. From Menu, the screen display can be switchedto Alarm Message and Warning Log Display. The screen displaycannot be switched between Alarm Message and Warning LogDisplay.

To switch to another function group, the function switch tab is usuallyused. However, by using Main Menu, Screen List for Each Machine of

Overview, the <Back> button, or the warning and alarm lamps, thescreen display can be switched to a particular screen.For screen switch operation, see the relevant items in Part IV,"OPERATION".




- 385 -

2.2 SCREEN ADDITION

This chapter sequentially describes jobs required to add new screens.

NOTEBefore performing screen addition jobs (such asscreen creation and modification), be sure to backup the i CELL. For the method of backup, see

Chapter 5, "BACKUP AND RESTORATION", in PartII, INSTALLATION".

2.2.1 Determination of Basic Items This subsection describes the basic items that need to be determined

before starting screen addition jobs (such as screen creation and screenmodification).

Determination of screen configurationDetermine a configuration for adding a screen. Two major methods areavailable.<1> A new function group is created, and a screen is added to the

group. <2> A screen is added to an existing function group.

Depending on the number of screens (functions) to be added and on themechanism for screen switching, <1> is recommended because new

screens can be added more easily and less modifications to the i CELL

are required.

Assuming that method <1> is used for screen addition, the method of adding a standard screen and function screen is described below. Whenmethod <2> is used, only a function screen is added. So, see therelevant items only.

NOTEUp to ten function groups can be used with thecurrent i CELL. However, eight function groups are

already used, so that only two function groups canbe added.




- 386 -

Determination of basic itemsDetermine the basic items indicated in the table below. The items areused in various settings described later.

Basic items

Item Description Example

Function group name Name of a function group User Function

Function switch tab

character string display

(upper row/lower row)

Character string displayed on a function switch tab. Two rows

are used for display in a function switch tab. A character string is

to be displayed on each of the upper and lower rows.

Upper row: User

Lower row: Function

Visibility in WebView Selection of whether the function switch tab of a function group

is visible when WebView is executed. 0: Visible, 1: Invisible

0: Visible

Standard screen name Name of a screen to be opened when you click a function switch

tab

User standard screen

Standard screen file name Actual Cim file name of a standard function StnScr.cim

Standard screen ScreenID 6-digit ID whose 3 higher digits do not duplicate any other

standard screen ScreenIDs(*1)

900000

Function screen name Name of a function screen User function screen

Function screen file name Actual Cim file name of a function screen FncScr.cim

Function screen ScreenID Standard screen ScreenID whose 3 lower digits are modified. No

duplication with other ScreenIDs is allowed.(*1)

900001

(*1) Use a number in the nine hundred thousands.




- 387 -

2.2.2 Modification to the Function Switch Tab A function switch tab is created based on the setting of the ini file(iCellTabCtl.ini) and is stored in the TabPos.cim file. To modify thefunction switch tab, first modify the ini file then make a function switchtab modification on the CimEdit screen. When no new function group isto be created, no modification to the function switch tab is required.

Modifying the ini file1 Copy the iCellTabCtl.ini file in

the %iCELL%\CimProject\screens directory, and create a backupfile for safety.

2 Open the iCellTabCtl.ini file.3 Add data such as names determined in Subsection 2.2.1,

"Determination of Basic Items" on the last line of each item asshown in the example below.

NOTEDo not modify any other lines. Otherwise, the i CELL

can malfunction.

4 Upon completion of addition, save and close the file.

Exam le

Function Group Names

Standard Screen File Names

Visibility in WebView

Character strings displayed in Function Overlay Tab

[Menu]

100000 = "Main Menu"

…….

108000 = "Remote Support"

900000 = "User Function"

[File Name]

xxx000 = "File Name"

100000 = "MainMenu.cim"

…….

108000 = "RemoteDgnMenu.cim"

900000 = "StnScr.cim"

[WebView Visibility]

'0:Visible, 1:Invisible

…….

108000 = "1"

900000 = "0"

[Tab Text]100000_0 = "Main"

…….

108000_1 = "Support"

900000_0 = "User"

900000_1 = "Function"

…….

Added Line

Added Line

Added Line

Added Line




- 388 -

Modification to the function switch tab1 Copy the TabPos.cim file in the %iCELL%\CimProject\screens

directory, and create a backup copy for safety.2 Activate the i CELL project. (It is recommended that the

communication enable check box of each machine be uncheckedon the i CELL setting screen before activation.)

3 Open TabPos.cim with CimEdit (file selection > right-click >Edit).

4 Double-click the function switch tab (general-purpose tab control)on the opened TabPos.cim screen (or select the function switch tab> right-click > select the trigger smart object).

5 A message box indicating the path of the ini file to be used for function switch tab creation appears. Click the <OK> button.

6 A message box indicating the completion of function switch tabcreation appears. Click the <OK> button.

7 This completes modification to the function switch tab. Save andclose the screen.

Before After

modification modification




- 389 -

2.2.3 Creation of a Basic Screen

This subsection describes the method of creating a screen (basic screen)that includes objects (general-purpose objects for i CELL) required on

an i CELL screen.

However, a sample file (SampleBaseScr.cim) created as described below already exists in the %iCELL%\Sample\screens directory. It isrecommended that the sample file be used for a basic screen (when

general-purpose objects as used with the current i CELL screen are

used). If the sample file is used, this subsection need not be read. Insuch a case, proceed to Subsection 2.2.4, "Creation of a StandardScreen and Function Screen".

A basic screen is used as the base for a standard screen and functionscreen to be added, as described below.

1 Produce a copy of the TabPos.cim file contained inthe %iCELL%\CimProject\screens directory in the samedirectory.

2 Change the name of the produced copy to a proper name. For explanation, the new name BaseScr.cim is assigned to the file usedfor the basic screen.

3 Open the BaseScr.cim file with CimEdit (file selection >right-click > Edit).

4 Delete the general-purpose tab control (function switch tab), Back button, title bar, message line, and warning and alarm lamps of theBaseScr.cim screen.




- 390 -

Title bar

Back button

Message line

General-purpose tab control

Warning and alarm lamps

5 Open the TabPos.cim file with CimEdit (file selection >right-click > Edit).

6 Select all necessary objects from the general-purpose tab control,Back button, title bar, message line, and warning and alarm lampsof the TabPos.cim screen (multiple objects can be selected byclicking each object while holding down the Shift key), then selectEdit then Copy from the menu.

7 On the BaseScr.cim screen, select Edit then Paste Special… fromthe menu.

8 A dialog box appears. Select Paste Link then click the <OK>

button.




- 391 -

9 Select only one pasted object, then right-click then selectProperties.

10 The Properties-Link Container dialog box appears. Select the Link Container tab, then change the data in the text box of "Link sourcefile" to TabPos.cim (delete"%iCELL%\CimProject\screens\").

11 After making a change, click the <OK> button then close thedialog box.

12 After performing steps 9 to 11 for all pasted objects, save andclose the screen.

As described above, if "Paste Link" is executed for an object, amodification to the object can be made only by making a modificationto the object in the link source file (TabPos.cim).

For details of each pasted object, see Section 2.3,

"GENERAL-PURPOSE OBJECTS FOR THE i CELL".




- 392 -

2.2.4 Creation of a Standard Screen and Function Screen

Both a standard screen and function screen are created based on the basic screen. For a standard screen and function screen to operate

according to the i CELL system, the screen variables (screen level

variables) need to be set properly. Moreover, a mechanism for screenswitching needs to be created.

2.2.4.1 File creation

Produce two copies of the basic screen file inthe %iCELL%\CimProject\screens directory, then assign a standardscreen file name and function screen file name determined in

Subsection 2.2.1, "Determination of Basic Items" to the producedcopies.When using the sample screen creation file SampleBaseScr.cim,

produce two copies of the file in the %iCELL%\CimProject\screensdirectory.In the explanation below, the sample file names are used. That is, thename of the standard function screen is StnScr.cim, and the name of thefunction screen file is FncScr.cim.




- 393 -

2.2.4.2 Setting the screen variables (screen level variables)

Set the screen variables of the standard screen and function screen.

1 Open each file with CimEdit (file selection > right-click > Edit).2 Select Format then Screen Properties from the menu.3 The Properties-Screen dialog box appears. Select the Variables

tab.

4 Set each variable indicated in the table below. To match thesample settings in Subsection 2.2.1, "Determination of BasicItems", the values to be set in StnScr.cim and FncScr.cim are also

described.




- 394 -

Setting of screen variables

Variable Description StnScr.cim FncScr.cim

FanucTabCtl_FirstSelected Tab number of the function group to which the screen

belongs. From top to bottom, the tab numbers are 0, 1,

2, ..., and 9.(*1)

8 8

FanucTabCtl_SubID Value that does not duplicate any other screens of the

function group to which the screen belongs. The value is

0 for the screen that is displayed when the tab is

selected.

0 1

FanucTabCtl_ID Initial value: -1(*2)

-1 -1

FanucTabCtl_TabSelected Initial value: -1(*2)

-1 -1

FanucTabCtl_UsedOption Initial value: 0(*2)

0 0

FNC_TBar_Menu Text character string for representing the name of the

function screen to which the screen belongs

User Function User

Function

FNC_TBar_ScrName Text character string for representing a screen name User standard

screen

User function

screenFNC_MLine_DspMsg Text character string to be displayed. This character string

needs to be enclosed in double quotation marks (").

Initial value: "Message"(*3)

”Message” ”Message”

FNC_MsgFlag Whether a message is to be displayed is indicated.

0 (initial value): Not displayed,

Other than 0: Displayed(*3)

0 0

FNC_ErrFlag Whether an error has occurred is indicated.

0 (initial value): Normal, Other than 0: Error (*3)

0 0

FNC_DspFlag Whether screen display is being processed is indicated.

0 (initial value): Not being processed,

1: Being processed(*3)

0 0

(*1) The newly usable value is 8 or 9.(*2) Do not change the value. If a value other than the initial value is set,

the function switch tab can malfunction.(*3) The value need not be changed. The values of these variables are

changed by a script or action to control the screen(general-purpose objects for the i CELL). For details of the

general-purpose objects for the i CELL, see Section 2.3,

"GENERAL-PURPOSE OBJECTS FOR THE i CELL".

5 When all screen variables have been set, click the <OK> button,then close the dialog box.

6 Save the screen.




- 395 -

2.2.4.3 Screen switching

With the function switch tab, the screen display can be switched only between the standard screens of individual function groups, and thescreen display cannot be switched between screens in the same group.To switch to another screen, a mechanism for switching to a standardscreen needs to be created. This subsection describes the method of creating a mechanism for screen switching by using a screen switchingaction.

1 Open the StnScr.cim file with CimEdit (file selection > right-click > Edit).

2 Open the Properties-Screen dialog box (select Format then ScreenProperties from the menu), then select the Procedures tab.

3 Click the <New> button then select the Actions tab.4 Enter an appropriate name (e.g., OverlayFncScr) in Procedure

Name then click the <New> button.5 After setting "Overlay screen" in the action type field, enter the

screen name (FncScr.cim) then select the basic project(CIMPROJECT).

6 Click the <OK> button to return to the Properties-Screen dialog box.

7 Click the <OK> button to end the creation of the procedure.8 Select Tools then Text Button from the menu then place the text

button at an appropriate location.9 Open the Properties-Object dialog box of the placed text button

(object selection > right-click > Properties), then select the Eventstab.

10 Click the <Create> button.11 Set "Mouse Down" in the event field, then set the procedure

OverlayFncScr created previously in the action field.12 Click the <OK> button to end the creation of the event.13 Save the screen.

By setting a desired file name as a switching file name, a mechanism for switching directly from a particular screen to another screen can becreated in a similar way.

ExampleMenu → Operation Monitoring (Machining Result)

Screen List for Each Machine → Tool Life Management

As described above, a standard screen and function screen can be

created according to the i CELL system. By adding various objects to

these screens later on, customized screens can be created.




- 396 -

2.3 GENERAL-PURPOSE OBJECTS FOR THE i CELL

This section describes the objects (general-purpose objects) shared byeach screen of the i CELL.

By using all of these objects, a screen similar to the i CELL screen

produced by FANUC can be created. A screen similar to the i CELL

screen produced by FANUC can also be created without using theseobjects.

2.3.1 General-Purpose Tab (Function Switch Tab) Control

The tabs represent the individual function groups set in the ini file(iCellTabCtl.ini).

SettingThe screen variables below need to be set.FanucTabCtl_FirstSelected Tab number of the function group to which the

screen belongs. From top to bottom, the tab

numbers are 0, 1, 2, ..., and 9.

FanucTabCtl_SubID Value that does not duplicate any other screens

of the function group to which the screen

belongs. The value is 0 for the screen that is

displayed when the tab is selected.

FanucTabCtl_Id Initial value: -1. Do not change the value.FanucTabCtl_TabSelected Initial value: -1. Do not change the value.

FanucTabCtl_UsedOption Initial value: 0. Do not change the value.

FNC_ErrFlag Whether an error has occurred is indicated.(*1)

0 (initial value): Normal, Other than 0: Error

FNC_DspFlag Whether screen display is being processed is

indicated.(*1)

0 (initial value): Not being processed, 1: Being

processed

(*1) With the general-purpose tab control, the variables are used as anoperation execution condition.

Execution condition: FNC_ErrFlag=0 and FNC_DspFlag≠1




- 397 -

OperationWhen you double-click a tab, the screen display switches to thecorresponding function screen.

2.3.2 Back Button

When you click the Back button, the screen currently open is closed andthe screen that was previously open is opened.

SettingThe screen variables below need to be set.FNC_ErrFlag Whether an error has occurred is indicated.

(*1)


FNC_DspFlag Whether screen display is being processed is indicated. (*1)

0 (initial value): Not being processed, 1: Being processed

(*1) With the general-purpose tab control, the variables are used as anoperation execution condition.

Execution condition: FNC_ErrFlag=0 and FNC_DspFlag≠1

OperationWhen you click the Back button, a procedure is executed to close thescreen currently open and open the screen that was previously open.

2.3.3 Title Bar

The title bar displays a package name ("Integrated Package" by default),menu (function) name, screen name, and date and time (CIMPLICITYsystem point value).

Package name Menu (function) name Screen name Date and time

Setting

The screen variables below need to be set. FNC_TBar_Menu Text character string for representing a menu

(function) name

FNC_TBar_ScrName Text character string for representing a screen name

OperationWhen a screen is opened, the menu (function) name, screen name, anddate and time information are acquired and displayed.




- 398 -

2.3.4 Message Line

The message line displays a message.

Message <OK> button

SettingThe screen variables and procedure below need to be set.

Screen variablesFNC_MLine_DspMsg Text character string to be displayed. This

character string needs to be enclosed in double

quotation marks (").Example: "Error occurred."

FNC_ErrFlag Whether an error has occurred is indicated.(*1)


FNC_MsgFlag Whether a character string is to be displayed is

indicated.(*1)

0 (initial value): Not displayed, Other than 0:

Displayed

(*1) With the message line, the variables are used as an operationexecution condition.

Execution condition: FNC_ErrFlag ≠ 0 or FNC_MsgFlag≠0

ProcedureErrorFlagLow Procedure executed to set FNC_ErrFlag=0.

Ensure that the action FNC_ErrFlag=0 is included.

OperationA message is displayed. When an error occurs, a message is displayed

with FNC_ErrFlag≠0 (red characters). In other cases, a message is

displayed with FNC_MsgFlag≠0 (blue characters).

When FNC_ErrFlag≠0, the <OK> button is displayed. When you click this button, an event for calling the procedure ErrorFlagLow (settingFNC_ErrFlag=0 by action) occurs, and the message and button arehidden.




- 399 -

2.3.5 Warning and Alarm Lamps

The warning and alarm lamps post the output of a warning and alarm(operator message).

SettingThe points below need to be set.FNCSYSP.F_WARNING Whether a warning is output with the i CELL is

indicated.

0: Not output, 1: Output

FNCSYSP.F_ALARM Whether an alarm is output with the NC is

indicated.


FNCSYSP.F_OPM Whether an operator message is output with the

NC is indicated.


These points are automatically set by the i CELL, so that the user need

not set these points.

OperationWhen FNCSYSP.F_WARNING=1, the warning lamp blinks in yellow.When FNCSYSP.F_ALARM=1, the alarm lamp blinks in red.

When FNCSYSP.F_OPM=1 and FNCSYSP.F_ALARM≠1, the alarmlamp blinks in purple, and the character string changes from "ALM" to"OPM".If you click a blinking lamp, the screen display switches to a screen that

provides detailed information.

Warning lamp Alarm (operator message) lamp




- 400 -

Exam le

Version Information

Correspondence between ScreenIDs and File Names

Correspondence between Item Names and ScreenIDs

[Ini]

Version=1.0.0.1

[FileName]

100000=MainMenu.cim

…….

108000=RemoteDgnMenu.cim

900000=StnScr.cim

900001=FncScr.cim

[ScreenID]

MainMenu=100000

…….

RemoteDgnMenu=108000

StnScr=900000FncScr=900001

Added Line

Added Line

2.4 ScreenID.ini

ScreenID.ini is the ini file for setting a screen ID (ScreenID) and isstored under the %iCELL%\CimProject\fanuc\Setting\Screendirectory.

By setting the screen ID of each screen in this file, the selection of amachine with the machine selection control is enabled. When using themachine selection control, be sure to set this file.

2.4.1 File Modification Modify the file according to the procedure below.

1 Copy the ScreenID.ini file stored under the %iCELL%\CimProject\fanuc\Setting\Screen directory andcreate a backup file for safety.

2 Open the ScreenID.ini file.3 By using the ScreenID determined in Subsection 2.2.1,

"Determination of Basic Items", make the following additions asdescribed in the example below:

NOTEDo not modify the other lines. Otherwise, the i CELL

can malfunction.

4 After making all necessary additions, save and close the file.




- 401 -

2.5 iCELL_ErrorMessage

iCELL_ErrorMessage is the OLE automation module (Active X DLL)used to write an error log related to the i CELL to the log file.

iCELL_ErrorMessage is installed in iCELL_ErrorMessage.DLL.Use this module when writing a user-specific error log.

2.5.1 ErrorMessage

An error log is written to the log file.This class is installed in iCELL_ErrorMessage.ErrorMessage withiniCELL_ErrorMessage.DLL.

2.5.1.1 Method

InitializePerforms initialization processing.

- Syntaxobject.Initialize LogName

- SettingLogName By using a character string expression, set the log identifier of

the log file to which an error log is to be written.Set “iCELLErrLog”.

- Return valueA Boolean value is returned. When the processing is successful, True isreturned. When the processing fails, False is returned.

TerminatePerforms termination processing.

- Syntaxobject.Terminate

- Return value None

WriteLogWrites an error log to the log file.

- Syntaxobject.WriteLog Message

- SettingMessage Set a character string expression to be written to the log file.

- Return value None




- 402 -

2.5.1.2 Example of usage

An example of program for writing an error log is provided below.

Dim obj As ObjectDim bRtn As BooleanDim Message As String

Set obj = CreateObject("iCELL_ErrorMessage.ErrorMessage")If obj Is Nothing Then

MsgBox "CreateObject Error"Exit Sub

End If

bRtn = obj.Initialize("iCELLErrLog")If bRtn = False Then

MsgBox "Initialize Error"Exit Sub

End If

Message = "Error Log Test"obj.WriteLog Message

obj.Terminate

Set obj = Nothing




- 403 -

2.6 iCELLDef

iCELLDef is the OLE automation module (Active X DLL) used to readand write data related to the i CELL. Values set on the i CELL setting

screen can be acquired using iCELLDef.

iCELLDef is installed in iCELLDef.DLL.

2.6.1 iCELLRW

iCELLRW reads and writes i CELL settings.

This class is installed in iCELLDef.iCELLRW within iCELLDef.DLL.

2.6.1.1 Method

ComDefReadReads communication-related settings.

- Syntaxobject.ComDefRead Value()

- Setting

Value() Be sure to specify this argument. Specify a two-dimensionalarray of character string type for storing read communication

settings. Before calling this method, allocate

two-dimensional array elements.

Example: ReDim Value(0 to obj.mDispMachine –1,

0 to obj.pComDefItemCount –1)

The array element number is to start with 0.

On the setting screen, the maximum number of machines

dynamically changes. In such a case, allocate an area of up

to pMaxMachine-1 instead of mDispMachine-1. On the

application screen, the maximum number of machines does

not change, so that mDispMachine - 1 is sufficient.

- ExplanationWhen this method has been executed successfully, communicationsettings are written into Value(). The first dimension of atwo-dimensional array represents machines and the other dimensionrepresents the settings of each machine. Communication settings for thenumber of machines set in the public variable mDispMachine are set inthe array. See the properties starting with pComDef… for the meaningof each array element.

- Return valueA Boolean value is returned. When the processing is successful, True isreturned. When the processing fails, False is returned. When the

processing fails, the cause is set in the public variable mErrorMessage.




- 404 -

iCELLItemNoAcquires an item number indicating whether the function is enabled for each machine, from the screen ID.

- SyntaxItemNo = object.iCELLItemNo(ScrID)

- SettingScrID Be sure to set ScrID. Specify a screen ID of long type.

ItemNo Item number of long type

- ExplanationWhen the method iCELLRead is executed, the settings of the i CELL

related to each machine can be acquired in a two-dimensional array.

With this method, when a screen ID is used, an item number indicatingwhether the function of the screen ID is enabled for each machine can

be acquired. An item number acquired with this method is an elementnumber in the second dimension of a two-dimensional array acquiredwith iCELLRead.A screen ID to be specified by the argument must already be set in theScreenID section of the settingfile %iCELL%\CimProject\fanuc\Setting\Screen\ScreenID.ini.This method checks the settings of this ini file to determine whichfunction the specified screen ID represents, and returns thecorresponding item number in a two-dimensional array.

- Return valueWhen an integer greater than 0 is returned, it represents an item number.If a screen ID not registered in the ini file, or a screen ID that has nodistinction between the enabled and disabled states is specified, -1 isreturned.

iCELLReadReads settings related to the i CELL.

- Syntax

object.iCELLRead Value()

- SettingValue() Be sure to specify this argument. Specify a two-dimensional array

of character string type for storing read i CELL settings. Before

calling this method, allocate two-dimensional array elements.

Example: ReDim Value(0 to obj.mDispMachine – 1,

0 to obj.piCELLItemCount – 1)



dynamically changes. In such a case, allocate an area of up to

pMaxMachine-1 instead of mDispMachine-1. On the application

screen, the maximum number of machines does not change, sothat mDispMachine - 1 is sufficient.




- 405 -

- ExplanationWhen this method has been executed successfully, i CELL settings are

written into Value(). The first dimension of a two-dimensional arrayrepresents machines and the other dimension represents the settings of

each machine. i CELL settings for the number of machines set in the

public variable mDispMachine are set in the array. See the propertiesstarting with piCELL… for the meaning of each array element.




- Syntaxobject.Initialize Path

- SettingPath Set the %iCELL%\CimProject\ directory by using a character string

expression. It is assumed that under this directory, a directory

storing the ini file under the fanuc directory is configured.

When the CIMPLICITY execution project environment

variable ”SITE_ROOT” is specified, this argument is omissible.

- ExplanationWhen this method has been executed successfully, the values of the

public variables indicated below become valid. For details of each public variable, see Subsection 2.6.1.2, "Public variables".

mLanguage Display language

mDispMachine Maximum number of machines

mMachineItemCount Number of machine setting items

mScrIdCount Number of screens within the screen master

mScrOverViewId Screen ID specified for overview with a selected

machine

mDirectory Directory of a setting file



MachineReadReads machine settings.

- Syntaxobject.MachineRead Value()




- 406 -

- SettingValue() Be sure to specify this argument. Specify a two-dimensional

array of character string type for storing read machine

settings. Before calling this method, allocate


Example: ReDim Value(0 to obj.mDispMachine – 1,

0 to obj.pMachineItemCount – 1)



dynamically changes. In such a case, allocate an area of up

to pMaxMachine-1 instead of mDispMachine-1. On the

application screen, the maximum number of machines does

not change, so that mDispMachine - 1 is sufficient.

- ExplanationWhen this method has been executed successfully, machine settings arewritten into Value(). The first dimension of a two-dimensional arrayrepresents machines and the other dimension represents the settings of each machine. Machine information for the number of machines set inthe public variable mDispMachine is set in the array. See the propertiesstarting with pMachine… for the meaning of each array element.



ScreenIdReadReads the screen master.

- Syntaxobject.ScreenIdRead Value()

- SettingValue() Be sure to specify this argument. Specify a two-dimensional

array of character string type for storing read screen

information. Before calling this method, allocate


Example: ReDim Value(0 to 1, 0 to obj.mScrIdCount – 1)


- ExplanationWhen this method has been executed successfully, set screeninformation is written into Value(). The first dimension of atwo-dimensional array represents the settings of each screen. In the firstitem (0), a screen ID is set. In the second item (1), a cim file name is set.The second dimension represents types of screens. Screen informationitems as many as the value set in the public variable mScrIdCount areset in the array.




- 407 -





- Return value None




- 408 -

2.6.1.2 Public variables

mDirectory Indicates the directory of a setting file.

- Syntaxobject.mDirectory

- ExplanationThis variable is of character string type, and its pathis %iCELL%\CimProject\fanuc\.

mDispMachine

Indicates the maximum number of machines.

- Syntaxobject.mDispMachine

- ExplanationThis variable is of long type, and indicates the maximum number of machines. This value can be changed only through the setting screen.This means that this value indicates the number of machines to beconnected by the user. Reference the property pMaxMachine for themaximum number of machines that can be connected according to thespecification.When executing the method MachineRead(), allocate areas as many asthis value for the elements of the first dimension of the array.Do not change the value through an application program.

mErrorMessageIndicates an error message.

- Syntaxobject.mErrorMessage

- Explanation

When the method fails, the cause is written into this variable. Thisvariable is of character string type.

mLanguageIndicates a display language.

- Syntaxobject.mLanguage

- ExplanationThis variable is of long type, and indicates a display language (0:

Japanese, 1: English).Do not change the value through an application program.




- 409 -

mScrIdCountIndicates the number of screen registered in the screen master.

- Syntaxobject.mScrIdCount

- ExplanationThis variable is of long type and indicates the number of screensregistered in the FileName section of the screenmaster %iCELL%\CimProject\fanuc\Setting\Screen\ScreenID.ini.

mScrOverViewIdIndicates a screen ID for representing an overview screen.

- Syntaxobject.mScrOverViewId

- ExplanationThis variable is of long type, and indicates a screen ID for representingan overview screen.

mVersion, mServicePackIndicates the version and service pack information of the i CELL.

- Syntaxobject.mVersionobject.mServicePack

- ExplanationThese variables are of character string type.When the i CELL has version 1.3 and service pack 1, mVersionindicates "1.3", and mServicePack indicates "1".




- 410 -

2.6.1.3 Properties

pComDefD2ALTimeout, pComDefD2DatagramLen, pComDefD2EOTTimeout,pComDefD2NakRetry, pComDefD2OutputTimeout, pComDefD2Retry,pComDefD2Timeout

These properties return integers starting with 0. The ordinal numbers of these elements with meanings in an array read with the methodComDefRead are indicated. All of these properties are DNC2-relatedsetting items. These properties are valid only when the value of

pComDefProtocol is DNC2.

- Syntaxobject.pComDefD2ALTimeout

- ExplanationWhen ComDefRead is executed, settings are loaded into atwo-dimensional array. In the second dimension of thetwo-dimensional array, the values of the elements with these propertynumbers have the meanings indicated below. (The first dimension of the array represents machines.)pComDefD2ALTimeout Time-out period of the application layer (in

seconds), represented by a number from 30

to 120

pComDefD2DatagramLen Maximum datagram length, represented by

a number from 80 to 256

pComDefD2EOTTimeout EOT time-out period (in seconds),represented by a number from 1 to 60

pComDefD2NakRetry Maximum NAK retry count, represented by

a number from 1 to 10

pComDefD2OutputTimeout Output time-out period (in seconds),

represented by a number from 1 to 60

pComDefD2Retry Maximum retry count, represented by a

number from 1 to 10

pComDefD2Timeout Non-response time-out period (in seconds),


pComDefFEC4Address, pComDefFEC4Enable, pComDefFEC4Timeout,

pComDefFEEnable, pComDefFEFwLibTimeout, pComDefFEIPAddress,pComDefFETCPPort, pComDefFEUDPPort

These properties return integers starting with 0. The ordinal numbers of these elements with meanings in an array read with the methodComDefRead are indicated. All of these properties areFOCAS2/Ethernet-related setting items. These properties are valid onlywhen the value of pComDefProtocol is FOCAS2/Ethernet.

- Syntaxobject.pComDefFEC4Address




- 411 -

- ExplanationWhen ComDefRead is executed, settings are loaded into a

two-dimensional array. In the second dimension of the

two-dimensional array, the values of the elements with these property

numbers have the meanings indicated below. (The first dimension of

the array represents machines.)

pComDefFEC4Address C4 server address, represented by a

character string in the "192.162.0.1" format

pComDefFEC4Enable Number for indicating whether a C4 server is

to be used: 1 for used and 0 for not used

pComDefFEC4Timeout C4 server time-out period, represented by a

number from 1 to 9999. The unit is 10 ms.

pComDefFEEnable Number for indicating whether

communication settings are enabled or

disabled: 1 for enabled and 0 for disabled

pComDefFEFwLibTimeout Time-out period for the FOCAS2/Ethernet

communication function, represented by a

number from 1 to 9999. The unit is the

second.

pComDefFEIPAddress IP address of an NC, represented by a

character string in the "192.162.0.1" format

pComDefFETCPPort TCP port number of an NC, represented by a

number from 5001 to 65535

pComDefFEUDPPort UDP port number of an NC, represented by a

number from 5001 to 65535

pComDefItemCountReturns the number of communication setting items.

- Syntaxobject.pComDefItemCount

- ExplanationWhen executing the method ComDefRead, allocate areas as many as

this value for the elements of the second dimension of the array.

pComDefProtocolThis property returns the communication protocol.

- Syntaxobject.pComDefProtocol

- ExplanationThis property returns an integer starting with 0. The ordinal element

number of the communication protocol in an array read with the method

ComDefRead is indicated. As the element indicated by this property in

the array, " " (blank character string: no communication protocol is set),

object.pProtocolFE (FOCAS2/Ethernet),

object.pProtocolDNC2(DNC2), or object.pProtocolRP

(Reader/Puncher) is set.




- 412 -

pComDefRPDownloadAttr, pComDefRPUploadAttr These properties return integers starting with 0. The ordinal numbers of these elements with meanings in an array read with the methodComDefRead are indicated. All of these are setting items related toReader/Puncher communication. These are valid only when the valueof pComDefProtocol is object.pProtocolRP.

- Syntaxobject.pComDefRPDownloadAttr

- ExplanationWhen ComDefRead is executed, settings are loaded into atwo-dimensional array. In the second dimension of thetwo-dimensional array, the values of the elements with these property

numbers have the meanings indicated below. (The first dimension of the array represents machines.)pComDefRPDownloadAttr Number for representing the download

attribute

pComDefRPUploadAttr Number for representing the upload attribute

pComDefSerialBaudRate, pComDefSerialDataCode, pComDefSerialDataLen,pComDefSerialEnable, pComDefSerialParity, pComDefSerialPort,pComDefSerialStopBit

These properties return integers starting with 0. The ordinal numbers of these elements with meanings in an array read with the method

ComDefRead are indicated. All of these are setting items related to theserial line. These properties are valid only when the value of

pComDefProtocol is object.pProtocolDNC2 or object.pProtocolRP.

- Syntaxobject.pComDefSerialBaudRate

- ExplanationWhen ComDefRead is executed, settings are loaded into atwo-dimensional array. In the second dimension of thetwo-dimensional array, the values of the elements with these property

numbers have the meanings indicated below. (The first dimension of the array represents machines.)

pComDefSerialBaudRate One of the following baud rates:

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400,

57600, 115200

pComDefSerialDataCode Data code represented by one of the following

character strings:

ASCII, ISO, EIA

pComDefSerialDataLen Data length represented by one of the

following numbers:

7, 8

pComDefSerialEnable Information about enabled/disabled state. 1:Enabled, 0: Disabled




- 413 -

Parity represented by one of the following

character strings

pComDefSerialParity

NONE

ODD

EVEN

No parity

Odd parity

Even parity

pComDefSerialPort Serial communication port number,


pComDefSerialStopBit Stop bit, represented by one of the following

character strings:

1, 1.5, 2

piCELLItemCountThis property returns the number of i CELL setting items.

- Syntax object.piCELLItemCount

- ExplanationWhen executing the method iCELLRead, allocate areas as many as thisvalue for the elements of the second dimension of the array.

piCELLOverViewEnable, piCELLRunTimeEnable,piCELLWorkResultEnable,piCELLAlarmEnable, piCELLToolLifeEnable, piCELLNCDispOpeEnable,piCELLOperatorMessageEnable

These properties return integers starting with 0. The ordinal numbers of these elements with meanings in an array read with the methodiCELLRead are indicated.

- Syntaxobject.piCELLOverViewEnable

- ExplanationWhen iCELLRead is executed, settings are loaded into atwo-dimensional array. In the second dimension of thetwo-dimensional array, the values of the elements with these propertynumbers have the meanings indicated below. (The first dimension of the array represents machines.) Each item is disabled when the value is

0, and each item is enabled when the value is 1.piCELLOverviewEnable Overview

piCELLRunTimeEnable Run time

piCELLWorkResultEnable Machining result

piCELLAlarmEnable Alarm

piCELLToolLifeEnable Tool life

piCELLNCDispOpeEnable NC display/operation/maintenance

piCELLOperatorMessageEnable Operator message

pMachineItemCountThis property returns the number of machine setting items.

- Syntaxobject.pMachineItemCount




- 414 -

- ExplanationWhen executing the method MachineRead, allocate areas as many asthis value for the elements of the second dimension of the array.

pMachineNo, pMachineName, pMachineNCType,pMachineNCSpec,pMachinePath01-pMachinePath10, pMachinePMC

These properties return integers starting with 0. The ordinal numbers of these elements with meanings in an array read with the methodMachineRead are indicated.

- Syntaxobject.pMachineName

- Explanation

When MachineRead is executed, settings are loaded into atwo-dimensional array. In the second dimension of thetwo-dimensional array, the values of the elements with these propertynumbers have the meanings indicated below. (The first dimension of the array represents machines.)pMachineNo Machine number from 1 to 999

pMachineName Machine name. When the length is 0, no machine

is set.

pMachineNCType NC type. One of the following character strings is

set:

" "(Blank character string: No machine is set.)

object.pNCTypeFS0C(FS0C)

object.pNCTypeFS15A(FS15A)

object.pNCTypeFS15B(FS15B)

object.pNCTypeFS16i(FS16/18/21i)

object.pNCTypePMiDH(Power Mate i D/H)

object.pNCTypeFS30i(FS30i)




object.pNCTypeOther(others)

pMachineNCSpec NC specification, represented by a character

string such as M, T, and TT.

object.pNCSpecFS16iM(M)

object.pNCSpecFS16iT(T)

object.pNCSpecFS16iTT(TT)object.pNCSpecPMiDH(D/H)

object.pNCSpecPMiD2(D2)

pMachinePath01-10 NC specification for each path. One of the

following character strings is set:

" " (Blank character string: The NC does not have

the path.)

object.pNCSpecM (M series)

object.pNCSpecT (T series)

"P" is input for Power Mate.

pMachinePMC PMC type. One of the following character strings

is set:

object.pPMCN_NA (N and NA)object.pPMCNB_NB2 (Node-B and NB2)

object.pPMCNone (Blank character string: No

setting made: Other than above)




- 415 -

pNCSpecM, pNCSpecTThese properties indicate the character string representing an NCspecification in machine setting.

- Syntaxobject.pNCSpecM

- ExplanationThe values of the object.pMachinePath01 to object.pMachinePath10elements of the second dimension of a two-dimensional array acquired

by executing the method MachineRead are " " (blank character string)or the value returned by these properties.object.pNCSpecM M series

object.pNCSpecT T series

pNCTypeFS0C, pNCTypeFS15A, pNCTypeFS15B, pNCTypeFS16i,pNCTypePMiDH, pNCTypeFS30i, pNCTypeFS31i, pNCTypeFS32i,pNCTypeFS0i, pNCTypeOther

These properties indicate the character strings representing an NC typein machine setting.

- Syntaxobject.pNCTypeFS16i

- ExplanationThe value of the object.pMachineNCType element of the seconddimension of a two-dimensional array acquired by executing themethod MachineRead is " " (blank character string) or the valuereturned by these properties.object.pNCTypeFS0C FS0C

object.pNCTypeFS15A FS15A

object.pNCTypeFS15B FS15B

object.pNCTypeFS16i FS16/18/21i

object.pNCTypePMiDH Power Mate i D/H

object.pNCTypeFS30i FS30i




object.pNCTypeOther Others

pProtocolDNC2, pProtocolFE, pProtocolRPThese properties indicate the character string representing a protocoltype in communication setting.

- Syntaxobject.pProtocolFE




- 416 -

- ExplanationThe value of the object.pComDefProtocol element of the seconddimension of a two-dimensional array acquired by executing themethod ComDefRead is " " (blank character string) or the valuereturned by these properties.object.pProtocolDNC2 DNC2

Object.pProtocolFE FOCAS2/Etherenet

Object.pProtocolRP Reader/Puncher

2.6.1.4 Example of usage

A sample program for indicating a machine number, name,communication protocol, IP address of FOCAS2/Ethernet, whether the

setting of FOCAS2/Ethernet is valid, and whether the overviewfunction of the i CELL is provided below.

Dim obj As ObjectDim bRtn As BooleanDim Machine() As StringDim ComDef() As StringDim iCELL() As StringDim Count As LongDim Message As String

Set obj = CreateObject("iCELLDef.iCELLRW")If obj Is Nothing Then

MsgBox "CreateObject Error"Exit Sub

End If

bRtn = obj.Initialize()If bRtn = False Then

MsgBox obj.mErrorMessageExit Sub

End If

ReDim Machine(0 To obj.mDispMachine - 1, _ 0 To obj.pMachineItemCount - 1)

ReDim ComDef(0 To obj.mDispMachine - 1, _ 0 To obj.pComDefItemCount - 1)

ReDim iCELL(0 To obj.mDispMachine - 1, _ 0 To obj.piCELLItemCount - 1)

bRtn = obj.SysDefRead()If bRtn = False Then


End If




- 417 -

bRtn = obj.MachineRead(Machine())If bRtn = False Then


End If

bRtn = obj.ComDefRead(ComDef())If bRtn = False Then


End If

bRtn = obj.iCELLRead(iCELL())If bRtn = False Then

MsgBox obj.mErrorMessageExit SubEnd If

For Count = 0 To obj.mDispMachine - 1Message = Machine(Count, obj.pMachineNo)& ":" & _

Machine(Count, obj.pMachineName) & Chr(13) & Chr(10) & _ ComDef(Count, obj.pComDefProtocol) & "," & _ ComDef(Count, obj.pComDefFEIPAddress) & ", Enable=" & _ ComDef(Count, obj.pComDefFEEnable) & Chr(13) & Chr(10) & _ "OverView=" & iCELL(Count, obj.piCELLOverViewEnable)

MsgBox Message

Next Count

Set obj = Nothing




- 418 -

2.7 MACHINE SELECTION CONTROL

With the ActiveX control dedicated to the i CELL, a machine and path

set on the i CELL setting screen can be selected. Moreover, various

information items set for a selected machine can be acquired.

This section describes the method of using the control.

2.7.1 Overview

Method of installationThe control need not be installed. The control is automatically installed

when the i CELL is installed.

Method of inserting the control into the CimEdit screenInsert the control in the same way as for the alarm viewer OCX attached

to CIMPLICITY. From the menu, select Edit then Insert New Object.

When the [Insert Object] dialog box appears, select the ActiveX tab

then select iCELL_List.McnPathNo.

2.7.2 Property

Machine selection control: Property installation listNo Property name Function

1 BackColor Background color

2 BackStyle Background style. 0:Not filled (default), 1:Filled

3 ComDefFEC4Enable Whether a C4 server is to be used. 1:Used, 0:not used

4 ComDefFEC4Timeout Time-out count for NC power supply determination

5 ComDefFEEnable Whether communication is enabled. True:Enabled, False:Not enabled

6 ComDefFEFwLibTimeout Number of time-out seconds in communication

7 ComDefFEIPAddress IP address

8 ComDefFETCPPort TCP port number

9 ComDefFEUDPPort UDP port number

10 ComDefProtocolCharacter string representing a connection protocol name.

See pComDefProtcol of the iCELLDef.iCELLRW object.

11 ComDefProtocolDNC2Character string representing a protocol name.

Same as pProtocolDNC2 of the iCELLDef.iCELLRW object

12 ComDefProtocolFECharacter string representing a protocol name.

Same as pProtocolFE of the iCELLDef.iCELLRW object.

13 ComDefProtocolIsDNC2 Whether the connection protocol is DNC2. 0:Others, 1:DNC2

14 ComDefProtocolIsFEWhether the connection protocol is FOCAS2/Ethernet. 0:Others,

1:FOCAS2/Ethernet

15 ComDefProtocolIsRPWhether the connection protocol is Reader/Puncher. 0:Others,

1:Reader/Puncher

16 ComDefProtocolRPCharacter string representing a protocol name.

Same as pProtocolRP of the iCELLDef.iCELLRW object.

17 DispArrangeGap Gap ratio between the machine display portion and path display portion(*1)

18 EnableThisScrId Whether this screen is valid on a machine. True:Valid, False:Not valid

19 ErrMsgBoxWhether error messages are to be displayed. False:Not displayed (default),

True:Displayed

20 ErrorMessage Character string representing an error message




- 419 -

No Property name Function

21 Font Font object: Bold, Italic, Name, Size, Underline

22 FontBold

23 FontItalic

24 FontName

25 FontSize

No font object is displayed in the dialog box of CIMPLICITY, so this property is

valid although it duplicates the font object.

26 InstallPath Path where a project is installed

27 IsInitializeWhether initialization processing has been executed. True:Executed, False:Not

executed

28 IsOverView Whether the screen is an overview screen. True:Overview, False:Others

29 McnName Machine name

30 McnNameLong Long machine name

31 McnNo Machine number. 0 when no valid machine is assigned to a screen function.

32 McnNoComboData Character string actually displayed in the machine combo box

33 McnNoComboDispMode

Machine combo box display format

1(mNumber):Number, 2(mName):Name, 3(mNumName):Number.Name,

4(mLongName):Long-name, 5(mNumLongName):Number.Long-name

34 McnNoComboEnableWhether the user is allowed to operate the machine combo box.

False:Not allowed, True:Allowed (default)

35 McnNoComboVisibleWhether the machine combo box is to be displayed. False:Not displayed,

True:Displayed (default)

36 McnNoComboWidthRatio Machine combo box width ratio(*1)

37 McnNoCountsWhether a valid machine is assigned to a screen function.

True:Assigned, False:Not assigned

38 McnNoTitle Text character string for a machine title button

39 McnNoTitleColor Machine title button color

40 McnNoTitleEnableWhether the user is allowed to operate a machine title button.


41 McnNoTitleHeightRatio Machine title button height ratio

42 McnNoTitleState Machine title button state: False (default), True

43 McnNoTitleVisibleWhether a machine title button is to be displayed. False:Not displayed,


44 McnNoTitleWidthRatio Machine title button width ratio(*1)

45 OverViewImagePath Path of an image set on the overview

46 PathName Path name

47 PathNo Path number

48 PathNoComboData Character string actually displayed in the path combo box

49 PathNoComboDispModePath combo box display format

1(pNumber):Number, 3(pNumName):Number.Name

50 PathNoComboEnableWhether the user is allowed to operate the path combo box.


51 PathNoComboVisibleWhether the path combo box is to be displayed. False:Not displayed,


52 PathNoComboWidthRatio Path combo box width ratio(*1)

53 PathNoTitle Text character string for a path title button

54 PathNoTitleColor Path title button color

55 PathNoTitleEnableWhether the user is allowed to operate a path title button.


56 PathNoTitleHeightRatio Path title button height ratio

57 PathNoTitleState Path title button state: False (default), True

58 PathNoTitleVisibleWhether a path title button is to be displayed. False:Not displayed,


59 PathNoTitleWidthRatio Path title button width ratio(*1)

60 PcScrMcnListCounts Number of screens in which ScreenID is stored




- 420 -

No Property name Function

61 ScreenIdListCounts Number of setScreenIDs

62 Version Version information

63 VersionButton Text button control version information

64 VersionCombo Combo box control version information

(*1) Ratio to the sum of these

PathNoTitleWidthRatio

DispArrangeGap PathNoComboWidthRatio

McnNoTitleWidthRatio

McnNoComboWidthRatio




- 421 -

2.7.3 Method

Machine selection control: Method installation listNo Method Function

1 Hide Hides the control.

2 Initialize Initializes the control.

3 ReadSlectMcnInfo Acquires the machine number and path set in the ini file and displays such information on

the control.

4 Refresh Performs forced update operation.

5 Save Saves the selected machine number and path number.

6 Terminate Terminates the processing of the control.

Hide

Hides the control.

- Syntaxobject.Hide

- Return value None


- Syntax object.Initialize Path

- SettingPath Set the %iCELL%\CimProject\ directory by using a

character string expression. It is assumed that under this

directory, a directory storing the ini file under the fanuc

directory is configured.

- ExplanationWhen this method has been executed successfully, the propertiesstarting with ComDef… are enabled.


processing fails, the cause is set in the property ErrorMessage.

ReadSlectMcnInfoAcquires the machine number and path set in the ini file then displayssuch information, and sets various information items in properties.

- Syntaxobject.ReadSlectMcnInfo PCName, FileName, McnNoInScr




- 422 -

- SettingPCName Set the local computer name by using a character string

expression.

FileName Set the CimView screen file name being activated, by using

a character string expression.

McnNoInScr Number of controls set on the screen

- ExplanationWhen this method has been executed successfully, the machineinformation currently selected is set in the properties enabled by themethod Initialize.

- Return valueA Boolean value is returned. When the processing is successful, True is

returned. When the processing fails, False is returned. When the processing fails, the cause is set in the property ErrorMessage.

RefreshRedraws the control.

- Syntaxobject.Refresh

- Return value None

SaveSaves the machine number and path selected on the screen.

- Syntaxobject.Save

- ExplanationThe machine number and path number selected on the screen are savedto %iCELL%\CimProject\fanuc\Setting\Screen\ScreenCnf.ini. If amachine drawing is set on the overview screen, the path is also saved.

- Return value None



- Return value

None




- 423 -

2.7.4 Event

Machine selection control: Event installation listNo Event Function

1 ChangeMcnNo Occurs when the machine number is changed.

2 ChangePathNo Occurs when the path number is changed.

3 ClickMcnNo Occurs when a machine title button is clicked.

4 ClickPathNo Occurs when a path title button is clicked.

2.7.5 Example of Usage

A sample program for changing the text character string of a machinetitle button in accordance with the machine combo box display format

and displaying the machine number, path, name, and communication protocol is provided below.

Dim scr As GefScreenDim obj As GefObjectDim ole As GefObject

Dim pLocalPC As New PointDim pProjectPC As New Point

Dim LocalPC As StringDim ProjectPC As StringDim CurrentDir As StringDim CurrentDirLen As LongDim CimFileName As StringDim HostName As StringDim McnNoInScr As Integer Dim s As string

Set scr = CimGetScreenSet obj = scr.Object.Objects.Item("McnSlct") (*1) Set ole = obj.OleObject

' Initialization pLocalPC.ID = "$LOCAL.COMPUTER" pProjectPC.ID = "$PROJECT.COMPUTER"LocalPC = pLocalPC.GetValueProjectPC = pProjectPC.GetValueIf LocalPC = ProjectPC Then

s = Environ$("SITE_ROOT")Else

CurrentDir = CurDir$()If Right(CurrentDir, 1) <> "\" Then

CurrentDir = CurrentDir + "\"End If

CurrentDirLen = Len(CurrentDir)s = Left(CurrentDir, CurrentDirLen - 8) ' 8=screens\

End If

(*1) ”McnSlct” is the name

assigned to themachine selection

control on the CimEdit

screen.




- 424 -

If Not ole.Initialize(s) ThenMsgBox ole.ErrorMessage

End If

' DisplayHostName = LocalPCCimFileName = FileParse$(scr.FullName, 4) & ".cim"McnNoInScr = 1If Not ole.ReadSlectMcnInfo(HostName, _

CimFileName, McnNoInScr) ThenMsgBox ole.ErrorMessage

End If

' Title character settingSelect Case ole.McnNoComboDispModeCase 1

ole.McnNoTitle = "machine-number"Case 2, 4

ole.McnNoTitle = "machine-name"Case 3, 5

ole.McnNoTitle = "machine-number.name"End Select

MsgBox ole.McnNoMsgBox ole.PathNo

MsgBox ole.ComDefProtocol

' Termination processingIf ole Is Not Nothing Then

ole.Saveole.TerminateSet ole = Nothing

End If

If obj Is Not Nothing ThenSet obj = Nothing

End If

Set scr = Nothing



B-75074EN/04 USER CUSTOMIZE 3.DATABASE SPECIFICATIONS

- 425 -

3 DATABASE SPECIFICATIONS

This chapter describes the specifications of the database (file name:

iCELL.mdb) used with the i CELL.

3.1 OVERVIEW

The i CELL database stores data used for the Machining Result screen

and Workpieces Process Result screen. By operating this database, a

display screen different from the one used with the i CELL can be

created. Note, however, that this database allows only read operation.

When the NC is to collect information not available from the i CELL by

using the CIMPLICITY function, the user should create a database

separate from the i CELL database.

3.1.1 Operating the Database with the i CELL

With the i CELL, the database is operated as described below.

<1> On thei

CELL setting screen, information to be stored from the NC in the database is set.

<2> When the i CELL is started, information is acquired from the NC

with background scripts then is stored in the database.

<3> When the i CELL is started, data is acquired from the database,

then is processed and displayed on the screen.

<4> Some i CELL screens write to the database.

i CELL

NC

i CELL

setting

screen

<1> <3>

<2>

DatabaseiCELL.MDB

i CELL

screen

<4>Backgroundscript



3.DATABASE SPECIFICATIONS USER CUSTOMIZE B-75074EN/04

- 426 -

3.1.2 i CELL Database

Database storage directoryThe i CELL database is stored at the following location:

Directory name : %iCELL%\CimProject\fanuc\dataFile name : iCELL.mdb

(%iCELL% indicates the directory where the i CELL is installed.)

The database is created using Microsoft Access 97. So, whenever possible, use Microsoft Access 97 to open the database. If a versionother than Microsoft Access 97 is used, do not save files. Otherwise, thei CELL can malfunction. For compatibility between versions, contact

Microsoft Corporation.

Access using ODBC and SQLWhen the i CELL is installed, the database is registered in ODBC as

described below.Database type: System DSNDatabase name: iCELLFull database path:

%iCELL%\CimProject\fanuc\data\iCELL.mdb(%iCELL% indicates the directory where the i CELL is installed.)

On each i CELL screen, the database is accessed using the SQL

function through ODBC. For the SQL function, refer to " CIMPLICITY

HMI Basic Control Engine Operator's Manual".To access the database by other means such as VB, use ODBC, DAO,and so forth.

Read onlyThe database allows read operation only. Do not write data and do not

modify the table design and data. Otherwise, the i CELL can

malfunction. However, the WKPCPlan - workpiece machining countsetting table only allows data to be modified and added.

3.1.3 i CELL Database Configuration

At present, the i CELL database has tables used for the Machining

Result screen and Workpieces Process Result screen. Those tables aredescribed below.




- 427 -

3.2 MACHINING RESULT

This section describes the tables used with the Machining Resultscreen.

3.2.1 RunTimeAConfig - Machine Result Setting Table

For each machine, the setting of whether to use the Machining Result

screen is stored. Data is set by machine setting on the i CELL setting

screen.Do not modify the design and data of the table.

Field name Data typeDescription <relevant items for the basic functions in the part for setting

of the operator's manual>

ID Auto number AutoNumber

McnID Numeric type Machine ID (1 to 999)

Enable Numeric type Whether the machining result is to be used (0:Not used/1:Used)

<i CELL machine setting>

3.2.2 RunTimeAData - Machining Result Data Table

For each machine, machining result data is stored. Machining resultdata is acquired from the NC with background scripts. Data is acquired

and stored in the table according to the procedure below. <1> When the i CELL project is started, a script for acquiring

machining result data is started in the background (at intervals of 30 seconds).

<2> From the NC, acquire a cumulative power-on time, operationtimes (cumulative time of automatic operation) I/II, cumulativecutting times I/II, machined parts count, and total machined partscount. These are the values of parameters created with the “Runhour and parts count display” of NC option.

<3> Acquire the current date/time data.<4> Check if the table has data with the same date as acquired in step

<3>.<5> If the table does not have data with the same date, the same value isstored in the First_ field and the Last_ field. If the table has datawith the same date, the value is stored in the Last_ field only.

Do not modify the design and data of the table.




- 428 -

Field name Data type Description



FirstClock Date/time type Time of the first data acquisition of the day

FirstPOn Numeric type Cumulative power-on time at FirstClock time [minute]

FirstOp1 Numeric type Operation time (cumulative time of automatic operation) at FirstClock time I [ms]

FirstOp2 Numeric type Operation time (cumulative time of automatic operation) at FirstClock time II [minute]

FirstCut1 Numeric type Cumulative cutting time at FirstClock time I [ms]

FirstCut2 Numeric type Cumulative cutting time at FirstClock time II [minute]

FirstCnt1 Numeric type Machined parts count at FirstClock time

FirstCnt2 Numeric type Total machined parts count at FirstClock time

LastClock Date/time type Time of the last data acquisition of the day

LastPOn Numeric type Cumulative power-on time at LastClock time [minute]

LastOp1 Numeric type Operation time (cumulative time of automatic operation) at LastClock time I [ms]LastOp2 Numeric type Operation time (cumulative time of automatic operation) at LastClock time II [minute]

LastCut1 Numeric type Cumulative cutting time at LastClock time I [ms]

LastCut2 Numeric type Cumulative cutting time at LastClock time II [minute]

LastCnt1 Numeric type Machined parts count at LastClock time

LastCnt2 Numeric type Total machined parts count at LastClock time

Method of collecting data on the Machining Result screen

Collect records by specifying the McnID and FirstClock conditions andmake calculations according to the following expressions:[Power-on time (seconds)] = ( [LastPOn] - [FirstPOn] ) * 60[Operation time (seconds)] = ( [LastOp1] - [FirstOp1] ) / 1000

+ ( [LastOp2] - [FirstOp2] ) * 60[Cutting time (seconds)] = ( [LastCut1] - [FirstCut1] ) / 1000

+ ( [LastCut2] - [FirstCut2] ) * 60[Machined parts count] = [LastCnt1] - [FirstCnt1][Total machined parts count] = [LastCnt2] - [FirstCnt2]




- 429 -

3.3 WORKPIECES PROCESS RESULT

This section describes the tables used with the Workpieces ProcessResult screen.

3.3.1 WKPCMcnName - Workpieces Process Result Setting Table

The name corresponding to a machine ID, and the settings of whether touse the Workpieces Process Result screen and whether to use theoptional values of workpieces process result data are set. A name is set

as the machine information on the i CELL setting screen.

Whether to use the screen and whether to use the optional values of

workpieces process result data are set as machine settings on the i

CELL setting screen.Do not modify the design and data of the table.

Field name Data type Description <relevant items for the basic functions in the part for setting of the

operator's manual>


<Machine information/number>

McnName Text type Name character string corresponding to a machine ID (not longer than 20 half-size

characters)

<Machine information/name>

Work Numeric type Whether a workpiece ID is to be used (0:Not used/1:Used)

<i CELL machine setting/machining result/setting/workpiece ID>

Onum Numeric type Whether an O number is to be used (0:Not used/1:Used)

<i CELL machine setting/machining result/setting/O number>

Last Numeric type Whether a machining end ID is to be used (0:Not used/1:Used)

<i CELL machine setting/machining result/setting/machining end ID>

User Numeric type Whether a user area ID is to be used (0:Not used/1:Used)

<i CELL machine setting/machining result/setting/user area ID>

Hand Numeric type Whether handshaking is performed (0:Not performed/1:Performed)

<i CELL machine setting/machining result/setting>

Enable Numeric type Whether the Workpieces Process Result screen is to be used (0:Not used/1:Used)

<i CELL machine setting>




- 430 -

3.3.2 WKPCWorkName - Workpiece ID Setting Table

The name corresponding to a workpiece ID, and the setting of a plannedmachining time are stored. Data is set in the overall machining result

setting on the i CELL setting screen.



operator's manual>

WorkID Numeric type Workpiece ID (1 to 99,999,999)

<i CELL overall machining result setting/workpiece ID/workpiece ID>

WorkName Text type Name character string corresponding to a workpiece ID (not longer than 20 half-size

characters)

<i CELL overall machining result setting/workpiece ID/workpiece name>

PlanTime Numeric type Planned machining time [sec]<i CELL overall machining result setting/workpiece ID/planned machining time>

3.3.3 WKPCLastStateConfig - Machining End ID Setting

The character string corresponding to a machining end ID, the setting of a display number are stored. Data is set in the overall machining result

setting on the i CELL setting screen.


Field name Data type Description <relevant items for the basic functions in the part for setting of theoperator's manual>


LastID Numeric type Machining end state ID (1 to 9,999)

<i CELL overall machining result setting/machining end ID/machining end ID>

LastStr Text type Character string corresponding to a machining end state ID (not longer than 20

half-size characters)

<i CELL overall machining result setting/machining end ID/machining end state>

Order Numeric type Display number for displaying machining end state on the screen (0 to 5)

<i CELL overall machining result setting/machining end ID/display number>

3.3.4 WKPCUserConfig - User Area ID Setting Table

The setting of the character string corresponding to a user area ID is

stored. Data is set in the overall machining result setting on the i CELL

setting screen.Do not modify the design and data of the table.


operator's manual>


UserID Numeric type User area ID (1 to 9,999)

<i CELL overall machining result setting/user area ID/user area ID>

UserStr Text type Character string corresponding to a user area ID (not longer than 20 half-sizecharacters)

<i CELL overall machining result setting/user area ID/user area>




- 431 -

3.3.5 WKPCPlan - Planned Workpiece Machining Count Setting

Table

The settings of a machine ID, workpiece ID, and planned machiningcount for a planned machining date are stored. Data is set on the

planned machining count input screen of the Workpieces ProcessResult screen.Data can be modified. In this case, enter values according to the listindicated below. However, do not modify the design of the table.

NOTEDo not modify data when the Workpieces Process

Result screen is displayed. Otherwise, the screenmay not be displayed normally.





PlanNum Numeric type Planned machining count (0 to 99,999,999)

FirstClock Date/time type Planned machining date (date only, with no time data)

3.3.6 WKPCData - Workpieces Process Result Data Table

Process result data for a machine and workpiece is stored. Process resultdata is acquired from the NC with background scripts. Data is acquiredand stored in the table according to the procedure below.

<1> When the i CELL project is started, a script for acquiring

machining result data is started in the background.<2> When the machining start point changes from "0" time "1",

machining start data acquisition processing (I) is performed.When the machining start point changes from "1" time "0",machining end data acquisition processing (II) is performed.

I. Machining start data acquisition processingThe current date/time (machining start time), machine ID,workpiece ID, O number, and sequence number are acquired andstored on the table.

II. Machining end data acquisition processingi. The current date/time (machining end time), machine ID,

sequence number, machining end state ID, and user area IDare acquired.

ii. From the table, find the latest record whose machine ID(McnID) is the same as that acquired in step i above, that is,the record whose machining start time (FirstClock) is thelatest, and acquire the value of the record.




- 432 -

iii. Check if there is a record that matches the machine ID andsequence ID acquired in step i and the machining start timeacquired in step ii. If such a record is not found, the

processing is ended.iv. If such a record is found, check if data is already stored in the

fields of the machining end time, machining end state ID, anduser area ID of the record. If data is already stored, the

processing is ended.v. If data is not stored, store the machining end time, machining

end state ID, and user area ID acquired in step i above in thatrecord on the table.


Field name Data type DescriptionID Auto number AutoNumber



Onum Numeric type O number (0 to 99,999,999)

FirstClock Date/time type Machining start time

LastClock Data/time type Machining end time

LastID Numeric type Machining end state ID (0 to 9,999)

UserID Numeric type User area ID (0 to 9,999)

Snum Numeric type Sequence number for each machine (1 to 99,999,999)

Method of collecting data on the Workpieces Process Result screen

(end state display)Calculate the number of records by specifying necessary conditionsamong McnID, WorkID, FirstClock, and LastID. For one-monthdisplay on a workpiece-by-workpiece basis, for example, calculate thenumber of records by specifying the values of WorkID, FirstClock, andLastID.




- 433 -

3.3.7 WKPCDspMcnCnd - Progress Status Display Table

This table is temporarily used to display the current progress status.After this table is displayed, all data is deleted.

Do not modify the design of the table.

NOTEDo not modify data when the Workpieces ProcessResult screen is displayed. Otherwise, the screenmay not be displayed normally.


ID Auto number AutoNumber McnID Numeric type Machine ID (1 to 999)



FirstClock Date/time type Machining start time

LastClockPlan Date/time type Planned machining end time

NormNum Numeric type Normally ended machining count

PlanNum Numeric type Planned machining count

AllLastClockPlan Date/time type Planned time for completion of all machining




- 434 -

3.3.8 WKPCDspLastState - Machining End State Display Table

This table is temporarily used to display machining end state. After thetable is displayed, all data is deleted.

Do not modify the design of the table.

NOTEDo not modify data when the Workpieces ProcessResult screen is displayed. Otherwise, the screenmay not be displayed normally.


ID Auto number AutoNumber McnID Numeric type Machine ID (1 to 999)



PlanNum Numeric type Planned machining count

ProcNum Numeric type Total machining count

LastID0 Numeric type Value obtained by subtracting, from the total machining count, the number of

machining end state IDs set to 0 and the number of machining end state IDs with

the Order field of the machining end ID setting table set to a value from 1 to 5

LastID1 Numeric type Number of machining end state IDs with the Order field of the machining end ID

setting table set to 1


setting table set to 2LastID3 Numeric type Number of machining end state IDs with the Order field of the machining end ID






NormNum Numeric type Normal end count. Sum of the number of LastID1s and the number of machining

end state IDs set to 0.



B-75074EN/04 USER CUSTOMIZE 4.REFERENCING THE DATABASE

- 435 -

4 REFERENCING THE DATABASE

To the i CELL, samples for referencing the database (file name:

iCELL.mdb) used with the i CELL from Excel are attached.

The samples can be used on a PC where the i CELL server is installed.

This chapter describes the samples.



4.REFERENCING THE DATABASE USER CUSTOMIZE B-75074EN/04

- 436 -

4.1 OVERVIEW

The following Excel samples for referencing the i CELL database are

available:

Sample 1. Referencing machining result dataAs with the Machining Result screen, database information is displayedas graphs and tables on an Excel sheet. Database information can also

be displayed as CSV data.File name: RunTimeA.xlsInstallation path: %iCELL%\Sample\DataExport\Excel

(%iCELL% is the folder where the i CELL is installed.)

Sample 2. Referencing workpieces process result dataAs with the Workpieces Process Result screen, database information isdisplayed on an Excel sheet. However, data is displayed in the CSVformat, and planned count data cannot be input, and no pie chart can bedisplayed.

File name: WorkProcA.xlsInstallation path: %iCELL%\Sample\DataExport\Excel

4.2 REFERENCING THE ACCESS DATABASE FROM EXCEL

This section describes the method of acquiring data from the Accessdatabase by using a VBA script of Excel and displaying the acquireddata on an Excel sheet. Specifically, a connection is made to the Access database with ODBCDirect, then data is acquired using SQL statements through a VBAscript of Excel then is displayed on an Excel sheet. Users who arefamiliar with the method need not read this section.

Starting ExcelTo display the Excel samples, start Excel by using one of the followingmethods:

Method 1Double-click an Excel sheet to be used.Method 2

(1) From the menu, select [Start] → [Programs], then select[Microsoft Excel] to start Excel.

(2) Read an Excel file to be used.When a dialog box for selecting whether to enable macros appears,select Enable in either case.

Starting VBEditer To edit the VBA script of an Excel sample, start VBEditor according tothe procedure below.

From the Excel menu, select [Tool] → [Macro], then select [VisualBasic Editor] to start VBEditer.




- 437 -

4.2.1 Referencing the Database

This subsection describes the method of referencing, reading from, andwriting to the database through VBA of Excel.

Method of referenceTo reference the database, ODBCDirect is used. ODBCDirect is afunction of DAO used to directly operate the ODBC data source. Byusing ODBCDirect, operate the database through ODBC with SQL.

Reference setting for DAOTo operate the database by using ODBCDirect through Excel VBA, areference setting for DAO is required.The method of reference setting is described below.

1 From the VBEditer menu, select [Tool]→ [References] to displaythe [References] dialog box.

2 Check "Microsoft DAO 3.5 Object Library" in "AvailableReferences" list of the [References] dialog box, then click the<OK> button.

3 The step above enables DAO (ODBCDirect) to be referenced fromthe VBA code.




- 438 -

Procedure for reading dataThe basic procedure for reading data from the database is described

below.

1 Declare object variables.

Dim tWS As WorkspaceDim tCon As ConnectionDim tRdSt As RecordsetDim tSQL As String

2 Create an ODBCDirect work space.

Set tWS = CreateWorkspace("", "admin", "", dbUseODBC)

Use the CreateWorkspace method for creation.By specifying the definition constant dbUseODBC in theargument Type, an ODBCDirect work space can be created.When a work space is created with the CreateWorkspace method,the method returns the Workspace object. By using the Setstatement, store the object in the object variable tWS.

3 As the cursor driver, specify the ODBC cursor library.

tWS.DefaultCursorDriver = dbUseODBCCursor

As a method target object, specify the created Workspace objecttWS.

4 Make a connection to the database.

Set tCon = tWS.OpenConnection("iCELL", dbDriverComplete, True,

"ODBC;DSN=iCELL;DATABASE=iCELL.mdb")

To make a connection, use the OpenConnection method.Specify a data source name in the argument Name, and specify areal data source name in the argument Connect. For a data source

name and real data source name of the i CELL, refer to Chapter 3,

"DATABASE SPECIFICATIONS". A read-only connection ismade by specifying True in the argument ReadOnly.When a connection is made to the database, the method returns theConnection object. By using the Set statement, store the object inthe object variable tCon.

5 As a character string, create an SQL statement.

tSQL = (SQL statement as a character string)

By using a command such as the SELECT command, create anSQL statement for acquiring data.




- 439 -

6 With the created SQL statement, open the record set.

Set tRdSt = tCon.OpenRecordset(tSQL)

The OpenRecordset method is used to open the record set.In the argument, specify the created SQL statement character string. As a method target object, specify the created Connectionobject tCon.When the record set is opened, the method returns the executionresult of the SQL statement as the Recordset object. By using theSet statement, store the object in the object variable tRdSt.

7 Acquire data from the opened record set.

Do While (Not tRdSt.EOF)

(Data acquisition processing)

'Move to the next recordtRdSt.MoveNext

Loop

In the opened record set, the contents of the start record of theexecution results of the SQL statement are automaticallyreferenced. When the data of the referenced record has beenacquired, the MoveNext method is used to proceed to the next

record. Data is acquired by repeating this processing until the lastrecord of the record set.

8 Close the record set.

tRdSt.Close

By using the Close method, close the opened record set.

9 Disconnect the connection with the database.

tCon.Close

Use the Close method to disconnect the connection.

10 Free the ODBCDirect work space.

tWS.Close

Use the Close method to free the created work space.




- 440 -

Procedure for writing dataThe basic procedure for writing data to the database is described below.

NOTEThe i CELL database is a read-only database. Do

not write data, and do no modify the design and dataof the tables. Otherwise, the i CELL can

malfunction.However, WKPCPlan - workpiece machining countsetting table, WKPCDspMcnCnd - progress statusdisplay table, and WKPCDspLastState - machiningend state display table allow data modification andaddition. Do not modify the data of these tables and

do not add data to these table when the WorkpiecesProcess Result screen is displayed. Otherwise, thescreen may not be displayed normally.For details, see Chapter 3, "DATABASESPECIFICATIONS".

1 Declare object variables.

Dim tWS As WorkspaceDim tCon As ConnectionDim tRdSt As Recordset

Dim tSQL As String

2 Create an ODBCDirect work space.

Set tWS = CreateWorkspace("", "admin", "", dbUseODBC)

Use the CreateWorkspace method for creation.By specifying the definition constant dbUseODBC in theargument Type, an ODBCDirect work space can be created.When a work space is created with the CreateWorkspace method,the method returns the Workspace object. By using the Setstatement, store the object in the object variable tWS.

3 As the cursor driver, specify the ODBC cursor library.

tWS.DefaultCursorDriver = dbUseODBCCursor

As a method target object, specify the created Workspace objecttWS.

4 Make a connection to the database.

Set tCon = tWS.OpenConnection("iCELL", dbDriverComplete, False,

"ODBC;DSN=iCELL;DATABASE=iCELL.mdb")

To make a connection, use the OpenConnection method.




- 441 -

Specify a data source name in the argument Name, and specify areal data source name in the argument Connect. For a data source

name and real data source name of the i CELL, refer to Chapter 3,

"DATABASE SPECIFICATIONS". A connection is made withread/write authority granted, by specifying False in the argumentReadOnly.When a connection is made to the database, the method returns theConnection object. By using the Set statement, store the object inthe object variable tCon.

5 As a character string, create an SQL statement.

tSQL = (SQL statement as a character string)

By using a command such as the UPDATE command and theINSERT INTO command, create an SQL statement for writingdata.

6 With the created SQL statement, open the record set.

Set tRdSt = tCon.OpenRecordset(tSQL)

The OpenRecordset method is used to open the record set.In the argument, specify the created SQL statement character string. As a method target object, specify the created Connectionobject tCon.

When the record set is opened, the SQL statement specified in theargument is executed to write to the database. The method returnsthe Recordset object. By using the Set statement, store the objectin the object variable tRdSt.

7 Close the record set.

tRdSt.Close

Use the Close method to close the opened record set.

8 Disconnect the connection with the database.

tCon.Close

Use the Close method to disconnect the connection.

9 Free the ODBCDirect work space.

tWS.Close

Use the Close method to free the created work space.




- 442 -

4.2.2 Displaying Acquired Data

This subsection describes the method of displaying acquired data on anExcel sheet.Use the Range property or the Cells property to display acquired data ina cell.

Setting numeric values in cells1 When the Range property is used

When using the Range property, use the format "Range("matrix")"like "Range("A2")". Represent a column by using a letter like "A".

A numeric value can be set in one cell as follows:

Range(“A1”).Value = 1 ‘Basic typeRange(“A2”) = 2 ‘Abbreviated type[A3] = 3 ‘Abbreviated type

Numeric values can be set in multiple cells (A1, A2, A3, A4, A5)at a time as follows:

Range(“A1:A5”).Value = 1

The numeric value set in a variable can be set as follows:

Dim X As Long

X = 10Range(“A1”).Value = X

2 When the Cells property is usedWhen using the Cells property, use the format "Cells (row,column)" like "Cells (2, 1)". Represent a column by using anumeric value like "1".The Cells property allows a numeric variable to be used as an

argument.




- 443 -

A numeric value can be set in one cell as follows:

Cells (1, 1).Value = 1 ‘Basic typeCells (2, 1) = 2 ‘Abbreviated type

Numeric values can be set in multiple cells (A1, A2, A3, A4, A5)at a time as follows:

Range(Cells (1, 1), Cells (5, 1) ).Value = 1

The numeric value set in a variable can be set as follows:

Dim X As LongX = 10Cells (1, 1).Value = X

A numeric value can be set by using a numeric variable as anargument as follows:

Dim i As LongFor i = 1 to 5

Cells (i, 1).Value = i Next i

Setting character strings in cellsWhen setting a character string in a cell, enclose the input characters indouble quotation marks ("). When a number enclosed in doublequotation marks (") is set in a cell, however, the number is treated as anumeric value. To handle a number as a character string, set the cell

format to character string type, or prefix an apostrophe (') to the inputnumber.




- 444 -

1 When a number is set as a character stringWhen an apostrophe (') is prefixed to a number, the number is setas a character string.

Range(“A1”).Value = “’001” ‘Treated as the character string001

Cells (2, 1).Value = “’002” ‘Treated as the character string002

When no apostrophe (') is prefixed to a number, the number is setas a numeric value.

Range(“A3”).Value = “003” ‘Treated as the numeric value 3 because of the absence of an

apostrophe (')Cells (4, 1).Value = “004” ‘Treated as the numeric value 4 because of the absence of anapostrophe (')

2 When a character string is setA character string can be set in a cell as follows:

Range(“A1”).Value = “ABC”Cells (2, 1).Value = “XYZ”

A date can be set as a character string in a cell as follows:

Range(“A3”).Value = “2002/1/1”Cells (4, 1).Value = “2002/12/31”

Time can be set as a character string in a cell as follows:

Range(“A5”).Value = “12:00:00”Cells (6, 1).Value = “23:59:59”




- 445 -

4.3 SAMPLE MACHINING RESULT SCREEN

This section describes the method of operating a sample MachiningResult screen and provides a detailed description of VBA scripts used. On Excel, the sample displays information similar to information

displayed on the Machining Result screen of the i CELL.

For details of the Machining Result screen, see Chapter 6,"MACHINING RESULT" in Part IV, "OPERATIONS".

4.3.1 Method of Operation

This subsection describes the method of execution and the method of operation.

Execution resultDouble-click the RunTimeA.xls file inthe %iCELL%\Sample\DataExport\Excel folder.When a dialog box for choosing whether to enable macros appears,select Enable.


Method of operation

(1) Machine number specification cell

(5) Graph display changebutton

(6) List format displaybutton

(4) Operation ratedisplay

(3) Refreshbutton

(2) Monthly reportspecification

cell

(7) CSV format displaybutton




- 446 -

(1) Machine number specification cellEnter a machine number for which machining results are to bedisplayed.

(2) Monthly report specification cellEnter a year and month for which machining results are to be displayed.

(3) Refresh buttonThis button updates the screen display to display the latest data.

(4) Operation rate displayThis field displays the ratio of cutting time to power-on time as a

percentage. The operation rate for the indicated number of days isdisplayed.

(5) Graph display change buttonThis button is used to select data to be graphically displayed. Aselection can be made between run time and parts counts.

Example of run time displayRun time data accumulated on the NC with the NC run time/parts countoption is displayed as a bar chart. The displayed data is automaticallyupdated to the latest data at intervals of 1 minute.




- 447 -

Example of parts count displayParts count data accumulated on the NC with the NC run time/partscount option is displayed as a bar chart. The displayed data isautomatically updated to the latest data at intervals of 1 minute.

(6) List format display buttonData is displayed in the list format. In the list format, run time and parts

count data is displayed in one list. The displayed data is automaticallyupdated to the latest data at intervals of 1 minute.

Example of list format display




- 448 -

(7) CSV format display buttonData is displayed for use in the CSV format. In the CSV format, runtime and parts count data is displayed. The displayed data is notautomatically updated.

Example of CSV format display

4.3.2 Description of VBA Scripts

To reference the database, various procedures described with VBAscripts of Excel are used.The major procedures are described below.In the descriptions below, the name of a procedure and the name of themodule including the procedure are indicated in the following format:

Example: GetRunTimeAData :: RuntimeA

Procedure name :: Module name




- 449 -

4.3.2.1 Database operation procedure

GetRunTimeAData :: RuntimeAThis procedure acquires data from the machining result data table.Data is acquired in a dynamic array of the structure(typRunTimeAData).The following SQL statement is created:

tSQL = "SELECT o.FirstClock, o.LastClock," & _ "o.FirstPOn, o.FirstOp1, o.FirstOp2, o.FirstCut1,o.FirstCut2, " & _ "o.LastPOn, o.LastOp1, o.LastOp2, o.LastCut1,o.LastCut2, " & _ "o.FirstCnt1, o.FirstCnt2, " & _

"o.LastCnt1, o.LastCnt2 " & _ "FROM RunTimeAData o " & _ "WHERE (o.McnId=" & iMchNo & _ " AND ((o.FirstClock) Between #" & iStDate & "# And #"& iEdDate & "#)) " & _ "ORDER BY o.FirstClock"

From the machining result data table, this SQL statement acquires datawith McnId and iMchNo matching each other and FirstClock betweeniStDate and iEdDate in ascending order of FirstClock.

4.3.2.2 Data display processing procedures

GetDispData :: RuntimeABased on data acquired from the database, this procedure collects datain the list format and graph format.Collected data is set in an array of the structure (typDispData).The method of collecting each type of data is as follows:

[Power-on time (seconds)] = ( [LastPOn] - [FirstPOn] ) × 60[Operation time (seconds)] = ( [LastOp1] - [FirstOp1] ) / 1000

+ ( [LastOp2] - [FirstOp2] ) × 60[Cutting time (seconds)] = ( [LastCut1] - [FirstCut1] ) / 1000

+ ( [LastCut2] - [FirstCut2] ) × 60[Machined parts count] = [LastCnt1] - [FirstCnt1][Total machined parts count] = [LastCnt2] - [FirstCnt2]

For power-on time, operation time, and cutting time, the GetDispTime procedure is called to acquire data for display in the list format andgraph format.Based on the collected cutting time and power-on time data, anoperation rate calculation is made with the GetOpeRate procedure.

[Operation rate (%)] = ( [Total cutting time] / [Total power-on

time] ) × 100




- 450 -

ChangeDispDays :: Sheet1This procedure changes the number of days for list and graph displayaccording to the number of the days of every month acquired with theGetMonthDays procedure. If the number of days remains unchangedfrom the previous display, however, processing is not performed.For a list, the number of display days is changed. For a run time graphor parts count graph, a data acquisition destination cell for each item of the graph is set.

SetTableData :: Sheet1This procedure sets list format data in cells. For the number of daysacquired with the GetMonthDays procedure, the For…Next statementis repeatedly executed as a loop, and the collected data m_DispData() isset in cells by using the Cells property. Moreover, an operation rate is

set in a cell by using the Range property.

SetChartData :: Sheet1This procedure sets graph format data in cells. For the number of daysacquired with the GetMonthDays procedure, the For…Next statementis repeatedly executed as a loop, and the collected data m_DispData() isset in cells by using the Cells property. Moreover, an operation rate isset in a cell by using the Range property.

SetCSVData :: Sheet1This procedure displays data usable with CSV on Sheet2. In cells, list

format data is set. All cells of Sheet2 are deleted together with theformat, then the format of the cells is changed to character string. Aheader portion and display items are set in cells by using the Range

property. For the number of days acquired with the GetMonthDays procedure, the For…Next statement is repeatedly executed as a loop,and the collected data m_DispData() is set in cells by using the Cells

property.

4.3.2.3 Timer processing procedures

With VBA, the timer control cannot be used. A pseudo timer is createdto automatically update data at certain intervals.The OnTime method of the Application object is used to create a

pseudo timer. The OnTime method generates an event only once atspecified time. So, by calling the OnTime method again when an eventis generated, a pseudo timer function is implemented.

InitTimer :: CommonThis procedure performs pseudo timer initialization. A timer eventgeneration interval and the name of a procedure to be executed with atimer are acquired.

SetTimer :: Common

This procedure sets a pseudo timer. With the OnTime method, aninterval and procedure name acquired with InitTimer are set to start the

pseudo timer. Moreover, the timer start flag m_TimerFlg is set to True.




- 451 -

StopTimer :: CommonThis procedure sets the timer start flag m_TimerFlg to False to stop thetimer.

TimerEvent :: CommonThis procedure is the event procedure for the timer set with the OnTimemethod. After data acquisition and display, the SetTimer procedure iscalled to set the next timer event.




- 452 -

4.4 SAMPLE WORKPIECES PROCESS RESULT SCREEN

This section describes the method of operating a sample WorkpiecesProcess Result screen and provides a detailed description of VBAscripts used. On Excel, the sample displays information similar to information

displayed on the Workpieces Process Result screen of the i CELL.

However, data cannot be automatically updated, planned count datacannot be entered, the display format cannot be changed, and no piechart can be displayed.The display format is fixed as described below.

Machine : Number, nameWorkpiece : Name

O number : DisplayedUser area : DisplayedTime display format : yy/mm/dd h:nn:ss

For details of the Workpieces Process Result screen, see Chapter 7,"WORKPIECE PROCESS RESULTS" in Part IV, "OPERATIONS".




- 453 -

4.4.1 Method of Operation

Method of execution Double-click the WorkProcA.xls file of the %iCELL%\Sample\DataExport\Excel folder.


When a dialog box for choosing whether to enable macros appears,select Enable.

Method of operation

(2) Display period

specification cell (6) Refresh button

(5) Display change

button

(1) Display condition

change button

(3) Machine specification

button/cell(4) Workpiece specification

button/cell




- 454 -

(1) Display condition change buttonSelect a condition for display. Select Daily, Monthly, or Term.

(2) Display period specification cellEnter a desired display period in the cell. For specification of Daily or Term, enter year/month/day. For specification of Monthly, enter year/month. For specification of Term, ensure that the date entered onthe right side is younger than the date entered on the left side. Otherwise,

process result data is not displayed correctly.

(3) Machine specification button/cellSpecify a machine by pressing the machine specification button. Whena machine is specified, the button is displayed in light blue, and the

process result data corresponding to a machine number and nameentered in the cells is displayed.

(4) Workpiece specification button/cellSpecify a workpiece by pressing the workpiece specification button.When a workpiece is specified, the button is displayed in light blue, andthe process result data corresponding to a workpiece name entered inthe cell is displayed.

(5) Display change buttonBy clicking the Progress, Log, or End State button, the screen display

can be switched to the current progress status, log, or machining endstate display. When a button is selected, the button is displayed in light

blue.

(6) Refresh buttonBased on the display period and display item, data is displayed for usein the CSV format.

Example of display (machining end state display)




- 455 -

4.4.2 Description of VBA Scripts

To reference the database, various procedures described with VBAscripts of Excel are used.The major procedures are described below.In the descriptions below, the name of a procedure and the name of themodule including the procedure are indicated in the following format:

Example GetLastStateConfig :: DB_Common

Procedure name :: Module name

4.4.2.1 Database operation procedures

DB_Common moduleThe DB_Common module defines common procedures for acquiring

data from the i CELL database.

GetLastStateConfig :: DB_CommonThis procedure acquires data from the machining end ID setting table.Data is acquired in an array of the structure (typLastStateConfig).The following SQL statement is created:

tSQL = "SELECT w.LastID, w.LastStr" & _ " FROM WKPCLastStateConfig w" & _ " WHERE w.Order>= 1 AND w.Order<=5" & _

" ORDER BY w.Order"

From the machining end ID setting table, this SQL statement acquiresLastID and LastStr with Order not less than 1 and not greater than 5 inascending order of Order.

CheckMcnConfig :: DB_CommonThis procedure checks if a machine name and number passed asarguments are set in the workpieces process result setting table.Whether a machine name and number are set is determined fromwhether acquired data is present. The following SQL statement is created:

tSQL = "SELECT wm.McnID, wm.McnName" & _ " FROM WKPCMcnName wm" & _ " WHERE wm.Enable=1 AND wm.McnName='" &iMcnName & "' AND wm.McnID=" & iMcnNo

From the workpieces process result setting table, this SQL statementacquires McnID and McnName with Enable set to 1, McnName andiMcnName matching each other ,and McnID and iMcnNo matchingeach other.




- 456 -

CheckWorkConfig :: DB_CommonThis procedure checks if a workpiece name passed as an argument is setin the workpiece ID setting table, and acquires the workpiece IDcorresponding to the workpiece name.Whether a workpiece name is set is determined from whether acquireddata is present. The following SQL statement is created:

tSQL = "SELECT ww.WorkID" & _ " FROM WKPCWorkName ww" & _ " WHERE ww.WorkName='" & iWorkName & "'"

From the workpiece ID setting table, this SQL statement acquiresWorkID with WorkName and iWorkName matching each other.

GetCountWorkProc :: DB_CommonThis procedure acquires the number of machining end state IDs fromthe workpieces process result data table.Data is acquired in a dynamic array of the structure (typCountData).The following SQL statement is created:

tSQL = "SELECT w." & m_FieldText & ", Count(w.LastID) AsCountOfUnitPrice" & _

" FROM WKPCData w" & _ iSQLWhere & _ " AND w.LastID<>NULL" & _ " GROUP BY w." & m_FieldText & _ " ORDER BY w." & m_FieldText

From the workpieces process result data table, this SQL statementacquires the number of LastIDs not set to NULL for each m_FieldTextin ascending order of m_FieldText.For counting the number of LastIDs, the Count function is used. In theWhere clause, iSQLWhere passed as an argument is also used.

GetCountWorkProcPlan :: DB_CommonThis procedure acquires total planned machining count from the

planned workpiece machining count setting table.Data is acquired in a dynamic array of the structure (typCountData).The following SQL statement is created:

tSQL = "SELECT w." & m_FieldText & ", Sum(w.PlanNum) AsSumOfPlanNum" & _

" FROM WKPCPlan w" & _ iSQLWhere & _ " AND w.McnID<>NULL" & _ " GROUP BY w." & m_FieldText & _ " ORDER BY w." & m_FieldText

From the planned workpiece machining count setting table, this SQLstatement acquires the total number of PlanNum's with McnID not set to

NULL for each m_FieldText in ascending order of m_FieldText.




- 457 -

For counting the total number of PlanNum's, the Sum function is used.In the Where clause, iSQLWhere passed as an argument is also used.

DB_McnCnd moduleThe DB_McnCnd module defines procedures for acquiring progress

status data from the i CELL database.

GetMcnCndData :: DB_McnCndThis procedure acquires progress status data. Data is created in the

progress status display table, and data is acquired from the progressstatus display table.Data is acquired in a dynamic array of the structure (typMcnCnd).The SQL statement is created as follows:

tSQL = "SELECT w.McnID, wm.McnName, w.WorkID,ww.WorkName, w.ONum," & _

" w.FirstClock, w.LastClockPlan, w.NormNum,w.PlanNum, w.AllLastClockPlan" & _ " FROM WKPCMcnName wm RIGHT OUTER JOIN" & _ " (WKPCWorkName ww RIGHT OUTER JOINWKPCDspMcnCnd w" & _ " ON ww.WorkID=w.WorkID)" & _ " ON wm.McnID=w.McnID" & _ " ORDER BY w.McnID"

By using RIGHT OUTER JOIN ...ON, this SQL statement connectstables.

1. Connects the workpiece ID setting table with the progressstatus display table when WorkID matches.

2. Connects the connected tables with the workpieces processresult setting table when McnID matches.

From the connected tables, each data item is acquired in ascendingorder of McnID of the progress status display table.

DeleteDspMcnCnd :: DB_McnCndThis procedure clears the data of the progress status display table.The following SQL statement is created:

tSQL = "DELETE *" & _ " FROM WKPCDspMcnCnd"

From the progress status display table, this SQL statement deletes alldata by using the DELETE command.

CreateMcnCndData :: DB_McnCndThis procedure creates data for display in the progress status displaytable.The latest log information is acquired for each machine. If there is datarepresenting current machining, data is created in the progress statusdisplay table by acquiring each data item and calling the write

procedure.




- 458 -

GetNewLog :: DB_McnCndThis procedure acquires the latest log information for each machinefrom the workpieces process result data table.Data is acquired in a dynamic array of the structure (typNewLog).The following SQL statement is created:

tSQL = "SELECT McnID, Max(FirstClock) as MaxOfFirstClock"& _

" FROM WKPCData" & _ " WHERE McnID<>NULL" & _ " AND FirstClock<>NULL" & _ " GROUP BY McnID" & _ " ORDER BY McnID"

From the workpieces process result data table, this SQL statement

acquires the maximum value of FirstClock with McnID and FirstClock not set to NULL for each McnID in ascending order of McnID.To acquire the maximum value, the Max function is used.

GetRunData :: DB_McnCndThis procedure acquires machining in-progress log information basedon the latest log information for each machine. Whether machining is in

progress is determined from whether data such as end time (LastClock),machining end ID (LastID), and user area ID (UserID) is acquired.Data is acquired in the structure (typRunLog).The following SQL statement is created:

tSQL = "SELECT w.McnID, w.WorkID, w.ONum, w.FirstClock,ww.PlanTime, w.LastClock, w.LastID, w.UserID" & _

" FROM WKPCWorkName ww RIGHT JOIN WKPCDataw" & _ " ON ww.WorkID=w.WorkID" & _ " WHERE w.McnID=" & m_NewLog(iIdx).McnID & _ " AND w.WorkID<>NULL" & _ " AND ((w.FirstClock) =#" &Format(m_NewLog(iIdx).FirstClock, "yyyy/m/d h:n:s") &"#)"

By using RIGHT OUTER JOIN ... ON, this SQL statement connects the

workpiece ID setting table with the workpieces process result data tablewhen WorkID matches. Such data that McnID and FirstClock of thelatest log information for each machine match McnID and FirstClock of the connected table, and that WorkID is not set to NULL is acquired.

SetDspMcnCnd :: DB_McnCndThis procedure sets acquired machining in-progress log informationand normal end count data in the progress status display table.The following SQL statement is created:

When O number data is absenttSQL = "INSERT INTO WKPCDspMcnCnd" & _

" (McnID" & _ ", WorkID" & _ ", FirstClock" & _




- 459 -

", NormNum)" & _ " VALUES" & _ " ('" & m_RunLog.McnID & "'" & _ ", '" & m_RunLog.WorkID & "'" & _ ", '" & m_RunLog.FirstClock & "'" & _ ", '" & m_CntWkPc(0).Count & "')"

When O number data is presenttSQL = "INSERT INTO WKPCDspMcnCnd" & _

" (McnID" & _ ", WorkID" & _ ", ONum" & _ ", FirstClock" & _ ", NormNum)" & _

" VALUES" & _ " ('" & m_RunLog.McnID & "'" & _ ", '" & m_RunLog.WorkID & "'" & _ ", '" & m_RunLog.ONum & "'" & _ ", '" & m_RunLog.FirstClock & "'" & _ ", '" & m_CntWkPc(0).Count & "')"

By using the INSERT INTO command, this SQL statement writesacquired machining in-progress log information and normal end countto the progress status display table.

SetDspMcnCnd_WkPcPlan :: DB_McnCnd

This procedure sets planned machining count data in the progress statusdisplay table.The following SQL statement is created:

tSQL = "UPDATE WKPCDspMcnCnd w" & _ " SET w.PlanNum='" & m_CntWkPcPlan(0).Count & "'"& _ " WHERE w.McnID=" & m_RunLog.McnID

By using the UPDATE command, this SQL statement writes plannedmachining count to PlanNum of data with McnID of machiningin-progress log information matching McnID of the progress statusdisplay table.

SetDspMcnCnd_LtCkPlan :: DB_McnCndThis procedure sets planned machining end time data in the progressstatus display table.Planned machining end time is acquired by adding planned machiningtime to the machining start time of machining in-progress loginformation.

Planned machining end time = Machining start time + Plannedmachining time

The following SQL statement is created:




- 460 -

tSQL = "UPDATE WKPCDspMcnCnd w" & _ " SET LastClockPlan='" & tLtCkPlan & "'" & _ " WHERE w.McnID=" & m_RunLog.McnID

By using the UPDATE command, this SQL statement writes plannedmachining end time to LastClockPlan of data with McnID of machiningin-progress log information matching McnID of the progress statusdisplay table.

SetDspMcnCnd_AllLtCkPlan :: DB_McnCndThis procedure sets planned total machining end time data in the

progress status display table.Planned total machining end time is calculated as follows:

Remaining machining count = Planned machining count - Normalend countPlanned machining end time = Machining start time + (Planned

machining time × Remaining machining count)


tSQL = "UPDATE WKPCDspMcnCnd w" & _ " SET AllLastClockPlan='" & tAllLtCkPlan & "'" & _ " WHERE w.McnID=" & m_RunLog.McnID

By using the UPDATE command, this SQL statement writes planned

total machining end time to AllLastClockPlan of data with McnID of machining in-progress log information matching McnID of the progressstatus display table.




- 461 -

DB_Log moduleThe DB_Log module defines a procedure for acquiring log data from

thei

CELL database.

GetLogData :: DB_LogThis procedure acquires log data.The following SQL statement is created:

tSQL = "SELECT w.McnID, wm.McnName, w.WorkID,ww.WorkName, w.ONum," & _

" w.FirstClock, w.LastClock, w.LastID, wl.LastStr,w.UserID, wu.UserStr, w.SNum" & _ " FROM WKPCMcnName wm RIGHT OUTER JOIN" &

_

" (WKPCWorkName ww RIGHT OUTER JOIN" & _ " (WKPCLastStateConfig wl RIGHT OUTER JOIN" & _ " (WKPCUserConfig wu RIGHT OUTER JOINWKPCData w" & _ " ON wu.UserID = w.UserID)" & _ " ON wl.LastID = w.LastID)" & _ " ON ww.WorkID=w.WorkID)" & _ " ON wm.McnID=w.McnID" & _ tSQLWhere & _ " ORDER BY w.FirstClock DESC, w.ID DESC"

By using RIGHT OUTER JOIN ... ON, this SQL statement connectstables.

1. Connects the user area ID setting table with the workpieces process result data table when UserID matches.

2. Connects the connected tables with the machining end ID settingtable when LastID matches.

3. Connects the connected tables with the workpiece ID settingtable when WorkID matches.

4. Connects the connected tables with the workpieces process resultsetting table when McnID matches.

From the connected tables, each data item is acquired in descendingorder of FirstClock and ID of the workpieces process result data table.

A Where clause (tSQLWhere) is created using CreateSQLWhere.




- 462 -

DB_LastState moduleThe DB_LastState module defines procedures for acquiring machining

end state data from thei

CELL database.

GetLastStateData :: DB_LastStateThis procedure acquires machining end state data. Data is created in themachining end state display table, and data is acquired from themachining end state display table.Data is acquired in a dynamic array of the structure (typLastState).The following SQL statement is created:

tSQL = "SELECT w.McnID, wm.McnName, w.WorkID,ww.WorkName, w.ONum, w.PlanNum, w.ProcNum," & _

" w.LastID0, w.LastID1, w.LastID2, w.LastID3,

w.LastID4, w.LastID5, w.NormNum" & _ " FROM WKPCMcnName wm RIGHT OUTER JOIN" &

_ " (WKPCWorkName ww RIGHT OUTER JOINWKPCDspLastState w" & _ " ON ww.WorkID=w.WorkID)" & _ " ON wm.McnID=w.McnID" & _ " ORDER BY w." & m_FieldText

By using RIGHT OUTER JOIN ...ON, this SQL statement connectstables.

1. Connects the workpiece ID setting table with the machining endstate display table when WorkID matches.

2. Connects the connected tables with the workpieces processresult setting table when McnID matches.

From the connected tables, each data item is acquired in ascendingorder of m_FieldText.

DeleteDspLastState :: DB_LastStateThis procedure clears the data of the machining end state display table.The following SQL statement is created:

tSQL = "DELETE *" & _

" FROM WKPCDspLastState"

From the machining end state display table, this SQL statement deletesall data by using the DELETE command.

CreateLastStateData :: DB_LastStateThis procedure creates data for display in the machining end statedisplay table.Data is created in the machining end state display table by acquiringeach data item and calling the write procedure.




- 463 -

SetDspLastState_WkPc :: DB_LastStateThis procedure sets total machining count data in the machining endstate display table.The following SQL statement is created:

tSQL = "INSERT INTO WKPCDspLastState" & _ " (" & m_FieldText & _ ", ProcNum)" & _ " VALUES" & _ " ('" & m_CntWkPc(i).ID & "'" & _ ", '" & m_CntWkPc(i).Count & "')"

By using the INSERT INTO command, this SQL statement newlywrites acquired total machining count to the machining end state

display table.

SetDspLastState_WkPcPlan :: DB_LastStateThis procedure sets planned count data in the machining end statedisplay table.Whether there is a record with the same condition is checked using theCheckSameRecord procedure. If there is a record with the samecondition, the record is updated. If there is no record with the samecondition, a new record is written.The following SQL statement is created:

When there is a record with the same conditiontSQL = "UPDATE WKPCDspLastState w" & _

" SET w.PlanNum='" & m_CntWkPcPlan(i).Count & "'" & _ " WHERE w." & m_FieldText & "=" &m_CntWkPcPlan(i).ID

By using the UPDATE command, this SQL statement writes plannedcount to PlanNum.

When there is no record with the same conditiontSQL = "INSERT INTO WKPCDspLastState" & _

" (" & m_FieldText & _

", PlanNum) " & _ " VALUES" & _ " ('" & m_CntWkPcPlan(i).ID & "'" & _ ", '" & m_CntWkPcPlan(i).Count & "')"

By using the INSERT INTO command, this SQL statement newlywrites acquired planned count to the machining end state display table.




- 464 -

CheckSameRecord :: DB_LastStateThis procedure checks if there is a record with the same condition in themachining end state display table.Whether there is a record with the same condition is determined fromwhether acquired data is present.The following SQL statement is created:

tSQL = "SELECT w." & m_FieldText & _ " FROM WKPCDspLastState w" & _ " WHERE w." & m_FieldText & "=" &m_CntWkPcPlan(iIdx).ID

This SQL statement acquires m_FieldText in the machining end statedisplay table when m_FieldText matches m_CntWkPcPlan(iIdx).ID.

GetTotalLastID :: DB_LastStateThis procedure collects machining end state data from the workpieces

process result data table.Data is acquired in a dynamic array of the structure (typCountData).The following SQL statement is created:

tSQL = " SELECT w." & m_FieldText & ", Count(w.LastID) asCountLastID" & _

" FROM WKPCData w" & _ iSQLWhere & _ " AND w.LastID<>NULL" & _ " AND w.LastID=" & iLastID & _ " GROUP BY w." & m_FieldText

From the workpieces process result data table, this SQL statementacquires the number of LastIDs not set to NULL with LastID matchingiLastID in ascending order of m_FieldText.For counting the number of LastIDs, the Count function is used. In theWhere clause, iSQLWhere passed as an argument is used.

SetDspLastState_LastID :: DB_LastStateThis procedure sets machining end state data in the machining end state

display table.The following SQL statement is created:

tSQL = "UPDATE WKPCDspLastState w" & _ " SET w.LastID" & iIdx & "=" & m_LastIDTotal(i).Count & _ " WHERE w." & m_FieldText & "=" & m_LastIDTotal(i).ID

By using the UPDATE statement, this SQL statement writes themachining end state m_LastIDTotal(i).Count to LastID" & iIdx of datawith m_FieldText matching m_LastIDTotal(i).ID.




- 465 -

SetDspLastState_NormNum :: DB_LastStateThis procedure sets normal end count data (sum of LastIDs = 0, 1) in themachining end state display table.


When LastID = 0 onlytSQLSet = " SET w.NormNum=w.LastID0"

When LastID = 0, 1tSQLSet = " SET w.NormNum=w.LastID0+" &m_LastIDTotal(i).Count

tSQL = "UPDATE WKPCDspLastState w" & _

tSQLSet & _ " WHERE w." & m_FieldText & "=" &m_LastIDTotal(i).ID

By using the UPDATE command, this SQL statement writes the normalend count of data with m_FieldText matching m_LastIDTotal(i).ID.




- 466 -

4.4.2.2 Data display processing procedures

GetDispMode :: Sheet1This procedure acquires the display mode.Based on the state of selection from the machine specification button,workpiece specification button, and display change button, the displaymode is acquired.

SetDispArea :: Sheet1This procedure displays a header portion and display items on Sheet2.All cells of Sheet2 are deleted together with the format, then the formatof the cells is changed to character string. The header portion isdisplayed with the CreateHeder procedure. The display items aredisplayed with the CreateItem procedure.

CreateHeder :: Sheet1This procedure displays a header portion on Sheet2.A header portion is created in each acquired display mode, then is set incells by using the Range property.

CreateItem :: Sheet1This procedure displays display items in each display mode on Sheet2.Display items are created in each display mode, then are set in cells byusing the Cells property.

GetDispData :: Sheet1This procedure acquires display data then displays the data on a sheet.Data is acquired and displayed for each display item.

DispMcnCndData :: Sheet1This procedure displays progress status data.For the number of display data items, the For…Next statement isrepeatedly executed as a loop, and the progress status datam_McnCnd() is set in cells by using the Cells property.

DispLastStateData :: Sheet1

This procedure displays machining end state data.For the number of display data items, the For…Next statement isrepeatedly executed as a loop, and data is acquired from the machiningend state data m_LastState () according to the display mode then is setin cells by using the Cells property.

DispLogData :: Sheet1This procedure displays log data.For the number of display data items, the For…Next statement isrepeatedly executed as a loop, and data is acquired from the log datam_Log () according to the display mode then is set in cells by using theCells property.



APPENDIX



B-75074EN/04 APPENDIX A.HOW TO INSTALL AND REGISTER CIMPLICITY

- 469 -

A HOW TO INSTALL AND REGISTERCIMPLICITY

This appendix explains how to install and register your use of

CIMPLICITY for i CELL.



A.HOW TO INSTALL AND REGISTER CIMPLICITY APPENDIX B-75074EN/04

- 470 -

A.1 HOT TO INSTALL CIMPLICITY

A.1.1 Installing CIMPLICITY

CIMPLICITY HMI can be installed easily by:

• Starting installation according to the procedure that matches the

device configuration of the computer in use and the way CD-ROM

is connected (local drive/network-shared drive)

• Going on with installation

In addition to these two topics, this appendix explains how to install:

• New options




- 471 -

A.1.2 How to Start Installation

The installation of CIMPLICITY HMI can be started in much the sameway as Windows

-based software. Strictly speaking, the installation

procedure varies depending on which of the following configurations is

used:

• Local CD-ROM drive

• Shared CD-ROM drive

Installing CIMPLICITY HMI, using a local CD-ROM driveIt is easy to install CIMPLICITY HMI from a local CD-ROM drive.

To install the CIMPLICITY software from a local CD-ROM drive,

follow this procedure:

Insert the CIMPLICITY HMI distribution CD-ROM into the CD-ROM

drive.

The installation procedure automatically starts.

If the procedure does not start automatically, start the installation

procedure, following these steps.

1. Open Windows Explorer.

2. Select the CD-ROM drive.

3. (On a network computer) Specify the CD-ROM drive as a

network drive and connect it for sharing.

4. (On all computers) Select setup.bat from the CIMPLICITY

HMI distribution CD.

Installing CIMPLICITY HMI, using a shared CD-ROM driveIf a shared CD-ROM drive is used for the CIMPLICITY HMI

distribution CD, CIMPLICITY HMI can be installed, using simple

procedures for a computer with the CD-ROM drive and the computer

where you are going to install CIMPLICITY HMI.

Getting a shared computer ready for CIMPLICITY HMI installation

Procedure to be performed on a computer equipped with a CD-ROM

drive:

1. Open My Computer.

2. Select the CD-ROM drive.

3. Click the mouse's right button to open a POP-up menu, and select

Share... from the POP-up menu.

4. Select the Sharing tab for the drive.5. Select Shared As.

6. Enter a desired name in the Share Name field.

7. Select OK .

Procedure to be performed on the computer where you are going to

install CIMPLICITY HMI

1. Open My Computer.

2. Click the Map Network Drive button on the toolbar.

3. Select Drive.

4. Specify a path to the CD-ROM in the shared drive.

5. Select OK .

The shared drive is now open, enabling you to select setup.bat from theCIMPLICITY HMI distribution CD.




- 472 -

A.1.3 Newly Installing CIMPLICITY HMI

Once setup.bat is selected from the distribution CD, the CIMPLICITYHMI splash screen appears while the installation procedure is checking

the computer. When the check is completed, dialog boxes appear in

series to guide you through the remaining installation work.

The procedure advances as stated below.

• Welcome

• Software Evaluation License Agreement

(for enabling you to check the software evaluation license

agreement)

• CIMPLICITY HMI Product Options

(for prompting you to set up CIMPLICITY system installation

options)

• Choose Destination Location(for prompting you to select an installation path)

• HMI Server Options

(for prompting you to set up CIMPLICITY function options)

• Choose Program Group

(for prompting you to select a program group)

• Registration

(for prompting you to register at installation)

• Setup Complete

(for informing you that you have succeeded in setup)

The CIMPLICITY HMI System setup screen opens with the Welcomedialog box.




- 473 -

If you want to cancel your request for installation, select Cancel.

Otherwise, select Next to go to the Software Evaluation License

Agreement dialog box.

Read the software license agreement terms carefully. If you agree with

the terms, select Yes. If not, select No. Selecting No stops the

installation procedure.

Selecting Yes brings you to the CIMPLICITY HMI Product Options

dialog box.




- 474 -

Select the option you want to install. A list of options appears, and the

Change Destination Location dialog box opens.

Select the directory where you want to install the CIMPLICITY HMI

software. Selecting Browse... enables you to search through a list of

directories. Alternatively, you can use a default directory

(c:\CIMPLICITY\HMI). After selecting a desired directory, select Next

to keep on installing.

The Options dialog box opens to list the products you may want to

install.

Select desired components of product options.

For some components in the Components list, more than one option is

available. When a component is selected, its options are listed in the list

box at the right. You can select desired options for individual

components. Once selection is completed, select Next to keep on

installing. The Choose Program Group dialog box opens.




- 475 -

NOTEMake sure that a component is highlighted, and then

select options usable with that component.

Select the program folder (CIMPLICITY\HMI by default) for the

CIMPLICITY HMI software and then select Next. A file transfer from

the CD-ROM to the specified directory begins.

Once installation is completed, the Registration dialog box opens.




- 476 -

At this point, you can register your use of the CIMPLICITY HMI

software. However, you are provided with a four-day trial use period

after installation. Within this period, you can access the basic system

and all installed options of the communication enabler. If you do not

acquire a software license before the end of the trial use period, the

system license becomes invalid, and the use of its functions is restricted.

See A.2.4, "Using CIMPLICITY HMI without License," for

information about the restricted functions.

If you registered your use of the software, or you selected No in the

Registration dialog box, the Site Complete dialog box opens.

For the CIMPLICITY HMI software to function normally, you must

restart the computer. This dialog box enables you to restart thecomputer immediately.

A.1.4 Installing New Options with CIMPLICITY HMI

You can add new options to CIMPLICITY HMI quickly.

Procedure for adding new options quickly:

1. Run Setup.bat from the CIMPLICITY HMI distribution

CD-ROM.

2. Select Install CIMPLICITY HMI.

3. Proceed to the CIMPLICITY HMI Setup dialog box.4. Select Review/Add Options.

The Options dialog box appears.

5. Select an option you want to install.

6. Once installation is completed, restart the computer.

7. Do not forget to register your use of the new option.




- 477 -

A.2 REGISTERING USE OF CIMPLICITY

A.2.1 Registering Use of CIMPLICITY HMI Software

If you purchased CIMPLICITY HMI software with license, you must

register your use of it before you can access all its functions.

NOTEIf you have not registered your use of the software,or you run the demo system, please read A.2.4,"Using CIMPLICITY HMI without License," for descriptions about restricted functions.

This section describes the following procedures.

• Initial registration

• Registering for new options and upgrading

• Transferring the license

The section also explains a non-license version and enumerates the

related restrictions.




- 478 -

A.2.2 Newly Registering for CIMPLICITY HMI

Before starting the registration sequence, make sure that you have the basic system, communication enabler, and the license of the options

you purchased on hand. Registering your use of the system requires:

• Running the registration program to register information about

you and the serial number of the software

• Getting an authorization code from GE Fanuc

• Running the registration program and entering the authorization

code

Running the registration programTo register your use of the software, follow this procedure:

1. Select CIMPLICITY from the Windows Start menu.

2. Select HMI.

3. Select Registration.

The Registration Instructions dialog box opens.

4. Click the New Registration radio button.

5. Select Next to keep on registering.

The Registration License Agreement dialog box opens to display

terms and conditions related to registration.

6. If you agree with the terms and conditions, select Yes to keep on

registering.

The Registration User Information dialog box appears.

7. Enter your name, address, telephone number, and fax number.(To get a system authorization code, you need to inform GE Fanuc

of all this information.)


The Registration Serial Number dialog box appears.

9. Enter the serial number of the basic system.

10. Enter the serial numbers of the options and upgrading.


The Registration Authorization dialog box appears to display the

user information, basic serial number, and system key code that

are to be reported to GE Fanuc.

12. Select Print Registration to print a copy of the user information,

basic serial number, and system key code.Report this registration information to GE Fanuc by fax or

telephone.

13. To continue, take either of the following steps:

• If you have no authorization code, select Quit to terminate

the registration sequence, and go to the next topic, "Request

to register." After you receive an authorization code from GE

Fanuc, you can enter the registration information again into

the registration program to complete registration.

• If you have an authorization code, select Next to keep on

registering. See "Entering an authorization code" in this

subsection for explanations about how to enter anauthorization code.




- 479 -

Request to register To get an authorization code, contact GE Fanuc of the USA at the

following telephone or fax number.

When asking for an authorization code, you need to supply your name,

user information, basic serial number, and system key code.

Fax: (518) 464-4581

Phone: (518) 464-4619

These numbers are usable from 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. EST on Monday

through Friday except USA national holidays. Requests to register sent

by fax or telephone after business hours or on weekends or holidays

will be accepted on the following business day.

Before contacting GE Fanuc, get ready the following information:

• User information

• CIMPLICITY HMI serial number

• System key code (generated during a registration sequence)When you receive an authorization code from GE Fanuc, take note of it.

Entering an authorization codeThe remaining steps of your CIMPLICITY HMI software registration

sequence are intended to enter an authorization code. Once you go

through them, you will be given all post-registration privileges.

To enter your authorization code, follow these steps.

1. Double-click the registration icon for the CIMPLICITY HMI

program group to restart the CIMPLICITY HMI registration

procedure.

2. Proceed to the Registration Instruction dialog box.

3. Check whether the New Registration radio button is selected.

4. Select Next.

5. Select Yes in the License Agreement dialog box.

6. Select Next in the Registration Serial Numbers dialog box.

7. Select Next in the Registration Authorization dialog box.

The Registration System Authorization Code dialog box appears.

8. Enter the authorization code you received from GE Fanuc.


The Registration Finish dialog box appears.

10. Select OK to exit the registration program.

Congratulations. You succeeded in registering your use of the

CIMPLICITY HMI software. Now you can perfectly access the basicsystem and all options you installed and registered for.

NOTEEnter your authorization code within four days after you enter the serial number of your basic systemand get a system code. The system code is updatedafter four days, and the authorization code issuedfor the old system code becomes invalid.




- 480 -

A.2.3 Registering for CIMPLICITY HMI Options and Upgrading theFunctions

You must register for new CIMPLICITY HMI options and upgraded

functions before they all become usable.

Registering for new CIMPLICITY HMI optionsTo register for new CIMPLICITY HMI options, you need to contact GE

Fanuc.

Registration procedure for new options:

1. Run the registration program from CIMPLICITY HMI in the

Windows Start menu.

2. Enter the serial number of each new option.

Now you are finished with registering for the new options.

Registering for function upgradingWith the CIMPLICITY HMI system, device I/O counts (for example,

50, 75, 150, 300, 700, and limitless) can be selected for both

development and run-time systems.

Any of the following function upgrading types can be selected.

• From low-point to high-point device I/O count

• From run-time to development system

• From viewer to server

For details about how to order function upgrading, contact a nearby

marketing company.

Registration procedure for function upgrading:

1. Run the registration program from CIMPLICITY HMI in the

Windows Start menu.

2. Proceed to the CIMPLICITY Registration Serial Number dialog

box.

3. Select Change.

4. Enter a serial number that matches the basic system for which you

want to register.

5. Inform GE Fanuc of your new basic serial number and system key

code to get a new system authorization code.

6. Enter the new system authorization code into the CIMPLICITY

Registration System Authentication Code dialog box.

NOTEWhen adding an option in function upgrading, youdo no need to contact GE Fanuc. You only have toenter a valid serial number for each desired optionyou purchased.




- 481 -

A.2.4 Using CIMPLICITY HMI without License

You can run the CIMPLICITY HMI software with no license for demonstration or test purposes.

You can:

• Run the CIMPLICITY demo project or any existing project for

two hours, and

• Create and display windows, using CimEdit and CimView.

The following restrictions are applied to demonstration and test run,

however.

• It is impossible for a server or viewer with no license to

communicate with CIMPLICITY applications on other

computers.

• A device communication enabler (devcom) with no license can

run for only two hours regardless of whether you have a license for the basic system.



B.NC SETTING APPENDIX B-75074EN/04

- 482 -

B NC SETTING

The setting of each type of NC is described below.

Refer to Section B.1, "SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet OF THE

OPTION BOARD FOR Series 16i/18i/21i-A/B AND Power Mate i" or

Section B.4, “SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet OF THE OPTION

BOARD FOR Series 30i/31i/32i-A,” in Appendix, when the option

board (Ethernet board, FAST Ethernet board, Data Server board, or

FAST DATA SERVER) is used.

Refer to Section B.2, "SETTING THE EMBEDDED Ethernet FOR

Series 16i/18i/21i-B” or Section B.5, “SETTING THE EMBEDDED

Ethernet FOR Series 30i/31i/32i-A" in Appendix, when the embedded

Ethernet board is used.

Refer to Section B.3, "SETTING THE DATA SERVER FOR Series

16i/18i/21i-A/B" or Section B.6, “SETTING THE DATA SERVER

FOR Series 30i/31i/32i-A,”in Appendix, when the Data Server

functions is used.

Refer to Section B.7, "SETTING UP DNC2," in Appendix, when the

DNC2 is used.

Refer to Section B.8, "SETTING UP READER/PUNCHER," in

Appendix, when the Reader/Puncher is used.



B-75074EN/04 APPENDIX B.NC SETTING

- 483 -

B.1 SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet OF THE OPTION BOARD

FOR Series 16i

/18i

/21i

-A/B, Power Matei

, AND Series0i -B/C

This section describes the items required to be set to operate the

FOCAS2/Ethernet functions available on the option board for Series

16i/18i/21i-A/B, Power Mate i, and Series 0i-B/C.


Series 16i/18i/21i-B," in Appendix for the embedded Ethernet function.

B.1.1 Precautions to be Observed when using the FOCAS2/EthernetFunctions for the First Time

CAUTIONWhen the Ethernet board or FAST Ethernet board isused for the first time, consult with your company’snetwork administrator to determine the IPaddresses and other settings. Then, conduct acommunications test.If incorrect IP addresses and other settings are set,communications may be interfered with or the entirenetwork might be adversely affected.Particularly, if a duplicate IP address is set,communication errors are caused intermittently.This may result in a CNC's system error.

NOTE1 One of the following option functions is needed

when the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions are used:Refer to Item "Ethernet boards or Data Server boards and CNC options," in Section 3.1 of Part I for details.

2 There is a limit on the number of FOCAS2/Ethernet

clients connectable to one CNC using theFOCAS2/Ethernet functions.Refer to Note 2 in Item “Usable CNCs (When theFOCAS2/Ethernet is used)” in Section 3.1 of Part Ifor details.




- 484 -

B.1.2 FOCAS2/Ethernet Parameter Screen

The Ethernet Parameter screen is used to set parameters that are neededto run the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions.

Display

Procedure1 Place the CNC in MDI mode.

2 Press function key SYSTEM .

3 Press the Continuation menu key at the bottom right of the soft key

menu.

4 When you press soft key [ETHPRM], the "Ethernet Parameter"

screen appears.For the Series 16i/18i/21i-B, to display the "Ethernet Parameter"

screen, press soft key [ETHPRM] and then soft key [BOARD].

If parameters have already been registered, the parameter settings

are displayed.

5 Enter or update the data using the MDI or soft keys.

6 Select the desired page using the PAGE

PAGE

page keys.




- 485 -

NOTE Already-set data can be deleted. To deletenumerical data, enter 0. To delete character data,enter a space (SP).




- 486 -

Display items and setting items

Display items related to the Ethernet functionsThe items related to the Ethernet functions are displayed.

Item Description

MAC ADDRESSMAC address of the Ethernet board or FAST Ethernet

board

NUMBER OF

SCREENS

Total number of Ethernet error message screens used by

the Ethernet functions

MAXIMUM PATH Number of control systems in the CNC

HDD EXISTENCE

Indicates whether a hard disk or ATA flash card is

mounted on the Ethernet board or FAST Ethernet board.

0: Not mounted.

2: Mounted.

TCP/IP setting items for the CNCSet the TCP/IP items for the CNC.

Item Description

IP ADDRESSSpecifies the IP address of the CNC.

(Format: "192.168.0.1")

SUBNET MASKSpecifies the mask address of the network IP address.

(Format: "255.255.255.0")

ROUTER IP

ADDRESS

Specifies the router IP address.

Specify this address when the network incorporates a

router.(Format: "192.168.0.99")

FOCAS2/Ethernet setting itemsSet the items related to the FOCAS2/Ethernet server.

Item Description

PORT NUMBER

(TCP)

Specifies the port No. to be used by the

FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, within a range of 5001 to

65535.

PORT NUMBER

(UDP)

Enter the value that is indicated in the [UPD number for

C4 service] dialog box displayed during installation.

Refer to Item "UDP number for C4 service," in Section

3.2 of Part II for details.

TIME INTERVAL Set 50.

NOTEWhen the "TCP/IP setting items for the CNC" havebeen changed, the power must be turned off then onagain.




- 487 -

B.1.3 Configuring a Small-scale Network

The following shows an example of the minimum settings needed to runthe FOCAS2/Ethernet functions on a small-scale network.

These settings allow a personal computer to be connected to two CNCs

by the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions.

• The FOCAS2/Ethernet function client runs on personal computer

No.1.

• The FOCAS2/Ethernet function server runs on CNCs No.1 and

No.2.

CNC No.1 CNC No.2

IP address 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.2

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

Router IP address None None

TCP port No. 8193 8193

UDP port No. 8192 8192

Time interval 50 50

Personal computer No.1

IP address 192.168.0.101

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0

Default gateway None

IP address 192.168.0.1CNC No.1

Port number 8193


Port number 8193

B.1.4 Configuring a Large-scale Network

Before you configure a large-scale network or add such a network to an

existing network, consult your company's network administrator to

determine IP addresses, subnet masks, and router IP addresses.

Set these items on the "Ethernet

Parameter" screen.

Set these items in "Microsoft TCP/IP Property" on the

personal computer (Windows OS).

Specify on the setting screen of i CELL. Refer to

Subsection 2.6.1, "Setting up Communication," in Part III

for details.


CNC No.2CNC No.1

10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX

HUB




- 488 -

B.2 SETTING THE EMBEDDED Ethernet FOR Series

16i

/18i

/21i

-BThis section describes the items required to be set to operate the

embedded Ethernet function for Series 16i/18i/21i-B.

When using the FOCAS2/Ethernet function, see Subsections B.2.1 and

B.2.2.

When setting an FTP server on a PC and setting the setting information

as parameters for the Data Server (to use the FTP file transfer function),

see Subsections B.2.1 and B.2.3.

Refer to Section B.1, "Setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet of the Option

Board for Series 16i/18i/21i-A/B, Power Mate i, and Series 0i-B/C," for

the option board.


CAUTIONWhen the embedded Ethernet function is used for the first time, consult with your company’s networkadministrator to determine the IP addresses andother settings. Then, conduct a communications

test.If incorrect IP addresses and other settings are set,communications may be interfered with or the entirenetwork might be adversely affected.


when the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions are used:Refer to Item "Ethernet boards or Data Server Boards and CNC options," in Section 3.1 of Part I for details.

2 There is a limit on the number of FOCAS2/Ethernetclients connectable to one CNC using theFOCAS2/Ethernet functions.Refer to Note 2 in “Usable CNCs (When theFOCAS2/Ethernet is used)” in Section 3.1 of Part Ifor details.

3 If multiple application software products or multiplepersonal computers access the CNCsimultaneously, the communication load on theCNC can increase, resulting in decreasedcommunication speed and degraded CNC screendisplay processing.




- 489 -

B.2.2 Setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet Functions

This subsection describes the setting for using the FOCAS2/Ethernetfunction.

B.2.2.1 FOCAS2/Ethernet parameter screen

The Ethernet Parameter screen is used to set parameters that are needed

to run the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions.

Display




menu.


screen appears.

The Ethernet functions currently available are displayed.

The upper row displays the usable embedded Ethernet function

device. The embedded port or PCMCIA card is displayed.

The lower row displays the usable Ethernet option boards. When

no option board is installed, no information is displayed.

5 By pressing the [EMBEDD] soft key, the parameters for the

embedded Ethernet port can be set.

By pressing the [PCMCIA] soft key, the parameters for the

PCMCIA Ethernet card can be set.

NOTE

The parameters for the embedded Ethernet port andthe parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card areindependent of each other.




- 490 -

6 By using the MDI keys and soft keys, enter and update data.

7 Switch the screen display with the page keys PAGE

PAGE

.

If data is already registered, the data is displayed.





- 491 -


Display items related to the embedded Ethernet functionsThe items related to the embedded Ethernet functions are displayed.

Item Description

MAC ADDRESS MAC address of the embedded Ethernet


Item Description

IP ADDRESSSpecifies the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.

(Format: "192.168.1.1")


(Format: "255.255.255.0")

ROUTER IP

ADDRESS

Specifies the router IP address.Specify this address when the network incorporates a

router.

(Format: " 192.168.1.254 ")

FOCAS2/Ethernet setting itemsSet the items related to the FOCAS2/Ethernet server.

Item Description

PORT NUMBER

(TCP)



65535.

PORT NUMBER

(UDP)

Enter the value that is indicated in the [UPD number for

C4 service] dialog box displayed during installation.




NOTEThe parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card areset to the following default values before shipment:IP address : 192.168.1.1Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0Router IP address : NoneTCP port No. : 8193UDP port No. : 0Time interval : 0




- 492 -

B.2.2.2 Configuring a small-scale network





No.1.


No.2.

CNC No.1 CNC No.2

IP address 192.168.1.1 192.168.1.2

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0




Time interval 50 50


IP address 192.168.1.101




Port number 8193


Port number 8193

B.2.2.3 Configuring a large-scale network





Parameter" screen.


personal computer (Windows OS).


Subsection 2.6.1, "Setting up Communication," in Part III

for details.

Personal

computer No.1CNC No.2CNC No.1


HUB




- 493 -

B.2.3 Setting the FTP File Transfer Functions

This subsection describes the setting required when an FTP server is to be set on a PC and the setting information is to be set as parameters for

the Data Server (to use the FTP file transfer function).

B.2.3.1 Setting the FTP file transfer function parameters


to run the FTP file transfer functions.

Display




menu.


screen appears.

The Ethernet functions currently available are displayed.

The upper row displays the usable embedded Ethernet function

device. The embedded port or PCMCIA card is displayed.

The lower row displays the usable Ethernet option boards. When

no option board is installed, no information is displayed.

5 By pressing the [EMBEDD] soft key, the parameters for the

embedded Ethernet port can be set.

By pressing the [PCMCIA] soft key, the parameters for the

PCMCIA Ethernet card can be set.




- 494 -

NOTEThe parameters for the embedded Ethernet port and

the parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card areindependent of each other.

6 By using the MDI keys and soft keys, enter and update data.

7 Switch the screen display with the page keys PAGE

PAGE

.

If data is already registered, the data is displayed.

NOTE Already-set data can be deleted. To delete

numerical data, enter 0. To delete character data,enter a space (SP).




- 495 -


Display items related to the embedded Ethernet functionsThe items related to the embedded Ethernet functions are displayed.

Item Description

MAC ADDRESS MAC address of the embedded Ethernet

TCP/IP setting items for the embedded Ethernet functionsSet the TCP/IP items for the embedded Ethernet functions.

Item Description

IP ADDRESSSpecifies the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.

(Format: "192.168.1.1")


(Format: "255.255.255.0")

ROUTER IP

ADDRESS

Specifies the router IP address.Specify this address when the network incorporates a

router.

(Format: " 192.168.1.254 ")

Setting items for connected host 1, host 2, and host 3Set the items related to the host computer on which the FTP server runs.

Item Description

PORT NUMBER Specifies the port No. to be used by the FTP file transfer

functions.

Usually, set 21 because the FTP service is used.

IP ADDRESS Specifies the IP address of the host computer.

(Format: "192.168.0.101")

USERNAME Specifies the name of the user to log on to the host

computer using FTP.

(A user name of up to 31 characters can be specified.)

PASSWORD Specifies the password for the above user name.

The password must always be specified.

(A password of up to 31 characters can be specified.)

LOGIN DIR Specifies the directory on the host computer to which the

Data Server functions are to log in.

(A name of up to 127 characters can be specified.)

NOTEThe parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card areset to the following default values before shipment:IP address : 192.168.1.1Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0Router IP address : NoneTCP port No. : 8193UDP port No. : 0Time interval : 0




- 496 -


The following shows an example of the minimum settings needed to runthe FTP file transfer functions on a small-scale network.


by the FTP communication.

• The FTP server runs on personal computer No.1.

• The FTP file transfer functions runs on CNCs No.1 and No.2.

CNC No.1 CNC No.2

IP address 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.2

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0Router IP address None None

Port No. 21 21

IP address 192.168.0.101 192.168.0.101

User name dtsvr dtsvr

Password dtsvr dtsvr

Connection

host 1

Login DIR None None

Parameter No. 20 5 5

Personal

computer No.1

IP address 192.168.0.101

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0Default gateway None

User name dtsvr

Password dtsvr

Login DIR Default






personal computer (Windows 2000/XP).

Set these items with User Manager of PC (Windows

2000/XP).

Set this item with Internet Service Manager of PC (Windows

2000/XP). This is applicable to Peer Web Services.


Parameter" screen.

Set these items on the "Parameter"

screen.

Personal



HUB




- 497 -

B.3 SETTING THE DATA SERVER FOR Series 16i /18i /21i -A/B

AND Series 0i

-B/CThis section describes the setting required to operate the Data Server

function for Series 16i/18i/21i-A/B and Series 0i-B/C (including the

FTP server function).

When using the FTP server function of the Data Server, see Subsections

B.3.1 and B.3.2.

When an FTP server is to be set on a PC and the setting information is to

be set as parameters for the Data Server (to use the Data Server

function), see Subsections B.3.1 and B.3.3.

B.3.1 Precautions to be Observed when Using the Data Server Functions for the First Time

CAUTION1 When the Data Server board or FAST Data Server is used for the first

time, format the hard disk or ATA card, set the appropriate parameters,and turn the power off then on again. If the Data Server functions areused without performing these operations, normal operation cannot beguaranteed.

2 When Ethernet FTP communication is performed for the first time,consult with your company's network administrator to determine the IP

addresses and other settings. Then, conduct a communications test.If incorrect IP addresses and other settings are set, communicationsmay be interfered with or the entire network might be adverselyaffected.Particularly, if a duplicate IP address is set, communication errors arecaused intermittently. This may result in a CNC's system error.

3 Never turn off the power to the CNC while the hard disk or ATA card(hereinafter simply referred to as the hard disk) is being accessed(while a Data Server function service is being executed). Otherwise,the data on the hard disk may be destroyed.Never turn off the power to the CNC while using its functions, especially

the FTP server functions.4 To guard against hard disk failure, back up the files on the hard disk.

NOTE1 One of the following option functions is needed when the Data Server

functions are used:For details, see the item of "Ethernet boards or Data Server boards andCNC options" in Section 3.1, "CNC", in Chapter 3, "OPERATINGENVIRONMENT" of Part I, "OVERVIEW".

2 The Data Server function imposes an upper limit on the number of FTP

clients connectable to one CNC. For details, see the note on UsableCNCs (When the Data Server is used)" in Section 3.1, "CNC", inChapter 3, "OPERATING ENVIRONMENT" of Part I, "OVERVIEW".




- 498 -

B.3.2 Setting the FTP Server

This subsection describes the setting required to use the FTP server function of the Data Server.

B.3.2.1 Ethernet parameter screen


to run the Data Server functions.

Display




menu.


screen appears.

For the Series 16i/18i/21i-B, to display the "Ethernet Parameter"


If data is already registered, the parameter settings are displayed.



PAGE

page keys.




- 499 -





- 500 -



Item Description

MAC ADDRESS MAC address of the Data Server board or FAST Data

Server

NUMBER OF

SCREENS

Total number of Ethernet error message screens used by

the Ethernet functions


HDD EXISTENCE Data Server board

Indicates whether a hard disk or ATA flash card is

mounted.

1: Hard disk

2: ATA flash card

FAST Data Server

Indicates whether an ATA flash card is mounted.

0: Not mounted.

2: Mounted.


Item Description

IP ADDRESS Specifies the IP address of the CNC.

(Format: "192.168.0.1")SUBNET MASK Specifies the mask address of the network IP address.

(Format: "255.255.255.0")

ROUTER IP

ADDRESS


Specify this address when there is a router on the

network.

(Format: "192.168.0.99")

Setting items for the FTP server Set the items related to the FTP server.

Item Description

USERNAME Specifies the user name on the data server that is to be

used when the host computer logs in using FTP.


PASSWORD Specifies a password for the above user name.

A password must always be specified.


LOGIN DIR Specifies the directory on the data server to which the

host computer is to log in.





- 501 -

NOTE1 When the "TCP/IP setting items for the CNC" have

been changed, the power must be turned off then onagain.2 Note that the system differentiates between upper-

and lower-case characters in "USERNAME" and"PASSWORD," described under "Setting items for the FTP server."

3 The default for "LOGIN DIR," described under "Setting items for the FTP server," is the \NCDATAdirectory. Only a directory under the \NCDATAdirectory can be specified for "LOGIN DIR."




- 502 -


The following shows an example of the minimum settings needed to runthe Data Server functions on a small-scale network.


by the Data Server.

• The FTP client runs on personal computer No.1.

• The FTP server runs on CNCs No.1 and No.2.

CNC No.1 CNC No.2

IP address 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.2

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

Router IP address None NoneUser name dtsvr dtsvr


FTP server

Login DIR None None

Personal

computer No.1

IP address 192.168.0.101



NC IP address 192.168.0.1

NC port number 21

NC user name dtsvr

NC password dtsvr

CNC No.1

NC Login DIR None


NC port number 21

NC user name dtsvr

NC password dtsvr

CNC No.2

NC Login DIR None


Before you configure a large-scale network or add such a network to anexisting network, consult your company's network administrator to



CNC No.2

CNC No.1


HUB


Parameter" screen.

Set these items in "Microsoft TCP/IP Property" on

the personal computer (Windows OS).


Subsection 2.6.1, "Setting up Communication," in

Part III for details.




- 503 -

B.3.3 Setting the Connection Host

This subsection describes the method of setting an FTP server in the PCand setting the setting information as parameters for the Data Server (to

use the Data Server function).

B.3.3.1 Ethernet parameter screen


to run the Data Server functions.

Display




menu.


screen appears.

For the Series 16i/18i/21i-B, to display the "Ethernet Parameter"


If data is already registered, the parameter settings are displayed.



PAGE

page keys.




- 504 -





- 505 -



Item Description

MAC ADDRESS MAC address of the Data Server board or FAST Data Server

NUMBER OF

SCREENS

Total number of Ethernet error message screens used by the

Ethernet functions


HDD EXISTENCE Data Server boardIndicates whether a hard disk or ATA flash card ismounted.1: Hard disk2: ATA flash card

FAST Data Server

Indicates whether an ATA flash card is mounted.0: Not mounted.2: Mounted.


Item Description

IP ADDRESS Specifies the IP address of the CNC.

(Format: "192.168.0.1")

SUBNET MASK Specifies the mask address of the network IP address.

(Format: "255.255.255.0")

ROUTER IP ADDRESS

Specifies the router IP address.Specify this address when there is a router on the network.

(Format: "192.168.0.99")

Setting items for connected host 1, host 2, and host 3Set the items related to the host computer on which the FTP server runs.

Item Description

PORT NUMBER Specifies the port No. to be used by the data server

functions.

Usually, set 21 because the FTP service is used.

IP ADDRESS Specifies the IP address of the host computer.

(Format: "192.168.0.101")USERNAME Specifies the name of the user to log on to the host computer

using FTP.


PASSWORD Specifies the password for the above user name.



LOGIN DIR Specifies the directory on the host computer to which the

data server functions are to log in.


NOTE

When the "TCP/IP setting items for the CNC" havebeen changed, the power must be turned off then onagain.




- 506 -




by the Data Server.


• The FTP client runs on CNCs No.1 and No.2.

CNC No.1 CNC No.2

IP address 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.2Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0


IP address 21 21

Port number 192.168.0.101 192.168.0.101

User name dtsvr dtsvr


Connection

host 1

Login DIR None None

Parameter No.20 5 5

Personal

computer No.1

IP address 192.168.0.101Subnet mask 255.255.255.0


User name dtsvr

Password dtsvr

Login DIR Default



existing network, consult your company's network administrator todetermine IP addresses, subnet masks, and router IP addresses.


CNC No.2CNC No.1


HUB

Set these items in "Microsoft TCP/IP Property" on thepersonal computer (Windows 2000/XP).

Set these items with User Manager of PC (Windows

2000/XP).

Set this item with Internet Service Manager of PC (Windows

2000/XP).


Parameter" screen.

Set these items on the "Parameter"

screen.




- 507 -

B.4 SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet OF THE OPTION BOARD

FOR Series 30i

/31i

/32i

-AThis section describes the items required to be set to operate the

FOCAS2/Ethernet functions available on the option board for Series

30i/31i/32i-A.


Series 30i/31i/32i-A," in Appendix for the embedded Ethernet function.


CAUTIONWhen the FAST Ethernet is used for the first time,consult with your company’s network administrator to determine the IP addresses and other settings.Then, conduct a communications test.If incorrect IP addresses and other settings are set,communications may be interfered with or the entirenetwork might be adversely affected.Particularly, if a duplicate IP address is set,communication errors are caused intermittently.This may result in a CNC's system error.


when the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions are used:Refer to Item "Ethernet boards or Data Server boards and CNC options," in Section 3.1 of Part I for details.

2 There is a limit on the number of FOCAS2/Ethernetclients connectable to one CNC using theFOCAS2/Ethernet functions.

Refer to Note 2 in Item “Usable CNCs (When theFOCAS2/Ethernet is used)” in Section 3.1 of Part Ifor details.




- 508 -

B.4.2 FOCAS2/Ethernet Screen

This subsection describes the setting screen for operating theFOCAS2/Ethernet functions.



3 Soft key [ETHER BOARD] appear. (When there is no soft keys,

press the continue key.)

4 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting

screen.

5 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FOCAS2] and then enter

parameters for the items that appear.




- 509 -

COMMON screen

Press soft key [COMMON] to display the COMMON screen.

COMMON screen

Setting itemItem Description

IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the FAST Ethernet/ FAST

Data Server.

(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")

SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the

network.


ROUTER IP

ADDRESS

Specify the IP address of the router.

Specify this item when the network contains a router.


Display item

Item DescriptionMAC ADDRESS FAST Ethernet/ FAST Data Server MAC address

NOTEThe second page (detail screen) of the COMMONscreen is to be set when the DNS/DHCP function isused. For details, see "FANUC FAST Ethernet /FAST Data Server OPERATOR’S MANUAL(B-64014EN).”




- 510 -

FOCAS2 screen

Press soft key [FOCAS2] to display the FOCAS2 screen.

FOCAS2 screen


PORT NUMBER

(TCP)



65535.

PORT NUMBER

(UDP)

Enter the value that is indicated in the [UPD number

for C4 service] dialog box displayed during installation.




NOTE1 The unit of TIME INTERVAL is 10 ms. The

allowable input range is 10 to 65535. Values lessthan 100 ms cannot be set.

2 If a smaller value is set in TIME INTERVAL, thecommunication load can increase to adverselyaffect the performance of the network.Example) If 100 is set, broadcast data is

transmitted at intervals of 1 second (1000

ms) (= 100 × 10).




- 511 -

B.4.3 Configuring a Small-scale Network





No.1.


No.2.

CNC No.1 CNC No.2





Time interval 50 50


IP address 192.168.0.101




Port number 8193


Port number 8193

B.4.4 Configuring a Large-scale Network




The FOCAS2 setting screen is used for

setting.






The common setting screen is used for

setting.

Personal


100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T

HUB




- 512 -

B.5 SETTING THE EMBEDDED Ethernet FOR Series

30i

/31i

/32i

-AThis section describes the items required to be set to operate the

embedded Ethernet function for Series 30i/31i/32i-A.

When using the FOCAS2/Ethernet function, see Subsections B.5.1 and

B.5.2.

When setting an FTP server on a PC and setting the setting information

as parameters for the Data Server (to use the FTP file transfer function),

see Subsections B.5.1 and B.5.3.

Refer to Section B.4, "Setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet of the Option

Board for Series 30i/31i/32i-A," for the option board.


CAUTIONWhen the embedded Ethernet function is used for the first time, consult with your company’s networkadministrator to determine the IP addresses andother settings. Then, conduct a communicationstest.

If incorrect IP addresses and other settings are set,communications may be interfered with or the entirenetwork might be adversely affected.


when the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions are used:Refer to Item "Ethernet boards or Data Server Boards and CNC options," in Section 3.1 of Part I for details.

2 There is a limit on the number of FOCAS2/Ethernet

clients connectable to one CNC using theFOCAS2/Ethernet functions.Refer to Note 2 in “Usable CNCs (When theFOCAS2/Ethernet is used)” in Section 3.1 of Part Ifor details.

3 If multiple application software products or multiplepersonal computers access the CNCsimultaneously, the communication load on theCNC can increase, resulting in decreasedcommunication speed and degraded CNC screendisplay processing.




- 513 -

B.5.2 Setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet Functions

This subsection describes the setting for using the FOCAS2/Ethernetfunction.

B.5.2.1 FOCAS2/Ethernet parameter screen

This subsection describes the setting screen for operating the

FOCAS2/Ethernet functions on the Ethernet setting screen.



3 Soft keys [EMBED] and [PCMCIA LAN] appear.(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)

4 To display the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet

port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card, press soft key [EMBED] or

[PCMCIA LAN], respectively.

5 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FOCAS2] and then enter


NOTE1 The parameters for the embedded Ethernet port and

the parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card are

independent of each other.2 The settings of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function for the

PCMCIA Ethernet card are made when a connectionto the Servo Guide and FANUC LADDER-III isestablished.




- 514 -

COMMON screen


COMMON screen


IP ADDRESS Specifies the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.




ROUTER IP

ADDRESS



router.


Display itemItem Description

MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address AVAILABLE

DEVICE

Enabled device of the embedded Ethernet.

Either the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA

Ethernet card is displayed.




- 515 -

FOCAS2 screen

Press soft key [FOCAS2] to display the FOCAS2 screen.

FOCAS2 screen


PORT NUMBER

(TCP)



65535.

PORT NUMBER

(UDP)

Enter the value that is indicated in the [UPD number

for C4 service] dialog box displayed during installation.




NOTE1 The unit of TIME INTERVAL is 10 ms. The

allowable input range is 10 to 65535. Values lessthan 100 ms cannot be set.

2 If a smaller value is set in TIME INTERVAL, thecommunication load can increase to adverselyaffect the performance of the network.Example) If 100 is set, broadcast data is

transmitted at intervals of 1 second (1000

ms) (= 100 × 10).




- 516 -

Initial setting of the PCMCIA Ethernet cardThe PCMCIA Ethernet card is factory-set to the following default

values, for ease of connection with a servo guide or FANUC

LADDER-III.

IP ADDRESS : 192.168.1.1

SUBNET MASK : 255.255.255.0

ROUTER IP ADDRESS : None

PORT NUMBER (TCP) : 8193

PORT NUMBER (UDP) : 0

TIME INTERVAL : 0

If a specified IP address is changed to a blank (space), the specified

setting is reset to the default value.

The built-in Ethernet port does not have a default value.




- 517 -






No.1.


No.2.

CNC No.1 CNC No.2

IP address 192.168.1.1 192.168.1.2

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0




Time interval 50 50


IP address 192.168.1.101




Port number 8193


Port number 8193





The FOCAS2 setting screen is used for

setting.






The common setting screen is used for

setting.

Personal



HUB




- 518 -

B.5.3 Setting the FTP File Transfer Functions

This subsection describes the setting required when an FTP server is to be set on a PC and the setting information is to be set as parameters for

the Data Server (to use the FTP file transfer function).

B.5.3.1 Parameter setting screen for the FTP file transfer function

This subsection describes the setting screen for operating the FTP file

transfer functions.


2 Press function keySYSTEM

.3 Soft keys [EMBED] appear.

(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)

4 By pressing the [EMBED] soft key, the Ethernet Setting screen for

the embedded Ethernet port is displayed.

5 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FTP TRANS] and then enter


NOTE1 The parameters for the embedded Ethernet port and

the parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card are

independent of each other.2 If the [PCMCIA LAN] soft key is pressed, the

PCMCIA Ethernet card can be set up. However, thecard setup is carried out for maintenance and is notnecessary usually.




- 519 -

COMMON screen


COMMON screen


IP ADDRESS Specifies the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.




ROUTER IP

ADDRESS



router.



MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address AVAILABLE

DEVICE

Enabled device of the embedded Ethernet.

Either the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA

Ethernet card is displayed.




- 520 -

FTP transfer screen

Press soft key [FTP TRANS] to display the FTP transfer screen.

By using page keysPAGE

PAGE, the three host computers at connection

destinations 1, 2, and 3 can be set.

FTP transfer screen (1st page) FTP transfer screen (2nd page)

Setting item

Item Description

HOST NAME Specify the IP address of the host computer.


PORT NUMBER Specify a port number to be used with the FTP file

transfer function. An FTP session is used, so that "21" is

to be specified usually.

USERNAME Specify a user name to be used for logging in to the host

computer with FTP.

(Up to 31 characters can be specified.)

PASSWORD Specify a password for the user name specified above.

(Up to 31 characters can be specified.)

Be sure to set a password.

LOGIN FOLDER Specify a work folder to be used when logging in to the

host computer. (Up to 127 characters can be specified.)

If nothing is specified, the home folder specified in the

host computer becomes the log-in folder.




- 521 -

Changing the host computer to be connected for the FTP file transfer function

Select a destination.

1 Pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key causes soft key [HOST SELECT]

to be displayed. Pressing this soft key causes soft keys [CONECT

1], [CONECT 2], and [CONECT 3] to be displayed.

2 Depending on the host computer to be connected, press soft key[CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], or [CONECT 3]. Destination 1, 2, or

3 is highlighted in the screen title field. The computer

corresponding to the highlighted destination is selected as the

target computer to be connected.

When destination 1 is selected




- 522 -


The following shows an example of the minimum settings needed to runthe FTP file transfer functions on a small-scale network.


by the FTP file transfer functions.

• On Personal Computer 1, the FTP server operates.

• On CNC 1 and CNC 2, the FTP client operates as the FTP file

transfer function.

CNC 1 CNC 2



Port number 21 21

IP address 192.168.0.101 192.168.0.101

User name Dtsvr dtsvr

Password Dtsvr dtsvr

Connection

host 1

Login DIR None None

NC parameter No. 20 5 5

PC 1

IP address 192.168.0.101

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0Default gateway None

User name dtsvr

Password dtsvr

Login DIR Default





Personal



HUB

The FTP transfer screen is used for setting.

The parameter screen is used for setting.

"Microsoft TCP/IP property" of the personal computer

(Windows 2000/XP) is used for setting.

"User acount of the personal computer (Windows

2000/XP) is used for setting.

"Internet service manager" of the personal computer


The COMMON screen is used for setting.




- 523 -

B.6 SETTING THE DATA SERVER FOR Series 30i /31i /32i -A

This section describes the setting required to operate the Data Server

function for Series 30i/31i/32i-A (including the FTP server function).

When using the FTP server function of the Data Server, see Subsections

B.6.1 and B.6.2.

When an FTP server is to be set on a PC and the setting information is to

be set as parameters for the Data Server (to use the Data Server

function), see Subsections B.6.1 and B.6.3.

B.6.1 Precautions to be Observed when Using the Data Server Functions for the First Time

CAUTION1 When the FAST Data Server is used for the first time, format the ATA

Flash card, set the appropriate parameters, and turn the power off then on again. If the Data Server functions are used withoutperforming these operations, normal operation cannot be guaranteed.

2 When Ethernet FTP communication is performed for the first time,consult with your company's network administrator to determine theIP addresses and other settings. Then, conduct a communicationstest.If incorrect IP addresses and other settings are set, communications

may be interfered with or the entire network might be adverselyaffected.Particularly, if a duplicate IP address is set, communication errors arecaused intermittently. This may result in a CNC's system error.

3 Never turn off the power to the CNC while the ATA Flash card is beingaccessed (while a Data Server function service is being executed).Otherwise, the data on the ATA Flash card may be destroyed.Never turn off the power to the CNC while using its functions,especially the FTP server functions.

4 To guard against ATA Flash card failure, back up the files on the ATAFlash card.

NOTE1 One of the following option functions is needed when the Data Server

functions are used:For details, see the item of "Ethernet boards or Data Server boardsand CNC options" in Section 3.1, "CNC", in Chapter 3, "OPERATINGENVIRONMENT" of Part I, "OVERVIEW".

2 The Data Server function imposes an upper limit on the number of FTP clients connectable to one CNC. For details, see the note onUsable CNCs (When the Data Server is used)" in Section 3.1, "CNC",in Chapter 3, "OPERATING ENVIRONMENT" of Part I,"OVERVIEW".




- 524 -

B.6.2 Setting the FTP Server

This subsection describes the setting required to use the FTP server functions of the Data Server.

B.6.2.1 Data Server setting screen

This subsection describes the setting screen for operating the FTP

server functions.



3 Soft key [ETHER BOARD] appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)


screen.

5 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [DATA SERVER] and then

enter parameters for the items that appear.




- 525 -

COMMON screen


COMMON screen


IP ADDRESS Specifies the IP address of the FAST Data Server.




ROUTER IP

ADDRESS



router.



MAC ADDRESS FAST Data Server MAC address





- 526 -

Data Server screen (FTP Server)

Press soft key [DATA SERVER] to display the Data Server screen.


PAGE, the FTP server setting screen is

displayed after the connection destination 1, 2, or 3 screen.

Data Server screen (FTP Server)

Setting item

Item Description

USERNAME Specify a user name to be used when the host computer

logs in to the Data Server. (A user name of up to 31

characters can be specified.)

PASSWORD Specify the password for the above user name.


LOGIN FOLDER Specify a work folder to be used when the host

computer logs in to the Data Server. (Up to 127


If no data is set, the home folder (home directory) is

used as a login folder.




- 527 -




by the Data Server.

• The FTP client runs on personal computer No.1.

• The FTP server runs on CNCs No.1 and No.2.

CNC No.1 CNC No.2

IP address 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.2

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

Router IP address None NoneUser name dtsvr dtsvr


FTP server

Login DIR None None

Personal

computer No.1

IP address 192.168.0.101




NC port number 21

NC user name dtsvr

NC password dtsvr

CNC No.1

NC Login DIR None


NC port number 21

NC user name dtsvr

NC password dtsvr

CNC No.2

NC Login DIR None


Before you configure a large-scale network or add such a network to anexisting network, consult your company's network administrator to


Set these items on the

COMMON screen.






Personal



HUB

Set these items on the Data

Server screen.




- 528 -

B.6.3 Setting the Connection Host

This subsection describes the method of setting an FTP server in the PCand setting the setting information as parameters for the Data Server (to

use the Data Server function).

B.6.3.1 Parameter setting screen for Data Server functions

This subsection describes the setting screen for operating the Data

Server functions.


2 Press function keySYSTEM

.3 Soft key [ETHER BOARD] appear. (When there is no soft keys,

press the continue key.)


screen.

5 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [DATA SERVER] and then

enter parameters for the items that appear.




- 529 -

COMMON screen


COMMON screen


IP ADDRESS Specifies the IP address of the FAST Data Server.




ROUTER IP

ADDRESS



router.



MAC ADDRESS FAST Data Server MAC address





- 530 -

Data Server screens (CONNECT 1, CONNECT 2, CONNECT 3)

Press soft key [DATA SERVER] to display the Data Server screen.


PAGE, the three host computers at connection

destinations 1, 2, and 3 can be set.

Data Server screens (for connection destination 1)


HOST NAME Specify the IP address of the host computer.


PORT NUMBER Specify the port number. Usually, set 21 because the

FTP communication is used.

USER NAME Specify the name of the user to log on to the host

computer using FTP. (A user name of up to 31


PASSWORD Specify the password for the above user name.


LOGIN FOLDER Specify a work folder to be used when the user logs in to

the host computer. (Up to 127 characters can be

specified.)

If no data is set, the home folder set on the host

computer is used as a login folder.




- 531 -

Changing the host computer to be connected for the Data Server function

Select a destination.

1 Pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key causes soft key [HOST SELECT]

to be displayed. Pressing this soft key causes soft keys [CONECT

1], [CONECT 2], and [CONECT 3] to be displayed.

2 Depending on the host computer to be connected, press soft key[CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], or [CONECT 3]. Destination 1, 2, or

3 is highlighted in the screen title field. The computer

corresponding to the highlighted destination is selected as the

target computer to be connected.

When destination 1 is selected




- 532 -




by the Data Server.


• The FTP client runs on CNCs No.1 and No.2.

CNC 1 CNC 2

IP address 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.2

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0


Port number 21 21

IP address 192.168.0.101 192.168.0.101

User name Dtsvr dtsvr

Password Dtsvr dtsvr

Connection

host 1

Login DIR None None

NC parameter No. 20 5 5

PC 1

IP address 192.168.0.101


Default gateway NoneUser name dtsvr

Password dtsvr

Login DIR Default





Personal



HUB

The Data Server screen is used for setting.

The parameter screen is used for setting.

"Microsoft TCP/IP property" of the personal computer


"User acount of the personal computer (Windows

2000/XP) is used for setting.

"Internet service manager" of the personal computer


The COMMON screen is used for setting.




- 533 -

B.7 SETTING UP DNC2

Sample NC parameter settings when DNC2 is used as the communicationprotocol

Item (standard setting value) Series 16/18 Series 15 Series 0-MC Series0-TC

Output data code

(ISO)0000.1=1 0000.4=0 ISO=1 ISO=1

I/O device No. 0020=10

0020=4

0021=4

0022=4

0023=4

I/O=10 I/O=10

Stop bit

(2)0131.0=1 5082=2 0051.0=1 0051.0=1

Data code(ASCII)

0131.3=1 0000.2=1 0051.3=1 0051.3=1

Parity bit

(EVEN)0134.1=1 5000.1=0 0051.1=1 0051.1=1

CD signal check

(disabled)0134.4=1 5000.4=1 0051.4=1 0051.4=1

Interface

(RS-232-C)0135.3=0 5000.0=0 0055.3=0 0055.3=0

BCC check

(enabled)0140.0=0 5056.0=0 0396.0=0 0396.0=0

ER signal check

(enabled)0140.2=0 5056.2=0 0396.2=0 0396.2=0

Negative acknowledgement error code(added)

0140.3=1 5056.3=1 0396.3=1 0396.3=1

Baud rate

(9600)0133=11 5083=11 0251=11 0251=11

No-response timeout

(5)0143=5 5050=5 0365=5 0320=5

EOT timeout

(5)0144=5 5051=5 0366=5 0321=5

No-response retry

(5)0145=5 5052=5 0368=5 0323=5

NAK retry

(3)0146=3 5053=3 0369=3 0324=3

CS-off reception character count(256)

0148=255 5054=256 0370=256 0325=256

Datagram length

(256)0149=256 5055=256 0490=256 0490=256

Map parameter screen

(displayed)- - 389.0=1 389.0=1

PMC data

(address specification type)- 5056.4=0

(Note)- -

NOTEThe setting indicated above is needed if Series 15Buses PMC-NA (excluding PMC-NA2).




- 534 -

B.8 SETTING UP READER/PUNCHER

Sample NC parameter settings when reader/puncher is used as thecommunication protocol

Item (standard setting value) Series 16/18 Series 10/11/12/15 Series 0

I/O device No.

(1)0020=0

0020=1

0021=1I/O=0

Stop bit

(2)0101.0=1 5111=2 0002.0=1

Reception data code

(ISO)0101.3=0 0000.2=0 ISO=1

Device No. 5001=1 0002.2=0

Device specifications

(Floppy cassette)0102=3

5110=8

(or 7)

0038.7=0

0038.6=1Baud rate

(9600)0103=11 5112=11 0552=11

TV check

(enabled)0000.0=1 0000.0=1 TV=1

Output data code

(ISO)0000.1=1 0000.4=0 ISO=1

Comment portion TV check0100.1=0

(disabled)

0000.1=0

(enabled)

0018.6=0

(disabled)

EOB punch

(LF)0100.3=1 0000.3=1 0070.7=1

Feed punch

(disabled) 0101.7=1 0002.7=1Protection of O8000 to O8999

(enabled)3202.0=1 0011.0=1 0389.2=1

Protection of O9000 to O9999

(enabled)3202.4=1 2201.0=1 0010.4=1

Program registration

(all programs)3201.1=0 2200.2=1 0045.1=0

Program registration

(addition)3201.0=0 2200.0=0 0045.0=0

Same registration

(alarm)3201.2=0 2200.1=0 0015.6=0

M02/M30/M99

(not ending registration) 3201.6=1 2200.3=1 0019.6=1



B-75074EN/04 APPENDIX C.EXAMPLES OF NC OPERATIONS

- 535 -

C EXAMPLES OF NC OPERATIONS

This chapter shows some examples of NC operations. When operating

an actual NC, refer to the manual of the corresponding NC.



C.EXAMPLES OF NC OPERATIONS APPENDIX B-75074EN/04

- 536 -

C.1 DNC2

Examples of operations of FANUC Series 16/18

Downloading an NC program (NC program number)

The NC program to be downloaded is determined by the NC program

number.

1 Bring the NC into the EDIT mode.

2 Press function key <PROG>.

3 Press soft key [(OPRT)].

4 Press soft key [+].5 Press soft key [READ].

6 Enter the NC program number "O????".

7 Press soft key [EXEC].

Uploading an NC program (NC program number)

When the NC program is saved, the NC program number is used as a

key.


2 Press function key <PROG>.3 Press soft key [(OPRT)].

4 Press soft key [+].

5 Press soft key [PUNCH].

6 Enter the NC program number "O????".

This NC program number is used as a key for simultaneous

storage.





- 537 -

Performing DNC operation of an NC program (NC program number)

When the NC program to be transferred is determined, the NC programnumber is used as a key.

1 Bring the NC into the MDI mode.

2 Press function key <SYSTEM>.

3 Press soft key [+] twice.

4 Press soft key [C-OPER]. A screen appears as shown below.


6 Press soft key [STRING].

7 Enter “O????.PRG”, where O???? is the NC program number of

the NC program to be transferred.

8 Press soft key [INPUT].9 Press soft key [STRING].

10 Bring the NC into the MEM mode.

11 Turn on the DNCI signal from PMC to bring the NC into the RMT

mode.

12 When the cycle start is activated on the NC side, the automatic

operation starts.

[COMMUNICATION OPERATION]

[DNC FILE SELECTION]

-

>

MDI **** **** **** ****




- 538 -

Examples of operations of FANUC Series 15



number.


2 Press soft key [PROGRAM] to select the program (memory)

screen.

3 Press soft key [ ] twice.

4 Press soft key [READ].

5 Enter “,O????”, where O???? is the NC program number of the

NC program to be transferred.To enter the comma (,), press the # key while holding down the

Shift key.




key.

1 Bring the NC into the EDIT mode.2 Press soft key [PROGRAM] to select the program (memory)

screen.

3 Press soft key [ ] twice.


5 Enter ",O????", where O???? is the NC program number of the NC

program to be uploaded.

To enter the comma (,), press the # key while holding down the

Shift key.

This NC program number is used as a key for simultaneous

storage.





- 539 -


The NC program to be downloaded is determined by the NC programnumber.

1 Bring the NC into the TAPE mode.

2 Press soft key [SETING].

3 Press soft key [CHAPTER].

4 Press soft key [COMMU. OPERAT]. A screen appears as shown

below.


the NC program to be transferred.

6 Press soft key [INPUT].7 When the cycle start is activated on the NC side, the automatic

operation starts.

COMMUNICATIONOPERATION O0001 N0001

DNC FILE SELECTION

INPUT TAPE *** STOP **** *** ***




- 540 -

Examples of operations of FANUC Series 0



number.


2 Press function key <PRGRM>.

3 Press soft key [I/O].

4 Enter “O????”, where O???? is the NC program number of the NC

program to be transferred.




key.



3 Press soft key [I/O].

4 Enter ",O????", where O???? is the NC program number of the NC

program to be specified.This NC program number is used as a key for simultaneous

storage.





- 541 -


The NC program to be downloaded is determined by the NC programnumber.

1 Bring the NC into the MDI mode.

2 Press function key <DGNOS/PARAM>.

3 Press soft key [MAP]. A screen appears as shown below.

4 Press soft key [STRING].


the NC program to be specified.

6 Press input key <INPUT>.

7 Bring the NC into the AUTO mode.

8 Turn on the DNCI signal from the PMC.

9 When the cycle start is activated on the NC side, the automaticoperation starts.

If bit 0 of NC parameter 389 is set, the [MAP PARAMETER] screen

must be enabled and the [SERVO SETTING] screen must be disabled

when the DNC operation is carried out.

[MAP PARAMETER] O0001 N0001

(SETTING)

DNC FILE SELECTION

NUM. MDI

( )( )( )( )( )




- 542 -

C.2 READER/PUNCHER

Examples of operations of FANUC Series 16/18

Downloading an NC program (file number)

The NC program to be downloaded is determined by the file number.




4 Enter the file number "??".

5 Press soft key [F SET].6 Press soft key [EXEC].

Uploading an NC program (file name)

When the NC program is saved, the file name is used as a key.




4 Enter the NC program number "????".

This NC program number becomes the file name of the uploaded program.

5 Press soft key [O SET].




key.


2 Press function key <PROG>.3 Press soft key [PUNCH].


5 Press soft key [O SET].


7 Press soft key [F SET].


The NC program cannot be uploaded to the PC by using the file number

as a key. So, ignoring the file number, the PC finds the NC program

number placed at the start of the transferred program and uses it as a

key.




- 543 -

Displaying the directory

1 Bring the NC into the EDIT mode.2 Press function key <PROG>.

3 Press soft key [FLOPPY].


5 Press the <PAGE ↑> or <PAGE ↓> key to switch between pages.

Deleting an NC program



3 Press soft key [DELETE].

4 Enter the file number "??".5 Press soft key [F SET].


Performing DNC operation of an NC program (file number)

When the NC program to be transferred is determined, the file number

is used as a key.

1 Bring the NC into the MEM mode.


3 Press soft key [FL. SDL].


5 Press soft key [SELECT].


7 Press soft key [F SET].



operation starts.




- 544 -

Examples of operations of FANUC Series 10/11/12/15




2 Press soft key [PRGRM].


4 Press soft key [FILE#].


6 Press soft key [ALL].

Downloading an NC program (file name)

The NC program to be downloaded is determined by the file name.




4 Press soft key [FILE NAME].

5 Enter the file name "ABC".

6 Press soft key [ALL].






4 Press soft key [PRGRM#].


This NC program number becomes the file name of the uploaded

program.





- 545 -


When the NC program is saved, the NC program number is used as akey.






6 Press soft key [THIS PROGRAM].




key.




3 Press soft key [DRCTRY FLOPPY].

4 Press the <PAGE↑> or <PAGE↓> key to switch between pages.




- 546 -

Examples of operations of FANUC Series 0-C







5 Press function key <INPUT>.









program.





key.





5 Press function key <INPUT>.6 Enter the file number "??".






key.




- 547 -


1 Bring the NC into the EDIT mode.2 Press function key <PRGRM>.

3 Press soft key [FLOPPY].

4 Press the <PAGE↑> or <PAGE↓> key to switch between pages.






5 Press function key <INPUT>.6 Press soft key [EXEC].



is used as a key.


2 Enter the DNCI signal from the PMC to set the RMT mode.


4 Press soft key [FL.SDL].

5 Press soft key [SELECT].





operation starts.





4 Press soft key [PRGRM#].






- 548 -


When the NC program to be transferred is determined, the file number is used as a key.

1 Bring the NC into the TAPE mode.


3 Press soft key [SEARCH].





operation starts.




- 549 -

Examples of operations of FANUC Series 0-A/0-B





3 Enter “N??”, where N?? is the file number of the file number to be

transferred.

4 Press function key <INPUT> twice.





3 Enter ",O????", where ???? is the NC program number of the NC

program to be specified.


program.

4 Press function key <OUTPT>.





specified.




is used a key.


2 Enter the DNCI signal from the PMC to set the RMT mode.



specified.



operation starts.



D.ERROR CODES APPENDIX B-75074EN/04

- 550 -

D ERROR CODES



B-75074EN/04 APPENDIX D.ERROR CODES

- 551 -

D.1 NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT ERROR CODES

The following error codes may be issued in downloading or uploading

with the NC program management function.

Errors in a program for NC program management (0x00010000 to 0x0001ffff)

0x00010000

An attempt was made to end a communication process, but machines turned out to be currently

involved in communication.

Terminate communication with all machines, and try to end the communication process again.

0x00010001

An attempt was made to start communication with a machine, but the machine turned out to be

already involved in communication.

It is impossible to issue a communication start command to a machine that is already involved

in communication.

0x00010003 The machine of interest has not started communication.Check whether the machine has been directed to start communication.

DNC2 communication errors (0x00030000 to 0x0003ffff)

0x00030103Setup data in the registry of the personal computer could not be read.

Check whether the data has been set up correctly.

0x00030201 A port open error occurred.

Check whether a correct port is used and whether the port setting is correct.

0x00030301The NC sent a negative acknowledgment (reset, error, etc.)

Check whether the NC has an instruction stopped by a reset or an error.

0x00030302

The ER signal is not set.

Check whether the NC power is turned off.

Check whether anything is wrong with the RS-232-C cable.

0x00030409The NC did not respond for a prescribed period during communication.

Check whether the NC has hung up.

0x00030411The NC sent a negative acknowledgment (reset, error, etc.)

Check whether the NC has an instruction stopped by a reset or an error.

0x00030412

The ER signal went down.

Check whether the NC power is turned off.

Check whether anything is wrong with the RS-232-C cable.

0x00030413

A retry-over occurred.

If communication has not yet been established at all, check parameters related to DNC2

between i CELL and the NC.

If this error has occurred suddenly, check whether the NC is normally operating.

0x00030501 Check whether the socket interface can be used on Windows OS.The i CELL may not be installed correctly.

0x00030502 Check whether the socket interface can be used on Windows OS.

0x00030503 Check whether the communication process is active.

0x00030601

A DNC2 command error occurred.

The error has occurred on the NC side, but the NC is not configured to return an error code.

Modify parameter settings so that the error code is returned from the NC.

0x00030602

The NC sent a T_NP negative acknowledgment.

An error has occurred on the NC side, but the NC is not configured to return an error code.


T_NP above and T_BD, M_NR, M_NP, and M_IL below represent types of negative

acknowledgments from the NC in DNC2 communication. For details, see Part II,

"PROTOCOLS" in "FANUC DNC2 DESCRIPTIONS (B-61992E)."

0x00030603

The NC sent a T_BD negative acknowledgment.






- 552 -

0x00030604

The NC sent an M_NR negative acknowledgment.



0x00030605

The NC sent an N_NP negative acknowledgment.



0x00030606

The NC sent an N_IL negative acknowledgment.



0x00030607No O number is specified. Alternatively, an illegal value is specified.

Check whether a correct O number is specified.

0x00030609 Another instruction is being executed.

Make a retry after the execution ends.

0x00030f02The specified tool post path number is not 0.

With DNC2, specify 0 as the tool post path number.

0x00030f03 An unsupported request code was received.Check the argument to the function.

0x00030f04 An unsupported information read (ReadVariable) instruction was received.

Check the argument to the function.

0x00030f05 An unsupported information write (WriteVariable) instruction was received.

Check the argument to the function.

0x00030f06

The number of information items specified for an information read instruction or information

write instruction is 0.

Specify a value between 1 and the maximum permissible value as the number of information

items.

0x00030f09 An illegal combination of tool offset values was specified.

Specify tool offset values appropriate for the type of the NC used.

0x00030f0c The specified address cannot be converted.Check whether the PMC number and the address character in the PMC area are correct.

0x00030f0d

The number of read data items is smaller than the number of data items specified for the

information read (ReadVariable) instruction.

Check whether the specified range is correct.

Reader/puncher communication errors (0x00040000 to 0x0004ffff)

0x0004100a

A file deletion from the NC was specified and ended in failure.

Check whether the file is present and whether a correct file attribute was specified for the

deletion.

0x0004100f

A transmission/reception request command from the NC side contains an illegal character. The

characters that can be used are lower-case and upper-case alphabetic characters, numerals,

blank, period (.), comma (,), and hyphen (-).The characters may be garbled because of the communication settings such as transfer rate

and stop bit. Check the communication settings. If a non-FANUC NC is used, check that the

command sent from the NC is the same as the command that would be sent from a FANUC NC.

0x00041010

A transmission/reception request command received from the NC has 32 characters or more.

If a non-FANUC NC is used, check that the command sent from the NC is the same as the

command that would be sent from a FANUC NC.

0x00041018

The data received from the NC includes the DC4 code, but the ER code has not yet been

received. A reset may have been made on the NC side.

Ignore this error if it occurs when a reset is made by the NC.

0x0004101c A TV check error occurred.

Check the data to be uploaded.

0x00041021 The file to be downloaded could not be found.Check that the file to be downloaded is present.




- 553 -

0x00041024

Automatic ISO/EIA discrimination could not be executed for the NC program uploaded to the

computer.

The automatic ISO/EIA discrimination is made on the basis of the LF character included in a

hundred characters read from the beginning of the file. However, no LF character was sent

(0x0a: ISO; 0x80: EIA).

Check the contents of the data to be uploaded.

0x00041025

The data being uploaded does not contain any O number. A data upload with a file number

specified requires an O number in the data.

Check the data to be uploaded. Upload the data, specifying a file name instead of a file number.

0x00041026

The data being uploaded contains a character O or a colon (:), which is not followed by any

number.


0x00041028

In the automatic ISO/EIA discrimination of an NC program uploaded to the computer, an illegal

character was found.


0x0004102c

The upload or download data contains an illegal character.For the upload data, the computer carries out an automatic ISO/EIA discrimination. The

characters may have been garbled because of a wrong communication setting.

For the download data, check whether the data in the computer is written in ASCII.

Ethernet communication errors (0x00060000 to 0x0006ffff)

0x00060102 A specified machine number is invalid.

Check the machine number registered in the Machine Configuration dialog box.

0x00060106 An Ethernet communication process was stopped because a request to stop it was received.

0x00060107The NC with a specified machine number is already performing another process.

Wait for a while, and then rerun.

0x0006010c

An NC program number specified in a download or upload request is out of the valid range.

Check whether the NC program number is in a range between 1 and 9999 (1 to 99999999 when8-digit NC program numbers are supported).

0x00060123

It is impossible to connect to the NC over an Ethernet network.

Check the connection of the Ethernet cable according to Subsection 2.6.1, "Setting up

Communication," in Part III, "Setting." Also check whether the IP address and TCP port number

match those set up in the NC.

0x00060128

It is impossible to connect to the C4 server.

Check the connection of the Ethernet cable according to Subsection 2.6.1, "Setting up

Communication," in Part III, "Setting." Also check whether the IP address and UDP port number

match those set up in the NC.

You need to make the UDP port set up in the NC match the entry of the services file on the PC.

Check the setting of FANUC_C4_SERVER according to Section 3.2, "Information to be

Automatically Saved to the TCP/IP Service File," in Part II, "Installation."

0x0006012a

An existence signal from the NC was interrupted.

It is likely that the NC power is off or an Ethernet cable has not been attached. So, processing is

impossible. Check the NC power and Ethernet cables.

0x0006012e An NC program requested for downloading or DNC operation has no O number.

Check the contents of the NC program.

0x00060131The number of valid characters for file paths is exceeded.

Check the number of characters.

0x00060132 A folder could not be created on the PC side.

Check the folder name.

0x00060133 A file having the same name as a folder is present.

The file cannot be overwritten by the folder.

0x00060134 There is a file or folder that cannot be uploaded or downloaded.Check the results of uploading or downloading.

0x00060135 A file could not be created on the PC side.

Check the file name.




- 554 -

0x00060136 Write to the result file failed.

0x0006013a A folder having the same name as a file is present.

The folder cannot be overwritten by the file.

0x00060200There is a file or folder name format error.

Check the file or folder name.

0x00060201 A specified file or folder name cannot be found.

Check whether the file or folder is present.

0x00060202 Too many files are registered.

0x00060203

The same file name is already present.

Downloading by overwriting an existing program cannot be performed. Check bit 2 of NC

parameter No. 3201.

0x00060204 A specified file or folder is selected on the NC side.

Cancel the selection, then retry.

0x00060205There is no program within a specified range.

Check whether a program is registered.

0x00060206The NC program area is destroyed.Check the contents.

0x00060207NC data contains a syntax error.

Check the contents.

0x00060208When the TV check is valid, a block containing an odd number of characters (including LF at the

end of the block) is detected.

0x000604f0

The NC power is turned off during communication over the Ethernet, or the Ethernet cable is

broken.

Check the power supply and cable.

0x000604ff(1) A program cannot be deleted in the MDI mode.

Use a mode other than the MDI mode.

0x000604ff(2) A selected program cannot be deleted in a mode other than the EDT mode.

0x000604ff(3) A program cannot be selected when another program is already running.

0x00060505(1)The 140 BP/S alarm condition has occurred in the NC.

It is impossible to perform downloading to a program selected in the NC.

0x00060505(2)

The 73 BP/S alarm condition has occurred in the NC.

It is impossible to perform overwrite-downloading to an existing program. Check bit 2 of NC

parameter 3201.

0x00060505(3)

The 72 BP/S alarm condition has occurred in the NC.

An attempt was made to register more programs than the maximum number of programs that

can be registered with the NC. Delete unnecessary programs.

0x00060505(4) It is impossible to upload a program that is not in the NC.

0x00060505(5) It is impossible to select a program that is not in the NC.

0x00060505(6) It is impossible to delete a program that is not in the NC.

0x00060507 An NC program cannot be deleted because the memory protection key is on.Turn off the memory protection key.

0x00060508

If the 70 BP/S alarm condition occurs in the NC:

The memory depleted in the NC when a program was being downloaded.

Delete unnecessary programs, and try to download the program again.

0x0006050b A specified series number is incorrect.

Specify a correct series number.

0x0006050c A program cannot be downloaded in the MDI mode.

Put the NC in the EDT or MEM mode.

Other errors (0x10010000 to 0x1009ffff)

0x10010003

The PC memory was depleted during execution.

Terminate unnecessary applications or increase the size of the virtual memory to allocate morememory.




- 555 -

0x10011102

0x10011103

0x10011009

The PC memory was depleted during initialization.

Terminate unnecessary applications or increase the size of the virtual memory to allocate more

memory.

0x10011106The specified machine number is invalid.

It is impossible to communicate with a machine not set up in the Configuration dialog box.

0x10011107

The specified file number is invalid.

Check whether the specified file number is 1 or greater.

The default directory holds fewer files than a specified file number. Check the file number.

0x10011108 The specified file name is invalid.

0x10011130No default directory is specified in the Configuration dialog box.

Specify one.

0x10011132

An attempt to detect a file failed.

Check whether the file is write-protected and whether another process has opened it by locking

it.

0x10013001

An attempt to get a port number from the services file failed.

Check whether the "FANUC_PCFA_CDA" entry has been registered with the services file.

0x10013101 An attempt to get a port number from the services file failed. Check whether the

"FANUC_PCFA_CDA" entry has been registered with the services file.

0x1002010a A download file is not found.

Check whether there is a download file.

0x1002010b A download file cannot be opened.

Check the file attribute of the download file.

0x1002010c A download file has no O number.

Check whether the file contains an O number.

0x1002010e An error occurred in reading a download file.

0x10020111 An error occurred in closing a download file.

0x10020112 An error occurred in moving a file to be written over for uploading.

Check the file attribute of the file.

0x10020113 An error occurred in creating an upload file.

Check whether the directory setting is correct.

0x10020115 An error occurred in writing an upload file.

0x10020118 An error occurred in closing an upload file.

If a directory on the network is used, check that the network is normal.

0x10022011

Data whose highest bit (bit 8) is 1 was found.

Check to see whether the NC program to be transferred is using invalid characters (such as

kanji or half-size katakana).

Refer to Section 4.2, "NC Program Format," in Part I, "Overview," for explanations about the

unicode.

0x10022022

The O number of a download file is 5 digits (9 digits or more when 8-digit numbers are

supported) or more.Keep the O number within four digits (within 8 digits when 8-digit numbers are supported).

0x10022023The O number of a download file is 0.

Do not use 0 as an O number.

0x10022035

The buffer has overflowed in a flash stop state.

Keep the data between the end code of the NC program and an EOF code or the next O

number within several ten bytes.

0x10022052The subprogram calling depth exceeded the limit (8 levels, or 15 levels for Series 30i/31i/32i).

Keep the subprogram calling depth within 8 levels (within 15 levels for Series 30i/31i/32i).

0x10022053

An attempt to open a subprogram file failed.

Check the access permission for subprograms.

Check whether another process is using the subprogram.

0x10022054 There is no file that corresponds to a subprogram call.Check whether the subprogram file exists.

0x10022055 Another O number was found in a subprogram file.

No multivolume configuration is supported for subprogram files.




- 556 -

0x10022056 A subprogram file has no M99.

The subprogram must have M99.

0x10022058

A subprogram name does not match the O number in the file.

The subprogram name must be the same as the O number in the file.

0x10022059M02 or M03 was found in a subprogram file.

Subprogram files cannot use M02 or M03.

0x10022062M99 was found in the main program for an expanded subprogram.

The main program for an expanded subprogram cannot contain M99.

0x10022091

An attempt to open a transfer file failed.

Check the access permission for transfer files.

Check whether another process is using the transfer file.

0x10022092There is no transfer file.

Check whether the transfer file exists.

0x10022093

In a list simultaneous transfer, a transfer file has no O number.

In a list simultaneous transfer, each file specified in the list must have an O number.

(The O number of a list file is used only in a list expansion transfer.)

0x100220a1 A line in the NC program is longer than 320 characters.

Keep any line that contains a subprogram call within 320 characters.

0x100220a2

A P code is 0.

Specify an O number (1 to 9999, or 1 to 99999999 when 8-digit numbers are supported) that is

valid for the P code.

0x100220a3

A P code is higher than 9999.

Specify an O number (1 to 9999, or 1 to 99999999 when 8-digit numbers are supported) that is

valid for the P code.

0x100220a4There are duplicate P codes.

Do not specify more than one P code in a line that contains a subprogram call.

0x100220a5There are duplicate L codes.

Do not specify more than one L code in a line that contains a subprogram call.

0x10022104 An attempt was made to transfer an O number that was already transferred.

Check whether two or more files specified in the list have the same O number.

0x10022105 An MFC file exception occurred.

0x10022107 An attempt to move an original file in overwrite-uploading.

Check whether another process is using the original file.

0x10022108

An attempt to create an upload file failed.

Check whether there is a directory where the upload file is to be created.

Check the access permission for the directory where the upload file is to be created.

0x1002210a An attempt to write to an upload file failed.

0x1002210b An attempt to close an upload file failed.

0x1002210d An attempt was made to perform overwrite-uploading for a read-only file.

Check whether the specified file name and other information are correct.

0x1003000b An attempt to open setup data in the registry of the PC failed.

Check whether the registry of Windows OS is disrupted.

0x1003000c An attempt to read setup data from the registry of the PC failed.

Check whether the registry of Windows OS is disrupted.

0x10040102 The specified machine number is invalid.

0x10040106 The computer name of the specified PC is invalid.

0x1004010f A file name or its full path name has not been specified in downloading or uploading where they

should be.

0x10040110

An O number specified for uploading, downloading, selection, or deletion is invalid.

Check whether the O number is in a range between 1 and 9999 (1 to 99999999 when 8-digit

numbers are supported).

0x10040111 An executable file for a communication process was not found.




- 557 -

0x1004011c(1)

The TCP/IP protocol has not been set up.

Check the Network Protocol tab on Control Panel to see if the TCP/IP protocol has been set up.

Also check whether your PC can share the network with a Windows PC on which the TCP/IP

protocol is already set up and communicate with it using the ping command.

0x1004011c(2)

CDA Manager is not running.

If CDA Manager cannot start normally, check whether "FANUC_PCFA_CDA" has been set up

in the services file.

Each data line in this file must end with a new-line code.

0x1004011d No machine has been specified in the Configuration dialog box.

0x10040121The folder name is incorrect.

Check the folder name.

0x10040122There are too many hierarchical levels.

Check the number of hierarchical levels.

0x10040123Characters that cannot be handled by the NC are included.

Check the character string.

0x10040124The O number is too long.Check whether the O number is within the range from 1 to 9999 (1 to 99999999 when 8-digit

numbers are supported).

0x10040125The file name is too long.


0x10040126The folder name is too long.


0x10040127 A folder or file name is not specified.

0x10040128The specified folder of file name (path format) is incorrect.

Check the specified character string.

0x1004020f Communication Manager is not running.

0x10040210 "FANUC_PCFA_APP" has not been set up in the services file.

0x10060001 An attempt was made to open a list file that is already open.Close the list file, and rerun.

0x10060002

An attempt to open a list file failed.

If you are trying to operate a machine-specific list file, check whether a transfer is completed

and the machine number is valid.

If you are trying to operate an existent original list file, check whether no other process is

operating the same file and the specified file name is correct.

If you are trying to create an original list file, check whether the specified file is correct.

0x10060003The specified list file was not found.

Check whether the specified list file is valid.

0x10060004 An attempt to close a list file failed.

0x10060005 The specified list file is already closed.

0x10060006 Application software attempted to execute a function (mathematical formula) for a transfer auxiliary function (instruction sequence).

Check whether the function call is valid.

0x1006000a

The record flag of a specified record is incorrect.

The flag indicates that the function (mathematical formula) you attempted to operate cannot be

executed. Check the record flag.

0x1006000b An attempt to lock the header field failed.

0x1006000c An attempt to lock a specified record field failed.

0x1006000d A function (mathematical formula) for original list files was executed for a machine-specific list

file.

0x1006000f A function (mathematical formula) for machine-specific files was executed for an original list file.

0x10060010 An attempt to seek a specified record failed.

0x10060011 An attempt to read from a list file failed.

0x10060012 An attempt to read data of an expected size from a list file failed.

Check the contents of the list file.




- 558 -

0x10060013 An attempt to write to a list file failed.

0x10060014 An attempt to write data of an intended size to a list file failed.

Check the contents of the list file.

0x10060015The O number flag of a specified record is incorrect.

Check the specified O number flag.

0x10060016 An attempt to unlock the header field failed.

0x10060017 An attempt to unlock a specified record field failed.

0x10060018

An attempt to open the registry failed.

Check whether the registry is set up correctly.

In the registry, a directory (HELPER_MACHINE_LIST_DIR) where machine-specific list files

are to be created has not been set up.

Set up the registry correctly.

0x10060019 An attempt to read a key from the registry failed.


0x1006001a

An attempt to read a value from the registry failed.


0x1006001bThe header flag for a machine-specific list file does not indicate "transfer in progress."

Check whether the header flag indicates "transfer in progress."

0x1006001c An attempt to modify a record that was already transferred failed.

0x1006001dThe list file does not contain a record having a specified record number.

Check the number of records.

0x1009F001

The PC memory was depleted during execution.

Terminate unnecessary applications or increase the size of the virtual memory to allocate more

memory.

0x1009F004

A machine specified for Ethernet communication has not been connected to the network

correctly.

Check the connection of the Ethernet cable and the setting of the network.

Check whether the "FANUC_C4_SERVER" value in the services file is the same as the "UDPport number" of "ETHPRM" in the NC.

0x1009F005

It is impossible to connect to FANUC C4 Server.

By selecting [Control Panel] - [Service], check whether FANUC C4 Server has started correctly.

Alternatively, check whether "127.0.0.1" has been set in [C4 Server Host Name] in the machine

configuration screen.

Errors returned from NC to computer during communication (0x20020000 to0x2002ffff)

0x2002ffba Command syntax error

0x2002ffb9 Command communication procedure error

0x2002ffce The program number is a negative number.

0x2002ffcd Program number format error

0x2002ffcc The specified axis is not present.

0x2002ffcb Too many data items were requested.

0x2002ffca

No data can be read.

If this error occurs when a tool offset value is read, the offset number may be an illegal value.

If this error occurs when a custom macro variable is read, the macro variable number may be an

illegal value.

If this error occurs when tool life management data is read, the tool group number may be an

illegal value.

0x2002ffc9 The axis command is incorrect.

0x2002ffc6 A request is being executed.

0x2002ffc5 A request is being cancelled.

0x2002ff00 An interrupt request was made.

This error occurs when a reset is made.

0x2002fdff A timeout occurred.




- 559 -

0x2002fdfe The line is busy.

0x2002fdfd There are remaining data.

0x2002fdfc The file name is incorrect.

0x2002fdfb

An open request was refused.

If the error occurs in downloading by FANUC Series 0, the NC may be in the alarm state.

If the error occurs in uploading by FANUC Series 0, the NC may be in the alarm state.

0x2002fdfa An edit request was refused.

0x2002fdf9 Busy state

0x2002fc0c

The selected file is not present.

If this error occurs when an NC program is selected, the desired NC program may not be

present.

0x2002fc0b A warning occurred when a file was selected.

0x2002fc0a A start request was refused.

If this error occurs at a cycle start, the NC may be executing another program.

0x2002fc09

The NC is not in the automatic operation mode.

If this error occurs at a cycle start, the NC may not be in the automatic operation mode.

If this error occurs when an NC program is selected, the NC may not be in a correct mode.

0x2002fc08

A file selection request was refused.

If this error occurs when an NC program is selected, the NC may be executing or editing

another program. If this error occurs with FANUC Series 0, Series 16, or Series 18, the NC may

be in the alarm state.

0x2002fc07 A file deletion request was refused.

0x2002fc06 The file is protected.

0x2002fc05 A file deletion request was refused or caused a warning to be made.

0x2002fc04 An editing request was refused.

0x2002fc03 The directory cannot be found.

0x2002fc02 A directory read request was refused.

0x2002fc01 The directory file name is illegal.

0x2002fba8 An error occurred in the window library on the NC side.

0x2002fba7

The command is not executed.

If this error occurs with FANUC Series 16 or Series 18 when an NC program is deleted, the

specified NC program may be running.

If this error occurs with FANUC Series 0 when an NC Program is deleted, the NC may be in the

alarm state.

0x2002fba6 The machine code is inappropriate.

0x2002fba5

The major data classification is inappropriate.

If this error occurs when an NC variable is read or written, the value of the variable address may

be illegal.

If this error occurs when a custom macro variable is written, for instance, the macro variable

number may be illegal.0x2002fba4 The middle data classification is inappropriate.

0x2002fba3

The minor data classification is inappropriate.

If this error occurs when an NC variable is read or written, the value of the variable address may

be illegal.

If this error occurs when PMC data is written, for instance, the PMC number may be illegal.

0x2002fba2 The data length is inappropriate.

0x2002fba1 The data type is inappropriate.

0x2002fba0 The data is inappropriate.

0x2002fb9f A command error occurred.

0x2002fb9e

The option is not provided.

If this error occurs when a custom macro variable is written, the option corresponding to the

specified macro variable number may not be provided.If this error occurs when a tool offset value is written, the option corresponding to the specified

offset number may not be provided.




- 560 -

0x2002fb9d

The file cannot be found.

If this error occurs when an NC program is deleted, the specified NC program may not be

present.

0x2002fb9c The file is protected.

0x2002fb9b The directory area cannot be found.

0x2002fb9a The NC memory area is insufficient.

0x2002fb99 Reading is inhibited.

0x2002fb98

Writing is inhibited.

If this error occurs when an NC program is deleted, the specified NC program may be

protected.

0x2002fb97 A write attempt ended in failure.

0x2002fb96 A read attempt ended in failure.

0x2002fb95 The device is not effective.

0x2002fb94 The system is not ready.

0x2002fb93

The status is not effective.

If this error occurs with FANUC Series 0 or Series 15 when an NC program is deleted, the

specified NC program may be busy.

0x2002fb92 The data does not match.

0x2002fb46 The window expansion option is not provided.

0x2002fb45 Another error occurred.

0x2002f62d

Writing is inhibited.

If this error occurs when data is downloaded, files with file numbers in the nine thousands or

eight thousands may be protected.

0x2002f625The data cannot be found.

If this error occurs in uploading, the NC program may not be present.

0x2002f61f The program has already been present.

If this error occurs in downloading, the program may be overwrite-protected.

0x2002f61eThe NC memory area is insufficient.If this error occurs in downloading, the NC memory may have no free space.



B-75074EN/04 APPENDIX E.DETAILS OF CIMPLICITY POINTS

- 561 -

E DETAILS OF CIMPLICITY POINTS

This appendix explains CIMPLICITY points used by i CELL.

These points can also be used on a screen added by the user. In this case,

however, the user is allowed only to read points. The user must not

write points.

These points created by i CELL are not covered by the CIMPLICITY

point license. When the user purchases a point license, the user is to

calculate the number of user-specific points added by the user other

than i CELL points (for example, the number of those peripheral device points that are added by using PLC) and purchase a license matching

the number of those points.



E.DETAILS OF CIMPLICITY POINTS APPENDIX B-75074EN/04

- 562 -

E.1 OVERVIEW

Restrictions by communication protocolA point is created for a machine of which communication protocol is

FOCAS2/Ethernet or DNC2. No point is created for a machine with the

reader/puncher interface.

E.1.1 CIMPLICITY Points and i CELL

CIMPLICITY manages data as a "point." A point is a variable that has a

defined value. i CELL displays CIMPLICITY point values on the

screen, adds them up, and saves the sum to a database.

The following chart shows the relationships between CIMPLICITY

points and i CELL.

i CELL configuration

screen

CIMPLICITY

i CELL

CIMPLICITY point

NC connection function

NC NC NC

<1>

<2><3>

<3>

<4>

<5>

<5>

i CELL setting

<6>

<6>

<6>

<1> The i CELL configuration screen reads the point setting of

CIMPLICITY.

<2> By acting on the i CELL configuration screen, the operator adds

machines and modifies i CELL functions. According to what the

operator performed, the i CELL configuration screen changes the

CIMPLICITY points.<3> The i CELL configuration screen saves the i CELL setting. It also

reflects a change to the CIMPLICITY point setting to

CIMPLICITY.

<4> The NC connection function reads the i CELL setting.

<5> The NC connection function communicates with the NC

according to the i CELL setting it read. Values read from the NC

are reflected to the CIMPLICITY points, and the CIMPLICITY

point values are written to the NC.

<6> i CELL reads the i CELL setting, and reads and writes

CIMPLICITY point values according to the i CELL setting. It also

displays the point values on the screen, and adds them up and

saves them to a database.




- 563 -

E.1.2 Point Naming Rules

iCELL uses two types of points. One type (machine-specific point) is

used for individual machines separately, and the other type (i CELL

-common point) is used in common throughout i CELL.

Machine-specific pointsThe name of each machine-specific point consists of two parts. The first

part identifies the machine and series, and the second part identifies the

type of the point. A period "." is used to separate the parts. The format

of the point name is:

FNCxxxy.<identifier>

where:

FNC is a fixed character string.

xxx is a three-digit machine number. It can range from 001 to 999.

y is a two-digit series number.

Point type y value

- If there is only one NC series, all points for that machine

- If there are two or more NC series, points for series 1

- If there are two or more NC series, points not related to series

01

If there are two or more NC series, points for series 2 02

<Identifier> identifies a point type.

Example)

The name of a point is "FNC0011.F_AL" if the machine number is

1, the series number is 1, and the identifier is "F_AL" (NC alarm).

i CELL -common pointsThe i CELL -common points are independent of machines. The name of

each i CELL -common point consists of two parts. The first part is a

fixed character string, and the second part identifies the point name. A

period "." is used to separate the parts. The format of the point name is:

FNCSYSP.<identifier>

where:

FNCSYSP is a fixed character string.

<identifier> identifies a point type.




- 564 -

E.2 LIST OF POINTS

E.2.1 Machine-Specific Points

The following table summarizes machine-specific points. The meaning

of each column header of the following table is as follows:

Point name

Indicates the name of a CIMPLICITY point. The first part

"FNCxxxy." of the point name is left out; only the identifier

is indicated.

Data type Indicates the type of CIMPLICITY point data.

Reading

interval

Indicates the interval at which the point value is updated.

Characters E and D indicate the communication protocol to

which a point is applied.E : FOCAS2/Ethernet

D : DNC2

i CELL

functionIndicates the i CELL function for which the point is used.

Value and

meaning

Indicates the value that the point can take and the meaning

of the value.

Each value of the item "i CELL function" corresponds to the function

name for a check box displayed on the Function tab of the i CELL

machine screen. (To open the i CELL machine screen, select i CELL

and Machine from the tree in the i CELL configuration screen, and

double-click a desired machine in the grid.) For example, if you turn onthe overview function in the i CELL configuration screen, the point that

has the i CELL function value "Overview" in the following table is

added to CIMPLICITY. If you turn off the function, the related points

are deleted from CIMPLICITY.

Clicking the Disable All button in the i CELL machine screen deletes

all points related to the machine of interest from CIMPLICITY.

The NC connection function reads values from the NC regularly, and

writes them to CIMPLICITY points. The item "Reading interval" in the

table indicates the interval at which the values are read. If the value of a

CIMPLICITY point is changed, the NC connection function writes thenew value to the NC immediately.

NOTE As the PMC address used for a point, the PMCaddress for the first path of an NC is indicated.When a multipath NC is connected, the PMCaddress for each path is used.




- 565 -

Point name Data typeReadinginterval

i CELL

functionValue and meaning

F_AL BOOL

E : One

secondD : Ten

seconds

Overview

NC alarm signal. The value is 1 if there is an alarm

condition in the NC. Otherwise, it is 0. It is 0 also if the NC power is off.

F_ALARM0 INTE : One

second Alarm

Alarm number not related to NC axes. The value is-1 if no alarm condition has occurred.

F_ALARM1 to 32 INTE : One

second Alarm

Alarm number related to NC axes. The last number is an axis number. The value is -1 if no alarmcondition has occurred. Points as many as thenumber of NC axes are created.

F_ALARMNO0

INT Array witheightelements

E : Onesecond

Alarm Alarm number not related to NC axes. If more thanone alarm condition occurs simultaneously, up toeight are held in the array.

F_ALARMNO1 to 32

INT

Array witheightelements

E : Onesecond

Alarm

Alarm number related to NC axes. The last number

is an axis number. If more than one alarm conditionoccurs simultaneously, up to eight are held in thearray. Points as many as the number of NC axesare created.

F_ALARMTYPE0 INT Array witheightelements

E : Onesecond

Alarm

Alarm attribute number not related to NC axes. If more than one alarm condition occurssimultaneously, up to eight are held in the array.Thie is used in Series 30i/31i/32i.

F_ALARMTYPE1 to 32INT Array witheightelements

E : Onesecond

Alarm

Alarm attribute number related to NC axes. The lastnumber is an axis number. If more than one alarmcondition occurs simultaneously, up to eight areheld in the array. Points as many as the number of NC axes are created.Thie is used in Series 30i/31i/32i.

F_ALI DINT D : Tenseconds Alarm Bit flag indicating the alarm occurrence status

F_COM_ACTIVATE BOOL - -(Note 1)

Point of an individual machine indicating whether information is collected in the background. Thevalue is 1 if the information is collected. The value is0 if the information is not collected.

(Note 3)

F_COM_COND BOOL - -(Note 1)

Point of an individual path indicating whether information is being collected in the background.The value is 1 if the information is being collected.The value is 0 if the information is not beingcollected.

F_COM_ON BOOL - -(Note 1)

Point for specifying the value of F_COM_ACTIVATE for each path. The value is thesame as the value of F_COM_ACTIVATE. Themeaning of the value is also the same as that of F_COM_ACTIVATE.

F_COM_RETRY BOOL - -(Note 1)

Point used when "Selected by Point" is selected for

"Re-connection on Communication Error" in

communication setup on the setup screen.

F_COM_STATUS BOOL - -(Note 1)

Point of the ORed F_COM_COND value of eachmachine. The F_COM_COND values of all thepaths are ORed. The meaning of the value is thesame as that of F_COM_COND.

(Note 3)




- 566 -


i CELL


F_ESP BOOL

E : Onesecond

D : Tenseconds

Overview

NC emergency stop signal. The value is 0 if the NC

is at an emergency stop. Otherwise, it is 1. It isinvalid if the NC power is off.The NC types and PMC addresses are as listedbelow.FS30i/31i/32i Bit 4 of G0008

FS16i/18i/21i Bit 4 of G0008

Power Mate i D/H Bit 4 of G0008

FS0i Bit 4 of G0008

FS15 Bit 4 of G0000FS0 Bit 4 of G0121

F_ESPV BOOL

E : Onesecond

D : Tenseconds

OverviewNC emergency stop signal. The value is 0 if the NCis at an emergency stop. Otherwise, it is 1. It is 1also if the NC power is off.

F_F0

BOOL Array witheightelements

E : Onesecond

D : Tenseconds

Overview

Eight bits (No. 1) of the PMC area for indicating thestate of the NC.The NC types and PMC addresses are as listedbelow.FS30i/31i/32i F0000

FS16i/18i/21i F0000

Power Mate i D/H F0000

FS0i F0000

FS15 F0000FS0 F0148

It is invalid if the NC power is off.

F_F1

BOOL Array witheightelements

E : Onesecond

D : Tenseconds

Overview

Eight bits (No. 2) of the PMC area for indicating thestate of the NC.The NC types and PMC addresses are as listed

below.FS30i/31i/32i F0001

FS16i/18i/21i F0001

Power Mate i D/H F0001

FS0i F0001

FS15 F0001FS0 F0149

It is invalid if the NC power is off.

F_MA BOOL

E : Onesecond

D : Tenseconds

OverviewNC ready signal. The value is 1 if the NC is ready tooperate. Otherwise, it is 0. It is 0 also if the NCpower is off.

F_NCC_ERROR STRING - -(Note 1)

Indicates an error in the NC connection function

F_OP BOOL

E : One

secondD : Ten

seconds

Overview

NC automatic operation-in-progress signal. The

value is 1 if the NC is in automatic operation.Otherwise it is 0. It is 0 also if the NC power is off.

F_OPM BOOLE : One

second ALARM

The value is 1 if there is an operator message.Otherwise, the value is 0.

F_OPMM1 to 4

STRING Array with255elements

E : Onesecond

ALARMCharacter string of the operator message. This isvalid if F_OPM is 1. Points 1 to 4 are createdaccording to the number of NC operator messages.

F_ OPMN1 to 4 INTE : One

second ALARM

Operator message number. The value is -1 if thereis no operator message. Points 1 to 4 are createdaccording to the number of NC operator messages.

F_POINT_GROUP BOOL - -(Note 1)

Used within the NC connection function

F_PWR BOOL - -(Note 1)

Indicates whether the NC power is on or off. The

value is 1 if the power is on. Otherwise, it is off.




- 567 -


i CELL


F_RUNTIME_A_CNT1 DINT

E : Oneminute

D : Tenseconds

MachiningResult

Number of parts processed by the NC.

The NC types and parameter number are as listedbelow.FS30i/31i/32i 6711

FS16i/18i/21i 6711

Power Mate i D/H 6711

FS0i 6711

FS15 107

F_RUNTIME_A_CNT2 DINT

E : Oneminute

D : Tenseconds

MachiningResult

Total number of parts processed by the NC.The NC types and parameter number are as listedbelow.FS30i/31i/32i 6712

FS16i/18i/21i 6712


FS0i 6712

FS15 108

F_RUNTIME_A_CUT1 DINT

E : Oneminute

D : Tenseconds

MachiningResult

Cumulative cutting time (in millisecond units) of theNC.The NC types and parameter number are as listedbelow.FS30i/31i/32i 6753

FS16i/18i/21i 6753


FS0i 6753

FS15 103

F_RUNTIME_A_CUT2 DINT

E : Oneminute

D : Tenseconds

Machining

Result

Cumulative cutting time (in minute units) of the NC.The NC types and parameter number are as listedbelow.FS30i/31i/32i 6754

FS16i/18i/21i 6754Power Mate i D/H 6754

FS0i 6754

FS15 104

F_RUNTIME_A_OP1 DINT

E : Oneminute

D : Tenseconds

MachiningResult

NC operation time (in millisecond unites)(cumulative time during which automatic operationis in progress).The NC types and parameter number are as listedbelow.FS30i/31i/32i 6751

FS16i/18i/21i 6751


FS0i 6751

FS15 101

F_RUNTIME_A_OP2 DINT

E : Oneminute

D : Tenseconds

MachiningResult

NC operation time (in minute unites) (cumulativetime during which automatic operation is inprogress).The NC types and parameter number are as listedbelow.FS30i/31i/32i 6752

FS16i/18i/21i 6752


FS0i 6752

FS15 102




- 568 -


i CELL


F_RUNTIME_A_PON DINT

E : Oneminute

D : Tenseconds

MachiningResult

Cumulative time during which the NC power is on

(in minute units).The NC types and parameter number are as listedbelow.FS30i/31i/32i 6750

FS16i/18i/21i 6750


FS0i 6750

FS15 100

F_SA BOOL

E : Oneminute

D : Tenseconds

OverviewNC servo ready signal. The value is 1 if the servosection can run normally. Otherwise, it is 0. It is 0also if the NC power is off.

F_SPL BOOL

E : Oneminute

D : Tenseconds

OverviewNC automatic operation pausing signal. The valueis 1 if the NC is not in automatic operation.

Otherwise, it is 0. It is 0 also if the NC power is off.

F_STATUS REAL

E : Oneminute

D : Tenseconds

Overview

NC statesCreated from F_OP, SA, STL, SPL, MA, AL, andESPV. For details, see "Displaying the overviewstatus."1: Power off. 2: At a stop. 3: In a pause.4: Running. 5: Reset. 6 At an emergency stop.7: NC ready. 9: Alarm.

F_STATUS1 REAL

E : Oneminute

D : Tenseconds

OverviewHolds a temporary value for calculating F_STATUS(No. 1).

F_STATUS2 REAL

E : One

minuteD : Tenseconds

Overview Holds a temporary value for calculating F_STATUS(No. 2).

F_STL BOOL

E : Oneminute

D : Tenseconds

OverviewNC automatic operation starting signal. The value is1 if the NC is starting automatic operation.Otherwise, it is 0. It is 0 also if the NC power is off.

F_WKPC_END REALE : One

minute


Used by the NC to inform the PC of the end of machining.

(Note 2)

F_WKPC_END_OK REALE : One

minute


Used by the PC to inform the NC that the PC hasconfirmed the end of machining when handshakingis used.

(Note 2)

F_WKPC_HANDSHAKE REALE : One

minute


Used by the NC to inform the PC whether to use

handshaking.(Note 2)

F_WKPC_LAST_ID REALE : One

minute


Used by the NC to inform the PC of a process endID.

(Note 2)

F_WKPC_O_NUM REALE : One

minute


Used by the NC to inform the PC of the O number for machining.

(Note 2)

F_WKPC_S_NUM REALE : One

minute


Used by the NC to inform the PC of the sequencenumber that identifies a machining process.

(Note 2)

F_WKPC_START REALE : One

minute


Used by the NC to inform the PC of the beginning of machining.

(Note 2)

F_WKPC_START_OK REAL E : Oneminute


Used by the PC to inform the NC that the PC hasconfirmed the beginning of machining whenhandshaking is used.

(Note 2)




- 569 -


i CELL


F_WKPC_USER_ID REAL

E : One

minute

Workpiece

processresult

Used by the NC to inform the PC of the user area

ID. (Note 2)

F_WKPC_WORK_ID REALE : One

minute


Used by the NC to inform the PC of the workpieceID.

(Note 2)

NOTE1 If one of these points is added, the others of them

are also added together. Each of these points isdeleted if all of the others are deleted.

2 See Subsection 2.9.1, "Workpiece Process Result,"in Part III, "Setting," for detailed descriptions about

the points related to workpiece process results andtheir meaning.

3 If the communication protocol is DNC2, multipleprocesses cannot be handled simultaneously. Totransfer an NC program file from the NC programmanagement screen, the background informationcollection from the NC must be stopped.If the machine selected on the NC programmanagement screen uses DNC2, change the valueof F_COM_ACTIVATE to 0 in order to stop thebackground information collection from the NC.Check the F_COM_STATUS value to see that theinformation collection has stopped. TheF_COM_STATUS value changes from 1 to 0 whenthe information collection stops. Then, an NCprogram file can be transferred. When the machineis deselected (that is, when the NC program filetransfer stops), return the F_COM_ACTIVATE valueto 1 in order to resume information collection fromthe NC.For the F_COM_STATUS value and overview status

display, see the subsequent description.




- 570 -

Displaying the overview statusThe status character strings such as [Running] and their display colors

on the overview screen are determined as follows.

<1> Read the PMC area to obtain the OP, SA, STL, SPL, MA, AL, and

ESP signals of the NC. To do this, create the following points.

Then, read the data.

PMC areaPoint

Bit

CNC

Name

Array

element

count

Address#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

F_F0 8 F0000 OP SA STL SPL

F_F1 8 F0001 MA AL

FS30i/31i/32i

FS16i/18i/21i

Power Mate iFS0i

F_ESP None G0008 ESP

F_F0 8 F0000 MA SA OP STL SPL AL

F_F1 8 F0001FS15, FS15i


F_F0 8 F0148 OP SA STL SPL

F_F1 8 F0149 MA ALFS0


<2> Create F_OP, F_SA, F_STL, F_SPL, F_MA, and F_AL from the

points listed above. Create F_ESPV from the ESP signal.

<3> Calculate F_STATUS from the combination of F_OP, F_SA,

F_STL, F_SPL, F_MA, F_AL, and F_ESPV. On the basis of theF_STATUS value, the color animation function of the screen

determines the character string to be displayed and its color on the

overview screen.

In addition to the PMC area signals listed above, F_COM_COND is

also checked.

If the machine is connected by DNC2, the value of F_COM_COND

becomes 0 while the NC program management screen is displayed. In

the meantime, neither PMC area signals nor machining results are

collected.




- 571 -

F_STATUS is calculated and displayed on the overview screen, as

illustrated below

F_STATUS calculation formulae and statuses displayed on the overview screen

2= StoppedColorless

F_MA=0

1= Power Off Gray

Yes

F_ESPV=0

6= EmergencyRed

Yes

F_AL=1

9=AlarmRed

Yes

F_OP=0

5=ResetColorless

Yes

F_STL=1

4= RunningGreen

Yes

F_SPL=1

3= HoldColorless

Yes

F_SA=0

7= NC ReadyColorless

YesF_COM_ COND=0

Com.HoldGray

Yes

E.2.2 i CELL -Common Points

The following table summarizes only the i CELL -common points that

are related to the user.

In the same manner as for machine-specific points, the identifiers (the

second part) of each point name are indicated.

i CELL -common points always reside in the system, and their values

indicate the current status of the system. Therefore, the table does not

have the "i CELL function" or "reading interval" column, unlike the

table for machine-specific points.

Point name Data type Range and meaning of value

F_ALARM BOOL The value becomes 1 if an alarm condition occurs in even one of the connected

machines. It is 0 if no alarm condition has occurred in any machine.

F_OPM BOOL The value becomes 1 if at least one connected machine has an operator message.

The value becomes 0 if all the machines have no operator message.

F_WARNING BOOL The value is 1 if any warning condition has occurred in i CELL. Otherwise, it is 0.



F.SETTING UP PC APPENDIX B-75074EN/04

- 572 -

F SETTING UP PC

This appendix describes the settings of various PCs.

For the setting of IIS, see Section F.1, "SETTING UP IIS".

For the setting of an FTP server, see Section F.2, "SETTING UP FTP

SERVER".



B-75074EN/04 APPENDIX F.SETTING UP PC

- 573 -

F.1 SETTING UP IIS

This appendix explains how to set up IIS for use by the i CELL Web

function. Once you are finished with installing i CELL, you set up IIS.

NOTEIf the OS is Windows NT, see subsections F.1.1 andF.1.2 written for Windows NT. If the OS is Windows2000, see subsections F.1.3 and F.1.4 written for Windows 2000.

F.1.1 Adding the Access Permission for Directories for Windows NT

The WEB directory is in the directory where i CELL is installed. The

access permission for this directory is given to the "IUSR_ICELL" user

created according to Subsection 2.2.6, "Registering the New User

"IUSR_ICELL" (Web Function) for Windows NT," in Part II,

"Installation."

1. Select [Properties] of [WEB Directory]→ [Access Permission] of

[Security]→ [Add]→ [Show Users], and add the "IUSR_ICELL"

user by specifying the type of the access permission as [Full

Control].




- 574 -

2. In the dialog box shown above, click [OK] to give the

"IUSR_ICELL" user the [Full Control] access permission for the

[WEB Directory.]

F.1.2 Constructing Web Sites for Windows NT

Making the i CELL Web function operable requires constructing a Web

site on IIS.

1. Select [Start] → [Program]→ [Windows NT 4.0 Option Pack] →

[Microsoft Internet Information Server,] and click [Internet

Service Manager] to start the Microsoft Management Console.

2. Stop the [Default Web Site], which is initially set up, by selecting

it with the mouse, right-clicking, and selecting Stop.




- 575 -

3. Add "i CELL Web Site" by selecting the computer icon with the

mouse, right-clicking, and selecting [New] → [Web Site.]

4. The "New Web Site" wizard screen opens. Enter "i CELL Web

Site" in the [Web Site Description], and click [Next.]

5. If you do not restrict the IP addresses to be used on the Web site,

click [Next.]




- 576 -

6. Specify the WEB directory (for example,

C:\FANUC\ICELL\WEB) in the directory where i CELL is

installed as the path to your home directory, and click [Next.]

7. Make sure that [Allow Read Access] and [Allow Script Access]

are on as the access permissions for your home directory, and click

[Finish.]

8. Select [iCELL Web Site,] right-click, and click Properties.




- 577 -

9. Click the Directory Security tab, and click [Edit] for Anonymous

Access and Authentication Control.

10. Click [Edit] for [Allow Anonymous Access] on [Authentication

Methods.]

11. Enter "IUSR_ICELL" in [Username] on "Anonymous User Account," and leave [Password] blank, then click [OK.]




- 578 -

12. Click [OK] on "Authentication Methods."

13. Click the Documents tab, delete "Default.htm" and "Default.asp,"

and add "Login.asp" as "Default Document," and then click [OK.]

14. Select [iCELL Web Site] with the mouse, right-click, and click

[Start.]




- 579 -

15. [iCELL Web Site] opens.

Now you have constructed the Web site.

When exiting Microsoft Management Console, you will see the

following message. Click [Yes.]




- 580 -

F.1.3 Adding the Access Permission for Directories for Windows2000

The WEB directory is in the directory where i CELL is installed. The

access permission for this directory is given to the "IUSR_ICELL" user

created according to Subsection 2.1.5, "Registering the New User

"IUSR_ICELL" (Web Function) for Windows 2000," in Part II,

"Installation."

1. Select [Properties] of [WEB Directory] → [Add] of [Security] →

[Show Users], and add the [IUSER_ICELL] user, then click "OK".

2. In the Name list box, select [iCELL], check the Allow check box

of Full Control, then click [OK].




- 581 -

F.1.4 Constructing Web Sites for Windows 2000

Making theiCELL Web function operable requires constructing a Web

site on IIS.

1. Select [Start] → [Program] → [Administrative Tools] → [Internet

Service Manager]. The "Internet Information Services" start.

2. Stop the [Default Web Site], which is initially set up, by selecting

it with the mouse, right-clicking, and selecting Stop.

3. Add "iCELL Web Site" by selecting the computer icon with the

mouse, right-clicking, and selecting [New] → [Web Site.]

4. The "Web Site Creation Wizard" screen appears. Click [Next].




- 582 -

5. Enter [iCELL Web site] in the [Description] box. Then, click

[Next].

6. If you do not restrict the IP addresses to be used on the Web site,

click [Next.]

7. Specify the WEB directory (for example, H:\Program

Files\FANUC\iCELL\WEB) in the directory where i CELL is

installed as the path to your home directory, and click [Next.]




- 583 -

8. Check that [Read] and [Run scripts [such as ASP]] are selected as

access permissions for the home directory. Then, click [Next].

9. Click [Finish.]

10. Select [iCELL Web Site,] right-click, and click Properties.




- 584 -

11. Click the Directory Security tab, and click [Edit] for Anonymous

Access and Authentication Control.

12. Click [Edit] for [Anonymous access] on "Authentication

Methods."

13. Enter "IUSR_ICELL" in [Username] on "Anonymous User

Account," and leave [Password] blank, then click [OK.]

14. Click [OK] on "Authentication Methods."




- 585 -

15. Click the Documents tab, delete "Default.htm" and "Default.asp,"

and add "Login.asp" as "Default Document," and then click [OK.]

16. Select [iCELL Web Site] with the mouse, right-click, and click

[Start.]

17. [iCELL Web Site] opens.

Now you have constructed the Web site.




- 586 -

F.2 SETTING UP FTP SERVER

This section explains how to set up an FTP server on the PC.

NOTEIf the OS is Windows NT, see subsection F.2.1written for Windows NT. If the OS is Windows 2000,see subsection F.2.2 written for Windows 2000.

F.2.1 Peer Web Services for Windows NT

Installing Per Web Services

1 Select [Start] > [Settings] > [Control Panel] > [Network].2 In the [Network] dialog box, select the [Service] tag.

3 Check if "Microsoft Peer Web Server" exists in [Network

Services]. If "Microsoft Peer Web Server" does not exist, it needs

to be installed. So, click the [Add] button. If "Microsoft Peer Web

Server" exists, an FTP server needs to be additionally installed.

Select [Start] > [Programs] > [Microsoft Peer Web Services] >

[Peer Web Services Setup], then proceed to 5.

4 When you click the [Add] button, the [Select Network Service]

dialog box appears. Select "Microsoft Peer Web Server" then click

the [OK] button.

5 The [Peer Web Services Setup] dialog box appears. In [Options],

check "Internet Service Manager" and "FTP Service". (Check other services as required.) After checking the services, click the

[OK] button.

6 The [Publishing Directories] dialog box appears. Set the root

directory to be accessed by FTP, then click the [OK] button.

7 The installation of "Microsoft Peer Web Services" starts.




- 587 -

Setting an FTP server 1 Select [Start] > [Programs] > [Microsoft Peer Web Services] >

[Internet Service Manager].

2 The [Microsoft Internet Service Manager] dialog box appears.

Select a computer whose [Service] is set to "FTP", then execute

[Properties] > [Service Properties] on the menu.

3 The [FTP Service Properties] dialog box appears. Display the

[Service] tag, then uncheck the [Allow only anonymous

connections] check box, then click the [OK] button.

4 This completes the setting of an FTP server of Peer Web Services.




- 588 -

Setting a login user 1 Select [Start] > [Programs] > [Administrative Tools] > [User

Manager].

2 Select [User] > [New User] from the menu.

3 The [New User] dialog box appears. Enter necessary information

such as a user name.

4 Click the [Groups] button, then set a group to which you belong.

Depending on the group set here, the actual read/write access right

can be affected when FTP-based communication is performed. So,

set a group carefully.

5 Click the [OK] button. The screen display returns to the [New

User] dialog box.

6 When you click the [OK] button, the user name is registered, and

you can log in using the user name and password.




- 589 -

F.2.2 Internet Information Service for Windows 2000

Installing Internet Information Service (IIS)1 Set the CD-ROM of Windows 2000.

2 Click [Install Add-On Components].

3 Select [Internet Information Services (IIS)], then click the

[Details] button.

4 The [Internet Information Services (IIS)] dialog box appears.

Check [File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Server].

5 Click the [OK] button. The screen display returns to the previous

screen. Click the [Next] button to install the necessary files.




- 590 -

Setting an FTP server 1 Select [Start] > [Settings] > [Control Panel].

2 Start [Administrative Tools] by double-clicking.

3 Double-click [Internet Services Manager], then start [Internet

Information Services].

4 Select a computer, then display the menu by right-clicking, then

select Properties.

5 Select [FTP Service] in Master Properties, then click the [Edit]

button.

6 Select the [Home Directory] tag.




- 591 -

7 Check [Read] and [Write] of [FTP Site Directory]. As [Directory

Listing Style], [MS-DOS] is selected by default. However, it is

recommended to check [UNIX]. When a file is displayed in the

UNIX format, whether the file is accessible can be determined.

8 Upon completion of setting, click the [Apply] button.

9 The dialog box shown above is displayed. Select [Default FTP

Site] then click the [OK] button. With the standard [Default FTP

Site], the directory "\Inetpub\ftproot" (drive where Windows 2000

is installed) becomes the home directory. Only those directories

under this directory can be accessed. So, with the default setting, NC programs need to be managed under this directory.




- 592 -

10 To access a directory other than this directory, a new FTP site

needs to be created. In this case, select and right-click a computer

in the [Internet Information Services] dialog box of step 3 above,

then select [New] > [FTP Site] from the menu, then set a home

directory and so forth.

If a new FTP site is created, make a setting in the [Internet

Information Services] dialog box of step 3 above so that the

created FTP site is enabled. For details, refer to online help

information and so forth.

Setting a login user 1 Select [Start] > [Settings] > [Control Panel].

2 Double-click the icon of [Users and Passwords].

3 Click the [Add] button, then enter necessary information such as a

user name.

4 Click the [Next] button, then enter a password for the specified

user name.




- 593 -

5 Click the [Next] button, then set an access right to be granted.

Depending on the access right set here, the actual access right for

reading from/writing to files can be affected when FTP-based

communication is performed. So, set an access right carefully.

6 Click the [Finish] button. The user name is registered, and the user

can log in using the user name and password.



G.CONNECTION TO THE INTERNET APPENDIX B-75074EN/04

- 594 -

G CONNECTION TO THE INTERNET

This appendix explains a sample contract for dialup connection.



B-75074EN/04 APPENDIX G.CONNECTION TO THE INTERNET

- 595 -

G.1 EXAMPLE CONTRACT FOR DIALUP CONNECTION

As for a dialup connection method, your Internet service provider will

usually give you a work procedure that matches the provider's facility.

You should use this work procedure rather than that described below.

The following are an example contract and setting method presented for

reference purposes.

If you enter into a contract for dialup connection with an Internet

service provider, you receive the following information.

1. Access point (telephone number)

0555-30-xxxx

2. Dialup authentication IDtest123

3. Dialup authentication password

xY3PU

4. Primary DNS server IP address

202.248.xxx.yyy

5. Secondary DNS server IP address

202.219.aaa.bbb

6. SMTP server name or IP address

smtp.test.com

7. POP server name or IP address

pop.test.com

8. Mail accountuser123

9. Mail password

TR4EW

10. Mail address

[email protected]

Set items 1, 2, and 3 in your dialup router.

Enter items 4 and 5 in "DNS" of "Microsoft TCP/IP Properties."



G.CONNECTION TO THE INTERNET APPENDIX B-75074EN/04

- 596 -

See Subsection 2.1.3, "Setting the DNS (Mail Function) For Windows

XP," Subsection 2.2.3, "Setting the DNS (Mail Function) For Windows

2000," or Subsection 2.3.3, "Setting the DNS (Mail Function) For

Windows NT," in Part II, "Installation," for details.

Enter item 6 in "Mail Server" of "Mailer Configuration."

Enter item 10 in "Mail Source Address" of "Mailer Configuration."

See Section 3.2, "Mailer," in Part III, "Setting," for details.

You do not need to enter item 7, 8, and 9 because the i CELL mail

function receives no mail at the PC where i CELL is running.



B-75074EN/04 APPENDIX H.CALLING FANUC LADDER-III

- 597 -

H CALLING FANUC LADDER-III

This appendix describes how to start FANUC LADDER-III from i

CELL.

NOTE

To use this function, FANUC LADDER-III must bepurchased and installed in addition to i CELL. The i

CELL install CD does not contain FANUCLADDER-III.

H.1 OVERVIEW

If both i CELL and FANUC LADDER-III are installed on a PC,

FANUC LADDER-III can be executed from the i CELL screen for a

machine selected on the overview screen.

This function is enabled regardless of whether i CELL or FANUC

LADDER-III is installed earlier.

NOTE

1 FANUC LADDER-III of Ver. 2.10 or after isnecessary.

2 Before starting FANUC LADDER-III from i CELL,

set up FANUC LADDER-III so that it cancommunicate independently with the NC. For details, refer to the operator's manual of FANUCLADDER-III.

3 FANUC LADDER-III and the NC must be connectedby Ethernet. Use the value input on the i CELL setup

screen as the IP address of the NC.4 If the server PC and viewer PC are configured by

CIMPLICITY viewer, install FANUC LADDER-III toeach PC on which FANUC LADDER-III is to beexecuted. If both the server PC and viewer PCdisplay the FANUC LADDER-III screen, the two PCsrequire FANUC LADDER-III.

5 The screen cannot be displayed in the Web view.



H.CALLING FANUC LADDER-III APPENDIX B-75074EN/04

- 598 -

H.2 OPERATION

To start FANUC LADDER-III, follow these steps.

1 Select a machine on the overview screen.

2 Click the "FANUC LADDER-III" button.

Now, FANUC LADDER-III of the selected NC starts.

NOTEIf FANUC LADDER-III is not installed, this button

is not displayed.



B-75074EN/04 INDEX

i-1

INDEX

<A>

ABOUT THE FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL.................4

About The NC Program Management Window............ 259

ACTIVATING THE i CELL PROJECT.......................237

ACTIVATING THE MAIN MENU ....................... ...... 245

ACTUAL POSITION DISPLAY..................................338

ADDING SCREENS.....................................................382

Adding the Access Permission for Directories for

Windows 2000 ..................... ....................... .................. 580

Adding the Access Permission for Directories for

Windows NT ....................... ....................... ................... 573

ALARM AND WARNING...........................................371

ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY ...................... .............. 348

Allocating Available Drives for Sharing Directories ....209

Automatic Data Backup ........................ ........................ 169

Available drive required for sharing the i CELL

installation directory ...................... ...................... ......... 209

Available drive required for sharing the NC program

root directory.................................................................210

<B>

Back Button...................................................................397

BACKUP ..................... ....................... ...................... ....103

BACKUP AND RESTORATION.................................102

BACKUP DATA DISPLAY.........................................364

BASIC FUNCTIONS....................................................114

Browsing, Editing and Creating New Files in the PC...269

<C>

CALLING FANUC LADDER-III ....................... ......... 597

CANCELING THE SETTINGS ...................... ............. 232CHANGING THE NUMBER OF CONNECTED

MACHINES..................................................................252

Checking CIMPLICITY Viewer Communication.........231

Checking Communication between the Viewer PC and

Each NC........................................................................229

Checking the Conditions for CIMPLICITY Viewer

Operation and Communication .................... ................. 203

CHECKS.......................................................................229

CIMPLICITY Points and i CELL .................................562

CIMPLICITY VIEWER ...................... ........................ .202Clearing History Data ...................... ..................... 350, 354

CNC ..................... ....................... ...................... ................ 9

COMMUNICATION ...................... ....................... .......133Communication Setting.................................................155

Communication with a Data Server (FTP server) .........284

Communication with the NC memory...........................273

Configuring a Large-scale Network

...............487, 492, 496, 502, 506, 511, 517, 522, 527, 532

Configuring a Small-scale Network

...............487, 492, 496, 502, 506, 511, 517, 522, 527, 532

Confirming Backup Archive File Paths.........................105

Confirming Data Server Communication Setting.......... 148

Confirming the Contents of the Backup Archive File ...106

Confirming the FOCAS2/Ethernet Communication

Setting .................... ....................... ....................... .........138

CONNECTION TO THE INTERNET..........................594

Constructing Web Sites for Windows 2000 .................. 581

Constructing Web Sites for Windows NT.....................574

CONTRACT WITH INTERNET SERVICE

PROVIDERS...................................................................26

Copying an Overview Prepared Beforehand................. 252

Copying the Backup Archive File ......................... ........108

Copying, Moving, Deleting and Renaming Files (and

Directories) in the PC....................................................265

Copying, Moving, Deleting, and Renaming Connection

Destination Files (Directories) ....................... ............... 288

Creating a New Connection Destination Directory .......297

Creating New Directories in the PC....................... .......272

Creating Operation Results .................... ....................... ..45

Creation of a Basic Screen ...................... ...................... 389

Creation of a Standard Screen and Function Screen .....392

<D>

Data Backup..................................................................356

Data display processing procedures ...................... 449, 466

Data Restoration............................................................357

Data Server Communication Setting ......................... ....146

Data Server setting screen....................... ...................... 524

DATABASE MAINTENANCE....................................176

Database operation procedure...................... ......... 449, 455

DATABASE SPECIFICATIONS........................ .........425

Description of VBA Scripts ......................... ......... 448, 455

DETAILS OF CIMPLICITY POINTS..........................561Details of List File Batch Transfer Function...................41

Details of List File Expended Transfer Function ............42



INDEX B-75074EN/04

i-2

Details of the Subprogram Batch Transfer Function.......38

Details of the Subprogram Expanded Transfer Function 39

Determination of Basic Items........................................385

DIAGNOSIS................... ....................... ....................... 343

DIALOG BOX CONFIGURATION.............................119

Display Format Alteration...............................................53

Display Information ...................... ...................... 46, 49, 55

DISPLAY TABLE..................... ....................... ............ 201

Displaying a Dialog Box When the Project Has Not

Been Updated................................................................126

Displaying Acquired Data.............................................442

DNC2.................... ...................... ....................... ........... 536

DNC2 Communication Setting .................... ................. 142

Download Tab...............................................................156

Downloading and Uploading NC Programs..................273

<E>

EDIT LIST FILE SCREEN OPERATIONS... .............. 301

Editing List Files...........................................................304

Editing the Overview Screen.........................................253

ERROR CODES ..................... ...................... ................ 550

ErrorMessage...................... ....................... ................... 401

Ethernet parameter screen....................... .............. 498, 503

Event ....................... ...................... ....................... ......... 423

EXAMPLE CONTRACT FOR DIALUP

CONNECTION.............................................................595

Example of Usage ...................... ................... 402, 416, 423

EXAMPLES OF NC OPERATIONS............................535

EXECUTION................................................................232

<F>

File creation ........................ ....................... ................... 392

File Deletion..................................................................358

File List Refreshing................. ........................ ...... 357, 362

File Modification...........................................................400

Flow of Setting..............................................................185

FOCAS2/Ethernet Parameter Screen ............ 484, 489, 513

FOCAS2/Ethernet Screen ..................... ....................... .508

FROM Data Backup......................................................360

FROM Data Deletion ..................... ...................... ......... 363

FROM Data Restoration................................................361

FROM/SRAM DATA BACKUP/RESTORATION......359

<G>General Tab...................................................................152

GENERAL-PURPOSE OBJECTS FOR THE i CELL .396

General-Purpose Tab (Function Switch Tab) Control... 396

<H>

History Data Display.....................................................349

History Signal Setting ..................... ....................... .......354

HOT TO INSTALL CIMPLICITY........................ .......470

How to Change Settings................................................121

HOW TO INSTALL AND REGISTER CIMPLICITY 469

How to Start Installation ..................... ....................... ...471

<I>

i CELL -Common Points...............................................571

i CELL Database....... ....................... ...................... .......426

i CELL Database Configuration....................................426

i CELL MACHINE...................... ...................... ...........161

iCELL_ErrorMessage ..................... ....................... .......401

iCELLDef......................................................................403

iCELLRW ...................... ...................... ....................... ..403

If an Attempt to Reflect Point Settings to

CIMPLICITY Fails ...................... ...................... ...........127

IMPLEMENTATION OF THE MAIL FUNCTION BY

DIAL-UP CONNECTION.... ....................... ................... 64

IMPLEMENTING THE MAIL FUNCTION AND

WEB FUNCTION WITH 24-HOUR CONNECTION ...67

INFORMATION TO BE AUTOMATICALLY SAVED

TO THE TCP/IP SERVICE FILE...................................98

INSTALLATION......................................................91, 92

Installing CIMPLICITY................................................470

Installing CIMPLICITY (Basic Function) for Windows

2000.................................................................................83

Installing CIMPLICITY (Basic Function) for Windows

XP ...................................................................................78

Installing i CELL...........................................................108

Installing IE5.5 (Basic Function) for Windows 2000...... 82

Installing IE5.5 (Basic Function) for Windows NT ........89

Installing IE6.0 (Basic Function) for Windows XP......... 77

Installing IIS 4.0 (Web Function) for Windows NT........88

Installing IIS 5.0 (Web Function) for Windows 2000 .....81

Installing IIS 6.0 (Web Function) for Windows 2003

Server .................... ...................... ....................... ............. 76

Installing New Options with CIMPLICITY HMI .........476

Installing the CIMPLICITY (Basic Function) for

Windows NT .................... ...................... ....................... ..90

Installing the CIMPLICITY Service Pack

(Basic Function) for Windows 2000 ..................... ..........83



B-75074EN/04 INDEX

i-3


(Basic Function) for Windows NT..................................90


(Basic Function) for Windows XP ....................... ........... 78

Internet Information Service for Windows 2000........... 589

ITEM NAME ...................... ....................... ................... 200

ITEMS COMMON TO THE SCREENS ...................... 242

<L>

List File Monitor Operations.........................................311

LIST FILE MONITOR SCREEN OPERATIONS........ 309

LIST FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION.............................40

List File Transfer Monitor and Control Function............42

LIST OF POINTS ...................... ....................... ............ 564

Logon Screen ...................... ....................... ................... 194

<M>

MACHINE COUNT CONFIGURATION .................... 128

Machine Detail Screen ..................... ....................... ......195

MACHINE INFORMATION ....................... ................ 130

MACHINE SELECTION CONTROL..........................418

Machine Selection Screen ..................... ....................... .194

Machine-Specific Points ....................... ....................... .564

Machining Result .................... ...................... ................ 179

MACHINING RESULT......................... ............... 427, 314

MAIL .................... ...................... ....................... ........... 182

MAIL CONFIGURATION...........................................187

Mail Destinations....................... ....................... ............ 183

MAIL FUNCTION ....................... ....................... ........... 63

Mail Message and Message Point ........................ ......... 184

MAILER ...................... ....................... ...................... ....186

MAIN MENU .................... ...................... ..................... 244

Menus............................................................................120

Message Line ...................... ....................... ................... 398

Method...................... ...................... .............. 401, 403, 421

Method of Operation..... ...................... .................. 445, 453

Modification to the Function Switch Tab......................387

<N>

Names of Screen Components ..................... ................. 242

NC DISPLAY AND OPERATION ...................... ..57, 332

NC MAINTENANCE..................... ....................... .59, 344

NC PROGRAM FORMAT....................... ...................... 34

NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT........... .............. 27, 255 NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - FTP CLIENT

SETTINGS....................................................................159

NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT – MACHINE

SETTINGS....................................................................151

NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT ERROR CODES...551

NC PROGRAM TRANSFER ....................... .................. 30

NC Program Transfer by Operating the NC........ ............32

NC Program Transfer by Operating the NC Program

Management Screen .................... ...................... .............. 30

NC SETTING............................... ....................... ..........482

NC SETTINGS ...................... ....................... ................ 179

NETWORK CONFIGURATION ...................... ............. 24

Newly Installing CIMPLICITY HMI........................ ....472

Newly Registering for CIMPLICITY HMI................... 478

<O>

Opening the Configuration Dialog Box......................... 119

Opening the IcellBkupRstr Dialog Box......................... 103

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ..................... ................. 6

Operating the Database with the i CELL ......................425

OPERATION.................... ....................... ............. 246, 598

OPERATION HISTORY DISPLAY ......................... ...351

Operation History Display ...................... ...................... 352

OPERATION MONITOR...............................................44

OPERATION RESULT SCREEN....................... ...........45

Outputting History Data........................................349, 353

OVERVIEW MENU.....................................................247

<P>

PARAMETER SETTING....................... ...................... 341

Parameter setting screen for Data Server functions.......528

Parameter setting screen for the FTP file transfer

function ...................... ....................... ...................... ......518

Peer Web Services for Windows NT.............................586

PERSONAL COMPUTER/HARDWARE......................18

PERSONAL COMPUTER/SOFTWARE .................... ...21

Planned Parts Count Input...............................................54

POINT FOR WEB ....................... ...................... ...........198

Point Naming Rules ....................... ....................... ........563

Precautions to be Observed when Using the Data

Server Functions for the First Time..................... ..497, 523

Precautions to be Observed when using the

FOCAS2/Ethernet Functions for the First Time

..................... ....................... .................. 483, 488, 507, 512

PREFACE ..................... ...................... ...................... .....p-1

PREPARATION ....................... ....................... .......72, 203

PREPARATION (FOR Windows 2000)......... ................ 79



INDEX B-75074EN/04

i-4

PREPARATION (FOR Windows NT)............................84

PREPARATION (FOR Windows XP)............................74

Procedure for Setting the Server PC..............................221

Procedure for Setting the Viewer PC ....................... .....226

PROGRAM CHECK.....................................................340

PROJECT PROPERTY.................................................129

Properties ..................... ....................... ...................... ....410

Property.........................................................................418

Public variables.............................................................408

<R>

READER/PUNCHER ....................... ....................... .....542

Reader/Puncher Communication Setting ...................... 144

Referencing and Editing Connection Destination Files.293

REFERENCING THE ACCESS DATABASE FROM

EXCEL..........................................................................436

REFERENCING THE DATABASE.............................435

Referencing the Database..............................................437

Registering for CIMPLICITY HMI Options and

Upgrading the Functions....................... ....................... .480

Registering the New User "IUSR_ICELL"

(Web Function) for Windows 2000.................................82


(Web Function) for Windows 2003 Server ..................... 77


(Web Function) for Windows NT .................... ............... 89

REGISTERING USE OF CIMPLICITY ...................... 477

Registering Use of CIMPLICITY HMI Software ......... 477

RESTORATION...........................................................108

RunTimeAConfig - Machine Result Setting Table .......427

RunTimeAData - Machining Result Data Table ........... 427

<S>

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS..................... ....................... s-1

SAMPLE MACHINING RESULT SCREEN...............445

SAMPLE WORKPIECES PROCESS RESULT

SCREEN ...................... ....................... ...................... ....452

Saving the Backup Archive File....................................107

SCREEN ADDITION...................................................385

Screen Configuration ..................... ...................... ......... 383

SCREEN OPERATION

........................ .............. 236, 259, 316, 322, 334, 346, 368

SCREEN OPERATION (1) ALARM MESSAGE

SCREEN ...................... ....................... ...................... ....374

SCREEN OPERATION (1) OVERVIEW SCREEN....249

SCREEN OPERATION (2) ALARM LOG DISPLAY

SCREEN .................... ...................... ....................... ......377

SCREEN OPERATION (2) SCREEN LIST FOR

EACH OVERVIEW MACHINE ...................... ............ 251

Screen Switching...................................................384, 395

SCREEN SYSTEM OF THE i CELL...........................383

ScreenID.ini ...................... ....................... ..................... 400

Selecting Information to be Backed Up ........................ 104

Selecting Information to be Restored.......... .................. 108

SEND TEST..................................................................191

SETTING....................... ...................... ....................... ..221

Setting Change and CIMPLICITY Project....................124

Setting Flow ...................... ....................... ..................... 196

Setting for Sharing the Server PC (Required When

Windows XP Is Used) ..................... ....................... .......213

Setting Options..............................................................298

Setting the Connection Host..................................503, 528

SETTING THE DATA SERVER FOR Series

16i/18i/21i-A/B AND Series 0i-B/C .............................497

SETTING THE DATA SERVER FOR Series

30i/31i/32i-A.................................................................523

Setting the DNS (Mail Function) for Windows 2000......81

Setting the DNS (Mail Function) for Windows NT ........86

Setting the DNS (Mail Function) for Windows XP.........76

SETTING THE EMBEDDED Ethernet FOR Series

16i/18i/21i-B ..................... ....................... ..................... 488

SETTING THE EMBEDDED Ethernet FOR Series

30i/31i/32i-A.................................................................512

Setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet Functions....................... 489

Setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet Functions....................... 513

SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet OF THE OPTION

BOARD FOR Series 16i/18i/21i-A/B, Power Mate i,

AND Series 0i-B/C........................................................483

SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet OF THE OPTION

BOARD FOR Series 30i/31i/32i-A...............................507

Setting the FTP file transfer function parameters.......... 493

Setting the FTP File Transfer Functions................ 493, 518

Setting the FTP Server ..................... ..................... 498, 524

Setting the screen variables (screen level variables) .....393

Setting the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows 2000.80

Setting the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows NT...85

Setting the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows XP ...75

Setting up Communication....................................117, 133

SETTING UP DNC2.....................................................533



B-75074EN/04 INDEX

i-5

Setting up FOCAS2/Ethernet Communication.............. 134

SETTING UP FTP SERVER....................... ................. 586

Setting up i CELL .........................................................118

SETTING UP IIS ....................... ....................... ............ 573

Setting up Machine Information....................................117

Setting up NC Program Management............................ 117

Setting Up ODBC (Basic Function) for Windows NT.... 87

SETTING UP PC .................... ...................... ................ 572

SETTING UP READER/PUNCHER............................534

Setting up the Number of Machines According to

Order Password...................... ....................... ................ 115

Setting up the Number of Machines to be Connected

and the Functions to be Used ...................... .................. 117

Setting Up the TCP/IP (Basic Function) for Windows

2000.................................................................................79


NT ..................... ...................... ...................... .................. 84


XP ...................................................................................74

SRAM Data Backup......................................................362

Starting Backup.............................................................106

Starting Restoration.......................................................109

Stopping and Updating the i CELL Project...................125

Structure of Edit List File Screen..................................301

Structure of List File Monitor Screen............................309

SUBPROGRAM TRANSFER FUNCTION................... 36

SWITCHING AMONG THE SCREENS ..................... 239

<T>

TERMINATING THE i CELL PROJECT....................238

TERMINATING THE MAIN MENU ....................... ...246

Timer processing procedures.........................................450

Title Bar ................... ....................... ...................... ........ 397Tool Life ..................... ....................... ...................... .....181

TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT..... ......................... .55, 366

Trigger Point and Trigger Criteria.................................183

<U>

UNINSTALLATION................... ....................... .. 100, 101

Upload Tab....................................................................158

Using CIMPLICITY HMI without License .................. 481

<V>

VARIOUS DATA BACKUP/RESTORATION ........... 355

<W>

Warning and Alarm Lamps.................... ....................... 399

WEB..............................................................................192WEB FUNCTION...........................................................66

WEB INITIAL CONFIGURATION.............................197

Web Screen Flow ..................... ....................... .............. 193

WKPCData - Workpieces Process Result Data Table... 431

WKPCDspLastState - Machining End State Display

Table ..................... ....................... ...................... ...........434

WKPCDspMcnCnd - Progress Status Display Table ....433

WKPCLastStateConfig - Machining End ID Setting ....430

WKPCMcnName - Workpieces Process Result Setting

Table ..................... ....................... ...................... ...........429WKPCPlan - Planned Workpiece Machining Count

Setting Table .................... ...................... ....................... 431

WKPCUserConfig - User Area ID Setting Table.......... 430

WKPCWorkName - Workpiece ID Setting Table......... 430

Work Flows for Adding and Deleting Machines........... 122

Work with the File List in the PC..................................262

Workpiece Machining Result Data ...................... ...........48

WORKPIECE MACHINING RESULTS ....................... 48

Workpiece Process Result....................... ...................... 165

WORKPIECE PROCESS RESULTS ........................ ...320

Workpieces Process Result .................... ....................... 179

WORKPIECES PROCESS RESULT ....................... ....429

WORKPIECES PROCESS RESULT SYSTEM

CONFIGURATION ...................... ....................... .........173



R e v i s

i o n R e c o r d

F A N U C

C I M P L I C I T Y i

C E L L O

P E R A T O R ’ S M A N U A L ( B - 7 5 0 7 4 E N )

0 4

O c t . , 2 0 0 4

- A p p l i c a b l e t o V

e r s i o n 2 . 0

- A p p l i e d t o S e r i e s 3 0 i / 3 1 i / 3 2 i , a n d S e r i e s 0 i ,

W i n d o w s X P , a

n d C I M P L I C I T Y H M I v 6 . 1

- A d d i t i o n o f e x p l a n a t i o n s f o r f u n c t i o n s t o t h e N C

p r o g r a m m a n a

g e m e n t s c r e e n

0 3

S e p . , 2 0 0 3


e r s i o n 1 . 3

- N C p r o g r a m m

a n a g e m e n t i s a p p l i e d t o t h e D a t a

S e r v e r ( F T P s e r v e r ) .

- A d d i t i o n o f e x p l a n a t i o n s r e l a t e d t o A u t o m a t i c d

a t a

b a c k u p f u n c t i o

n

- A d d i t i o n o f e x p l a n a t i o n s r e l a t e d t o U s e r

c u s t o m i z a t i o n

0 2

N o v . , 2 0 0 2


e r s i o n 1 . 2

- A p p l i e d t o D N C 2 a n d R e a d e r / P u n c h e r c o n n e c

t i o n

- A d d i t i o n o f e x p l a n a t i o n s t o u s e o n t h e C I M P L I C I T Y

v i e w e r

0 1

O c t . , 2 0 0 1

E d i t i o n

D a t e

C o n t e n t s

E d i t i o n

D a t e

C o n t e n t s



1/9

SHEETDESCRIPTIONDESIGNDATEEDIT

01

FANUC LTD.

DRAW.NO.Matsukura Newly registered

TITLE: FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL

OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-1

FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL OPERATOR'S MANUAL

Add explanation of Point Customization and CNC Communication Mode 1. Type of applied technical documents

Name FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL OPERATOR'S MANUAL

Spec.No./Version B-75074EN/04

2. Summary of change

Group Name / Outline New, Add,

Correct,

Delete

Applicable

Date

Basic

Function

Add the following addtions and collections

- PREFACE

- II. INSTALLATION 3.1 INSTALLATION

- III . SETTING 2. BASIC FUNCTIONS

- III. SETTING 2.4 PROJECT PROPERTY

- V. USER CUSTOMIZE 2. ADDING SCREENS

Addition

Correction

Immediately

Optional

Function Unit

Maintenance

parts Notice This document is available for A08B-9510-J920#EN version 2.1

Correction Another



2/9


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-1

PREFACE

This manual describes the FANUC CIMPLICITY®

i CELL that operates on

a personal computer (called PC for short). The FANUC CIMPLICITY®

i

CELL is an application that runs on the CIMPLICITY®

HMI Plant Edition.

Using the Ethernet, DNC2, reader/puncher, or Data Server communication

function available with an CNC produced by FANUC, the FANUC

CIMPLICITY®

i CELL transfers data such as NC programs between the

CNC and personalcomputer.

This manual is applicable to FANUC CIMPLICITY®

i CELL Version 2.1.

Related manuals

This manual also covers FANUC NCs, their communication functions, and

CIMPLICITY related to the use of this software.

However, this manual does not cover all required information. Refer to the

following manuals in addition to this manual:

(1) CIMPLICITY HMI Plant Edition

• Online help

(1) Replace the following explanation of the "PREFACE"

(2) Replace the following explanation of the "Related manuals" in the "PREFACE"



3/9


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-1

(3) Replace the following bitmap in item 1 of the "II.INSTALLATION 3.1 INSTALLATION"




4/9


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-1

3. On the installation component select screen, the buttons indicating the

server and viewer components of the CIMPLICITY viewer are

displayed.

• When you want to install i CELL on the server PC of the

CIMPLICITY viewer or does not want to use the CIMPLICITYviewer, select the "server" component.

• When you want to install i CELL on the viewer PC of the

CIMPLICITY viewer, select the "viewer" component.

• When you don't want to install i CELL and you want to create your

specified screens and points, select "CNC Communication Mode"


(5) Replace the following explanation and bitmap in item 3 of the"II.INSTALLATION 3.1 INSTALLATION"



5/9


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-1






6/9


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-1

2 BASIC FUNCTIONS

(--- 3rd paragraph ---)

It is necessary to make it a development server temporarily by using OEMKey when a setting is changed when run time server of CIMPLICITY is

used.

Refer to the chapter "System management", in the CIMPLICITY HMI Plant

Edition online help for the details of OEM Key.

2.2.1 Opening the Configuration Dialog Box

To open the Configuration dialog box of i CELL, from the Windows Start

menu, select Start, Program, CIMPLICITY i CELL, and Configuration.

NOTE

Please don't operate points or edit scripts on the CIMPLICITY

workbench during iCELL setting screen is running.


(12) Add the following NOTE to the "III.SETTING 2.2.1 Opening the Configuration Dialog Box"

(11) Replace the following explanation of the "III. SETTING 2. BASIC FUNCTIONS"



7/9


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-1

2.4 PROJECT PROPERTY

Selecting Project from the menu bar of the Configuration dialog box, then

Property from the Project menu displays the Project Property dialog box.

< In case of i CELL > < In case of CNC communication mode >

This dialog box lets you make the settings related to the entire i CELL

project and CNC communication mode.

Specify the number of machines you want to connect. You

can specify as many machines as the total number of

machines allowed for the available order passwords. The

range of numbers you can enter is displayed to the right of

the entry box.

Connect Machine

Count

CAUTION

• It is impossible to include, as a target for deletion, any

machine for which functions are enabled in i CELL

settings. To include a machine as a target for deletion,

make sure that all i CELL functions are disabled for the

machine.

• It is impossible to include, as a target for deletion, any

machine for which has points created by point

customization. To include a machine as a target for

deletion, make sure that there are no points which are

created by point customization of the machine to delete.

(13) Replace the following explanation and bitmap in the "III.SETTING 2.4 PROJECT PROPERTY"



8/9


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-1

If you want to use any functions from NC Connection to Web in the i CELL

project, turn on the corresponding check boxes to select the functions. The

tree displays the setting items for the selected functions.

CNC Connection To transfer data between CIMPLICITY and the CNC, turn on

this check box.

Be sure to turn on the check box.

Program

Management

To perform program management on a PC, turn on this

check box.


i CELL To use i CELL, turn on this check box.


Mail To use the main function, turn on this check box.

Web To use the Web function, turn on this check box.

This item can be selected only on a Windows 2003 server,

Windows 2000 server or Windows NT server. For a Windows

XP Professional, Windows 2000Professional or Windows NTworkstation, the Webfunction cannot be selected because it

is unavailable.


Property dialog box. Clicking the Cancel button discards what you specified

when closing the dialog box.

Custom Point To use the Custom Points function, turn on this chek box.

Point Name Rule

Setting To use Point Name Rule Setting, turn on this chekbox. This

check box is displayed ati CNC communication mode. Refer

to the "V User Customize 6.4 Point Name Rule Setting" for

details.

This box lets you set the method of reading data from the

CNC.

Sequential Data is sequentially read for each

CNC every reading cycle.

Parallel Data is read at the same time for

each CNC every reading cycle.

Read Data from

CNC

Refer to the " V. USER CUSTOMIZE 5.5.1 Read Methods

and Read Intervals - Parallel Process and Sequential

Process " for details.

Please check the "Parallel" when you use iCELL.



9/9


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-1

This box lets you set whether to enable the Point Setting

Notification.

The FOCAS2/Ethernet connection is required for this

function.

Use To use this function turn on this

check box.

Don't use To don't use this function turn on

this check box.

Point Setting

Notification

Refer to the " V. USER CUSTOMIZE 5.5.8.3 Point Setting

Notification" for details.

When you change this setting, please select the "Script"

of the "Project" menu to display the "Init/Term scripts

general setting" dialog.

Then click <OK> button to set Point Setting Notification

again.

This box lets you set the machine number format in logs.

Serial Number of

Each Path

Sequential numbers for each CNCs

system number are used.

Number of Each IP

Address

The machine of same Internet

Protocol address assumes the

same machine number, and Pxx

(xx are system number) which

shows the system number at the

head of each log is added.

Machine Number

Format in Log

Please refer to the "V. USER CUSTOMIZE 5.5.7 Log"


Property dialog box. Clicking the Cancel button discards what you specified

when closing the dialog box.

2 ADDING SCREENS(--- 3rd paragraph

---)

For details of operating the editor CimEdit for creating screens, refer to the

"Screens" section of CIMPLICITY HMI online help.

(14) Replace the following explanation in the "V.USER CUSTOMIZE 2. ADDING SCREENS"



1/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2


Add explanation of Point Customization and CNC Communication Mode

1.Type of applied technical documents

Name FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL OPERATOR'S MANUAL

Spec.No./Ed. B-75074EN/04

2.Summary of Change

Group Name/Outline

New

AddCorrectDelete

ApplicableDate

BasicFunction

The following explanations are added to Section V"USER CUSTOMIZATION" of B-75074EN/04.

5. Point Customization6. CNC Communication Mode

Add Immediately

OptionalFunction

Unit

MaintenanceParts

Notice This document is available for A08B-9510-J920#EN version 2.1

Correction

Another



2/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2


Add the following explanation after the section "V.USER CUSTOMIZATION 4.REFFERENCING THE

DATABASE" of "B-75074EN/04".

Index

5 POINT CUSTOMIZATION.............. ..................................................... ......................................................................... .. 5

5.1 OVERVIEW............................................................................................ .................................................................. 5

5.1.1 Description of Point Customization .......................................................... ...................................................... 5

5.1.2 Communicable Data ............................................... ....................................................... .................................. 6

5.2 POINT SETTING......................................................................... ...................................................................... ...... 7

5.2.1 Read intervals.................................................................................................................................................. 7

5.2.1.1 Display ................................................ ........................................................ .............................................. 8

5.2.1.2 Setting......... ........................................................ ....................................................................... ............... 8

5.2.2 Point List ....................................................................................................................................................... 11

5.2.2.1 Display ................................................ ........................................................ ............................................ 11

5.2.2.2 Creating new points ........................................................ ....................................................................... 11

5.2.2.3 Editing, deletion, renaming, and duplication........................................................................................ 16

5.2.3 Point Group.................................................................................................................................................... 21

5.2.3.1 Display ................................................ ........................................................ ............................................ 21

5.2.3.2 Creating new point group control points......... ........................................................... ........................... 21

5.2.3.3 Editing, deletion, and renaming ..................................................... ....................................................... 24

5.3 CIMPLICITY SCRIPT SETTING ................................................. ........................................................................ 27

5.3.1 Initiation and Termination Scripts............................................................................................................... 27

5.3.2 Setting............................................................................................................................................................ 28

5.3.2.1 Init/Term Scripts General Settings .................................................. ..................................................... 29

5.3.2.2 Init/Term Scripts Detail Settings ..................................................... ..................................................... 31

5.3.3 Settings in the Initialization/Termination Scripts........................... ............................................................ 35

5.4 POINTS FOR DATA INPUT/OUTPUT................................................. ............................................................... 39

5.4.1 PMC Data ...................................................................................................................................................... 39

5.4.2 Custom Macro Variables ................................................. .................................................... .......................... 43

5.4.3 Parameters..................................................................................................................................................... 45

5.4.4 Alarm Numbers ................................................. ........................................................ .................................... 47

5.4.5 Alarm Types...................................... .................................................... ......................................................... 49

5.4.6 Number of Operator's Message..................................................................................................................... 51

5.4.7 Operator's Message Strings ................................................... ....................................................................... 53

5.5 CNC CONNECTION ............................................ .................................................... ............................................. 55



3/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

5.5.1 Read Methods and Read Intervals - Parallel Process and Sequential Process .......................................... 55

5.5.2 Write Methods and Write Intervals.............................................................................................................. 57

5.5.3 Point Group.................................................................................................................................................... 57

5.5.4 CNC Power Status Monitor Function........................................................................................................... 58

5.5.5 Reconnection Function in the Event of a Communication Error in Read/Write Processes ....................... 59

5.5.6 Reconnection Function in the Initialization Process during CNC Connection Initiation and in the Power

ON Initialization Process................................................................................................................................................... 61

5.5.7 Logs .................................................. .................................................... .......................................................... 61

5.5.7.1 PWRLOG – CNC power status ........................................................ ...................................................... 62

5.5.7.2 CPULOG – Progress of internal processing..................................................... ..................................... 63

5.5.7.3 RTLOG – CNC data read and point write time ...................................................... .............................. 63

5.5.7.4 NCRTLOG – CNC data read process time ........................................................... ................................. 65

5.5.8 CNC Connection Control Points ...................................................... ............................................................. 66

5.5.8.1 Result Point ...................................................... ............................................................................. ......... 66

5.5.8.2 End Point .................................................... ........................................................ .................................... 67

5.5.8.3 Point Setting Notification Point.......................................................... ................................................... 67

5.5.8.4 Error message storage point .................................................... .............................................................. 69

5.5.8.5 Power status monitor point............................. ........................................................... ............................ 69

5.5.8.6 Communication enable instruction point ..................................................... ......................................... 70

5.5.8.7 Communication status monitor point.... ....................................................... ......................................... 70

5.5.8.8 Communication reconnection instruction point.... ........................................................... ..................... 71

5.5.8.9 Point Group Control Point ............................................... ...................................................................... 71

5.5.9 CNC Connection Termination....................................................................................................................... 72

6 CNC COMMUNICATION MODE................................................. ....................................................................... ......... 73

6.1 OVERVIEW............................................................................................ ................................................................ 73

6.1.1 Description of CNC Communication Mode................................................................................................... 73

6.1.2 Comparison between i CELL and CNC Communication Mode................................................................... 74

6.1.3 Procedure for Using CNC Communication Mode ........................................................................................ 75

6.2 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT....... ........................................................ ............................................................. 76

6.2.1 Available CNCs................................................................ ................................................................... ........... 76

6.2.2 Ethernet Boards and CNC Options ................................................ .............................................................. 76

6.2.3 Network Configuration ................................................................................................................................. 76

6.2.4 Number of CNCs Connected .................................................... ..................................................................... 76

6.2.5 CIMPLICITY HMI ........................................................................................................................................ 76

6.3 INSTALLATION AND ORDER PASSWORD REGISTRATION .................................................. ...................... 77

6.3.1 Installation..................................................................................................................................................... 77

6.3.2 Registering an Order Password.................................................... ................................................................ 77

6.3.2.1 Creating target projects ................................................... ...................................................................... 77

6.3.2.2 Registering an order password ........................................................ ...................................................... 78



4/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

6.4 POINT NAME RULE SETTING................................................... ........................................................................ 80

6.4.1 Overview ..................................................... ........................................................ ........................................... 80

6.4.2 Point Name Rules of CNC Communication Mode........................................................................................ 81

6.4.3 Using Point Name Rule Setting.................................................................................................................... 83

6.4.3.1 Enabling and disabling the Point Name Rule Setting Function............... ........................................... 83

6.4.3.2 Displaying the Point Name Rule Setting dialog box...................................... ....................................... 85

6.4.3.3 Setting point name rules..... ........................................................ ........................................................... 86

6.4.4 Setting Examples........................................................................................................................................... 98

6.4.4.1 Using the point name rules of another project..................................................... ................................. 98



5/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

5 POINT CUSTOMIZATION

This chapter describes how to add CIMPLICITY points for inputting new

CNC data to and outputting it from i CELL.

This function can be used in i CELL 2.1 or later.

5.1 OVERVIEW

5.1.1 Description of Point Customization

Point Customization is a function for creating CIMPLICITY points

necessary for performing communication with a CNC by using the function

for communication with a CNC (CNC CONNECTION).

It can be used in i CELL or in CNC Communication Mode, which is one of

the operating modes of i CELL. For an explanation of CNC

Communication Mode, see chapter 6, "CNC COMMUNICATION MODE".

Point Customization can be used in i CELL 2.1 or later only if the

FOCAS1/Ethernet or FOCAS2/Ethernet is used. For an explanation of the

operating environment to be assumed if the FOCAS1/Ethernet or

FOCAS2/Ethernet is used, refer to "When the FOCAS2/Ethernet is used" in

Section 3.1, "CNC", in Part I, "General", in the i CELL Operator's Manual.

Also, a CIMPLICITY HMI development server is required.

(The FOCAS2/Ethernet contains the functions of the FOCAS1/Ethernet, and

the FOCAS1/Ethernet and the FOCAS2/Ethernet are collectively referred to

as the FOCAS2/Ethernet throughout the remainder of this document.)

Point Customization can be configured with the "Custom Point" tree in the

i CELL Configuration dialog box, shown below.



6/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

5.1.2 Communicable Data

By setting points using Point Customization, it is possible to communicate

data of the kinds given in the table below with a CNC. It should be noted

that a CNC requires an option to communicate some kinds of data. For

details of each data kind, see Section 5.4, "POINTS FOR DATA

INPUT/OUTPUT".

No Data kind Valid data range Reading Writing Option that a CNC requires

1 PMC data G,F,X,Y,R,A,T,K,C,D,M,N,E

O O

Local variable O X2 Custom macro variable

Common variable O O

Custom macro(custom macro B) option

3 Parameter Axis/non-axis O O

4 Alarm number Alarm type

Axis/non-axis O X

5

Number of operator'smessageOperator's messagestrings

1st to 4thmessages

O X

External message functionor external data inputfunction optionFor an explanation of theCNC editions for enablingthe 2nd to 4th messages inthe Series 16i /18i /21i, seeSubsection 5.4.6, "Number

of Operator's Message".The function for the Series30i /31i /32i A is under development.



7/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

5.2 POINT SETTING

This section describes how to set CIMPLICITY points using Point

Customization.

The basic procedure for setting points is as follows:

<1> Set read intervals. (See Subsection 5.2.1, "Read intervals".)

<2> Create points. (See Subsection 5.2.2, "Point List".)

<3> Set points. (See Subsection 5.2.2, "Point List".)

<4> Create Point Group Control Points. (See Subsection 5.2.3, "Point

Group".)

<5> Set Point Group Control Points. (See Subsection 5.2.3, "Point

Group".

If you add or change a point to i CELL, please terminate i CELL

Configuration dialog box, then execute "iCELL Project" from the start menu,

then execute [Configuration Update] from the [Project] menu.

5.2.1 Read intervals

This subsection describes how to set the intervals at which to read

CIMPLICITY point data from CNCs.

There are two methods of reading, a parallel process and a sequential

process.

In a parallel process, read instructions are issued to each CNC at the same

time at each read interval.

This can shorten the time required to read values from multiple CNCs, but

will increase the CPU load at the peak of the read process.

In a sequential process, read instructions are issued to one CNC at a time at

each read interval.

This will increase the time required to read values from multiple CNCs, but

can keep the increases in CPU load low at the peak of the read process.

For a parallel process, three different read intervals can be set for each CNC;

for a sequential process, three different read intervals common to all CNCs

can be set. No matter which process is used, the read interval settings will

have a great impact on CPU load. Care must be exercised so that the read

interval settings are sufficiently large as compared with the time required to

actually read data from CNCs to prevent the CPU utilization at the peak of

the process from reaching 100%.

For details of the read methods, see Subsection 5.5.1, "Read Methods and

Read Intervals - Parallel Process and Sequential Process". The time

required to actually read from CNCs can be output to a log. For an

explanation of how to do this, see Subsection 5.3.2, "Setting"; for details, see

Subsection 5.5.7.3, "RTLOG – CNC data read and point write time".



8/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

5.2.1.1 Display

From the tree on the left-hand side of the i CELL Configuration dialog box,

select [Custom Point]>[Read Interval], and the read interval list will appear.

For a parallel process, a list of the read intervals for each CNC is displayed;

for a sequential process, the read intervals (up to three different intervals)

common to all CNCs are displayed.

5.2.1.2 Setting

This subsection describes how to set read intervals. The setting procedure

can be started by first displaying a read interval list, described in Subsection

5.2.1.1, "Display".

Changing read intervals

<1> Use either of the following methods to display the Read Intervaldialog box:

• Select the record to be changed, then select [Property] from the [Edit]

menu.

• Double-click the record to be changed.

<2> Set a numeric value and a unit, and click the <OK> button.

<Display shown for a parallel process> <Display shown for asequential process>

Numericvalue

Unit

<Dis la shown for a arallel rocess> <Display shown for a sequential process>



9/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

Number Number of the machine for which a read

interval is to be changed.

This item is displayed for a parallel process

only.

Name Name of the machine for which a read interval

is to be changed.


only.

Intervals at which CNC Connection reads

values from machines.

If i CELL is used, Interval 1 and Interval 2

cannot be changed. Set a numeric value in the

range permitted for the unit selected.

10 millisecond 0-999

Second 0-999

Minute 0-999

Interval 1 - 3

Hour 0-99

<Multiple Machines>

Button

Used to apply the settings for the current

machine to other machines.

Clicking this button causes a dialog box to

appear, allowing the read interval settings to be

applied to multiple machines.


only.

Applying read intervals to multiple machines

For a parallel process, it is possible to set the same settings for multiple

machines, using the method described below.

<1> Use either of the following methods to display the Read Interval

dialog box:

• Select the record of the machine whose read interval settings are to be

applied, and select [Property] from the [Edit] menu.

• Double-click the record of the machine whose read interval settings are

to be applied.

<2> Click the <Multiple Machines> button to display the Apply Read

Interval for all machines dialog box.

<3> From the Applicable Machines list, select a machine to which the

same settings are to be applied, and click the <Add> button.

<4> The selected machine is added to the Target Machines list.

<5> Click the <OK> button.



10/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

Applicable Machines List of machines to which the settings can be

applied.

Taget Machines List of machines to which the settings are to be

actually applied.

<Add> Button Used to add a machine selected from the

Applicable Machines list to the Target

Machines list.

<Add All> Button Used to add all the machines in the Applicable

Machines list to the Target Machines list.

<Delete> Button Used to delete a machine selected from the

Target Machines list from the list. When

deleted from the list, the machine will be added

to the Applicable Machines list.

<Delete All> Button Used to delete all the machines in the Target

Machines list from the list. When deleted

from the list, the machines will be added to the

Applicable Machines list.



11/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

5.2.2 Point List

Point List is used to create CIMPLICITY points for data input/output and to

make various settings.

5.2.2.1 Display


select [Custom Point]>[Point List], and the Point List window will appear.

Various operations can be started by displaying this window first.

5.2.2.2 Creating new points

This subsection describes how to create new points for data input/output.

The procedure can be started by first displaying the Point List window,

described in Subsection 5.2.2.1, "Display".

<1> Use one of the following methods to display the Create Point dialog

box:

• From the [Edit] menu, select [New].

• Select the last record (blank record), and select [Property] from

[Edit].• Double-click the last record (blank record).

<2> Make the setting for each item (referring to [Create Point]), and click

the <Create> button.

<3> The Point Property dialog box appears.

<4> Make the setting for each item (referring to [Point Property]), and

click the <OK> button.

NOTE

Those points that are in use with i CELL cannot be edited,deleted, renamed, duplicated, or duplicated to other machines.



12/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

[Create Point]

Machine Name of the machine for which to create a point.

Path Path of the machine for which to create a point.

Point Name Name of the point to create.

Set the character string to follow "FNCxxxyy.U_"

(where xxx is a machine number and yy is a path

number).A string of 32 characters including

"FNCxxxyy.U_" can be set.

Data Kind Data kind of the point to create.

Available kinds are PMC data, custom macro

variable, parameter, alarm number/type, and

number of operator's message/operator's message

string.

Data Class Data class of the point to create.

Available classes are Boolean, Analog, and Text.Depending on the data kind selected, some data

classes may not be selectable.

Communication Indicates the status of communication with CNCs.

<Create> Button Used to create a set point.

NOTE

When the Create Point dialog box is displayed and a machine is

selected, the power status of the machine is checked. For operation with the setting that suppresses the use of a C4

server, if the power of the machine is OFF, it takes the FwLib

time-out time, set in [Communication setting], to check the power

status. If it is obvious that the power of the machine is OFF, the

power status check time can be shortened by enabling a C4

server when creating a point and disabling a C4 server when

actually communicating with the machine.

Communication



13/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

[Point Property]

Point Name Name of the point to create.

The value set in the Create Point dialog box is

displayed.

Data Kind Data kind of the point to create.


displayed.

Data Class Data class of the point to create.


displayed.

Description Allows description of the point to create.

Read Interval Select from Interval 1, Interval 2, and Interval 3.

For an explanation of setting each interval, see

Subsection 5.2.1.2, "Setting".

Data Type Data type of the point to create.

Selectable data types are BOOL, SINT,USINT, INT, UINT, DINT, UDINT, and

REAL. Depending on the data class selected,

some data types may not be selectable.

Bit Offset For the BOOL type only, allows specification

of the bit to be referenced with a number

between 0 and 7. For other types, set the bit

Communication

Data range check

Detailed setting

area



14/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

offset to 0.

Elements

NOTE1

Specify the number of data elements to read and

write.

For the BOOL type, specify 1 or a multiple of 8.

Read Only

NOTE1

Place a check to make the point read only.

Do not place a check to make it read-and-write

enabled.Depending on the data kind selected, the point

can only be made read only.

Detailed setting area Make detailed settings for creating a point.

Depending on the data kind selected, the items

that can be set differ.

Use Default Point

Group

Specify whether to use the Default Point

Group.

If the Default Point Group is used, when a

point is created, it is automatically set in theDefault Point Group. If the Default Point

Group is not used, it is necessary to set a Point

Group with point group setting.

Communication Indicates the status of communication with

CNCs. If "Com.Enable" is displayed, a data

range check is performed when a point is created

(when the <OK> button is clicked) (Data Range

Check:Enable). If "Com. Disable" is displayed,

the data range check is not performed (Data

Range Check:Disable).

Data range check

NOTE2

Indicates whether a data range check is

enabled. If "Enable" is indicated, the system

communicates with CNCs when the <OK>

button is clicked to check whether the data is in

the valid data range. If it is outside the valid

data range, an error message such as the one on

the next page will be displayed.

<Check Com.>Button When the power of a CNC is turned on,clicking this button allows the communication

status to be checked.

This button is displayed only if the settings are

such that a C4 server is not used and the power

is OFF.



15/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

For details of each item, see Section 5.4, "POINTS FOR DATA

INPUT/OUTPUT".

Data range check: Error example

If a data range check detects an error, an error message such as the following

is displayed. In this example, 10 data elements are set in addresses starting

with PMC R9990.

NOTE1

If a point is made read-and-write enabled and a value other than

1 is set for Elements, when the value of any element is

changed, the values of all elements are written to the CNC.

For data elements that need to be written individually, set them

at separate points and set 1 for Elements.

NOTE2

If [Com. Status] indicates Com. Disable, the data range check

is not performed, so that points may be created with invalid

CNC settings. Be sure to create points after checking that

communication is enabled.

If creating a point when communication with CNCs is not

possible, use the following procedure to perform a point data

range check again before communicating with CNCs:

(1) Select the point to check, select [Property] from the [Edit]menu to display the Point Property dialog box.

(2) Check that [Data Range Check] indicates "Enable" before

clicking the <OK> button.



16/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

5.2.2.3 Editing, deletion, renaming, and duplication

This subsection describes each of editing, deletion, renaming, and

duplication operations. Each operation can be started by first displaying

the Point List window, described in Subsection 5.2.2.1, "Display".

Editing

Change the settings of a point as follows:

<1> Use either of the following methods to display the Point Property

dialog box:

• Select the point to edit, and select [Property] from the [Edit] menu.

• Double-click the point to edit.

<2> Change settings as desired, and click the <OK> button. For an

explanation of each item, see [Point Property] in Subsection 5.2.2.2,

"Creating new points".

Deletion

Delete a point as follows:

Select the point to delete, and select [Delete] from the [Edit] menu.

NOTEThose points that have been set in the mail and Web functions

cannot be deleted or renamed. Also, those points that have

been set in the formulas for other points, etc. cannot be edited,



17/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

Deleting multiple points

Delete multiple points at a time as follows:

<1> From the [Edit] menu, select [Multi Delete].

<2> The Delete multiple points dialog box appears. Select the points to

delete, and click the <OK> button.

List of Points List of points that can be deleted.

Search Specify the condition for the points that can be

displayed on the list of points.

<Select All> Button Used to select all the points contained in the list

of points.

<Unselect All>

Button

Used to unselect all the points selected in the

list of points.

Renaming

Rename a point as follows:

<1> From the [Edit] menu, select [Rename].

<2> The ReName Point dialog box appears. Enter a new name and




18/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

Original Name Point to rename.

New Name New name for the point.

Set the character string to follow

"FNCxxxyy.U_" (where xxx is a machine

number and yy is a path number).

A string of up to 32 characters including


Duplication

Copy a point to the same machine as follows:

<1> Select the point to copy, and from the [Edit] menu, select [Duplicate].

<2> The Duplicate Point dialog box appears. In the To field, enter a

point name, and click the <OK> button.

From Name of the source point.

To Name of the point to be newly created by

duplication.


"FNCxxxyy.U_" (where xxx is a machine

number and yy is a path number).A string of up to 32 characters including


Use Default Point

Group


Group.

If the Default Point Group is used, when a

point is created, it is automatically set in the

Default Point Group. If the Default Point

Group is not used, it is necessary to set a Point

Group with point group setting.

Duplicating to other machines

It is possible to duplicate a point to other machines, with the same name and

the same settings.

In the name, the xxx (machine number) of "FNCxxxyy.U_..." is changed to

the machine number of the machine to which the point is copied.



19/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

<1> Select the point to duplicate to other machines, and from the [Edit]

menu, select [Dup. to other Mcn].

<2> The Dup. to other Mcn dialog box appears. Select the machine(s) to

which the point is to be copied, and click the <OK> button.

List of machines to which the point can be

copied.

Communication statuses are also displayed. If

a communication status is not displayed, this

indicates that the power of the machine is ON

and the point settings are appropriate.

Communication statuses are as follows:

Switched Off The power is OFF.

Com. Disable Communication has failed.

Out of range The point settings are not

appropriate.Data Type

Error

The data type is not

appropriate.

Applicable Machines

Sign Error The sign of the data type is

not appropriate.

Target Machines List of machines to which the point will

actually be copied.

The communication statuses are also displayed.

The communication statuses are the same as

those displayed with applicable machines.

Use Default Point

Group


Group. If the Default Point Group is used,

when a point is created, it is automatically set

in the Default Point Group. If the Default

Point Group is not used, it is necessary to set a

Point Group with point group setting.



20/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

NOTE

When a point is edited or is duplicated to other machines, the

power status of the machine is checked. For operation with the

setting that suppresses the use of a C4 server, if the power of

the machine is OFF, it takes the FwLib time-out time to check

the power status (for duplication to other machines, FwLib

time-out time multiplied by the number of machines to which the

point is to be copied). If it is obvious that the power of the

machine is OFF, the power status check time can be shortened

by enabling a C4 server when creating a point and disabling a

C4 server when actually communicating with the machine.

NOTE

The point is duplicated as that a point on the same path. It is

not possible to copy it as that on a different path.

Example)

Machine 1 (path 3), machine 2 (path 1), machine 3 (path 4)

O: Duplication enabled, X: Duplication disabled A. Duplication from machine 1 to machine 2

Machine 1 (path 3) Machine 2 (path 1)

Point on path 1 → O

Point on path 2 → X

Point on path 3 → X

B. Duplication from machine 1 to machine 3

Machine 1 (path 3) Machine 3 (path 4)

Point on path 1 → O

Point on path 2 → OPoint on path 3 → O



21/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

5.2.3 Point Group

Multiple points grouped together are referred to as a Point Group. By using

the Point Group function to set a group of points for constant reading and

another group of points for reading only when necessary, it is possible to

reduce network load.

A Point Group must have a single BOOL type point corresponding to it.This point is called the Point Group Control Point. While the value of this

control point is True, reading from the points in the group is performed. If

the value of the control point is False, reading from the points in the group is

not performed.

Multiple Point Groups may be set. Reading from points not in a Point

Group is not performed; all points from which to read data must be set in a

Point Group.

For details of Point Groups, see Subsection 5.5.3, "Point Group".

5.2.3.1 Display


select [Custom Point]>[Point Group], and a list of Point Group Control

Points appears.

5.2.3.2 Creating new point group control points

This subsection describes how to create new Point Group Control Points.

The procedure can be started by first displaying the list of Point Group

Control Points, described in Subsection 5.2.3.1, "Display".

<1> Use one of the following methods to display the Create Point Group

Control Point dialog box:

• From the [Edit] menu, select [New].

• Select the last record (blank record), and select [Property] from the

[Edit] menu.

• Double-click the last record (blank record).



22/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

<2> Make the setting for each item (referring to [Create Point Group

Control Point]), and click the <Create> button.

<3> The Point Group dialog box appears.

<4> Add the points to be set with the control point to be created to the

Target Point area, and click the <OK> button.

[Create Point Group Control Point]

Machine Name of the machine for which to create acontrol point.

To create a control point common to machines,

select "Common".

Path Path of the machine for which to create a

control point.

The path cannot be changed. If "Common" is

selected for Machine, nothing is displayed.

Point Name Name of the control point to create.

If a machine is selected for Machine, set

"FNCxxx01.U_"; if Common is selected, set

the character string to follow "FNCSYSP.U_"

(where xxx is a machine number).

A string of 32 characters including

"FNCxxx01.U_" or "FNCSYSP.U_" can be set.

Data Class Data class of the control point to create.

Boolean is selected.



23/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

[Point Group]

Control Point Name of the control point.

The name set in the Create Point Group Control

Point dialog box is displayed.

Description Allows description of the point to be created.

Initial Value Initial value of the control point.

Specify 0 or 1. If the value of the control point is 1 (True), reading from the points in the

group with the control point is performed. If

the value is 0 (False), reading from the points

in the group is not performed.

Applicable Point Displays a list of points that can be set with the

control point.

Those points that have already been set with

other control points are not displayed.

Search Specify the condition for the points that can bedisplayed in the Applicable Point area.

Target Point Displays a list of points to be set with the

control point.

User Point Count Number of points to be set with the control

point.



24/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

i CELLPoint

(reference)

Displays a list of i CELL points currently set

with the control point.

No points are displayed if a new control point

is to be created.

Points are displayed only if i CELL is used.

i CELL Point Count Displays the number of i CELL points

currently set with the control point.

0 if a new control point is to be created.

A number is displayed only if i CELL is used.

5.2.3.3 Editing, deletion, and renaming

This subsection describes each of editing, deletion, and renaming operations.

Each operation can be started by first displaying a list of Point Group

Control Points, described in Subsection 5.2.3.1, "Display".

Editing

Change the points currently set with a control point as follows:

<1> Use either of the following methods to display the Point Group dialog

box:

• Select the control point to edit, and select [Property] from the [Edit]

menu.

• Double-click the control point to edit.

<2> Change settings as desired.

<3> Click the <OK> button.

NOTE1 The default control point (control point for use with i CELL)

cannot be deleted or renamed.

2 Those control points that have been set in the mail and Web

functions and in the formulas for other points, etc. cannot be

deleted or renamed.



25/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

Control Point Name of the control point.

Description Allows description of the control point.

Initial Value Initial value of the control point.

Specify 0 or 1. If the value of the control

point is 1 (True), reading from the points in the

group with the control point is performed. If

the value is 0 (False), reading from the points

in the group is not performed.

Applicable Point Displays a list of points that can be set with the

control point.

Those points that have already been set with

other control points are not displayed.

Search Specify the condition for the points that can be

displayed in the Applicable Point area.

Target Point Displays a list of points to be set with the

control point.Those points that have already been set are also

displayed.

User Point Count Number of points to be set with the control

point.

i CELL Point Displays a list of i CELL points currently set



26/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

(reference) with the control point.

Points are displayed only if i CELL is used.

i CELL Point Count Displays the number of i CELL points

currently set with the control point to be set.

A number is displayed only if i CELL is used.

Deletion

Delete control points as follows:

Select the control point to delete, and from the [Edit] menu, select [Delete].

Renaming

Rename control points as follows:

<1> From the [Edit] menu, select [Rename] to display the ReName Point

dialog box.

<2> Enter a new name, and click the <OK> button.

Original Name Point to rename.

New Name New name for the point.


"FNCxxxyy.U_" (where xxx is a machinenumber and yy is a path number).

A string of up to 32 characters including




27/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

5.3 CIMPLICITY SCRIPT SETTING

Initiation and termination of CNC Connection must be linked to the

initiation and termination of the target program. Linking requires that

appropriate settings be made in the two scripts of CIMPLICITY, em_init.bcl

and em_term.bcl.

Making various settings in the [Script] dialog box in the Configuration

dialog box causes the settings to be reflected in em_init.bcl and em_term.bcl.

This section describes how to make settings in the [Script] dialog box. It

also describes how to set various options of CNC Connection.

5.3.1 Initiation and Termination Scripts

em_init.bcl

This script is automatically executed when the project is initiated. The

initiation process for CNC Connection is inserted there. The setting file

and various options for use with CNC Connection are also set there.

Clicking the <OK> button in the [Script] dialog box causes the settings to be

inserted into em_init.bcl as a script. The settings that have been written

before the insertion remain unchanged. For information on customizing

em_init.bcl, see Subsection 5.3.3, "Settings in the Initialization/Termination

Scripts".

When CNC Connection is started, the icon shown below appears in the task

bar.

NOTE

1 When i CELL is used, there is no need to make settings in

particular because the settings in CIMPLICITY scripts have

already been made. Except if the settings of point setting

completion notification points have been changed and except for

special cases, it is recommended that the settings be leftunchanged.

2 If CNC Communication Mode is used for the first time, the

initiation and termination of CNC Connection are not linked to

the initiation and termination of the target project because

settings have not been made in CIMPLICITY scripts. Be sure

to make settings in CIMPLICITY scripts.



28/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

em_term.bcl

This script is automatically executed when the project is terminated. The

termination process for CNC Connection is set there.


inserted into em_term.bcl as scripts. The settings that have been written

before the insertion remain unchanged. For information on customizing

em_term.bcl, see Subsection 5.3.3, "Settings in the Initialization/Termination

Scripts".

5.3.2 Setting

With the procedure below, it is possible to make settings in em_init.bcl and

em_term.bcl and set various options for CNC Connection.

<1> From the [Project] menu in the i CELL Configuration dialog box,

select [Script] to start the Init/Term Scripts General Settings window.

<2> Make the setting for each item (referring to Subsection 5.3.2.1,

"Init/Term Scripts General Settings").

<3> Click the <Detail> button to start the Init/Term Scripts Detail Settings

window.

<4> Make the setting for each item (referring to Subsection 5.3.2.2,

"Init/Term Scripts Detail Settings"), and


<5> The Init/Term Scripts General Settings window reappears. Click the

<OK> button to exit from the Init/Term Scripts General Settings window.

NOTE

If settings are changed, exit from the setting session by clicking

the <OK> button in the Init/Term Scripts General Settings

window. If the setting session is exited by clicking the

<Cancel> button in the Init/Term Scripts General Settings

window, all changes (including any changes made in the

Init/Term Scripts Detail Settings window) will be canceled,

preventing them from being reflected in the scripts.



29/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

5.3.2.1 Init/Term Scripts General Settings

This subsection describes each of the items that can be set in the Init/Term

Scripts General Settings window.

This subsection also describes whether the settings can be changed in

i CELL and in CNC Communication Mode.

Item 1. Init script File

File name of the CIMPLICITY initiation script.

The setting cannot be changed in i CELL or CNC Communication

Mode.

Item 2. Term script File

File name of the CIMPLICITY termination script.The setting cannot be changed in i CELL or CNC Communication

Mode.

Item 3. Comm. setting File

Name of the setting file for CNC Connection.

i CELL: CNCSetting.txt (cannot be changed)

CNC Communication Mode: CimVrtlCnc.cfg (cannot be

changed)

Item 4. Project

Target project name.

The setting cannot be changed in i CELL or CNC Communication

Mode.

Item 5. Result Point

Name of the initiation result storage point.

i CELL: Cannot be changed.



30/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

CNC Communication Mode: Any point name may be used. If

the specified point does not exist in the target project, the point

will be created when the Configuration dialog box is exited.

For details, see Subsection 5.5.8.1, "Result Point".

Default = FNCSYSP.F_NCC_STATUS

Item 6. End Point

Point for termination instructions.





For details, see Subsection 5.5.8.2, "End Point".

The default is FNCSYSP.F_PROJECT_END.

Item 7. Point Setting Notification

Point for point setting completion notification.

A name is displayed only if the Point Setting Notification

Function is used.





For details, see Subsection 5.5.8.3, "Point Setting Notification

Point".

The default is FNCSYSP.F_COM_PSET_NOTIFY.

<Detail> Button

Used to make detailed settings.

See Subsection 5.3.2.2, "Init/Term Scripts Detail Settings".

<Default> Button

Used to change all items in the initialization/termination scripts

(including those in the Init/Term Scripts Detail Settings window)

to their defaults.

NOTE

It is not possible to delete any of Result Point, End Point, andPoint Setting Notification newly created in this window from the

Configuration dialog box. If they need to be deleted, delete

them from the CIMPLICITY Workbench.



31/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

5.3.2.2 Init/Term Scripts Detail Settings

This subsection describes each of the items that can be set in the Init/Term

Scripts Detail Settings window. The items are divided into Groups 1 and 2.

Group 1

Item 1. C4 Server

Host name of the C4 server.

Default = 127.0.0.1

Item 2. Retry Interval

Retry interval (ms) to be assumed if a communication error occursin the initialization process or in reading/writing during initiation

or if initialization fails when the power is switched from OFF to

ON. Default = 30000

Item 3. Additional time to the terminal process timer

Additional time (ms) to the terminal process timer.

Default = 5000

Item 4. Terminal waiting time of communication thread

Terminal waiting time (ms) of a child thread of a communicationthread. Default = 180000 NOTE

Item 5. Terminal waiting time of dialog thread

Terminal waiting time (ms) of a child thread of a dialog thread.

Default = 5000

Item 6. Terminal waiting time of log thread



32/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

Terminal waiting time (ms) of a log thread.

Default = 5000

Item 7. Retry interval in busy case

Retry interval (ms) to be assumed if a write process is busy.

Default = 1000

Item 8. Retry number in busy case

Number of retries to be assumed if a write process is busy.

Default = 2

<Default (Only Detail)> Button

Used to change all items (of groups 1 and 2) in the Init/Term

Scripts Detail Settings window to their defaults. This does not

change the items in the Init/Term Scripts General Settings

window.

NOTE The time required for a termination process varies depending on the

number of CNCs connected. If the following message appears during

termination, it is possible that the termination process is not completed

in the default timeover time.

If this occurs, change the setting of Terminal waiting time of

communication thread (item 4).

Also, the following are recorded in the CimVrtlCnc Error Log:

Example 1: There is no response of the completion of end

preparation from a [thread-name].

Example 2: End Processing of [thread name] went wrong.

Example 3: There is no response from a [thread-name].

(ErrNo.0x???.0x?)

where [thread-name] is replaced by one of the following character st

rings:

Point setting thread

Point change surveillance threadPower supply check thread

Writing thread

Reading thread (1)

Reading thread (2)

Reading thread (3)



33/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

Group 2

Item 1. Check PWE of CNC on writing parameter

Whether to the CNC parameter write enable setting when

changing the values of CNC parameters from a personal computer.

Check placed: Check

Check not placed: Not check (default)

Item 2. Log power status of CNC (PWRLOG)

Whether to output CNC power ON/OFF status changes to the log.

Check placed: Output (default)

Check not placed: Not output

For details of the log, see Subsection 5.5.7.1, "PWRLOG – CNC

power status".

Item 3. Log Internal progress (CPULOG)

Whether to output the log for checking the progress of internal

processing.

Check placed: Output

Check not placed: Not output (Default)

For details of the log, see Subsection 5.5.7.2, "CPULOG –

Progress of internal processing".

Item 4. Log real read time (RTLOG)

Whether to output the real read process time for each CNC and for

each read interval (time required to read CNC data and time

required to write to a point) to the log.


Check not placed: Not output (default)



34/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

For details of the log, see Subsection "5.5.7.3, "RTLOG – CNC

data read and point write time"

Item 5. Log CNC read time (NCRTLOG)

Whether to output the read process time for each CNC and for

each read interval to the log.


Check not placed: Not output (default)

For details of the log, see Subsection 5.5.7.4, "NCRTLOG – CNC

data read process time".

Item 6. Change the point value *** when error

Whether to set the value of a point to an invalid value (***) in the

event of a communication error.

Check placed: Set it to an invalid value (default)

Check not placed: Not set it to an invalid value

Item 7. Exclusive control in getting FOCAS2/Ethernet library

handle Whether to execute exclusive control in getting a

FOCAS2/Ethernet library handle.

Check placed: Execute exclusive control

Check not placed: Not execute exclusive control (default)

Item 8. Write the value of CNC to CIMPLICITY on every time

How to write the values read from the CNC to CIMPLICITY

points.

Check placed: Write every time

Check not placed: Write only when values differ (default)

<Default (Only Detail)> Button

Used to change all items (of groups 1 and 2) in the Init/Term

Scripts Detail Settings window to their defaults. This does not

change the items in the Init/Term Scripts General Settings

window.

NOTE

Creating a log causes communication processing speed to

decrease. Set the log creation options only if required; usually,

refrain from creating logs other than those created by default.



35/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

5.3.3 Settings in the Initialization/Termination Scripts


written to em_init.bcl and em_term.bcl. This subsection describes these

settings.

This subsection should be read only if em_init.bcl and em_term.bcl need to be customized in CNC Communication Mode. If i CELL is used, this

subsection need not be read for proper operation.

The settings made in the [Script] dialog box are inserted into em_init.bcl and

em_term.bcl, as described below.

• Insertion start position

The system searches for the lines "' <<FConfig.exe Script Begin>>" and

"' <<FConfig.exe Script End>>" and, if they exist, replaces the portion

between them with the settings.

If they do not exist, the system inserts the settings at the line subsequentto Sub Main().

• Settings to be inserted

' <<FConfig.exe Script Begin>>

...Initiation/termination processes for CNC Connection that have been

set in the [Script] dialog box...

' <<FConfig.exe Script End>>

The part between "' <<FConfig.exe Script Begin>>" and "' <<FConfig.exe

Script End>>" is overwritten with the settings. The other part will remain

unchanged.

Initiation process for CNC Connection that is written to em_init.bcl

em_init.bcl can contain the following scripts for the initiation of CNC

Connection. (Some are written on more than one line.)

The "Argument No." column indicates the item numbers in "Command line

arguments of CNC Connection" on the next page.



36/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

Initiation process for CNC Connection that is written to em_init.bcl

Line ScriptArgument

NoDescription

1 ' <<FConfig.exe Script Begin>> Insertion start comment2 Dim FNC_TaskID As Long Variable declaration3 Dim FNC_Process As Long Variable declaration4 Dim FNC_ExeData as String Variable declaration5

Dim FNC_InstallDir as String Variable declaration6 Dim FNC_ProjectDir as String Variable declaration8 FNC_InstallDir =

"C:¥Program Files¥FANUC¥iCELL¥"i CELL installation directory

9 FNC_ProjectDir =Environ$("SITE_ROOT")

10 PointSet"FNCSYSP.F_PROJECT_END", 0

End Point initialization

11 FNC_ExeData =FNC_InstallDir +"bin¥CIMVrtlCNC.exe/F=" + FNC_ProjectDir +

"CimVrtlCnc.cfg

/P=CIMPROJECT"

12

Command line arguments are crated on the 11thto 16th lines.Communication setting file nameProject name

12 FNC_ExeData = FNC_ExeData +" /PWE=1/C4=127.0.0.1/R= FNCSYSP.F_NCC_STATUS/Q= FNCSYSP.F_PROJECT_END"

3456

Check PWE of CNC on writing parameter = YesC4 Server Result PointEnd Point

13 FNC_ExeData = FNC_ExeData +" /PWRLOG=1/CPULOG=0/RTLOG=0/NCRTLOG=0"

789

10

Log power status of CNC (PWRLOG) = YesLog Internal progress (CPULOG) = NoLog real read time (RTLOG) = NoLog CNC read time (NCRTLOG) = No

14 FNC_ExeData = FNC_ExeData +

" /RUNFALIB=0/EVERYWRITE=0/RETRY=30000/KEEPOLD=0"

11121314

(None)Write the value of CNC to CIMPLICITY onevery time=NoRetry IntervalChange the point value *** when error = Yes

15 FNC_ExeData = FNC_ExeData +" /TIMEOUT1=5000/TIMEOUT2=180000/TIMEOUT3=5000/TIMEOUT4=5000"

15161718

Additional time to the terminal process timer Terminal waiting time of communication threadTerminal waiting time of dialog threadTerminal waiting time of log thread

16 FNC_ExeData = FNC_ExeData +" /EXCLUSIVEFWLIB=0

/WRETRY=1000/WRETRYNUM=2"

19

2021

Exclusive control in getting FOCAS2/Ethernet

library handle = NoRetry interval in busy caseRetry number in busy case

17 FNC_ExeData = FNC_ExeData +" /PSET_NOTIFY=FNCSYSP.F_COM_PSET_NOTIFY"

22 Point Setting Notification name (only if a PointSetting Notification Point is used)

18 FNC_TaskID = Shell(FNC_ExeData) Initiation of CNC Connection19 ' <<FConfig.exe Script End>> Insertion end comment



37/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

Command line arguments of CNC Connection

The command line arguments, represented by "/???", used in the initiation

process for CNC Connection are as described below. The "Item in the

Configuration dialog box" column indicates where in the [Script] dialog box

each argument is set.

Command line arguments of CNC Connection

No. Command lineargument

Description Item in theConfigurationdialog box

1 /F=[file-name] Name of the setting file for CNC Connection(Default =CimVrtlCNC.cfg)

GeneralItem 3

2 /P=[project-name] Specification of the name of the target project(CIMPLICITY project on which to execute CNCCommunication Mode)

GeneralItem 4

3 /PWE=[0/1] Whether to check the PWE of the CNC when writing parameters. 0:Check, 1:Not check (default = 0:Check)

Detail, Group 2Item 1

4 /C4=127.0.0.1 Host name of the C4 sever Set 127.0.0.1.


5 /R=[point-ID] Name of the initiation result storage point(Default =FNCSYSP.F_NCC_STATUS)

GeneralItem 5

6 /Q=[point-ID] Name of the point for termination instructions(Default = FNCSYSP.F_PROJECT_END)

GeneralItem 6

7 /PWRLOG=[0/1] Whether to record power ON/OFF status changes to the log0:Not output, 1:Output (default = 1:Output)


8 /CPULOG=[0/1] Whether to record the progress of internal processing to thelog0:Not output, 1:Output (default = 0:Not output)


9 /RTLOG=[0/1] Whether to record the read process time for each machine tothe log0: Not output, 1:Output (default = 0:Not output)


10 /NCRTLOG=[0/1] Whether to record the read process time for CNC data to thelog0:Not output, 1:Output (default = 0:Not output)


11 /RUNFALIB=0 Be sure to set 0. (None)

12 /EVERYWRITE=[0/1]

Whether to write the values read from the CNC toCIMPLICITY every time0:Write only when values differ, 1:Write every time(Default = 0)


13 /RETRY=[retry-inter val]

Retry interval (ms) to be assumed if initialization fails(Default = 30000ms)


14 /KEEPOLD=[0/1] Whether to set the value of a point to an invalid value (***)

in the event of a communication error.0:Set, 1:Not set (default = 0:Set)

Detail, Group 2

Item 6

15 /TIMEOUT1=time Additional time (ms) for the terminal process timer (Default = 5000ms)


16 /TIMEOUT2=time Terminal waiting time (ms) of a child thread of acommunication thread(Default = 180000ms)


17 /TIMEOUT3=time Terminal waiting time (ms) of a child thread of a dialog Detail, Group 1



38/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

thread(Default = 5000ms)

Item 5

18 /TIMEOUT4=time Terminal waiting time (ms) of a log thread(Default = 5000ms)


19 /EXCLUSIVEFWLIB=[0/1]

Whether to execute exclusive control in getting aFOCAS2/Ethernet library handle0:Not execute, 1:Execute (default = 0:Not execute)


20 /WRETRY=time Retry interval (ms) to be assumed if a write process is busy(Default = 1000ms)


21 /WRETRYNUM=number of retries

Retry number to be assumed if a write process is busy(Default = 2:Yes)


22 /PSET_NOTIFY=[point-ID]

Point Setting Notification name(Default = FNCSYSP.F_COM_PSET_NOTIFY)

GeneralItem 7

Termination process for CNC Connection that is written to em_term.bcl

em_term.bcl can contain the following scripts for the termination of CNC

Connection.

The "Argument No." column indicates the item numbers in "Command line

arguments of CNC Connection" on the previous page.

Termination process for CNC Connection that is written to em_term.bcl

Line ScriptArgument

No.Description

1 ' <<FConfig.exe Script Begin>> Insertion start command2 PointSet

"FNCSYSP.F_PROJECT_END", 16 Termination by setting End Point to 1

3 ' <<FConfig.exe Script End >> Insertion end comment



39/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

5.4 POINTS FOR DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

This section provides a detailed description of the items of the data kinds

that can be set at points for data input/output. It also describes examples of

specifying individual points.

5.4.1 PMC Data

Items

Data Class Boolean, Analog

Description Allows description of the point.

Read interval Select from among intervals 1, 2 and 3

specified as described in Subsection 5.2.1,

"Read intervals".

Data Type BOOL, SINT, USINT, INT, UINT, DINT,

UDINT

Bit Offset For the non-array BOOL type only, allows

specification of the bit to be referenced with a

number between 0 and 7. For other types, set

the bit offset to 0.



40/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

Elements BOOL: 1 or a multiple of 8 only

Other: Number of addresses to read and write

Read Only Read only or read-and-write enabled

Address G, F, X, Y, R, A, T, K, C, D, M, N, E

Number PMC address number

Set the method of specifying the PMC toinput/output.

A method can be specified only for the

Series30i /31i /32i.

The following methods can be specified:

Series16 i-compatible(1st PMC)

Input data to and output data from the first

PMC in the same way as the Series16i .

1st PMC, 2nd PMC, 3rd PMC,

Dual-check safety PMC

Input data to and output data from each

PMC unit.

Specific method

Path

Can be specified for G and F addresses

only. It causes data to be input to and

output from the PMC set on a specified

path.

It is not possible to write data to the entire address F and X area or to

addressees R9000 to R9999. Note also that data must not be written to

addresses K0017 to K0019 or to addresses K900 to K999.In the Series30i /31i /32i, multipath PMCs can be used, and G and F

addresses can be allocated freely to each path of a CNC. For example, in

the Series16i, addresses starting with G0000 are always allocated to the G

area of path 1, but in the Series30i /31i /32i, G2000 of the third PMC and

subsequent addresses can be allocated to the G area of path 1.



41/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

Allocation examples for PMCs

CNC

Path 1

Path 2

F0000～

G0000～ PMC

F1000～

G1000～

Series16i

Series30i

CNC

Path 1

Path 2

F0000～

G0000～ SignalI/F

F1000～

G1000～

PMC

3rd PMC

2nd PMCF3000～

G3000～

F2000～

G2000～

With a path specification, regardless of the allocation of a CNC path to a

PMC, the G and F addresses according to the CNC path are accessed. For

both G and F addresses, set values starting with 0 for numbers. Note that

unlike in the Series16i, in which offsets are used, such as 0 for path 1 and

1000 for path 2, values starting with 0 must always be set. A path

specification is effective to reading G and F addresses in the Series30 i /31i

/32i and to writing to G addresses.

Example) Comparison of specification methods for reading the G0 areaof the second path in the Series16i /30i for the "allocation examples

for PMCs" on the previous page

Series16i Address: G, Number: 1000

Series30i Address: G, Number: 0000, Specific method: Path

or

Address: G, Number: 3000, Specific method: 2nd PMC



42/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

Specification examples

a) If Point Name: R0200, Data Type: BOOL, Bit Offset: 0, Elements:

8, and Number: 200

R0200(0) = R0200#0 data

R0200(1) = R0200#1 data

R0200(2) = R0200#2 data

R0200(3) = R0200#3 data

R0200(4) = R0200#4 data

R0200(5) = R0200#5 data

R0200(6) = R0200#6 data

R0200(7) = R0200#7 data

b) If Point Name: R0200, Data Type: SINT, Bit Offset: 0, Elements:

3, and Number: 200

R0200(0) = R0200 data

R0200(1) = R0201 data

R0200(2) = R0202 data



43/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

5.4.2 Custom Macro Variables

Reading and writing custom macro variables requires that a custom macro

(custom macro B) be contained in the CNC.

Items

Data Class Analog (fixed)


Read interval Select from among intervals 1, 2, and 3 specified

in Subsection 5.2.1, "Read intervals".

Data Type REAL (fixed)

Bit Offset 0 (fixed)

Elements Number of addresses to read and write NOTE 1

Read Only Read only or read-and-write enabled NOTE2

Number Custom macro variable number

NOTE1 If a value greater than 0 is specified for Elements (for an array),

as many elements as the value are read from and written to the

specified address.

NOTE2 Only common variables can be read-and-write enabled; local

variables can be read only.



44/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2


a) If Point Name: CMV0900, Elements: 3, and Number: 900

CMV0900(0) = Custom macro number 900 data





45/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

5.4.3 Parameters

Items

Data Class Boolean, Analog


Read interval Select from among intervals 1, 2, and 3

specified in Subsection 5.2.1 , "Read intervals".

Data Type BOOL, SINT, USINT, INT, UINT, DINT,

UDINT, REAL

Bit Offset For the BOOL type only, allows specification

of the bit to be referenced with a number

between 0 and 7. For other types, set the bit

offset to 0.

Elements For a non-axis type: 1

For an axis type: Number of axes to read

(equal to or less than the number of controlled

axes) NOTE1

Read Only Read only or Read-and-write enabled

Number Parameter number



46/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

Axis Number For a non-axis type: 0

For an axis type: Number of axes (equal to or

less than the number of controlled axes)

NOTE1

NOTE1 For an axis type parameter with no axis number specified (Axis

number = 0), an array of axes may be specified. The number of array

elements must be equal to or less than the number of controlled axes.

For an axis type parameter with an axis number specified (Axisnumber not equal to 0) and for a non-axis type parameter, set 1 for

Elements.


a) If Point Name: PA3623, Data type: SINT, Bit offset: 0, Elements:

3, Number: 3623, and Axis number: 0

PA3623 (0) = Data for the 1st axis of parameter 3623

PA3623 (1) = Data for the 2nd axis of parameter 3623

PA3623 (2) = Data for the 3rd axis of parameter 3623

b) If Point Name: PA3715A3, Data type: BOOL, Bit offset: 2,

Elements: 1, Number: 3715, and Axis number: 3

PA3715A3 = #2 data for the 3rd axis of parameter 3715

c) If Point Name: PA3715, Data type: BOOL, Bit offset: 2, Elements:

3, Number: 3715, and Axis number: 0

PA3715(0) = #2 data for the 1st axis of parameter 3715

PA3715(1) = #2 data for the 2nd axis of parameter 3715

PA3715(2) = #2 data for the 3rd axis of parameter 3715



47/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

5.4.4 Alarm Numbers

Items



Read interval Select from among intervals 1, 2, and 3specified in Subsection 5.2.1, "Read intervals".

Data Type INT (fixed)


Elements Maximum number of alarms to read for the

specified axis

Read Only Read only (fixed)

Axis Number Axis number (equal to or greater than the

number of controlled axes)

0: Alarm not related to the axis



48/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2


a) If Point Name: ALMA0, Elements: 3, and Axis number: 0

ALMA0 (0) = Number of the first alarm not related to the axis

ALMA0 (1) = Number of the second alarm not related to the axis

ALMA0 (2) = Number of the third alarm not related to the axis

A value of -1 is placed if no alarm is generated.

b) If Point Name: ALMA1, Elements: 3, and Axis number: 1

ALMA1 (0) = Number of the first alarm of the first axis

ALMA1 (1) = Number of the second alarm of the first axis

ALMA1 (2) = Number of the third alarm of the first axis

A value of - 1 is placed if no alarm is generated.



49/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

5.4.5 Alarm Types

Items



Read interval Select from among intervals 1, 2 and 3specified as described in Subsection 5.2.1,

"Read intervals".



Elements Maximum number of alarms to read for the

specified axis

Read Only Read Only (fixed)

Axis Number Axis number (equal to or greater than the

number of controlled axes)

0: Alarm not related to the axis



50/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2


a) If Point Name: ALMTA0, Elements: 3, and Axis number: 0

ALMTA0 (0) = Alarm type for the first alarm not related to the axis

ALMTA0 (1) = Alarm type for the second alarm not related to the axis

ALMTA0 (2) = Alarm type for the third alarm not related to the axis


b) If Point Name: ALMTA1, Elements: 3, and Axis number: 1

ALMTA1 (0) = Alarm type for the first alarm of the first axis

ALMTA1 (1) = Alarm type for the second alarm of the first axis

ALMTA1 (2) = Alarm type for the third alarm of the first axis


Alarm types

The table below gives the alarm types that can be acquired.

Value

Series 16i /18i /21i,

Power Mate i D/H,

Series 0i

Series 30i /31i /32i

0 P/S100 Parameter write switch ON1 P/S000 Input of parameters that require

power off

2 P/S101 I/O error

3 P/S, other Foreground P/S

4 Overtravel alarm Overtravel/external data input error

5 Overheat alarm Overheat alarm

6 Servo alarm Servo alarm

7 System alarm Data input/output error

8 APC alarm Macro alarm

9 Spindle alarm Spindle alarm

10 P/S5000 to P/S5999, punch press

alarm

Other alarms

11 Laser alarm Alarm related to the malfunction

prevention function

12 Unused Background P/S

13 Rigid tapping alarm SYNC EXCESS ERROR

14 Unused Reserved

15 External alarm message External alarm message

16 Unused Reserved

17 Unused Reserved

18 Unused Reserved

19 Unused PMC error



51/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

5.4.6 Number of Operator's Message

Reading the number of operator's message or operator's message strings

requires that the external message function or external data input function

option be contained in the CNC.

The function in the Series16i /18i /21i that reads four numbers of operator's

messages or operator's message strings can be used in CNCs of the followingeditions and later.

CNC type Edition

16i T B1F1 14

16i M B0F1 15

18i T BEF1 14

18i M BDF1 15

21i T DEF1 9

21i M DDF1 9

NOTE

1 To enable the second to fourth messages in the Series16i /18i

/21i, 0i, bit 0 of parameter No. 3207 must be set.

2 In the Power Mate i D/H, only the first message is enabled.

3 In the Series30i /31i /32i, this function is under development and

cannot be used.



52/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

Items





"Read intervals".



Elements 1 (fixed)


Kind of operator's message

For the Series16i /18i /21i, 0i

1 First message

2 Second message3 Third message

4 Fourth message

For the Power Mate i D/H

Kind of operator's

1 First message


a) If Point Name: OPMN4 and Kind of operator's: 4

OPMN4 = Number of the fourth message

A value of -1 is placed if no operator's message is generated.



53/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

5.4.7 Operator's Message Strings

Available CNCs, the necessary CNC options and parameters, and others are

the same as those described in the preceding subsection, Subsection 5.4.6,

" Number of Operator's Message".

Items

Data Class Text (fixed)




"Read intervals".

Data Type STRING (fixed)


Elements 255 (fixed)




54/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

Kind of operator's message

For the Series16i /18i /21i, 0i

1 First message

2 Second message

3 Third message

4 Fourth message

For the Power Mate i D/H

Kind of operator's

1 First message

Specification example

a) If Point Name: OPMM1 and Kind of operator's: 1

OPMM1 = First message string



55/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

5.5 CNC CONNECTION

CNC Connection performs CIMPLICITY point input/output by

communicating with CNCs. CNC Connection is used in i CELL and in

CNC Communication Mode.

This section describes the main specifications of CNC Connection.

5.5.1 Read Methods and Read Intervals - Parallel Process and SequentialProcess

There are two methods of reading CIMPLICITY points from CNCs, a

parallel process and a sequential process. A parallel process and a

sequential process cannot be used at the same time. A parallel process and

a sequential process differ as described below.

Parallel process

Read instructions are issued to each CNC at the same time at each read

interval.

This can shorten the time required to read values from multiple CNCs, but

will increase the CPU load at the peak of the read process.

Sequential process

Read instructions are issued to one CNC at a time at each read interval.

This will increase the time required to read values from multiple CNCs, but

can keep the increases in CPU load at the peak of the read process.

TimeRead interval

Parallel process Sequential process

TimeRead interval

and represent the times required to read data from CNCs 1 and 2.

Difference between parallel and sequential processes in reading(if communicating with two CNCs)

2

1

2

1

2

1 2

1 2 1 2 1 2

1



56/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

No matter which process is used, the read interval settings will have a great

impact on CPU load. Care must be exercised so that the read interval

settings are sufficiently large as compared with the time required to actually

read data from the CNCs to prevent the CPU utilization at the peak of the

process from reaching 100%.

The time required to actually read from CNCs can be recorded to a log.

For details, see Subsection 5.5.7.3, "RTLOG – CNC data read and point

write time".

For a parallel process, three different read intervals can be set for each CNC;

for a sequential process, three different read intervals common to all CNCs

can be set. It is possible to specify which of these read intervals to use on a

point-by-point basis. This function makes it possible to set the data that is

to be updated frequently and the data that is not on a point-by-point basis.

If multiple read intervals are set, they are processed in parallel. The figure

below shows an outline of a parallel process and a sequential process.

Parallel process Sequential process

and represent the times required to read data from CNCs 1 and 2.

Setting of read intervals

2 2

1 2

121

12

21

TimeReadinterval 1

Readinterval 2

TimeReadinterval 1

Readinterval 2

1 2 1 2 1 2

Duplicate DuplicateDuplicateDuplicate

21

If there are reads from the same CNC at the same time, the reads are

performed in parallel.

For an explanation of how to set read methods and set read intervals, refer to

Section 2.4, "PROJECT PROPERTY" in Part III, "SETTING", in the

i CELL Operator's Manual and see Subsection 5.2.1, "Read intervals",

respectively.



57/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

5.5.2 Write Methods and Write Intervals

As for the writing from CIMPLICITY points to CNCs, when a value at a

CIMPLICITY point is changed, it will immediately be reflected in the CNC.

Unlike reading, writing is not performed periodically.

5.5.3 Point Group

Multiple points grouped together are referred to as a Point Group. Using

the Point Group function to set a group of points for constant reading and

another group of points for reading only when necessary, it is possible to

reduce network load. Setting a Point Group is effective only to the reading

from points. As for the writing to points, if a value at a CIMPLICITY point

is changed, it will immediately be reflected in the CNC, regardless of

whether a Point Group is set or not.

A Point Group must have a single BOOL type point corresponding to it.

This point is called the Point Group Control Point. While the value of thiscontrol point is True, reading from the points in the group is performed. If

the value of the control point is False, reading from the point in the group is

not performed.

Read interval

represents an execution of a read represents a stoppage of a read.

Point group

○ ×

Point group A

Control point A

Point A1Point A2

Point group B

Control point B

Point B1Point B2

TrueFalse

Time

TrueFalse

○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○

× ○ ×

× ○ ×

Point group A Control point A

Point A1Point A2

Point group A for constant reading

Point B1Point B2

Point group BControl point B

Point group B for reading whennecessary

Point group A is forconstant reading, socontrol point A mustalways be set to True.

Point group B is forreading only when

control point B is set to True.



58/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

Multiple Point Groups may be set. Reading from points not in a Point

Group is not performed; all points from which to read data must be set in a

Point Group. A Point Group is not related to a particular machine; it is

possible to set points in different machines in a single Point Group.

For an explanation of how to set Point Groups, see Subsection 5.2.3, "Point

Group".

5.5.4 CNC Power Status Monitor Function

This function monitors the power ON/OFF state of a CNC, and sets True at

the power status monitor point if the power is ON and False if it is OFF.

For an explanation of power status monitor points, see Subsection 5.5.8.5,

"Power status monitor point".

In older versions, the power status could be monitored only in a

same-network configuration such as that shown in Fig. A, but in version 1.4

or later, the state can be monitored in a different-network configuration such

as that shown in Fig. B.

Note, however, the CNC power status monitor function differs in the time

required to recognize the power OFF state of a CNC depending on the

network configuration.

In the same-network configuration shown in Fig. A, there occurs a delay of

only several seconds from the time the power of the CNC turns OFF until

CNC Connection recognizes it. In the different-network configuration

shown in Fig. B, on the other hand, the time set for FwLib time-out is

required until CNC Connection recognizes the power OFF state. For an

explanation of setting FwLib time-out, refer to Subsection 2.6.2, "Setting up

FOCAS2/Ethernet Communication" in Part III, "SETTING", in the i CELL

Operator's Manual.

CNCPC

Router

CNC

CNC CNC

The PC and the CNCsbelong to differentnetworks connected viaa router.

The PC and the CNCs all belong to the same

network.

Network A

Network B

PC

Fig. A Same-network configuration Fig. B Different-network configuration



59/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

5.5.5 Reconnection Function in the Event of a Communication Error inRead/Write Processes

Due to poor communication line quality, a communication error may occur

in a read/write process although the CNC power status monitor function,

described in Subsection 5.5.4, "CNC Power Status Monitor Function",

decides that the power is ON. It is possible to make settings so that areconnection is made in such a case, i.e., a communication is terminated and

another communication is started. It is possible to select a reconnection

method from three types, Disable/Select by Point/Enable.

Note that selecting a reconnection method is effective only if the personal

computer and the CNCs are in a same-network configuration such as that

shown in Fig. A in Subsection 5.5.4, "CNC Power Status Monitor Function".

The reconnection function is always enabled in a different network

configuration such as the one shown in Fig. B.

Reconnection method

Disable

Does not make a reconnection automatically. If a

communication error occurs, any subsequent reading from or

writing to the CNC will be canceled. If the power status of the

CNC turns OFF and then back ON, a reconnection will be made.

Select by Point

Used to specify whether to make a reconnection according to the

value of a point. The point used for this purpose is called thecommunication reconnection instruction point. For an

explanation of communication reconnection instruction points, see

Subsection 5.5.8.8, "Communication reconnection instruction

point".

If a communication error occurs, CNC Connection sets the

communication reconnection instruction point to True. The user

application must monitor the communication reconnection

instruction point, and if it becomes True, perform appropriate

action such as notifying the operator of the communication error,

so that the operator can decide whether to make a reconnection.To make a reconnection, set the communication reconnection

instruction point to False. If the communication reconnection

instruction point becomes False, CNC Connection makes a

reconnection. If a reconnection cannot be made, a reconnection

is attempted at every specified retry time until it is successful.

If this function causes a reconnection to be attempted, a log called



60/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

"Retry Connection (2)" will be created in "CimVrtlCnc Error Log"

regardless of whether it is a success or a failure. After a

reconnection is successful, this log will not be created.

If a communication error occurs, CNC Connection sets the

communication reconnection instruction point to True, and upon

realizing that the power OFF state of the CNC subsequently, CNC

Connection sets the communication reconnection instruction point

to False.

Enable

Makes a reconnection automatically if a communication error

occurs. If a reconnection cannot be made, a reconnection is

attempted at every specified retry time until it is successful. If

the quality of the communication line is poor, it is possible that an

error recurs immediately after a connection is made. If a

communication error frequently occurs, improve the quality of the

communication line, rather than relying on the reconnection

function. When the function is enabled, use caution because

communication errors may go unnoticed even if they frequently

occur.

If this function causes a reconnection to be attempted, a log called

"Retry Connection (1)" will be created in "CimVrtlCnc Error Log"

regardless of whether it is a success or a failure. After a

reconnection is successful, this log will not be created.

Setting method

For an explanation of setting a reconnection method, refer to Subjection

2.6.2, "Setting up FOCAS2/Ethernet Communication" in Part III,"SETTING", in the i CELL Operator's Manual.

For an explanation of setting the retry time to be assumed if a reconnection

is attempted, see "Group 1" in Subsection 5.3.2.2, "Init/Term Scripts Detail

Settings".



61/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

5.5.6 Reconnection Function in the Initialization Process during CNCConnection Initiation and in the Power ON Initialization Process

If a communication error occurs when CNC Connection is initiated and is

executing an initialization process, a retry is always made and if the retry is

successful, a log called "Retry Initialization" is created in "CimVrtlCnc Error

Log".Also, if a communication error occurs in initialization at the time of

switching from power OFF to ON, a retry is always made and if the retry is

successful, a log is output to "Retry Connection".

For an explanation of setting the reconnection retry time in the initialization

process during initiation and in initialization at the time of switching from

power OFF to ON, see "Group 1" in Subsection 5.3.2.2, "Init/Term Scripts

Detail Settings".

5.5.7Logs

The error status, the progress, and other information are recorded to logs.

Whether to output the progress can be specified with the appropriate

initiation-time option. For an explanation of specifying the option, see

Subsection 5.3.2, "Setting".

In the event of an error, view "CimVrtlCnc Error Log" and "CimVrtlCnc

Detail Log", using the log viewer installed together with i CELL or CNC

Communication Mode.

As the machine number to be output to a log, the path-specific serial number or the IP address-specific number may be specified.

For the path-specific serial number, the serial numbers allocated sequentially

to the individual machines on a path-by-path basis, starting with the path

number 1 of the machine number 1, will be machine numbers. For the IP

address-specific number, machines with the same IP address are allocated

the same machine number, and Pxx (where xx denotes a path number),

indicating the path number, is added at the beginning of each log.

As for those logs that do not depend on the machine number (file read

failures, application initiations/terminations, total process time at each read

interval, etc.), the machine number is assumed 0, and Pxx is not added.Pxx is not added, either, if only one path is set.

Settings and the machine numbers output to a log will be as follows:



62/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

Examples)

Machine information in theConfiguration dialog box

Machine number output to a log

Machinenumber

Path number Path-specific serialnumber

IP address-specificnumber

1 1 1 1

1 2 22

2 3 23 1 4 3

5 1 5 4

The machine number to be output to a log can be set with the appropriate

project property.

Refer to Section 2.4, "PROJECT PROPERTY", in Part III, "SETTING", in

the i CELL Operator's Manual.

The following explains logs in detail.

5.5.7.1 PWRLOG – CNC power status

Changes in the power ON/OFF state of each CNC are output to CimVrtlCnc

Detail Log.

The log is output only when a power status change occurs.It is used to survey the power status acquisition process.

Log format

Power Log: Old=previous New=present Reboot=restart Msg=message

Old Previous power status.

0 = OFF, 1 = ON

New Present power status.

0 = OFF, 1 = ON

ReBoot Whether a restart has been done.

0 = No restart done, 1 = Restart done

Msg Whether a power message has been sent.

0 = Not sent, 1 = Sent

NOTE

Creating a log causes communication processing speed to

decrease. Set the log creation options only if required; usually,

refrain from creating logs other than those created by default.



63/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

Example)

<For a machine number in the setting file>

Power Log: Old=1 New=0 Reboot=0 Msg=0

<For an IP address-specific machine number (path number: 1)>

P01 Power Log: Old=1 New=0 Reboot=0 Msg=0

5.5.7.2 CPULOG – Progress of internal processing

The progress of internal processing is output to CimVrtlCnc Detail Log.

It is used to survey the CPU utilization.

Log format

Power Log: Processing thread number - processing message number

Number of the machine on which processing is

performed + thread number. Thread numbers are as

listed below.

0x10 MsgMng thread0x2X NCRead thread

0x30 NCWrite thread

0x40 PtSet thread

0x50 OnChng thread

0x60 C4Chk thread

0x70 TimMng thread

Thread Number

0xFF Dialog box

Message

Number

Number of the message processed with the

PreTranslateMessage function on the thread.

Example) If the WM_CHECKPOWER(0x07F9) message is processed on

the C4Chk thread with the machine number 1


CPU Log: 0160 - 07F9

< For an IP address-specific machine number (path number:1)>

P01 CPU Log: 0160 - 07F9

5.5.7.3 RTLOG – CNC data read and point write time

The process time for each CNC and for each read interval is output to

CimVrtlCnc Detail Log.

An output process time is the total of the time for the power check process

performed at each read interval, the time for the process for reading data

from a CNC, and the time for the process for creating the data to be written

to a CIMPLICITY point. If the read is a sequential process, the total of the

process times of all machines for each read interval is also output.



64/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

It is used to survey the process time at each read interval.

Log contents (1) - If the read is a parallel process

The total of the times for the processes performed at each read interval of a

CNC is output to the log.

Specified read interval

Real read process time (log output time)

Idle time

Power check

process time

Time for the process for

reading data from the

CNC

Time for the process

for creating the data

to be written

CNC1 read process

Log contents (2) - If the read is a sequential process

Besides the same data as that for a parallel process, the total of times for the

read processes of all CNCs is output to the log.

Idle time

Log output time

Read process for CNC1

Total of the times for the processes for all machines (log output time)

Log output time

Read process for CNC2


Log formatR Time Log: TID=Read interval /Process time

R TotalTime Log: TID=Read interval /Process time

Read interval Read interval at which the process is performed.

0 = Interval 1, 1 = Interval 2, 2 = Interval 3

Process time Time required for the process (ms).

Example 1) If the read is a parallel process, the machine number is 1, the

read interval is 1, and the process time is 50 [ms]


R Time Log: TID=0000 /50<For an IP address-specific machine number (path number: 1)>

P01 R Time Log: TID=0000 /50

Example 2) If the read is a sequential process, the machine number is 1,

the read interval is 1, the process time is 50 [ms], and the total process

time is 100 [ms]




65/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

R Time Log: TID=0000 /50

R TotalTime Log: TID=0000 /100

5.5.7.4 NCRTLOG – CNC data read process time

The time for the read process for each CNC and for each read interval is

output to CimVrtlCnc Detail Log.

An output read process time is the time for the process for reading data froma CNC at each read interval.

It is used to survey read process time.

Log contents

The time for the process for reading data from a CNC for each CNC read

interval is output to the log.


Real read process time

Idle time

Power check

process time

Time for the process for

reading data from theCNC (log output time)

Time for the process

for creating the datato be written

CNC1 read process

Log format

NC R Time Log: TID=Read interval /Process time

Read interval Read interval at which the process is performed.0 = Interval 1, 1 = Interval 2, 2 = Interval 3

Process time Time required for the process (ms).

Example) If the machine number is 1, the read interval is 1, and the

process time is 10 [ms]


NC R Time Log: TID=0001 /10

<For an IP address-specific machine number (path number: 1)>

P01 NC R Time Log: TID=0001 /10



66/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

5.5.8 CNC Connection Control Points

This subsection describes the points for controlling the operation of CNC

Connection and for monitoring the operation state.

Of these points, a single point necessary for a project can be created as

described in Subsection 5.3.2.1, "Init/Term Scripts General Settings".

If i CELL is used, default points other than Point Setting Notification Points

are created in advance. Also, the single point necessary for each CNC or for each path of a CNC is automatically created when the communication

settings for the machine are made.

5.5.8.1 Result Point

This is the point for storing the results of initiating CNC Connection, and a

single Result Point is necessary for a project.

In CNC Communication Mode, a Result Point may be created with any

name. For an explanation of how to create a Result Point, see Subsection5.3.2.1, "Init/Term Scripts General Settings".

Data Type INT

Elements 1

Initial Value -1

Point Name FNCSYSP.F_NCC_STATUS, or any name

Detail A value is set by CNC Connection.

When the initiation process for CNC

Connection terminates, a result will be set. If

operation is normal, 0 is set; if an error such as

"no setting file found" occurs, a positive error

code is set.



67/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

5.5.8.2 End Point

This is the point for terminating CNC Connection, and a single End Point is

necessary for a project.

In CNC Communication Mode, an End Point can be created with any name.

For details of how to create an End Point, see Subsection 5.3.2.1, "Init/Term

Scripts General Settings".

Data Type BOOL

Elements 1

Initial Value False

Point Name FNCSYSP.F_PROJECT_END, or any name

Detail A value is set by the user.

Setting the value to True causes CNC

Connection to terminate.

5.5.8.3 Point Setting Notification Point

Overview

The Point Setting Notification Point is used to notify that a user application

is ready to use points when i CELL or CNC Communication Mode is

initiated.

The Point Setting Notification Point is of two types, general Point Setting

Notification Point and path-specific Point Setting Notification Point.

When a path-specific Point Setting Notification Point becomes TRUE, this

means that a series of communications for the path terminates and the

application is ready to reference the points on the path. A path-specific

Point Setting Notification Point is NONE at initiation, and becomes TRUE

when the following processes terminate:

(1) CNC power ON/OFF status check

(2) In the power ON status, reading of data at all read intervals

If, however, 0 m/s is specified as a read interval, the point is set TRUE with

no reading. Those points that are not contained in a Point Group and those

points for which the initial value of the Point Group Control Point is 0 sothat no read instructions are issued are set TRUE when the process (1) is

performed. They are also set TRUE if an error occurs in the above

processes.

A general Point Setting Notification Point becomes TRUE when all

path-specific Point Setting Notification Points become TRUE.

Path-specific and general Point Setting Notification Points change from

NONE to TRUE only once when CNC Communication Mode is initiated.



68/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

Then, they remain constant values until CNC Communication Mode is

terminated.

Path-specific Point Setting Notification Point

This is the point for the notification of the completion of path-specific point

setting. If the Point Setting Notification Function is used, a single

path-specific Point Setting Notification Point is required for each path of a

CNC.

Data Type BOOL

Elements 1

Initial Value None

Point Name FNCxxxyy.F_COM_PSET_NOTIFY

(where xxx is a machine number and yy is a

path number)

Detail A value is set by CNC Connection.The value is set to True when path-specific

point setting is completed.

General Point Setting Notification Point

This is the point for the notification of the completion of general point

setting. If the Point Setting Notification Function is used, a single general

Point Setting Notification Point is required for each project.

In CNC Communication Mode, a general Point Setting Notification Point

may be crated with any name. For an explanation of how to create a

General Point Setting Notification Point, see Subsection 5.3.2.1, "Init/Term

Scripts General Settings".

Data Type BOOL

Elements 1

Initial Value None

Point Name FNCSYSP.F_COM_PSET_NOTIFY, or any

name


The value of this point becomes True when all

path-specific Point Setting Notification Points

become True.



69/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

5.5.8.4 Error message storage point

This is the point for storing an error message if an error occurs in CNC

Connection. An error message storage point is required for each CNC.

Data Type STRING

Elements 256

Initial Value None

Point Name FNCxxx01.F_NCC_ERROR (where xxx is a

machine number)


If an error occurs, an error message is set at this

point. The same message is also recorded in

the error log.

5.5.8.5 Power status monitor point

This is the point for monitoring the power ON/OFF status of the CNC to

which i CELL or CNC Communication Mode is connected. A power status

monitor point is required for each CNC.

Data Type BOOL

Elements 1

Initial Value None

Point Name FNCxxx01.F_PWR (where xxx is a machine

number)


The value becomes True if the CNC power

status is ON and False if OFF.



70/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

5.5.8.6 Communication enable instruction point

This is the point for instructing whether to perform communication with the

CNC to which i CELL or CNC Communication Mode is connected. A

single communication enable instruction point is required for each path of a

CNC. After issuing instructions using this point, check the response, using

a communication status monitor point, described in Subsection 5.5.8.7,

"Communication status monitor point".

Data Type BOOL

Elements 1

Initial Value True

Point Name FNCxxxyy.F_COM_ON


path number)


If the value is True, communication with the

CNC is performed; if False, it is not performed.

5.5.8.7 Communication status monitor point

This is the point for making a response to instructions to enable or disable

communication, as described in Subsection 5.5.8.6, "Communication enable

instruction point". A single communication status monitor point is required

for each path of a CNC.

Data Type BOOL

Elements 1

Initial Value None

Point Name FNCxxxyy.F_COM_COND


path number)


When instructions are received from a

communication enable instruction point, this

point assumes the same value as that of the

communication enable instruction point.



71/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

5.5.8.8 Communication reconnection instruction point

This is the point for instructing whether to make a reconnection if a

communication error occurs due to poor communication line quality. A

single point is required for each CNC.

Data Type BOOL

Elements 1

Initial Value False

Point Name FNCxxx01.F_COM_RETRY (where xxx is a

machine number)


If a communication error occurs, and the value

is True, a reconnection is made; if False, a

reconnection is not made.

5.5.8.9 Point Group Control Point

This is the point for controlling a Point Group, and each Point Group

requires a single Point Group Control Point.

A Point Group Control Point can be created with any name. For an

explanation of how to make Point Group Control Points, see Subsection

5.2.3, "Point Group".

Data Type BOOL

Elements 1

Initial Value True or False

Point Name Default: FNCxxx01.F_POINT_GROUP

Any name:

Name for a machine = FNCxxx01.U_???

(where xxx is a machine number)

Name common to machines =

FNCSYSP.U_???


If the value is True, data is read from the points

related to this point; if False, data is not read

from the points.



72/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

5.5.9 CNC Connection Termination

When CNC Connection terminates, various threads also terminate.

Thread termination wait times are related as shown in the figure below. If

the default is such that an application cannot terminate normally because of

no response from a thread, specify a child thread termination wait time

longer than the default. If the child thread termination wait time is shorter,

the application may not be terminate normally.

Termination wait time for a child threadof a communication thread

Termination process for a child thread of a communication thread

Terminal process timer

Additionaltime to theterminal

process timer

Termination waittime for a log

thread

Dialog box termination process

Termination waittime for the

child thread inthe dialog box

The timeover time for the default termination wait time for a child thread of

a communication thread is 180 seconds. In this case, the maximum wait

time until CNC Connection terminates is 195 seconds, including the

timeover time of 15 seconds in other processes. If the termination process

terminates normally, CNC Connection terminates in a shorter time.



73/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

6 CNC COMMUNICATION MODE

This chapter describes CNC Communication Mode, which is one of the

operating modes of i CELL. This function can be used in i CELL 2.1 or later.

6.1 OVERVIEW

6.1.1 Description of CNC Communication Mode

CNC Communication Mode, one of the operating modes of i CELL, is a

mode in which only the function for communicating with a CNC (CNC

Connection) of all the i CELL functions is used. Whether to use i CELL

functions or use CNC Communication Mode can be specified on the

installation window when i CELL is installed.

CNC Communication Mode can be used only when FOCAS2/Ethernet is

used for communication. Also, a CIMPLICITY HMI development server

is required.

If CNC Communication Mode is installed, functions other than CNC

Connection (such as NC program management, CNC display and operation,

operation result management, and maintenance) cannot be used.



74/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

6.1.2 Comparison between i CELL and CNC Communication Mode

The differences between i CELL and CNC Communication Mode are as

given in the table below.

Comparison item i CELL CNC Communication Mode

Contents of theCIMPLICITY project to

be installed

The various functions of i CELL are

installed (such as programmanagement, CNC display andoperation, operation resultmanagement, and maintenance).

Applications must be created by theuser.

Point creation method The points for use with the variousfunctions of i CELL are automatically

created during machine setting.Those points that are required by theuser must be created using Point

Customization.

Those points that are required by user applications must be created usingPoint Customization.

Number of CNCs that can be connected duringinstallation

5 5

Maximum number of CNCs that can beconnected using CNCconnection options

20 75

Method of communication with theCNC

FOCAS2/Ethernet,RS-232-C (DNC2, reader/puncher)

FOCAS2/Ethernet

Drawing numbers of available CNC connectionoptions

NOTE Hatched drawing numbersare for CNCCommunication Mode

only.They cannot be used withi CELL.

A08B-9510-J940 5A08B-9510-J941 10A08B-9510-J942 15

A08B-9510-J940 5A08B-9510-J941 10A08B-9510-J942 15

A08B-9510-J943 20 NOTE A08B-9510-J944 30A08B-9510-J945 40A08B-9510-J946 50A08B-9510-J947 60

A08B-9510-J948 70



75/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

6.1.3 Procedure for Using CNC Communication Mode

The procedure for using CNC Communication Mode is as follows:

Step Where described in this manual

1 Install CNC Communication Mode 6.3.1 Installation

2 Create the CIMPLICITY project to use CNCCommunication Mode (target project)

6.3.2.1 Creating target projects

3 Enter an order password in the Configurationdialog box

6.3.2.2 Registering an order password

4 Set the number of machines connected Section 2.4, PROJECT PROPERTY, III.Setting

NOTE

5 Set machine information Section 2.5, MACHINE INFORMATION, III.

Setting NOTE

6 Set up communication with the machines Section 2.6, COMMUNICATION, III. Setting NOTE

7 Set points 5.2 POINT SETTING

8 Add the initiation/termination processes for CNC Communication Mode to the script of thetarget project

5.3 CIMPLICITY SCRIPT SETTING

NOTE Section in the i CELL Operator's Manual where it is described.



76/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

6.2 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

6.2.1 Available CNCs

Available CNSs are the same as those when FOCAS2/Ethernet is used with

i CELL.

Refer to "When the FOCAS2/Ethernet is used" in Section 3.1, "CNC", inChapter 3, "OPERATING ENVIRONMENT", in Part I, "GENERAL", in the

i CELL Operator's Manual.

6.2.2 Ethernet Boards and CNC Options

Ethernet boards and CNC options are the same as those when

FOCAS2/Ethernet is used with i CELL.

Refer to "Ethernet boards or Data Server boards and CNC options " in

Section 3.1, "CNC", in Chapter 3, "OPERATING ENVIRONMENT" in Part

I, "GENERAL", in the i CELL Operator's Manual.

6.2.3 Network Configuration

The network configuration is the same as that when the FOCAS2/Ethernet is

used with i CELL.

Refer to Section 3.3, "NETWORK CONFIGURATION", in Part I,

"GENERAL", in the i CELL Operator's Manual.

6.2.4 Number of CNCs Connected

Using CNC Communication Mode requires that the basic order password

supplied with the installation CD be entered in the same way as with i

CELL.

Up to 75 CNCs can be connected using the order passwords of CNC

connection options.

6.2.5 CIMPLICITY HMI

A development server is required.



77/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

6.3 INSTALLATION AND ORDER PASSWORDREGISTRATION

This chapter describes how to install CNC Communication Mode so that it

can be used, as well as how to register an order password.

Register an order password on a single personal computer only once. If

two or more target projects are to be used, once an order password isregistered, there is no need to register it for all the target projects. (If an

attempt is made to register the same order password twice or more, an error

message "As entered Order Password is already registerd, you can not regist

it." is displayed and registration fails.)

6.3.1 Installation

Perform installation with the following procedure:

<1> Insert the installation CD of i CELL.

If the installer is not automatically started, execute "Setup.exe", located in

the root directory of the CD.

<2> In the installation component select window, select "CNC

Communication Mode".

6.3.2 Registering an Order Password

Before registering an order password, create a target project (CIMPLICITY

project to use CNC Communication Mode).

6.3.2.1 Creating target projects

<1> Start the CIMPLICITY workbench.

<2> When the workbench appears, select [New]>[Project] from the [File]

menu.

<3> Make the following settings, and click <Create>.

Project Enter a project name.

Options Place a check next to "Basic Control".

Protocols Do not place a check next to any item.

NOTE

It is not possible to install i CELL and CNC CommunicationMode at the same time.



78/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

<4> When the Project Property dialog box appears, make the settings for

the necessary items and click <OK>.

<5> When the CIMPLICITY project wizard appears, click <Exit>.

<6> The workbench for the created project appears. If "Select OK to

start this project." appears, click <Cancel>.

<7> Create a single dummy virtual point. The point may have any point

name and point class.

<8> From the [Project] menu of the workbench, select [Update

configuration] to update.

<9> Exit from the workbench.

6.3.2.2 Registering an order password

<1> From the Start menu, select [Program]>[CIMPLICITY

iCELL]>[iCELL configuration] to start the Configuration dialog box.

<2> When the "Select Project" dialog box appears, select the project

file*.gef of the target file and click <OK>.

The figure below shows an example where the project C:¥CncCom uses

CNC Communication Mode.

<3> When the created CIMPLICITY project is selected for the first time,

the following confirmation dialog box appears. Click <OK>.

<4> Confirm that at least one point is registered with the CIMPLICITY

project.



79/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

If a point has been created as described in Subsection 6.3.2.1, "Creating

target projects", click <OK>. If there is no point, create a dummy virtual

point, then click <OK>. The dummy virtual point may have any name

and class.

<5> The Configuration dialog box appears.

<6> From the [Project] menu, click [Machine count configuration], and

register an order password.

For an explanation of how to register an order passwords, refer to Section

2.3, "MACHINE COUNT CONFIGURATION", in Part III, "SETTING",

in the i CELL Operator's Manual.



80/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

6.4 POINT NAME RULE SETTING

6.4.1 Overview

A point name to create in the point customization window requires a first

part representing a machine number and a path number, followed by a

user-specifiable point identifier. Point name rules are the rules for the first

part representing a machine number and a path number.

By using Point Name Rule Setting, it is possible to change the point name

rules in the point customization window to those for the user.

As the figure below shows, the point name rules of CNC Communication

Mode applies to the points to be created in the point customization window.

By using Point Name Rule Setting, it is possible to create point names using

the point name rules for the user, as the figure below shows.

Point name rules of CNC Communication ModeFNC+3-digit machine number+2-digit path number

Area for entering auser-specifiable point identifier

Change them to the point name rules for the user

NOTE

The Point Name Rule Setting Function can be used only

when Point Customization is used in CNC Communication

Mode in i CELL 2.1 or later.

If Point Customization is used with i CELL, the Point Name

Rule Setting Function cannot be used.



81/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

What this function cannot do

Point Name Rule Setting is the function that enables setting of name rules by

the user for each machine number and path number. Even by using Point

Name Rule Setting, it is not possible to set irregular point names. Nor is it

possible to set the same point name for different machines or different paths.

Example) Neither point (1) nor (2) can be set for a machine with the

machine number 3 and the second path:

Point (1) MCN3_PATH2.D1000

Point (2) M3_P2.D1001

6.4.2 Point Name Rules of CNC Communication Mode

Points for use in CNC Communication Mode are largely divided into two

types, machine-specific point and machine-unrelated point. By using Point

Name Rule Setting, it is possible to change the Point Name Rules for the

names hatched in the figure below, i.e., the Point Name Rules for

machine-specific points and the Point Name Rules for common Point Group points of all machine-unrelated points.

(For the unhatched points, marked with a *1) symbol, any point names may

be specified in the "Init/Term Scripts General Settings" dialog box in the

[Project] menu.)

Point for a common point group point

Result Point, End point,Point Setting Notification Point *1)

Point for the first path of a machine

Point for each path of a machine

Per-machine

Machine-unrelated

Point

Machine-specific point

The name of a machine-specific point consists of a first part identifying the

machine and the path and a second part identifying the type of the point, the

parts being separated with a period ".". The point name format is as

follows:

FNCxxxyy.<identifier>

whereFNC is a fixed character string.

xxx is a three-digit machine number. It can range from 001 to 999.

yy is a two-digit path number.

<identifier> is a name identifying the type of the point.



82/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

Example)

The point name with a machine number of 1, a path name of 1, and an

identifier of "F_AL" (CNC alarm) is "FNC00101.F_AL".

Machine-unrelated point

The name of a machine-unrelated point consists of a first part, which is a

fixed character string, and a second part identifying the point name, the parts

being separated with a period ".". The point name format is as follows:

FNCSYSP.<identifier>

where

FNCSYSP is a fixed character string.

<identifier > is a name identifying the type of the point.

By using Point Name Rule Setting, it is possible to change the Point Name

Rules for common Point Group points of all machine-unrelated points.

Machine-unrelated points include Result Points, End Points, and Point

Setting Notification Points, which can be set in the [Script] dialog box in the[Project] menu.



83/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

6.4.3 Using Point Name Rule Setting

Use Point Name Rule Setting with the following procedures:

Subsection 6.4.3.1, "Enabling and disabling the Point Name Rule Setting

Function"

Subsection 6.4.3.2, "Displaying the Point Name Rule Setting dialog box"

Subsection 6.4.3.3, "Setting point name rules"

The procedures are described in detail below.

6.4.3.1 Enabling and disabling the Point Name Rule Setting Function

First, enable the Point Name Rule Setting Function. To enable this

function, place a check in the [Point Name Rule Setting] checkbox in the

[Project Property] menu.

The Point Name Rule Setting Function can be used in CNC Communication

Mode only; this checkbox is not displayed if i CELL is installed.

Placing a check in the "Point Name Rule Setting" checkbox in the [Project

Property] menu must be performed after one of the steps given below. In

other words, the function must be enabled after an order password is set and

before communication is set up.

Set an order password

Set the number of machine

Set machine information

Set up communication (data communication and control points are

created)

[Point Name Rule Setting]CheckBox setting



84/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

Set points (data communication and control points are created)



85/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

Conditions under which this function can be enabled and disabled

Performing [Communication setting] causes control points for use in CNC

Communication Mode to be created, so that the enable/disable setting of this

function cannot be changed. It should be noted that points are created

when [Communication setting] is performed before data communication

points and Point Group Control Points are created.

Point creation with [Script] in the [Project] menu can be executed at any time,

regardless of the enable/disable setting of [Point Name Rule Setting].

If, after points are created using the point name rules of CNC

Communication Mode, the enable/disable setting of this function is to be

changed, first delete all data communication points and Point Group Control

Points, then delete all communication settings made with [Communication

setting]. There is no need to delete the machine settings made with

[Machine setting].

6.4.3.2 Displaying the Point Name Rule Setting dialog box

The point name rules for the user may be set in the Point Name Rule Setting

dialog box.

The Point Name Rule Setting dialog box can be displayed in either of two

ways below:

(1) Set all machine information first, then set the point name

rules for all machines

With this method, set all machine information first, then

place a check in the "Point Name Rule Setting" checkbox to

enable the function.When it is enabled, [Point Name Rule Setting] is added to

the [Project] menu. Selecting it causes the Point Name

Rule Setting dialog box to appear.

(2) Set the machine information for one machine, then set thepoint name rules for that machine, and repeat the steps for

other machines

With this method, place a check in the "Point Name Rule

Setting" checkbox before setting machine information.

Click the [Machine Information] tree in the left window,

and set machine information.

CAUTION

[Point Name Rule Setting] is not displayed in the [Project]

menu unless a check is placed in the "Point Name Rule

Setting" checkbox to enable the function.



86/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

At this time, provided that a check is placed in the "Point

Name Rule Setting" checkbox, clicking the <OK> button in

the machine information window causes the Point Name

Rule Setting dialog box to automatically appear.

6.4.3.3 Setting point name rules

To use the point name rules for the user, set the four point name rules listed below:

① Rule for data communication point name

② Control point name rule (1) Machine point

③ Control point name rule (2) Path point

④ Control point name rule (3) Point-group point

This subsection describes how to enter these rules.

When this window appears for the first time, the same point name rules as

those of CNC Communication Mode are set. Enter the point name rules for

the user.

<1> Rule for data communication pointname

<2> Control point name rule (1)Machine point

<3> Control point name (2)Path point

<4> Control point name rule (3)Point-group point



87/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

Making entries in the Point Name Rule Setting dialog box

Enter the setting for each item as described below:

(1) To enter the setting for each of the items A, C, and D under [Rule for

data communication point name], use the mouse or the tab key to select

the desired gravity area and enter a character string.

(2) In cells in table format, enter settings as described below:

Select the desired cell, using the mouse or the cursor and tab keys

as appropriate.

After the cell is selected, pressing <ENTER> or <Space> bar allows

an input operation to be started at the end of the existing character

string.

After the cell is selected, entering an alphanumeric character causes

the existing character string to be deleted, allowing an input

operation to be started with the first character entered.

After the cell is selected, pressing the <BackSpace> key causes the

existing character string to be deleted, allowing an input operation.

Pressing the <Esc> key during an input operation causes the cell toreturn to the state before input.

Upon completion of an input operation, perform one of the

following:

- Press <ENTER>

- Move from the cell using the up or down cursor key

- Click another location with the mouse

(3) Click the <Save> button, and the point name rules will be saved.

(4) Click the <Cancel> button to cancel the entries.



88/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

Conditions under which point name rules can be set

The conditions under which point name rules can be set are as given in the

figure below.

Those items whose settings cannot be changed are displayed gray. To

change such items, the following procedure is necessary:

Items A, C, and D under <1> [Rule for data communication point name]

Delete the data communication points and Point Group Control Points

for all machines.

Item B under <1> Rule for data communication point name and control

point name rules <2> to <4>

Delete the communication settings for all machines.

Point creation with [Script] in the [Project] menu can be executed at any time,

regardless of the enable/disable setting of [Point Name Rule Setting].

<2> Control point name rule (1)Machine pointCannot be changed if [Communication setting] isperformed

<3> Control point name rule (2)Path pointCannot be changed if [Communication setting] isperformed.

<4> Control point name rule (3)Point-group pointCannot be changed if

[Communication setting] isperformed.

<1> Rule for data communication point name

The settings for items A, C, and D cannot bechanged if a data communication point is set

on any of the paths of the machines for whichcommunication settings have been made.

The setting for item B cannot be changed if [Communication setting] is performed.



89/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

<1> Rule for data communication point name

Under [Rule for data communication point name], set the point name rules

for points for CNC data input/output.

"FNCxxxyy.U_", displayed in the window, is the rule for data

communication point names in CNC Communication Mode. Change this

rule to that for the user.

Items A, C, and D can be changed even after [Communication setting] is

performed, but once a data communication point is created, they cannot be

changed for the path on which it is created. Item B cannot be changed if

[Communication setting] is performed. Those items that cannot be changed

are displayed gray.

In the "Point Name Example" area, a point name example to be created with

the rule specified with A, B, C, and D, set as in the figure above is displayed.

"(PointName)" is replaced by a point name identifier, such as "D1000",

entered in the point customization window.

Whenever a cell in the "Setting" grid for B is selected, the display under

"Point Name Example" is updated using the setting for the selected path.

The number in parentheses () represents the character string length of the

point. If the number of characters permitted for a point name is exceeded,

the number is displayed red. If this occurs, an error message is displayed

during storage.



90/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

The items under [Rule for data communication point name] are as follows:

Rule for data communication point name

o Item DescriptionValue in CNCCommunicationMode

1 A. FNC Specify the character string to be added at the beginning of all

data communication point names.It is possible to select not to specify any character string.

It is recommended to set a character string that makes it possibleto distinguish the points for use in CNC Communication Modefrom other device points such as PLC points.

The character string must start with an alphabetic character or anunderscore.

"FNC"

2 B. xxxyy Specify the character strings used to identify machine and their paths. A setting is required for each machine set in the machineinformation window. For a machine with multiple paths, a

setting is required for each path. This item is required.

Be sure to set character strings different from other settings. If asetting is deleted or if the same setting as another setting is set, anerror message is displayed.

When this window is displayed for the first time after machinenames are set through Machine setting, the following character strings are automatically set:- For a path number of 1, the machine name is set.- For another path number, the machine name + "??" is set.

3-digit machinenumber + 2-digit path number

Example:A machine number of 5 and a pathnumber of 8 resultin "00508".

3 C. . Specify the character string to be placed between A+B above andD below.

It is possible to select not to set it. It is recommended to set a "."so that points can be easily displayed in a tree on theCIMPLICITY workbench.

"."

4 D. U_ Character string to be placed in the middle of a datacommunication point name.It is possible to select not to set it.

"U_"



91/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

<2> Control point name (1) Machine point

Under [Control point name (1) Machine point], set the point name rule for

control points that use machine numbers of all control points other than data

communication points. The settings cannot be changed if [Communication

setting] is performed. Those items whose settings cannot be changed are

displayed gray.

The left side of the grid shows the point names in CNC Communication

Mode minus the character string "FNCxxxyy.U_" as determined with the

point name rule, such as F_PWR. In the right side labeled "Setting", enter

settings to change these point names.

Each setting requires the character string $MCN$, which is converted into a

machine number during point name setting. $MCN$ is replaced by the

machine number of each machine with a path number of 1 of the values set

for "xxxyy" (item B) under <1> Rule for data communication point name.

Example: If the following is set for "xxxyy" (item B) under <1> Rulefor data communication point name

Converted into CTL.MCN01_P1.POWER.

In the "Point Name Example" area, the point name resulting from combining

the setting in a cell selected from the "Setting" area with the setting of a path

selected from the "Setting" area for item B under [Rule for data

communication point name] is displayed. Enclosed in parentheses () is the

number of characters of the point name. If the number of characters

permitted for a point name is exceeded, the number is displayed red. If the



92/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

<Save> button is clicked in this state, an error message appears, and storage

is canceled; correct the point name rule.

The settings are as follows:

Control point name (1) Machine point

No Item (default) Description ($MCN$ is required.)1 F_PWR

(FNC$MCN$.F_PWR)Power status monitor point name rule settingSet the name rule for a point for representing the power ON/OFF status of each machine. Be sure to set this item.

2 F_NCC_ERROR(FNC$MCN$.F_NCC_ERROR)

Error message storage point name rule settingSet the name rule for a point for indicating an error that hasoccurred in CNC Communication Mode. Even if this

function is not used, be sure to set this item.3 F_COM_ACTIVATE

(FNC$MCN$.F_COM_ACTIVATE)Communication enable instruction point name rule settingSet the name rule for a point for instructing whether to perform communication with the CNC to which CNCCommunication Mode is connected. Be sure to set thisitem.

4 F_COM_STATUS(FNC$MCN$.F_COM_ STATUS)

Communication status monitor point name rule settingSet the name rule for a point for checking a response to acommunication enable instruction point. Be sure to setthis item.

5 F_COM_RETRY(FNC$MCN$.F_COM_ RETRY)

Communication reconnection instruction point name rulesetting

Set the name rule for a point for using the communicationreconnection function by specifying a point name in CNCCommunication Mode. Even if this function is not used, be sure to set this item.

6 F_COM_PSET_NOTIFY(FNC$MCN$.F_COM_PSET_NOTIFY)

Communication start notification point name rule settingSet the name rule for a point for using the communicationreconnection function by specifying a point name in CNCCommunication Mode. Even if this function is not used, be sure to set this item.



93/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

<3> Control point name rule (2) Path point

Under [Control point name rule (2) Path point], set the point name rule for

control points that use path numbers of all control points other than data

communication points. The settings cannot be changed if [Communication

setting] is performed. Those items whose settings cannot be changed are

displayed gray.

Each setting requires the character string $MCNPATH$, which is convertedinto a machine number and a path number during point name setting.

$MCNPATH$ is replaced by "xxxyy" (item B) set under <1> Rule for data

communication point name.


Converted into CTL.MCN01_P2.COM_ON.











94/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2


Control point name rule (2) Path point

No Items (default) Description ($MCNPATH$ is required.)

1 F_COM_ON(FNC$MCNPATH$. F_COM_ON)

Communication enable instruction point name rule settingSet the name rule for a point for instructing whether to perform communication with the CNC to which CNCCommunication Mode is connected. Be sure to set thisitem.

2 F_COM_COND(FNC$MCNPATH$.F_COM_COND)

Communication status monitor point name rule settingSet the name rule for a point for checking a response to acommunication enable instruction point. Be sure to setthis item.

3 F_COM_PSET_NOTIFY(FNC$MCNPATH$.F_COM_PSET_NOTIFY)

Point Setting Notification name rule settingSet the name rule for a point for the notification of a power ON/OFF check and a completion of data reading. Be sureto set this item.



95/98


01

FANUC LTD.



OPERATOR’S MANUAL

05.05.19 B-75074EN/04-2

<4> Control point name rule (3) Point-group point

Under [Control point name rule (3) Point-group point], set the point name

rule for Point Group Control Points. The settings cannot be changed if

[Communication setting] is performed. Those items whose settings cannot

be changed are displayed gray.

A point name example to be created with the settings is displayed In the"Point Name Example" area.












Control point name rule (3) Point-group point

No Items (default) Description

1 FNCxxxyy.(FNC$MCN$.)

Machine-specific Point Group Control Point name rule settingIf any Point Group Control Point name is to be created with PointCustomization, the point name rule "FNCxxxyy.U_zzzz" is applied. Asdescribed earlier, xxxyy is a 3-digit machine number and a 2-digit pathnumber, and a point name may be specified for the identifier zzzz.For the setting for "FNCxxxyy.U_", set the character string to replace"FNCxxxyy.U_" of the point name rule above. This setting requires thecharacter string $MCN$, which is replaced by a machine number during pointname setting. $MCN$ is replaced by the machine number of each machinewith a path number of 1 of the values set for "xxxyy" (item B) under <1> Rulefor data communication point name.

2 FNCSYSP.U_ (FNCSYSP.U_)

Common Default Point Group Control Point name settingWhen a machine-independent, common Point Group Control Point name iscreated with Point Customization, "FNCSYSP.U_zzzzz" is created. A pointname may be specified for zzzzz.For the setting of "FNCSYSP.U_", set the character string for use in place of FNCSYSP.U_. Note however that $MCN$, which is replaced by a machinename, and $MCNPATH$, which is replaced by a machine name + path name,cannot be used.

3 F_POINT_GROUP(F_POINT_GROUP)

Machine-specific Default Point Group Control Point name settingWhen a data communication point is created for a machine, the Default PointGroup Control Point "FNCxxxyy.F_POINT_GROUP" is created.For the setting of "F_POINT_GROUP", set the character string for use in place

of F_POINT_GROUP. Note however, that $MCN$, which is replaced by amachine name, and $MCNPATH$, which is replaced by a machine name + path name, cannot be used.


Download - Fanuc Cimplicity i Cell Operator

Top Related